<|startoftext|>Chapter 1: Born to Kill Year 0 “Is this the one?” “Yeah I guess.” “What do you mean you guess? It either is or it isn’t.” “I dunno I lost the list.” “You what? That’s just great. You realize how much we’re going to get our asses chewed out because of your fuck up? I’m sick of paying for your mistakes.” “Will you calm down? How the hell are they gonna know anyway? You seen one ugly little baldy, you’ve seen ‘em all. All babies look the same.” “Not the elven ones.” “Enough with your elf fetish. These babies are all under the care of the Empire anyway, they’re here for the taking. “Yeah, the key word being the Empire. You know we need the proper paper work, which you just fucking lost!” “So what, I can forge it. You really worry too much, there’s so much red tape they ain’t gonna know the difference and what does it matter? The Empire’s getting a body for their purposes anyway.” “Yeah, but you know how they like the best.” ”How the fuck can they really tell at this age? They do all the real testing later. Look he’s got all his limbs, and he doesn’t display any signs of impurity. I’d say he’s a prime candidate for whatever they have in store for this poor little bastard.” “Yeah I guess…damn. I can’t imagine what it’s like being brought up like that.” “Me either, this program has only been going on a few years, but I’ve already heard some fucked up stories about it…y’know its things like this that sometimes make me question the logic of our glorious leaders.” “Shhhh! Are you mad? Don’t talk like that! It’s not our place to question anything, we’re just supposed to do our jobs! Besides, the logic is quite obvious. If they train people from birth they’ll have superior combat skills and utter loyalty to the Empire.” “That’s my point though. Is it really necessary? The Empire already produces so much propaganda that it does the job pretty well in producing loyal citizens and if that doesn’t work it also instills so much fear in most that even if someone wanted to start a rebellion; it’s highly unlikely they would.” “Don’t be so sure, it has happened in the past.” “The past? When? Like four hundred years ago when the Empire was still in its own infancy? Pfft. Wouldn’t happen anymore and as for having elite combat troops, again what’s the point? We’ve already got camps to train elite groups like the Shadow Guard who are not to be fucked with and we have more than enough resources to create an army of golems that would be just as loyal and kick the shit out of our enemies.” “Look, I don’t want to talk about this anymore! Our superiors have their reasons, as does the Emperor! Let us just take this baby and be done with this task!” The two clerks left the infirmary with you that day where upon you were accepted as a suitable candidate and put into The Eternal Program. You don’t remember too much during the time of your very young years, except that you are mostly confined to a room where all your basic needs are met. On a daily basis, a couple bigger people come in to check on you. They have you perform various physical tasks as well as spending time to teach you things like basic reading and writing. Sometimes they ask you various questions and write down your responses while other times they come in and stab you with painful needles with fluid in them. (You don’t like those times) You don’t really understand it all, except that you know that the Emperor is always watching you. He is everywhere even if you don’t see him. He is keeping an eye on your actions and you must always obey his will, lest you be punished. You know this to be true because you have this repeatedly told to you. Eventually your relative isolation would come to an end. > Years later... Year 5 You are sitting in a gray room at a desk with several other children your age. All of you glance at each other a lot and it is obvious that there is much curiosity, but nobody speaks. This is very unusual for you, up until now, you have only had minimal contact with others. Most of them are male like you, but a few of them are female. Soon the silence comes to an end when a dark skinned woman walks into the room. She has long hair and sharp features. One thing you notice is that despite her long hair covering her ears you can still see that the tips of them are pointed. She must be elven, but in the pictures you’ve seen in books, you’ve never seen one with dark skin before. “Hello children, and congratulations on maintaining dignified silence during your time by yourselves. It’s nice to see that your previous human minders aren’t totally incompetent. Still, if you were Svelk children you would’ve been much better trained by now. Ah, but it is not my place to dwell on the limitations of the lesser born. I am merely here to oversee your training into proper Eternals so that you may serve the Emperor to your fullest capabilities. Now before we begin, I suggest you all ask questions now, because this will probably be the only time I will be in the mood for your ignorance.” For a moment nobody speaks, but when the elven lady insists, one brave soul raises their hand. “Yes, you.” “Are you an elf?” “Yes, I am. While the ignorant would use the vulgar term dark elf to describe me, my kind are more properly known as the Svelk. In fact WE are the purest of the elven race. All others you may have the misfortune of meeting are merely diluted members of our bloodline. They are truly pitiful creatures really only fit for extermination. Remember this.” “Yes, you.” “What is your name?” “My name is unimportant, but you and the rest will always address me as Mistress. Failure to do so will earn my wrath, and more importantly the wrath of the Emperor. Remember this.” “Yes, you.” “What will you teach us?” A second passes after the question, when a small bolt of light from the Svelk’s finger tips and hits the child in the chest asking the question. He falls backwards out of his chair and on to the floor. The rest of you jump in your own chairs and look back at him. He is breathing very erratically. “I will teach you to OBEY my commands when I give them!” Mistress shouts, she then warns the rest of you. “Don’t you dare touch him, let alone help him! (Sigh) And here I thought you lot had been trained better! It occurs to me that I will have to be extra strict in my discipline. As to the question about what I will teach you… I will teach you to be warriors. I will teach you to be wizards if you display the talent. I will teach you to shed yourselves of weakness. I will teach you to serve the Emperor without question and kill without mercy and you will always obey for you will find strength in obedience. You will find joy in order. You will find love in murder. You shall be instruments of terror and genocide if he so wishes it. You will be Eternals…or you will die. Remember this.” After Mistress’ speech, the child she struck down eventually struggles back up and gets back in his seat, clutching his chest and still wheezing. “I trust you have learned your lesson?” “Y…yes…Mistress…” he gasps. “Good, now one more question before we begin…you there. What is your question? Speak up!” Mistress demands while pointing at you, though you have not raised your hand. You don’t wish to disagree with Mistress, so you stumble and try to think up a question. “Uh…er…I was just wondering when will you teach us to fight Mistress?” Mistress raises an eyebrow and gives a smirk as she approaches you. “Fight? And what makes you think that YOU are even ready to learn yet? Do you have even the slightest knowledge of combat tactics?” “No, Mis…” before you can even complete the sentence Mistress knocks you out of your chair with a quick jab with her hand, the pain from your face spreads to your chest when Mistress steps on it with her boot. She digs it into you and presses all her weight on it, while the rest of your class looks on. “Damn right, no you don’t. You weren’t even alert enough to anticipate my attack. You let me get in close and now look at you, you’re completely at my mercy. I am in a position to do whatever I like with you, while you are only in a position to beg or die. So what will it be worm? Are you going to beg for your miserable life, or should I save the Empire’s time and money by killing you now?” > You beg The pain is great and you want it to be over with as quickly as possible so you cry out and scream for mercy to Mistress. To this, she merely laughs cruelly and continues to step on your chest. “Ha ha ha ha! If this was a real fight do you think an enemy would should you mercy? You truly are pathetic, how did the Empire ever decide that YOU would be a worthy candidate to be an Eternal? Begging for your wretched life as if it was important. It isn’t. Your life is nothing! ALL of your lives are nothing! Your lives will never be anything more than warm bodies to serve the Emperor! The question is, will you even be able to live up to that honored status? The answer is no, if you do not learn mercy is for the weak. Remember this.” At this point Mistress finally takes her foot off of you and much like your other classmate hit by her magic bolt, you slowly get up and back in your seat, clutching your chest. You sniffle and try to keep yourself from crying, but the tears are still there. A glare from Mistress causes you to quickly wipe your eyes and try to compose yourself the best you can. Time passes by under the harsh guidance of Mistress. She teaches you all that she promised she would and then some. Your lessons are not only that of a combat nature, but of an academic one as well. You wouldn’t be aware of it, but you and your classmates are probably much better educated than other children your age. As for you, Mistress never lets you forget of how you begged for your life in front of everyone. While it is true that she sadistically taunts everyone at one time or another, it doesn’t make your emotional and psychological scars go away. This shame you experience causes you to become more insecure and you constantly feel the need to prove to everyone that you aren’t weak. When you are called upon to spar with your fellow classmates, you always fight aggressively. For the most part you usually win, and you typically break a few bones of some of your fellow classmates. The lessons of being humiliated by Mistress have not been forgotten. You can’t ever let yourself be put in a vulnerable position again and you must be brutal, it’s the only way you’ll be able to please the Emperor. Your personality doesn’t go unnoticed by your instructor and watchers, they make note of it and decide how you should be handled in the next step of your training. Year 12 You are in a room with a few of your fellow classmates standing in a row. Most of your class has been separated for reasons unknown to you. All you know right now is there is a scarred orc in worn battle armor arguing with a well dressed man who is human. They are speaking about you, but not actually speaking TO you… “What? I thought the whole point of this program was to create an elite fighting group like the Shadow Guard, why are you splitting them up and intending to put some of them in regular military units?” the orc questions. “Things have changed since the program’s inception. Besides, if the latest military reports are any indication I’d say you could use a better quality of recruits, or at least I hope that’s the problem and it isn’t due to a lack of proper training.” the man dressed in black formal wear calmly retorts. “Hey! I train every grunt I get to be the best killer they can be! I’ve conquered more territory for the Empire than anyone! My record speaks for itself and I could do a hell of a lot more if you put me on the front lines again, so don’t try to tell me I’m not doing my fucking job!” “Be that as it may, I’d say you still could benefit by having a few Eternals in your ranks, if nothing else than to be a good example.” “Good example? HAH! We haven’t even seen one of these so-called Eternals in action yet! It’s all been just speculation, and a waste of time and money if you ask me! The Empire should be providing better equipment and more of it, for soldiers on the Rask Frontier, it’s a fucking meat grinder out there and we’re constantly having to put down rebellions by the natives.” “Well nobody ASKED you, captain and your problems are not mine to deal with. This is the Emperor’s project and he has his reasons. If I were you I’d watch your tone. Victories or not, you are a servant of the Emperor and you will obey orders or you will be replaced.” The orc captain steps back from the well dressed man then he takes a deep breath, before speaking. “You are lucky that I do serve the Emperor, for that is the only thing keeping me from ripping out your throat, human…very well I shall take these so called Eternal whelps, but let it be known that I shall be testing them to the limit and then some. If they fail, they shall die like anyone else unable to keep up.” “As you wish commander, I leave it in your capable hands. You will keep me apprised of their progress on a weekly basis. Good day.” The well dressed man says and leaves the room, leaving you all alone with the orc commander. You’ve never seen a real orc in person before, but he looks every bit as intimidating from what you’ve read about them, even if he is much more articulate than you expected. He walks up and down the row sizing you all up before speaking. “I am Captain Gruz, and I will be in charge of the rest of your training until the Emperor deems otherwise. I imagine that your former instructor was that dark elven bitch, so I trust you all know by now that failure and weakness have no place here. Correct?” “Yes Captain!” you all shout in unison. “Heh, well glad to see her skills in teaching discipline are still as effective as ever. Good. Now let’s see how good your combat skills are…” At this point you and your fellow classmates instinctively start to pair up to spar with each other, but Gruz stops you. “What are you lot doing? I didn’t tell you to get out of formation!” “But captain, you said to prove our combat skills.” One boy speaks up. “I…oh wait I see. She had you fighting each other. Typical dark elven training. Create mistrust and loathing even when there is no need for it. (Sigh) I can see I’m going to have to undo some of the shit she instilled in you if I’m going to mold you into the proper killing tools.” Time goes by and Captain Gruz begins to train you in various forms of combat, though it’s different. He teaches you and your classmates to fight as a team. This usually involves various large beasts similar to what you have already fought or even small groups of goblinoids. It takes awhile for you to adapt, but after seeing the first couple of casualties, you and the rest manage to pull together to defeat your enemies. Academically speaking, you are not taught much. Captain Gruz figures that Mistress taught you enough math and literacy to get by in life. Besides not much need for all that fancy learnin’ stuff when you’re going to be chopping people’s heads off on the battlefield. Captain Gruz is just as uncompromising as Mistress in his training, but he seems less gleeful about it. His verbal abuse is more direct and to the point rather than gloating about your failures. He still reminds you all regularly about how it is your sworn duty to serve the Emperor, but you hardly need him to tell you that, to believe otherwise is unthinkable. As for you, you find yourself given a role of leadership. Captain Gruz noted your tendency to be one of the first to charge into battle. He however also has some advice for you. “I respect your desire for battle, but if you do not control your insecurities you will one day find yourself needlessly unprepared. I suspect that dark elven bitch did something humiliating to you that has resulted in your behavior. Effective in some ways I suppose, but if you truly want to be a leader of men and command respect, you need to master your emotions as you would your weapons. You must do away with insecurities and be fully confident in your abilities. You must walk into battle already KNOWING that you will win, not charging in with a chip on your shoulder with some misguided desire to prove yourself. That’s a quick way to get yourself killed. Contrary to popular belief, your goal is NOT to die for the Emperor. Your goal is to survive and make the other dumb bastards die so that you may continue to serve the Emperor. Think on this when you lead your fellows into your next training assignment.” The captain’s words carry much weight with you and in the years during your training you manage to purge most of your doubts about yourself as well as becoming an accomplished warrior. Your instructor and watchers once again note your growth and skills, and as usual they make decisions on how you will best serve the Emperor. > Year 16 You are called into Captain Gruz’s office, when you arrive you see the well dress man that you saw four years ago standing with him… and debating with him again. “I’m telling you Mr. Mol, I think they should work in the same unit. They’ve trained together and they’ve worked together so well at this point that splitting them up would be folly. Hell, these people have known each other since birth! You know that better than anyone!” Gruz says. “Yes, captain I’m well aware of the situation, and normally I might agree if their were more of them, but I think their expertise would better serve if we deployed them separately in problem areas of the Empire.” Mr. Mol replies. “You don’t break up a well oiled machine! I guarantee having them all in the same unit will be a better idea. I mean we still haven’t sent them into a real battle yet! Wouldn’t it be better to see if they can get the job done first before placing them in charge of others?” “And what a perfect opportunity to lose them all, if something unexpected should happen.” “Oh for…look that could’ve happened here! And if you’re so worried about them all getting killed in battle then what was the fucking point then? Besides, if they do prove to be useless in battle, better we find that out sooner rather than later when they’re in charge of others and getting them killed as well!” Mr. Mol thinks for a moment and then replies. “Hmmm, very well you do have a point captain. We’ll try it your way at first and go from there. Have them deployed in the Nalin province. Your services here have been useful as ever. Good day.” Mr. Mol, steps out and commander Gruz addresses you. “Well you heard all that, you and your fellow Eternal babies are being sent to the Nalin province. It’s not the Rask Frontier, but it’s a suitable first challenge for you guys. We’ve been trying to settle the conquest of that place for a few years now, and technically it is part of the Empire, but we’re still having problems with the Kobold population there. Little bastards are determined to resist and have been conducting a fairly effective guerilla war since we arrived. Though I blame that more on the incompetence of the commander in that region. If I was stationed there, this shit would’ve been taken care of a long time ago…but I’m not, so unfortunately you will have to report to Captain Pollo.” Captain Gruz approaches you closer before continuing. “Now I’m putting you in charge of your unit for reasons I’m sure you’re aware of. While I’m confident I’ve made the right choice, the burden will ultimately be on you to prove to be an effective leader. Remember, you’re not just a normal soldier, you’re supposed to be an Eternal. An instrument of destruction ordered by the Emperor himself. Failure is never an option for you. Even now there are rumors about your kind, and when you finally show yourselves you will be met by fear, awe, hatred and even distain. Prove yourselves and you will live up to the name that your were given. Anyway, the caravan picking you up will arrive tomorrow. Good luck and dismissed.” With this you leave and tell the rest of your people about where you’re going and the general nature of what to expect. They all seem pretty excited to prove themselves, and to be honest so are you. At last you will get the chance to prove yourself and can only imagine that the Emperor will be pleased by what he will see. The next day, you and your unit are picked up and the ride there is uneventful, but your unit spends a little time talking about things they see on the way. This is the first time all of you have probably been away from the training center you’ve spent all your lives in. Curiosity about some of the surroundings is natural, but it isn’t just the casual talk that’s different. Your comrades are different. They are less reserved than they once were. Captain Gruz might’ve been a strict instructor, but in addition to encouraging teamwork he was also prone to encourage you guys to have a few hours of free time. This loosening of the reigns a bit, allowed a certain amount of familiarity with each other that wasn’t just on a professional level anymore. Even you have felt yourself changing personality wise. Still you are all Eternals, and you are loyal to the Emperor. You will never forget that your duty comes first. Eventually you all arrive at Fort Glory in the Nalin province where you are stared at by several soldiers who whisper among themselves. None of you pay it any mind though, you simply report to Captain Pollo. He doesn’t look anything like Captain Gruz. He’s human for one thing and wears lighter armor which is impeccably clean. When he sees you, he almost looks bored, like you were interrupting him, but you when you came in he was reclined in his chair and not doing anything of importance. “So…you are the Eternals I’ve heard so much about. Humph. I don’t see anything special except that pretty one over there. Oh no, not you dear. That blonde muscular one in the back. Yes, delicious.” Captain Pollo says pointing to one of your men and not even getting out of his chair. “Captain Pollo, we are here for our assignments so that we may serve the Emperor.” You say. “(Sigh) I suppose you are this unit’s leader?” “ Yes, captain. I am currently their leader and holding the rank of sergeant due to my excellence in my training exercises.” “Sergeant? YOU? Why you’re a mere boy! All of you are just children! I ask them for more men and they send me children! The only thing you all would be good for is cleaning the fort! In fact that’s what you can go do right now, starting with the toilets!” This is exactly what Captain Gruz said would happen. This is your first test. “Captain, we have been trained in several forms of combat and fully ready to fight. Send us into battle and we will prove ourselves. We are here to perform our duty for the Emperor and all that entails.” “All that entails eh? Okay, you want a fight? A few miles east of here, you’ll find a town called Dalt. Its filled with ignorant peasants that constantly whine to us that there are a nest of kobolds lurking in the hills near them. We’re stretched out as it is and can’t spare anymore troops to waste on towns that are of no military importance in the grand scheme of things. Go there and take care of their problem, then maybe we’ll have more to talk about.” You nod and all of you leave, but before you are able to Pollo calls you back. “Oh one more thing sergeant. Order one of your men to stay here with me. I think you know by now which one I mean.” At this point you’re in genuine shock. You may be young, and even a little detached from normal ‘society” but you know exactly what Captain Pollo is implying. You can honestly feel more than surprised by this though. “Captain, I will need all of my team to have the best chance to succeed in this mission.” You say. “Oh? Well sorry, but you’ll have to make do like everyone else here does. Or you could clean the fort like I first ordered you to do, which you chose to ignore.” It’s a no win situation, though you try to figure out a loophole that takes the responsibility off of you. “Captain, you are of a higher rank than me, surely you could just order him yourself.” “Ha ha, nice try. No. You want to be a leader of men? You need to make this decision yourself. Tis quite easy I would think. Sacrifice one for the good of the rest. If anything I’d say he’s the lucky one. He gets to stay here enjoying the pleasures of the flesh, and won’t have to be mucking about with kobolds and dealing with idiotic peasants.” > You leave him behind Unfortunately Pollo is right, the only decision that makes sense is to leave Gerald behind. Still, you aren’t fond of the idea though not necessarily for the moral reasons that most would be. This is an unproductive use of your team’s talents and pointless in the scheme of things. You can’t believe the Empire would allow such a petty man to be in charge of the safety of a province and why isn’t the Emperor aware of such inefficiency? “Very well.” “I knew you’d see things my way. Have fun playing with the kobolds. You’re dismissed.” You leave Pollo’s office where your team is still waiting for you. “Gerald, I regret that you will not be coming with us on this mission. The Captain wants you to stay with him.” You say. “What?! But I’m ready to fight!” he protests. “There will be other missions, I promise you. We will prove ourselves so well on this one, that they will have no choice but to send us out on a regular basis. However, your orders are clear in this matter, you are to remain here with Captain Pollo.” “B…yes sir.” Just before Gerald goes into the captain’s office, you whisper into his ear. “Accidents happen.” He’s a little puzzled by this comment, but you and the rest of your team proceed to your assignment and nobody says anything more about it. When you finally get to the town, it’s a sorry sight. A lot of the buildings are damaged and the streets are filled with debris. There are a few people attempting to clean up the place, but it’s clear that they’re all very demoralized. ‘Oh, I see the Empire has finally decided to help us; well you’re too late! The kobolds raided this town last night and as you can see completely trashed the place!” says a disheveled man. “The Empire has many places it has to protect citizen. It is regrettable that your town was attacked, but we are here now to eliminate the problem.” “You’re here now? Where the fuck were you last night when my wife was killed by those ugly little bastards?” the man says getting in your face. “Calm yourself citizen, this will not help your situation.” “My situation? I just said my wife is fucking DEAD! I don’t give a shit about my situation anymore you fucking Empire dickhead! Fuck you and your fucking Emperor!” It is at this point the man unwisely pushes your chest with his hand and you instantly grab it and break his whole arm. He predictably crumples in excruciating pain, screaming as the bone juts out of the skin and blood runs out of his body into the mud. All the other towns people who have seen this back off or hide, as they are rightfully worried about what you’re going to do next. “Now listen up citizens of Dalt! I understand that you’ve all been through a lot, but that is not a reason to give in to insolence! You are all Empire subjects and you will show proper respect or what’s left of this town will suffer in such a manner that you’ll think what the kobolds did was a birthday party.” The man whose arm you broke begins to scream more obscenities at you in between his regular howls of pain. You look at Kane and nod. Kane finishes the man off by quickly decapitating him. You take his head and throw it before one of the crowd of peasants who look on in horror. “Remember this.” You say. You remain in the town of Dalt for the night and get rooms from an overly cooperative innkeeper. He also tells you a little information about the kobolds such what direction they came from, what sort of equipment they were using and how many there were during the attack. Before getting some rest you spend a little of the time discussing strategy with your team. You all don’t show it too much, but you are all a little excited about tomorrow. The next day you set off towards the wooded hills, it doesn’t take long before you see a kobold patrol wandering around. They look exactly like how you’ve seen them in books, sort of like scaly goblins, but from what you’ve heard, a lot more cunning. Your team attempts to be stealthy, but perhaps it’s due to the excitement of this first “real” battle. Edgar isn’t as silent as he should be and clumsily steps on a few twigs alerting the patrols. The kobold patrol sees all of you, yell excitedly in their language and run away. Edgar is about to chase them, but you knock him to the ground. “What the hell?” he says wondering why you stopped him. “Trap, Edgar. Look.” You say and point to a tripwire that would’ve triggered a spiked log that he almost stepped on. “Oh.” He says. “You were trained better than that Edgar and we went over this last night! This area is probably going to be filled with traps. Now come on, we don’t have the luxury of a surprise attack any more.” The remainder of this attack is a tedious exercise in cautiousness broken up by quick battles. The kobolds really have set up traps everywhere and take full advantage of your team’s slow movement to launch periodic ambushes themselves. Fortunately they are very poor warriors even in large numbers and you easily dispatch them. All your fighting eventually leads to a cave, which you sort of figured it would. You warn your team that this place is probably going to be a maze and heavily trapped as well. “Should we split up so we can cover more ground?” Brenda asks. “No, we’re going to be neck deep in them when we go into that cave. They may be poor warriors, but even enough of them could overwhelm one or two of us. If we stick together we’ll be fine. Besides, we’re going to be here awhile anyway.” There “awhile” isn’t an exaggeration. You spend the remainder of the day and night killing kobolds. Your team seems to enjoy it, but you eventually start to get bored of the monotony. You don’t even bat an eye when you come across what seems to be a breeding chamber and you exterminate all the female kobolds and their young. Eventually you reach a large cave clearing where you meet the leader. “Sssss! Defilersss! Murderersss!” a slightly larger kobold hisses at you from some sort of primitive throne and then orders his guards to attack. It’s rather pathetic, as they fare no better than the rest. A few quick sword and axe blows and this kobold chieftain is alone. While the rest of your team is eager to kill him like the rest, you have a slightly better idea for him. You engage him in singles combat, which is over pretty quickly. You then subdue him with some rope you have in your pack. “Why are we taking him as prisoner? We’re Eternals! We don’t take prisoners!” Edgar shouts. “Yeah, we also aren’t supposed to miss obviously placed traps either, so there’s a first time for everything. Besides I’ve got a good idea for this one.” You drag the kobold leader back to town who curses you the whole time in a mixture of his language and yours. When you arrive it is now dawn and the townspeople are surprised to see you back, let alone with a kobold in tow. You tie the kobold leader to a tree near the center of the town and address everyone. “Citizens of Dalt! The kobold nest has been completely destroyed. This…thing was the leader of this particular nest and most likely orchestrated the raid; do with him as you will. There of course are other kobold nests in this province, but the Eternals will be taking care of this long overdue problem. All the Empire needs in this matter is your continued obedience and loyalty.” After giving this speech you and your team take your leave and hear the screams of the kobold leader as the villagers torture and rip him apart. When you arrive back at Fort Glory, other soldiers are surprised to see all of you back alive. It was assumed that at best, half of you would be dead. There is a possible thought of whether you actually succeeded and didn’t just come back in failure, but given that Kane took it upon himself to take “trophies” his gruesome necklace of kobold ears makes it pretty clear that the job was done. When you report however, it seems the fort has undergone a change in leadership “I’m Lieutenant Anu and now in charge of Fort Glory until further notice. First things first, did you accomplish your mission? “Mission accomplished, we killed them all lieutenant. All of their warriors, all of their women, all of their babies, pets, their leader, all of them.” “Well always helps to be sure. Which brings me to the next point. Your man Gerald is currently in the stockade. In fact he may be facing execution.” “Might I inquire why, sir?” “I’d say you’d probably know as much about it as I do, but if I had to guess? Captain pervert put the moves on him and your man took exception to it and killed him. He claims it was an accident, but there’s no way the captain twisted his own head ALL THE WAY AROUND just by tripping and falling over.” “If Gerald says it was an accident, then I believe him sir.” “Okay look, I’m not going to sit here and say that the captain wasn’t complete scum. I should know I had to serve along side him for the past five years. I saw how he’d have teenage boys brought to his office. Now I know you guys are these Eternals that we’ve all heard about, but dammit man, we can’t just have murders within the ranks, we have to respect some sort of order here!” “We’re all about respecting order sir…I suppose if it is absolutely necessary to execute Gerald, then that will be regrettable. I would however say that Gerald’s actions actually contributed to more order here and will better for the Empire in general.” “How so?” “The removal of captain Pollo, has allowed you to move up in rank and judging by your feelings on this matter you are a person who respects military decorum. I have no doubt, the fort will be run more efficiently now.” Lieutenant Anu chuckles a bit. “I’d almost think you were trying to butter me up to save your guy, but I already know you genuinely believe what you’re saying and you’re right anyway. (Sigh) Well…I suppose accidents do happen. Nobody here is going to miss Pollo, so I’ll have Gerald released and write up a report.” “Sir, can I make a request?” “Don’t you think you’re pushing your luck?” “Not my intention sir, but I was going to ask if there’s anything my group could do here that’s a little more challenging than killing kobolds?” “Hmm, yes I imagine you would feel that way...well on the furthest southern edge of the province there have been bands of nomadic raiders and there have been rumors of them organizing under some sort of shaman. Dunno if it’s true or not. Of course we could also transfer you someplace where the battle is a little more suited to your violence level.” > You request transfer You don’t see much point in staying in this place anymore, you would most likely serve the Empire better elsewhere. Captain Anu grants the request, though he mentions he knows that a Mr. Mol is taking interest in your progress here, so it’ll have to go through him first. A couple days pass and it is all straightened out. Mr. Mol approves, but he goes with his original plan of separating you all. Brenda and Gerald remain in the Nalin province, Roldan and Warrick go to the Felkan border. You, Kane and Edgar all wind up at the Rask frontier, specifically Fort Defiance. The split is a little odd for all of you, considering you’ve all been together so long. You say your goodbyes to Brenda and Gerald first when the caravan comes for you. Next you say your goodbyes to Warrick and Roldan when they make their stop. The remainder of the trip is in relative silence, though sometimes Edgar remarks about how he can’t wait to display his true combat skills against better challenges. Eventually you arrive at the Rask frontier and make your stop at Fort Defiance. You haven’t gotten off the caravan five minutes when a man wearing battle armor approaches you. “Hey are you the Eternals?” “Yes we are.” “I’m Captain Ian, I’ve heard about you and while you don’t look like much, we’ll take anyone at this point. Though I would’ve preferred more battle mages or even orcs at this point. Captain Ian begins to give you a run down on the entire area. He mentions that the mortality rate here is high so morale isn’t the best. He goes on to mention that Shadow Guard detachments have been assigned here to help out, but between the ogres and the giants there’s only so much that even they can do. He mentions since you three have already worked together he’s just going to leave you together, but will be assigning you to a new unit where you will have others to command as well. With the caravan leaving, the three of you head to your new unit. When you see them, quite a few of them are predictably much older than you, but surprisingly you see that half of them are around your age. “So, you’re those Eternals huh?” one the older soldiers says almost dismissively. “Yes? Did you need something corporal?” you say sensing the hostility. “Nothing, sergeant. I just wondered if you were.” He says backing down from confrontation. The three of you settle in as you begin your assignment at Fort Defiance. Year 18 “Kane watch out!” you shout as the wind whips around you and the snowfall nearly blinds your vision. You can just make out the figure, which you know to be Kane roll out of the way of a club strike from an ogre attempting to attack him from behind. You look around and see the bloody dead bodies of several members of your team and the ogres that ambushed you. You knew that patrolling the Kragen Pass during a blizzard was a stupid idea, but Captain Ian insisted that you had to go and do it. It’s no wonder progress hasn’t been made up here with the captain making inept decisions at every turn. He’s not like Captain Pollo, but he’s not much better. You are starting to seriously wonder about how the Empire keeps allowing such incompetence to pass through. You run as fast as you can in the snow to help Kane battle the last two ogres. You cleave at the legs of one of the large monsters causing him to fall into the snow then finish him off with another strike through his head. Kane dispatches his own ogre opponent and the battle is finally over. “Looks like we’re the only two left again.” Kane says. “Yeah, I’m getting used to that scenario. Come on, let’s head back. This blizzard isn’t letting up and we’ve done all we can here.” You and Kane leave behind the bodies and make your way through the blizzard in silence. It’s times like this you half expect Edgar to start going on about how well he did in battle, of course he hasn’t done that ever since you lost him in that battle against some giants last year. You never exactly approved of his reckless ways and it’s ultimately what got him killed, but you still miss him sometimes. You are almost at the end of the pass when a large rumbling is heard. You look overhead and even in this blizzard you can see the large figures looming on the cliffs and it’s what you originally were concerned about when you had to patrol this path. “GIANTS! RUN!” you yell and the pair of you attempt to make it out of the pass. Large boulders crash down along side the cliffs with an equally large amount of ice and snow. Kane runs faster and makes it ahead of you, but this only results in you seeing him crushed completely by a falling boulder. You are engulfed in snow and swept up and buried in the stuff. You’re disorientated, tired, freezing and slowly suffocating, but with determination, you manage to dig yourself out. Unfortunately several giants face you when you do dig yourself out. You’re out numbered and trapped in the pass. You know that this is most likely going to be your last battle. You draw your sword and walk towards the giants. It will be a good death, but your only regret is that you will not survive to serve the Empire for longer than you would’ve liked.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Unfortunately Pollo is right, the only decision that makes sense is to leave Gerald behind. Still, you aren’t fond of the idea though not necessarily for the moral reasons that most would be. This is an unproductive use of your team’s talents and pointless in the scheme of things. You can’t believe the Empire would allow such a petty man to be in charge of the safety of a province and why isn’t the Emperor aware of such inefficiency? “Very well.” “I knew you’d see things my way. Have fun playing with the kobolds. You’re dismissed.” You leave Pollo’s office where your team is still waiting for you. “Gerald, I regret that you will not be coming with us on this mission. The Captain wants you to stay with him.” You say. “What?! But I’m ready to fight!” he protests. “There will be other missions, I promise you. We will prove ourselves so well on this one, that they will have no choice but to send us out on a regular basis. However, your orders are clear in this matter, you are to remain here with Captain Pollo.” “B…yes sir.” Just before Gerald goes into the captain’s office, you whisper into his ear. “Accidents happen.” He’s a little puzzled by this comment, but you and the rest of your team proceed to your assignment and nobody says anything more about it. When you finally get to the town, it’s a sorry sight. A lot of the buildings are damaged and the streets are filled with debris. There are a few people attempting to clean up the place, but it’s clear that they’re all very demoralized. ‘Oh, I see the Empire has finally decided to help us; well you’re too late! The kobolds raided this town last night and as you can see completely trashed the place!” says a disheveled man. “The Empire has many places it has to protect citizen. It is regrettable that your town was attacked, but we are here now to eliminate the problem.” “You’re here now? Where the fuck were you last night when my wife was killed by those ugly little bastards?” the man says getting in your face. “Calm yourself citizen, this will not help your situation.” “My situation? I just said my wife is fucking DEAD! I don’t give a shit about my situation anymore you fucking Empire dickhead! Fuck you and your fucking Emperor!” It is at this point the man unwisely pushes your chest with his hand and you instantly grab it and break his whole arm. He predictably crumples in excruciating pain, screaming as the bone juts out of the skin and blood runs out of his body into the mud. All the other towns people who have seen this back off or hide, as they are rightfully worried about what you’re going to do next. “Now listen up citizens of Dalt! I understand that you’ve all been through a lot, but that is not a reason to give in to insolence! You are all Empire subjects and you will show proper respect or what’s left of this town will suffer in such a manner that you’ll think what the kobolds did was a birthday party.” The man whose arm you broke begins to scream more obscenities at you in between his regular howls of pain. You look at Kane and nod. Kane finishes the man off by quickly decapitating him. You take his head and throw it before one of the crowd of peasants who look on in horror. “Remember this.” You say. You remain in the town of Dalt for the night and get rooms from an overly cooperative innkeeper. He also tells you a little information about the kobolds such what direction they came from, what sort of equipment they were using and how many there were during the attack. Before getting some rest you spend a little of the time discussing strategy with your team. You all don’t show it too much, but you are all a little excited about tomorrow. The next day you set off towards the wooded hills, it doesn’t take long before you see a kobold patrol wandering around. They look exactly like how you’ve seen them in books, sort of like scaly goblins, but from what you’ve heard, a lot more cunning. Your team attempts to be stealthy, but perhaps it’s due to the excitement of this first “real” battle. Edgar isn’t as silent as he should be and clumsily steps on a few twigs alerting the patrols. The kobold patrol sees all of you, yell excitedly in their language and run away. Edgar is about to chase them, but you knock him to the ground. “What the hell?” he says wondering why you stopped him. “Trap, Edgar. Look.” You say and point to a tripwire that would’ve triggered a spiked log that he almost stepped on. “Oh.” He says. “You were trained better than that Edgar and we went over this last night! This area is probably going to be filled with traps. Now come on, we don’t have the luxury of a surprise attack any more.” The remainder of this attack is a tedious exercise in cautiousness broken up by quick battles. The kobolds really have set up traps everywhere and take full advantage of your team’s slow movement to launch periodic ambushes themselves. Fortunately they are very poor warriors even in large numbers and you easily dispatch them. All your fighting eventually leads to a cave, which you sort of figured it would. You warn your team that this place is probably going to be a maze and heavily trapped as well. “Should we split up so we can cover more ground?” Brenda asks. “No, we’re going to be neck deep in them when we go into that cave. They may be poor warriors, but even enough of them could overwhelm one or two of us. If we stick together we’ll be fine. Besides, we’re going to be here awhile anyway.” There “awhile” isn’t an exaggeration. You spend the remainder of the day and night killing kobolds. Your team seems to enjoy it, but you eventually start to get bored of the monotony. You don’t even bat an eye when you come across what seems to be a breeding chamber and you exterminate all the female kobolds and their young. Eventually you reach a large cave clearing where you meet the leader. “Sssss! Defilersss! Murderersss!” a slightly larger kobold hisses at you from some sort of primitive throne and then orders his guards to attack. It’s rather pathetic, as they fare no better than the rest. A few quick sword and axe blows and this kobold chieftain is alone. While the rest of your team is eager to kill him like the rest, you have a slightly better idea for him. You engage him in singles combat, which is over pretty quickly. You then subdue him with some rope you have in your pack. “Why are we taking him as prisoner? We’re Eternals! We don’t take prisoners!” Edgar shouts. “Yeah, we also aren’t supposed to miss obviously placed traps either, so there’s a first time for everything. Besides I’ve got a good idea for this one.” You drag the kobold leader back to town who curses you the whole time in a mixture of his language and yours. When you arrive it is now dawn and the townspeople are surprised to see you back, let alone with a kobold in tow. You tie the kobold leader to a tree near the center of the town and address everyone. “Citizens of Dalt! The kobold nest has been completely destroyed. This…thing was the leader of this particular nest and most likely orchestrated the raid; do with him as you will. There of course are other kobold nests in this province, but the Eternals will be taking care of this long overdue problem. All the Empire needs in this matter is your continued obedience and loyalty.” After giving this speech you and your team take your leave and hear the screams of the kobold leader as the villagers torture and rip him apart. When you arrive back at Fort Glory, other soldiers are surprised to see all of you back alive. It was assumed that at best, half of you would be dead. There is a possible thought of whether you actually succeeded and didn’t just come back in failure, but given that Kane took it upon himself to take “trophies” his gruesome necklace of kobold ears makes it pretty clear that the job was done. When you report however, it seems the fort has undergone a change in leadership “I’m Lieutenant Anu and now in charge of Fort Glory until further notice. First things first, did you accomplish your mission? “Mission accomplished, we killed them all lieutenant. All of their warriors, all of their women, all of their babies, pets, their leader, all of them.” “Well always helps to be sure. Which brings me to the next point. Your man Gerald is currently in the stockade. In fact he may be facing execution.” “Might I inquire why, sir?” “I’d say you’d probably know as much about it as I do, but if I had to guess? Captain pervert put the moves on him and your man took exception to it and killed him. He claims it was an accident, but there’s no way the captain twisted his own head ALL THE WAY AROUND just by tripping and falling over.” “If Gerald says it was an accident, then I believe him sir.” “Okay look, I’m not going to sit here and say that the captain wasn’t complete scum. I should know I had to serve along side him for the past five years. I saw how he’d have teenage boys brought to his office. Now I know you guys are these Eternals that we’ve all heard about, but dammit man, we can’t just have murders within the ranks, we have to respect some sort of order here!” “We’re all about respecting order sir…I suppose if it is absolutely necessary to execute Gerald, then that will be regrettable. I would however say that Gerald’s actions actually contributed to more order here and will better for the Empire in general.” “How so?” “The removal of captain Pollo, has allowed you to move up in rank and judging by your feelings on this matter you are a person who respects military decorum. I have no doubt, the fort will be run more efficiently now.” Lieutenant Anu chuckles a bit. “I’d almost think you were trying to butter me up to save your guy, but I already know you genuinely believe what you’re saying and you’re right anyway. (Sigh) Well…I suppose accidents do happen. Nobody here is going to miss Pollo, so I’ll have Gerald released and write up a report.” “Sir, can I make a request?” “Don’t you think you’re pushing your luck?” “Not my intention sir, but I was going to ask if there’s anything my group could do here that’s a little more challenging than killing kobolds?” “Hmm, yes I imagine you would feel that way...well on the furthest southern edge of the province there have been bands of nomadic raiders and there have been rumors of them organizing under some sort of shaman. Dunno if it’s true or not. Of course we could also transfer you someplace where the battle is a little more suited to your violence level.” > You face the raiders You decide that it might be wise to maintain a presence here, after all there is still work to be done and you’re confident that things will be better at the fort now. Lieutenant Anu nods and says you can set out in a couple days to the town of Jekka. He mentions that the nomads have never been a problem like the kobold are, but lately they have been reaching that level. He also says they aren’t native to Nalin, but rather the desert land south of it. You spend the next couple of days at the fort are spent honing your weapon skills and telling your team to do likewise. Gerald joins you after being released from the stockade. He looks a little embarrassed and you reprimand him for his lack of finesse, but welcome him back. Eventually you set off for the southern Nalin border. The journey isn’t as uneventful as the first mission and you encounter a few kobolds attacking travelers along the roads. You easily dispatch them of course. The town of Jekka is in much better shape than Dalt, but its obvious the people here have been suffering from attacks. “Empire soldiers? Here? I thought you lot were chasing down kobolds to waste time with the likes of us.” A man says to you. He looks to be some sort of town sheriff. “All Empire towns are under our protection citizen. We have heard this one is suffering heavy raids from the desert nomads.” “ Well, we’ve been doing okay so far, but a few of the other border villages have gotten it pretty bad. One of them was totally destroyed. Those lizard riders have never been this bad or numerous before. The weird thing is, they just destroy and kill, they don’t actually do any proper raiding or looting, not that it really matters. but for the past few months.” “We heard rumors of a shaman uniting them.” “Yeah that’s the rumor, but really nobody knows what’s going on with them. They make quick attacks and then run back to their accursed desert. So when are more Empire soldiers coming?” “They aren’t.” “What?! We’ve been holding out for months with no hope in sight and now that you give us a little bit, you take it away again?” “Citizen, I advise you to calm yourself.” You warn, wondering if you’re going to have to make another point like you did in Dalt. You don’t since thought since the sheriff has more sense. “Alright, alright, but I’m telling you there are a lot of those lizard riders! I hope you’re more than just regular Empire soldiers. You guys Shadow Guard or something?” “We’re Eternals.” You set up your staging point in Jekka. The desert raiders will probably attack this town again as usual, so you might as well take advantage of the fact. The waiting is tedious, but eventually after few days it pays off. Several of the raiders appear in the distance and make no hesitation in their attack. The raiders are trying to rely on intimidation, because they sure aren’t relying on strategy and only attack the town from one direction. The lizard creatures that the raiders ride might be intimidating to the average citizen, but you’ve fought bigger creatures during training. They’re rather clumsy beasts actually and when you and your team begin to use your own hit and run tactics, they start to collide into each other causing problems for the raiders. As for the raiders themselves, they prove to be barely better fighters than the kobolds after dismounting several of them. Underneath the desert protection gear they wear, they don’t appear to be human or any other race you’re familiar with, but they bleed just like all them and that’s the important thing. As many battles often go, this one is over quicker than it felt. The remaining raiders run off and you order your people to mount up and chase them down which is fairly easy to do. Jekka suffered some damage and a few dead, but overall the townspeople couldn’t be happier with the outcome and most shower you with praise. However, you get the impression that you’re going to be facing more of these raiders in the near future and you’re right. A couple days pass and another raid on the town of Jekka occurs in the same exact manner, then again a few days after that. A week passes and there are no more raids, but that doesn’t mean they’ve stopped. You already know they’ve been attacking several settlements, so you tell Warrick and Roldan to scout out the closest ones to see what their situation is while you try to build some proper defenses for Jekka. A week passes and you learn more about your foes from a villager who survived the destruction of his home. The desert raiders (or the Usksha as you’ve come to find out their proper name) have indeed been united under one banner by a shaman of some sort. The villager says he saw this being with his own eyes and was spared for the sole purpose to warn all that the Usksha will no longer tolerate a foreign presence encroaching on their desert. This shaman said he has been chosen personally by their god Usk to destroy all those that do and that the town of Jekka will not be able to resist the inevitable destiny that it will fall. “So, he’s coming here then? Good, saves us the trouble of hunting him down.” You reply. “Combined with this information and based on what Warrick and I have scouted out, it sounds like there will be even more of them. Possibly a full blown army. We might need reinforcements from Fort Glory.” Roldan says. “Reinforcements? Hah! We’ve beaten them several times with ease!” “Would they even get here in time? We don’t exactly know when the attack will come.” Brenda asks. “They might or they might not, still we should try. Find out who the best runner is in this town and have them travel to Fort Glory with this news. We can continue to prepare in the meantime.” You say. The next morning several Uskshas appear in the distance like the other times you fought them. Then more show up, then even more. The town sheriff completely panics and says he’s never seen this many before. This of course causes most of the other townies to panic as well. You slap him and tell him if he and anyone else aren’t going to be helpful then they need to stay out of the way and find someplace to hide. They come at you screaming and yelling in their barbarian language and suddenly a huge worm thing comes out of the ground in the center of town. “Ha ha! At last a real fight!” Edgar yells and runs at it immediately as it destroys the nearby tavern. You order Kane to come with you to help Edgar while the rest try to delay the rest of the usksha. You just hope the barricades hold up long enough for them to greatly whittle the numbers down. You, Edgar and Kane approach the great worm, which bashes its great body into the side of another building, killing many townspeople hiding inside. “YOU! You think you can destroy me? I am an avatar of Usk! How can you destroy a god when you are, but a mere child of a corrupt empire?” you suddenly hear in your mind. It takes a split moment, but you realize that this beast is the shaman. He has used magic of some kind to transform himself into this thing. It doesn’t matter how much favor he has from his god though, he isn’t one and will die like the rest. Using his daggers like climbing gear, Kane jumps as high as he can and sink them into the shaman, while you and Edgar attempt to chop at his body like it was a tree. The shaman roars and attempts to smash you with his body, but you pull Edgar out of the way and Kane jumps off before being crushed. The shaman burrows back into the hole he came from and a few moments later he breaks through in another area of the town and begins destroying the barricades. You reach the shaman just in time for him to sink back into his hole again, while usksha pour in through the broken wall. “Shit!” Edgar shouts in exasperation. “Plug up that opening with their dead bodies!” you shout as you chop off the head of one their lizards before doing the same to the fallen rider. Holding the back the tide of usksha isn’t exactly what you want to be doing though, you want to take down that shaman, do that and this battle is over. When you hear him break through the ground again elsewhere in town, you tell Kane and Edgar to hold the line here, while you go see if you can get him. You see him near the center of town again trying to finish destroying the buildings there. You chop down a few usksha near him and resume attempting to bring him down. He uses his crushing attack like last time, but this time you anticipate and not only dodge, but you manage to run your sword into his eye when his head is at your level. He bellows in pain and attempts to escape again, but you won’t let go of your sword and pull it towards you as he pulls backwards. You fall to the ground as the sword finishes slicing through the shaman’s flesh leaving a gapping wound where his eye and part of his “face” would be. You then see the worm collapse to the ground and begin to glow. Some of the others nearby, human and usksha alike stop fighting to stand and watch in wonder. The shaman transforms back into his natural form, his head and body displaying heavy wounds. “No…can’t…you…why…we hate you…you aren’t…wanted…your empire will die…we will reclaim what is oursss…” are the scattered words you hear in your head as you approach the shaman’s broken body. “Stop talking.” You say and run your sword through his other eye. It is at this point you hear the howls of several usksha as their mental link with their leader has been severed. You, your team and even a few vengeful townspeople butcher the remaining usksha that don’t get away while attempting to retreat. Jekka is half in ruins and many are dead, but the battle has been won. The following day a detachment of troops arrive from Fort Glory. They look at the carnage and the platoon leader reports to you. “I’m Corporal Delan and I’m here to help you with…shit, what the hell happened here?” “Victory, corporal. Victory.” You say. “So…the threat is gone?” “I wouldn’t say it’s gone, but it won’t be rearing its head for a long time.” “I say we should march into that desert and wipe them out permanently, then we’d never have to worry about them ever again!” Edgar says. “Well, if you decide to do that, we’ll help. I know you’ve been busy down here so I don’t know if you’ve heard, but we’ve made great strides in eliminating the kobolds, so Captian Anu told us to help you with this problem as much as we can. > You march into the desert The usksha are broken and on the run, the opportunity to eliminate them as a future threat is certainly there, along with extending the Empire’s influence south of the Nalin province. Your recent victories have filled you with confidence and you agree you should mount an attack on the usksha. “You can’t be serious! Look I know you guys are Eternals, and I won’t deny that you’re the best warriors I’ve ever seen, but even you won’t be able to conquer the usksha in their desert! They’ve lived there for centuries, even before the Empire existed! They know it like nobody else, you’ll be outnumbered and fighting the elements themselves!” the Jekka sheriff exclaims. Somehow he survived the battle by hiding no doubt. Perhaps he is content on being a coward all his life, but you were meant for much more! You are an Eternal and the Emperor himself will reward you himself when you make the first steps in civilizing the desert. You slap him again and tell him that you’ll need as much water as everyone can carry. After a period of rest, you, your team and Delan’s men set off for the desert. You figure the best way to approach this is to follow the usksha’s tracks. This works out well at first as the lizard mounts are heavy footed creatures that leave deep prints, so you come across several small bands of fleeing usksha. When you begin to leave the Nalin province and enter the desert, the prints get harder to track. You follow tracks for two days before you find more usksha. Still, you aren’t finding any large settlements. By day four and Delan’s men are starting to complain. He tries to maintain order, but it’s obvious they can’t take the heat of the day and cold of the night. Your own team is fairing better, but even a couple of them are starting to make comments. On the seventh night, you’re ambushed by several usksha who spring up from the sands itself; they manage to kill several of Delan’s men before you dispatch them. “Sergeant, I think we need to get the hell out of this desert. There’s nothing here, but sand and death!” “Then leave weakling! We’re more than able to carry out this mission ourselves! We don’t need anybody! We’re Eternals!” Edgar shouts. “I don’t doubt our abilities sir, but I’m beginning to wonder if this isn’t a waste of time. We’ve defeated the usksha and chased them deep into their own land. Maybe we’ve made our point.” Roldan says. “I’m finding myself agreeing sir, we could better serve the Empire elsewhere.” Gerald adds. “Duly noted. We’re sticking with the original plan and as for you Delan, you’re under my command too, so you aren’t going anywhere either, now I advise you to find your guts and keep what men you have left in line, before I take away what little authority you still have left.” Corporal Delan obeys and silently slinks back to his men. Your own people obey as well, but you know that the voices of dissent are already there. Still, you’re convinced that you’ll find something of importance out here along with wiping out usksha. On day ten, a strange reptilian creature attacks you. The first instinct is to defend yourself of course, but when it turns Warrick and Gerald to stone instantly, even you find yourself worried. “Don’t look at it! It’s got some sort of magic attack!” you shout and put your shield to cover yourself. Delan and his couple remaining men don’t even stick around they turn and run completely. Edgar closes his eyes and swings wildly at the beast, but only manages to get himself mauled by the creature’s sharp teeth and claws. The distraction is enough for Brenda to shoot several arrows in the beast while its back is to her. The beast gives a final bellow and dies. You survey the damage and it’s pretty bad. You’ve lost two men, and looking at Edgar on the ground it’ll soon be three. He can’t even form any words, he just looks up at the sky gurgling and spitting up blood and trying to clutch at an arm which is no longer there. “I told you! I told you we should’ve gone back!” Roldan screams. “Silence! I’m in charge here and you won’t speak to me like that again!” you say. “Somebody needs to tell you something, because…” You lose your patience from a combination of the disrespect, the loss, the failure, the heat, all of it. You punch Roldan causing him to fall to the ground. He looks up in disbelief at first, but then begins to laugh. “Ha ha…ha ha ha ha ha! We…ha ha ha! Found more usksha!” he laughs and points. You all turn to see a sizable group of mounted usksha in the distance. They don’t move in either, instead they shoot at you with their bows. Brenda catches an arrow to her leg before you can sound a retreat. You and Kane run, but Roldan just sits there still laughing, the next time you turn your head to look back, he’s no longer sitting up. Brenda tries to keep up, but the arrow in her leg slows her down and eventually she catches two more arrows in her back, killing her much in the same way she killed that strange beast. Eventually you and Kane get away, but in all the excitement you don’t know where you are and you don’t even have the tracks you were following to go back to. Under better and less stressful conditions you might get your bearings again, but you never do. Your next few days involve wandering the desert being continually worn down by usksha ambushes and the sun. You leave Kane’s dehydrated body and continue alone, but not for long as you eventually also succumb to the heat. As you lay dying your thoughts of glory are gone and though dehydrated, you manage to shed a single tear for your failure to serve the Emperor.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You decide that it might be wise to maintain a presence here, after all there is still work to be done and you’re confident that things will be better at the fort now. Lieutenant Anu nods and says you can set out in a couple days to the town of Jekka. He mentions that the nomads have never been a problem like the kobold are, but lately they have been reaching that level. He also says they aren’t native to Nalin, but rather the desert land south of it. You spend the next couple of days at the fort are spent honing your weapon skills and telling your team to do likewise. Gerald joins you after being released from the stockade. He looks a little embarrassed and you reprimand him for his lack of finesse, but welcome him back. Eventually you set off for the southern Nalin border. The journey isn’t as uneventful as the first mission and you encounter a few kobolds attacking travelers along the roads. You easily dispatch them of course. The town of Jekka is in much better shape than Dalt, but its obvious the people here have been suffering from attacks. “Empire soldiers? Here? I thought you lot were chasing down kobolds to waste time with the likes of us.” A man says to you. He looks to be some sort of town sheriff. “All Empire towns are under our protection citizen. We have heard this one is suffering heavy raids from the desert nomads.” “ Well, we’ve been doing okay so far, but a few of the other border villages have gotten it pretty bad. One of them was totally destroyed. Those lizard riders have never been this bad or numerous before. The weird thing is, they just destroy and kill, they don’t actually do any proper raiding or looting, not that it really matters. but for the past few months.” “We heard rumors of a shaman uniting them.” “Yeah that’s the rumor, but really nobody knows what’s going on with them. They make quick attacks and then run back to their accursed desert. So when are more Empire soldiers coming?” “They aren’t.” “What?! We’ve been holding out for months with no hope in sight and now that you give us a little bit, you take it away again?” “Citizen, I advise you to calm yourself.” You warn, wondering if you’re going to have to make another point like you did in Dalt. You don’t since thought since the sheriff has more sense. “Alright, alright, but I’m telling you there are a lot of those lizard riders! I hope you’re more than just regular Empire soldiers. You guys Shadow Guard or something?” “We’re Eternals.” You set up your staging point in Jekka. The desert raiders will probably attack this town again as usual, so you might as well take advantage of the fact. The waiting is tedious, but eventually after few days it pays off. Several of the raiders appear in the distance and make no hesitation in their attack. The raiders are trying to rely on intimidation, because they sure aren’t relying on strategy and only attack the town from one direction. The lizard creatures that the raiders ride might be intimidating to the average citizen, but you’ve fought bigger creatures during training. They’re rather clumsy beasts actually and when you and your team begin to use your own hit and run tactics, they start to collide into each other causing problems for the raiders. As for the raiders themselves, they prove to be barely better fighters than the kobolds after dismounting several of them. Underneath the desert protection gear they wear, they don’t appear to be human or any other race you’re familiar with, but they bleed just like all them and that’s the important thing. As many battles often go, this one is over quicker than it felt. The remaining raiders run off and you order your people to mount up and chase them down which is fairly easy to do. Jekka suffered some damage and a few dead, but overall the townspeople couldn’t be happier with the outcome and most shower you with praise. However, you get the impression that you’re going to be facing more of these raiders in the near future and you’re right. A couple days pass and another raid on the town of Jekka occurs in the same exact manner, then again a few days after that. A week passes and there are no more raids, but that doesn’t mean they’ve stopped. You already know they’ve been attacking several settlements, so you tell Warrick and Roldan to scout out the closest ones to see what their situation is while you try to build some proper defenses for Jekka. A week passes and you learn more about your foes from a villager who survived the destruction of his home. The desert raiders (or the Usksha as you’ve come to find out their proper name) have indeed been united under one banner by a shaman of some sort. The villager says he saw this being with his own eyes and was spared for the sole purpose to warn all that the Usksha will no longer tolerate a foreign presence encroaching on their desert. This shaman said he has been chosen personally by their god Usk to destroy all those that do and that the town of Jekka will not be able to resist the inevitable destiny that it will fall. “So, he’s coming here then? Good, saves us the trouble of hunting him down.” You reply. “Combined with this information and based on what Warrick and I have scouted out, it sounds like there will be even more of them. Possibly a full blown army. We might need reinforcements from Fort Glory.” Roldan says. “Reinforcements? Hah! We’ve beaten them several times with ease!” “Would they even get here in time? We don’t exactly know when the attack will come.” Brenda asks. “They might or they might not, still we should try. Find out who the best runner is in this town and have them travel to Fort Glory with this news. We can continue to prepare in the meantime.” You say. The next morning several Uskshas appear in the distance like the other times you fought them. Then more show up, then even more. The town sheriff completely panics and says he’s never seen this many before. This of course causes most of the other townies to panic as well. You slap him and tell him if he and anyone else aren’t going to be helpful then they need to stay out of the way and find someplace to hide. They come at you screaming and yelling in their barbarian language and suddenly a huge worm thing comes out of the ground in the center of town. “Ha ha! At last a real fight!” Edgar yells and runs at it immediately as it destroys the nearby tavern. You order Kane to come with you to help Edgar while the rest try to delay the rest of the usksha. You just hope the barricades hold up long enough for them to greatly whittle the numbers down. You, Edgar and Kane approach the great worm, which bashes its great body into the side of another building, killing many townspeople hiding inside. “YOU! You think you can destroy me? I am an avatar of Usk! How can you destroy a god when you are, but a mere child of a corrupt empire?” you suddenly hear in your mind. It takes a split moment, but you realize that this beast is the shaman. He has used magic of some kind to transform himself into this thing. It doesn’t matter how much favor he has from his god though, he isn’t one and will die like the rest. Using his daggers like climbing gear, Kane jumps as high as he can and sink them into the shaman, while you and Edgar attempt to chop at his body like it was a tree. The shaman roars and attempts to smash you with his body, but you pull Edgar out of the way and Kane jumps off before being crushed. The shaman burrows back into the hole he came from and a few moments later he breaks through in another area of the town and begins destroying the barricades. You reach the shaman just in time for him to sink back into his hole again, while usksha pour in through the broken wall. “Shit!” Edgar shouts in exasperation. “Plug up that opening with their dead bodies!” you shout as you chop off the head of one their lizards before doing the same to the fallen rider. Holding the back the tide of usksha isn’t exactly what you want to be doing though, you want to take down that shaman, do that and this battle is over. When you hear him break through the ground again elsewhere in town, you tell Kane and Edgar to hold the line here, while you go see if you can get him. You see him near the center of town again trying to finish destroying the buildings there. You chop down a few usksha near him and resume attempting to bring him down. He uses his crushing attack like last time, but this time you anticipate and not only dodge, but you manage to run your sword into his eye when his head is at your level. He bellows in pain and attempts to escape again, but you won’t let go of your sword and pull it towards you as he pulls backwards. You fall to the ground as the sword finishes slicing through the shaman’s flesh leaving a gapping wound where his eye and part of his “face” would be. You then see the worm collapse to the ground and begin to glow. Some of the others nearby, human and usksha alike stop fighting to stand and watch in wonder. The shaman transforms back into his natural form, his head and body displaying heavy wounds. “No…can’t…you…why…we hate you…you aren’t…wanted…your empire will die…we will reclaim what is oursss…” are the scattered words you hear in your head as you approach the shaman’s broken body. “Stop talking.” You say and run your sword through his other eye. It is at this point you hear the howls of several usksha as their mental link with their leader has been severed. You, your team and even a few vengeful townspeople butcher the remaining usksha that don’t get away while attempting to retreat. Jekka is half in ruins and many are dead, but the battle has been won. The following day a detachment of troops arrive from Fort Glory. They look at the carnage and the platoon leader reports to you. “I’m Corporal Delan and I’m here to help you with…shit, what the hell happened here?” “Victory, corporal. Victory.” You say. “So…the threat is gone?” “I wouldn’t say it’s gone, but it won’t be rearing its head for a long time.” “I say we should march into that desert and wipe them out permanently, then we’d never have to worry about them ever again!” Edgar says. “Well, if you decide to do that, we’ll help. I know you’ve been busy down here so I don’t know if you’ve heard, but we’ve made great strides in eliminating the kobolds, so Captian Anu told us to help you with this problem as much as we can. > You leave it alone Marching into the desert without a grand plan other than simple slaughter isn’t much of a plan. The usksha are nomads anyway, you’d never be able to catch all of them in their home turf. “No, I believe we’ve taken care of the major problem, but I think you should stay here and oversee the safety of this town now. We’ll head back to Fort Glory and report the situation.” You tell Delan. As you pack up and start to leave, Edgar begins to complain. “What are we doing? We should be trying to hunt down the rest of the usksha!” “Our mission here is done, the usksha have been defeated. If we get ordered to mount an expedition into the desert then we shall do so.” “Bah! Anu is probably going to assign us to fight kobolds again! We should be taking the initiative!” “It seems every time you take the initiative, I end up having to help you in some way. I’d recommend that you worry less about fighting and more about your combat techniques.” At this point Edgar gets noticeably mad, but says nothing and walks off. You’re starting to get slightly concerned about him. You’d rather not have to teach him a lesson like you did when you were still training under Mistress. When you arrive at Fort Glory and report to Captain Anu he’s pleased with what you’ve accomplished and is impressed. He says he’d like to keep you here to finish up wiping out the kobold infestation, but he’s received word from the top that your team is to be transferred elsewhere. “Where are we going sir?” “The Rask frontier and I don’t mind saying I don’t envy you.” “I’ve heard of the place before. What is the situation there?” “Bad, worse and downright horrible. As far as I know the Empire has been trying to establish order there for decades and not making any progress.” “Captain, I certainly hope you don’t make it a habit of saying disparaging things about the Empire.” A man says walking into the room. It’s Mr. Mol. “Uh no sir. Sorry sir.” Captain Anu says sheepishly. Mr. Mol overlooks his comments and speaks to you directly. “Ignore the captain’s words, everyone exaggerates the situation at the Rask frontier. While the area is having some problems, the fact remains if it really was so bad there, we would’ve pulled out a long time ago. Anyway, congratulations on your latest mission. Couldn’t help overhearing your report in the next room, quite impressive. Which makes me believe it was a good idea to transfer you now.” “The Eternals are ready to serve the Emperor wherever he may need us sir.” You say. “And the Emperor will always appreciate your service. He has been watching you, you know. He always is. That is why he believes you would be most effective apart from each other.” “Sir?” “You are Eternals, m’boy. You were bred to lead as well as fight. You’ve already proven yourself to be able to do both, but your fellow Eternals will never reach their fullest potential if they live under your shadow. All of you will be separated and given your own commands in territories the Emperor needs you the most. I have no doubt you all will be successful and honor the Emperor with your future victories.” “W..we will sir, but you said territories. Are we not all being sent to the Rask frontier?” “Oh I think the captain misunderstood. A few of you are being sent there, but some of you are staying here, and others are yet being sent elsewhere. Here, here’s your orders, you can inform the rest of your team, I’m sure they’ll be excited to hear this news too, oh and consider yourself promoted to lieutenant. The rest of your team members will probably be promoted to sergeant rank when they officially get their assignments. I think that’s about it. A caravan will be here to transfer some of you to your new assignments in a few days. Good day.” As Mr. Mol goes walking out the office, you feel a little strange. Your team has been together so long, it feels weird to know that you’re going to be split apart. “Sorry for the wrong information, I thought all of you would be sent to the Rask frontier. Well I guess I’m glad to know some of your are staying, heh…are you okay?” Captain Anu asks. “Huh? Oh yes. I’m okay captain. If you’ll excuse me I have to inform my team of their new assignments.” “Certainly. Dismissed.” You inform your team of the news and there is a mixture of feelings. There is some excitement of gaining their own commands, but are still a little apprehensive about splitting up. Well all of them except Edgar who seems to be solely overjoyed that he’s getting his own command. “Okay, Roldan and Brenda, you’re staying here.” “Damn, I was hoping I’d at least get to go some place different.” Brenda says. “Make no mistake, this area still needs order established. I believe you and Roldan will do a fine job in continuing the reputation of excellence that we have built here.” You continue with the list. “Gerald and Warrick, you’re being assigned along the Felkan border. Apparently the non-aggression treaty the Empire had with the Felkan Kingdom has expired and tensions have been high. War with them may even break out.” “Interesting. Well if war does break out, we’ll be the first one to show the Felkans the error of defying the Emperor’s mercy.” Warrick says. “Yeah, yeah! Let’s get on with it, where am I going?” Edgar interrupts. You glare at Edgar and then continue. “You, Kane and I are all being sent to the Rask frontier.” “As it should be. My skills were going to waste here.” “Edgar, I’m going to say this while I’m still your superior. I certainly hope you realize that this isn’t a game and you’ll prove yourself to be a competent leader.” “Hey, I’m just as much of a leader as you are! The difference is I take risks and that will be a trait that will necessary in a place like the Rask frontier! I will rise up in the ranks and bring honor to the name Eternal and glory to the Emperor!” “You mean glory to yourself because you feel like you have something to prove.” You say. “And you don’t? You’re a hypocrite anyway! Always were ever since we trained under Mistress! I still recall you begging for your life to her as she crushed you under her boot. From that day on you were always trying to prove yourself and beating the bloody pulp out everyone.” “And as I recall you were on that end several times Edgar. Is that why you’re still trying to prove yourself?” “You wanna try that now?” Edgar says getting in your face and at this point all of your fellow Eternals intervene to break up a potential fight. “Hey come on you guys! We can’t be seen fighting each other like this! We’re Eternals, we put all that stuff behind us back in training. We’re professionals and supposed to be setting the example for the Empire!” Roldan says. Edgar brushes himself and backs off. “Tell you what Roldan. You set the example for the Empire. All of you set the example. In the meantime, I’ll be scoring victories and actually serving the Emperor by conquering land in his name.” And with these last words, he takes his leave all of you. The last few days together are a little awkward with what transpired between you and Edgar. Still you say your goodbyes to Roldan and Brenda when the caravan comes. A few days after that, you then say your goodbyes to Warrick and Gerald. You, Edgar and Kane sit in silence for the remainder of the trip. Eventually you arrive at the Rask frontier and make your stop at Fort Destiny. You haven’t gotten off the caravan five minutes when a woman wearing battle armor approaches you. “Hey are you the Eternals?” “Yes we are.” “I’m Captain Krozer, I’ve heard a lot about you and wanted to meet you personally. Welcome to hell.” Captain Krozer begins to give you a run down on the entire area. She mentions that the mortality rate here is high so morale isn’t the best, but she hopes that you and the other Eternals assigned here can rally some sort hope here again. Captain Krozer also goes on to tell you that there’s been a slight change of plans in your assignments. She says that you’re still staying here, but that Kane and Edgar are going to Fort Defiance, which is further north. Probably for the best considering what transpired between you and Edgar. Kane nods a dignified goodbye to you, and gets back on the caravan; Edgar of course isn’t as pleasant and gives you a hostile glare before leaving. With the caravan leaving, you head to your new unit. When you see them, quite a few of them are predictably much older than you, but surprisingly you see that half of them are around your age. “So, you’re one those Eternals huh?” one the older soldiers says almost dismissively. You’re in no mood to warn anyone this time, so you go straight to the point and throw him to the floor with his arm painfully twisted behind his back. “Correct, and you’ll address me as sir or lieutenant if you want to keep this arm, because it’ll be very hard to continue doing your duty for the Emperor with just a stump. Understand?” “Argh. Y..yes sir!” And so begins your assignment in the Rask frontier. > Chapter 2A: For The Empire! Year 20 “Watch it the last ones are coming from the left side!” you shout, pointing at the barbarian wolfmen breaking through the barricade. Two of your number go down before the might of the wolfmen. As always you find yourself having to do things yourself. Not that you’re adverse to placing yourself in the thick of battle, but sometimes you get a little tired of having to micromanage. One of the wolfmen goes down by your blade with ease, the other three however are shot full of bolts, though you were very nearly in the crossfire. “DAMMIT, watch where you’re shooting!” You shout at the dark elven mercenaries. “Oh stop being so dramatic, we’ve been shooting with these crossbows longer than you’ve even been alive I’d wager.” One of them replies, followed by a few snickers. You shake your head at the fact that you have to routinely work with them, let alone having to put up with their kind. Then again you’ve had to put up with a lot around here for the past four years. “Are we done fighting these dogs now? When are we going to get back to killing more sveld? That’s a lot more fun.” One of the mercenaries says. “You aren’t getting paid to have fun svelk! You’re getting paid to do your job. If you really want to go murder your tree loving cousins so bad, we’re not stopping you.” You say. “Whatever monkey, our job here is done, we’re heading back. Let us know when you need our help again.” The mercenary says and they leave. You survey the damage to the logging camp and it’s going to be awhile before this place is up and running to it’s full capabilities again. Still, today is a victory and despite everything, you’ve managed to eliminate more enemies even if it does seem like they are everywhere in this harsh cold land. Unfortunately nowadays the Rask frontier isn’t the only place where the Empire has been having problems. Open war broke out with the Felkan Kingdom a couple years ago. Sometimes you wonder how things are going with Warrick and Gerald, but you’ve never heard anything about them, or from them. In fact you rarely hear news from anywhere unless it directly concerns you defending mining towns, logging town, or outposts from barbarians or the forest elves. It’s never pretty here, but you can only imagine what they deal with up at Fort Defiance where they routinely face ogres and sometimes even giants. You have heard that Edgar has made quite a name for himself with some of his actions. In a way you’re glad, because he’s living up to the title of an Eternal and doing honor by serving with distinction…still, knowing him he’s doing it all to try to “beat” you. As for you, you’ve made quite a name for yourself as well. You have improved the mortality rate of the soldiers here a little (most notably the ones serving under you), but you’ve also managed to successfully defend several towns with low citizen casualties too. The greatest accomplishments of yours are the complete destruction of several hostile barbarian tribes. The Black Wolves, the Enclave of the Bear, the Blood Boars, and other minor shape changing tribes have all been exterminated thanks to your relentless nature. Indeed, you’ve become so infamous that the barbarian tribes in this land have come to call you the “The Bane of Rask.” This recent battle was a last desperate regroup attack by one of the tribes, the “Silver Fangs” after you wiped out all their women and children in an attack on their camp. Grim business to be sure, but it wasn’t first time and it certainly won’t be the last. These tribes must learn that they cannot stand against the might of the Empire or the Emperor. If they can only learn that with their extinction then so be it. You report your victory to Captain Krozer. “Excellent as always lieutenant. I know time after time I can count on you. Which leads me to the next major task. From what I can tell we’ve managed to eliminate the major threats in this particular area of the Rask frontier, but we have two left. The forest elves and the Wendigo tribe are the two in question and I’m wondering which one we should focus our attention on first.” “Well I can tell you that the Wendigo tribe will be a challenge. They’re the biggest, toughest and meanest of all the barbarian shape shifters. So far we haven’t had a large battle with them yet, but with our extermination of the other tribes, the time is getting closer. As for the elves, it will be more tedious than anything as they use a lot of guerilla tactics and such. We’ve still never found any sort of home, base or camp of theirs, but I suppose those dark elven mercs will be more than willing to help us with eliminating them. I’m sure their leader, Edolith will most likely demand a high price as usual though.” You say. “(Sigh) Yeah, I’m sure she will. Things are never easy here. Fuck it; we’re pushing forward on both groups right now and putting an end to it once and for all. The question is, would you prefer to lead a company against the Wendigo tribe or go on a seek and destroy mission on the forest elves.” > You attack the Wendigo tribe “While I have every desire to see both of these blights erased from the Empire’s lands, I believe my abilities would be best served in leading the attack against the Wendigo tribe, captain.” You say. “I had a feeling you’d be more drawn to that idea, and you are probably the best person for it, seeing how many victories you have against the barbarians tribes here. Very well, I shall send another officer to lead the mission against the elves and I hope those mercenaries lower their price in exchange for a chance to kill their tree loving kin. In fact I may go along on that mission.” Captain Krozer replies. “You are captain?” “Yes, someone needs to keep an eye on those shifty bastards. Besides I find that I’ve been getting stuck behind the desk too much lately. It’ll be good to be back out in the field. Don’t want to become like one of those fat self-important generals that do nothing except point to maps and make equally fat musings on tactics. A true leader should lead from the front, I’m sure you agree.” “It is preferable yes…but I do understand the need to keep those with keen military minds safe from major war zones. Such people have their place as all do in their service of the Emperor.” “Why lieutenant, are you complimenting me on my intelligence? It’s not like you to flirt.” Captain Krozer asks in a tone slightly friendlier than usual, it catches you a little off guard. “I…no! I mean yes, you are very intelligent, but…” “Relax lieutenant, just having a little fun, didn’t mean to put you on the spot. Anyway, we’ll pick this up later, you better get prepared for your mission, and good luck.” You do exactly that, get prepared. You know this will not be an easy battle. You fought a member of the wendigos by yourself before and it was one of your greatest fights. Fighting an entire tribe of them even with an entire company behind you will not make it easier. Most of the men while capable soldiers, they are still just recruits in some ways when facing the shear might and savagery of these barbarians, let alone a tribe like the wendigos. At this point you wish you had a few battle wizards or even orcs in your ranks, but most of those have been assigned either at Fort Defiance or on the frontlines of the Felkan War. You march through the ice and snow towards wendingo territory, along the way you come across a small village completely decimated. Looks like it was a fairly new one made up of some determined settlers. Still, no amount of determination could have possibly made it a good idea to start building a new settlement that was so close to wendigo territory without Empire protection. Houses have been burned, and the gory bodies of the dead are everywhere and in pieces. Some of the bodies have even been partially eaten. Not surprising, considering the wendigo tribe will cannibalize their own people if necessary. A couple of the newer recruits throw up at the grisly sight. The march eventually leads you a wooded hill area where they make their home. It’s there where you have your first major encounter with the wendigos. Their aren’t a lot of them, but they’re completely vicious and without fear. They think nothing of attacking you despite being outnumbered and bellow their terrible howl. A howl so dreadful it can affect the mind and causes a few of your men to lose their courage completely. “It’s all in your head! The Emperor’s Will protects us! Find your nerve or die!” you shout and clash with the nearest wendigo. It’s just the first of many such battles. The only good thing is the wendigos are pretty easy to find and make no attempts to hide from you, meaning you don’t really need to make a big effort at hunting them down. The bad thing of course is little by little your company is worn down by their attacks along with the land already being harsh and food being scarce. It’s not just that though, this land of theirs, it’s making you feel weird, to say nothing of your men. The howls of the wendingos seem to be on the very winds here. It’s constantly there sapping your mind and making yourself feel strange thoughts. “Lieutenant, I’m starting to feel really hungry. A lot of the men are.” Your second says to you. “We just stopped to eat.” “I know, but I dunno I’m still hungry.” “Well we’re not stopping again. We need to keep moving the quicker we do this, the quicker we can go back home and have a proper meal.” “Yes, a proper meal with meat. Lots of meat. Heh heh.” Your second says and walks away. By the fifth day, you finally come across a large wendigo encampment and it is there where you see some sort of leader. You knew they had to have one, these types always do. He’s predictably the largest of his kind and covered in pure white fur. When your company arrives, the wendigos make their howl, but more disturbingly some of your men make a rival howl of their own and charge into battle even before you give the command. The battle is a slaughter on both sides. You struggle against the wendigo leader striking several blows that would kill a normal man, but of course then you’re not fighting a man. He swipes you across the chest destroying your breast plate and lands another blow to your head which probably would’ve killed you had you not been wearing a helmet. It is enough to knock you down however. “Your combat skill is impressive, Bane of Rask. It will be an honor to add it my own when I devour your heart.” You suddenly hear in your head as you struggle to get up. You’ve heard this sort of talk before. Namely when you were fighting against the usksha shaman. You shake off the wendingo leader’s mental attempts to throw you off guard and narrowly avoid his foot stomping on your head. You grab your sword nearby and with all your might, you swing it at the very foot that just tried to crush your head and chop it clean off. The wendigo leader howls again, but this is one of pain as he tumbles to the ground. You waste no time and shove the blade down the beast’s gullet. While this would be enough to kill most, the leader manages punch you aside with all his thrashing and then tries to stand up on one foot with a sword still stuck through his mouth and coming out the other side of his head. It would be a darkly comical sight under different circumstances watching this beast hop around trying to pull a sword out of his head, but you’re in no mood to laugh. You charge into him as hard as you can to knock him down and grab the sword yanking it back and forth until you succeed in sawing off the top part of his head. To their credit, the remaining wendigos continue to fight and die with their leader. The battle is won and even you take a moment to rest. This rest is to be short lived. “Bane of Rask, you’ve just won a fierce battle wouldn’t it be nice to celebrate by filling your belly with meat? There is a lot in the pot over there.” “…what?” you say to yourself and hold your head in your hands. “The pot over there. Lots of tasty meat that this tribe was going to eat before you so rudely interrupted them. No sense in letting it go to waste.” “…no I just killed you.” “Did you? Of course if you wish you could just pick a body on the ground and start eating. Why not? You deserve it.” You know what’s going on here. The wendigos aren’t truly flesh and blood creatures! They’re some sort of spirits or something otherworldly. No wonder you’ve felt strange the entire time you’ve been here. You get up and call your men to leave immediately, only to see some of them have already fully succumbed to the wendigo curse. Eating the bodies laying on the ground and beginning to look less than human and more feral. > You run The longer you stay here, the more likely all of you are going to get possessed. This entire land is cursed and you need to get out of here. You and the rest of your unprocessed troops begin to back off while still keeping an eye on the new wendigos. Their preoccupation with fresh bodies is limited however and they soon begin to turn towards you. They howl that dreadful noise again and begin to transform. It is at this point some of your men run as fast as then can, others begin to hold their heads telling a voice to shut up. “Bane of Rask, join us or die here today!” you hear the voice hiss. Several wendigos run after the men who fled, while the others stay to attack you. For whatever reason, they’re not fighting with as much reckless abandon anymore, it’s almost as if they’ve absorbed the fighting skills of your soldiers. Despite this, you manage to pull out a victory, but you’re exhausted and wounded. You see some of your other men already beginning to transform having been possessed by the wendigos and you spare no time in killing them before they can transform as well. “Your skills for killing are misused, if you just embraced the primal instinct, you would be able to use your skills to the fullest extent and without the shackles of any higher authority.” “SHUT UP!” you shout. Between the constant assaults to your mind and your wounds, you struggle to make your way out of wendigo territory. It doesn’t help that you’re also still being periodically attacked by the wendigos that presumably finished off the rest of your men who ran away. You run your sword through the face of a wendigo and ignore his claws ripping through your own armor and your flesh. You’re tired, but a rage is growing within you due to these constant assaults. You grab the already mortally wounded wendigo and as hard as you can you summon all your strength to break its neck. It falls to the snow in a heavy heap and you do as well. “Do it…nobody is around…feed to sustain your strength…” you hear. You sink your teeth into the body of the wendigo and begin to feed…or rather the carcass of its former host as the wendigo itself has left its body and managed to weave itself into your mind. Your barrier against it finally shattered, your mind is truly not your own anymore. While you are “alive” you are merely a puppet now. You spend the remainder of your days seeking out fresh flesh, until ultimately your mind is completely absorbed and under control of the wendigo.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>“While I have every desire to see both of these blights erased from the Empire’s lands, I believe my abilities would be best served in leading the attack against the Wendigo tribe, captain.” You say. “I had a feeling you’d be more drawn to that idea, and you are probably the best person for it, seeing how many victories you have against the barbarians tribes here. Very well, I shall send another officer to lead the mission against the elves and I hope those mercenaries lower their price in exchange for a chance to kill their tree loving kin. In fact I may go along on that mission.” Captain Krozer replies. “You are captain?” “Yes, someone needs to keep an eye on those shifty bastards. Besides I find that I’ve been getting stuck behind the desk too much lately. It’ll be good to be back out in the field. Don’t want to become like one of those fat self-important generals that do nothing except point to maps and make equally fat musings on tactics. A true leader should lead from the front, I’m sure you agree.” “It is preferable yes…but I do understand the need to keep those with keen military minds safe from major war zones. Such people have their place as all do in their service of the Emperor.” “Why lieutenant, are you complimenting me on my intelligence? It’s not like you to flirt.” Captain Krozer asks in a tone slightly friendlier than usual, it catches you a little off guard. “I…no! I mean yes, you are very intelligent, but…” “Relax lieutenant, just having a little fun, didn’t mean to put you on the spot. Anyway, we’ll pick this up later, you better get prepared for your mission, and good luck.” You do exactly that, get prepared. You know this will not be an easy battle. You fought a member of the wendigos by yourself before and it was one of your greatest fights. Fighting an entire tribe of them even with an entire company behind you will not make it easier. Most of the men while capable soldiers, they are still just recruits in some ways when facing the shear might and savagery of these barbarians, let alone a tribe like the wendigos. At this point you wish you had a few battle wizards or even orcs in your ranks, but most of those have been assigned either at Fort Defiance or on the frontlines of the Felkan War. You march through the ice and snow towards wendingo territory, along the way you come across a small village completely decimated. Looks like it was a fairly new one made up of some determined settlers. Still, no amount of determination could have possibly made it a good idea to start building a new settlement that was so close to wendigo territory without Empire protection. Houses have been burned, and the gory bodies of the dead are everywhere and in pieces. Some of the bodies have even been partially eaten. Not surprising, considering the wendigo tribe will cannibalize their own people if necessary. A couple of the newer recruits throw up at the grisly sight. The march eventually leads you a wooded hill area where they make their home. It’s there where you have your first major encounter with the wendigos. Their aren’t a lot of them, but they’re completely vicious and without fear. They think nothing of attacking you despite being outnumbered and bellow their terrible howl. A howl so dreadful it can affect the mind and causes a few of your men to lose their courage completely. “It’s all in your head! The Emperor’s Will protects us! Find your nerve or die!” you shout and clash with the nearest wendigo. It’s just the first of many such battles. The only good thing is the wendigos are pretty easy to find and make no attempts to hide from you, meaning you don’t really need to make a big effort at hunting them down. The bad thing of course is little by little your company is worn down by their attacks along with the land already being harsh and food being scarce. It’s not just that though, this land of theirs, it’s making you feel weird, to say nothing of your men. The howls of the wendingos seem to be on the very winds here. It’s constantly there sapping your mind and making yourself feel strange thoughts. “Lieutenant, I’m starting to feel really hungry. A lot of the men are.” Your second says to you. “We just stopped to eat.” “I know, but I dunno I’m still hungry.” “Well we’re not stopping again. We need to keep moving the quicker we do this, the quicker we can go back home and have a proper meal.” “Yes, a proper meal with meat. Lots of meat. Heh heh.” Your second says and walks away. By the fifth day, you finally come across a large wendigo encampment and it is there where you see some sort of leader. You knew they had to have one, these types always do. He’s predictably the largest of his kind and covered in pure white fur. When your company arrives, the wendigos make their howl, but more disturbingly some of your men make a rival howl of their own and charge into battle even before you give the command. The battle is a slaughter on both sides. You struggle against the wendigo leader striking several blows that would kill a normal man, but of course then you’re not fighting a man. He swipes you across the chest destroying your breast plate and lands another blow to your head which probably would’ve killed you had you not been wearing a helmet. It is enough to knock you down however. “Your combat skill is impressive, Bane of Rask. It will be an honor to add it my own when I devour your heart.” You suddenly hear in your head as you struggle to get up. You’ve heard this sort of talk before. Namely when you were fighting against the usksha shaman. You shake off the wendingo leader’s mental attempts to throw you off guard and narrowly avoid his foot stomping on your head. You grab your sword nearby and with all your might, you swing it at the very foot that just tried to crush your head and chop it clean off. The wendigo leader howls again, but this is one of pain as he tumbles to the ground. You waste no time and shove the blade down the beast’s gullet. While this would be enough to kill most, the leader manages punch you aside with all his thrashing and then tries to stand up on one foot with a sword still stuck through his mouth and coming out the other side of his head. It would be a darkly comical sight under different circumstances watching this beast hop around trying to pull a sword out of his head, but you’re in no mood to laugh. You charge into him as hard as you can to knock him down and grab the sword yanking it back and forth until you succeed in sawing off the top part of his head. To their credit, the remaining wendigos continue to fight and die with their leader. The battle is won and even you take a moment to rest. This rest is to be short lived. “Bane of Rask, you’ve just won a fierce battle wouldn’t it be nice to celebrate by filling your belly with meat? There is a lot in the pot over there.” “…what?” you say to yourself and hold your head in your hands. “The pot over there. Lots of tasty meat that this tribe was going to eat before you so rudely interrupted them. No sense in letting it go to waste.” “…no I just killed you.” “Did you? Of course if you wish you could just pick a body on the ground and start eating. Why not? You deserve it.” You know what’s going on here. The wendigos aren’t truly flesh and blood creatures! They’re some sort of spirits or something otherworldly. No wonder you’ve felt strange the entire time you’ve been here. You get up and call your men to leave immediately, only to see some of them have already fully succumbed to the wendigo curse. Eating the bodies laying on the ground and beginning to look less than human and more feral. > You fight As grim as it might be and as tired as you are, you can’t just let the spirits infect your men. For one thing it isn’t any way for a soldier to go down. For another they’ll just become the “new tribe” you just cleared out. Maybe this land is cursed, but you’ll not let it be infested with hosts for the spirits that dwell here. You draw your sword and several of your men who haven’t been affected do likewise. Those that have been infected finally stop their gruesome feast and look at you. “So hungry, must have more flesh, must be fresh, must be YOU!” your second in command screams ghoulishly and attacks you. Another battle takes place, though not as long or nearly as hard as the first, but you and what’s left of your company make a full retreat as fast as possible when it’s over. It isn’t a smooth retreat though. The thoughts of hunger are filling your minds constantly and being tired just makes it easier for the spirits to infect your men. Several more times you have to put down members of your own company who have turned. It isn’t until you leave those accursed wooded hills that you start to feel more like yourself, but even then the journey back isn’t easy. The cold, the hunger, and the overall mental and physical exhaustion takes its toll on your last remaining men. By the time you reach the nearest friendly settlement you have six left. “Heh, just like the old days, you silently chuckle to yourself, briefly thinking of your six Eternal fellows. You don’t think you’ve ever been pushed to the limit like this before. Truly it is only by the Emperor’s strength that you managed to make it through. You only hope you have not shamed him too much with your failure. Eventually you arrive at Fort Destiny and report to Captain Krozer, who is celebrating with several others in the fort. You don’t know what’s causing this unorthodox behavior, but you’re certainly surprised by it. “Captain, I have my mission report.” “Hey! You’re back Bane of Rask! Isn’t that what they call you around here? Ha ha! I’m glad you’re back, I figured your mission would be as successful as mine! Have a drink!” “Uh maybe later captain, but I…did you say there was a victory?” “Well we wouldn’t be sitting here getting drunk if there wasn’t now would we? The campaign against the forest elves was completely successful. I have to give those svelk credit, they can sniff out their kin better than anyone. Was hardly even a fight, when we eventually did find their major home as it was filled mostly with non-combatant women and children. We’d killed most of the warriors trying to get there. Still, always grim business dealing with the enemy civvies. We managed to enslave most of the children at least without killing them, though if the svelk had it their way they would’ve raped and killed everyone. Uncivilized vicious bastards.” The general says taking another drink. “You enslaved them?” you ask being slightly confused by the idea. “Well sure…what you think I’d just kill them? I know that’s the way you do things lieutenant, and probably with those shape shifting barbarians its for the best, but let’s just say I’m a little more merciful than you. Hope it doesn’t ruin your perception of me.” “Uh… not at all. I’m sure you are right captain. The elven children can be indoctrinated to become productive citizens of the Empire. They will learn that our way of life is superior and the correct way.” “Ha ha, that’s why I like you lieutenant. You don’t know any better. Hey let’s take this conversation back to my office, it’s a little loud here.” You say okay and begin to follow her, but she grabs your hand in an effort to lead you. You aren’t sure of how to react, so you just let her. When you get there she sits on her desk and smiles at you. “Relax, lieutenant. I know you’re an Eternal, but you’re always so serious.” “It’s just I really need to report my mission to you captain.” “Oh very well, I know it’s important to you.” She says taking another drink. You tell her exactly what happened and she listens intently to your story. “Well lieutenant, looks like you managed to pull out a victory against all odds once again. I figured you would.” She says. “Victory? I don’t feel like it was a victory, captain. I lost most of the company.” You reply. “Normally I might agree, but from what you told me, it’s amazing you survived at all, let alone bring anyone back alive. Evil spirits, cursed lands, having to kill your own men turning into insane beasts…not something I’d want to face and I’ve seen my fair share of battles. Besides it sounds like the spirits can’t leave that area and you eliminated a majority of their hosts, as well as depriving them of more by doing what was necessary with our transformed soldiers. We’ll probably always have the odd wendigo running around due to idiotic adventurers exploring places where they shouldn’t, but the danger has been curtailed greatly thanks to you.” “The Emperor’s will guided me and his vigor gave me the endurance to succeed.” “Perhaps, but you really should’ve had a battle mage with you. I have no idea why central command has not sent us any despite my requests, things can’t be that bad with the Felkans! Sometimes I wonder what the hell they’re doing down there. Oh well at least I had you right?” she says and gets off her desk. “Of course, I’ll be here for as long I am needed here general.” “Good.” She says and puts her arms around you and kisses you on the lips. You’re taken completely off guard and are completely out of your element. You’re reminded of Captain Pollo’s advances on Gerald, but this is different since you feel a little something for Krozer even though you’ve tried to not think about it. As the time you’ve spent here has gone by, your thoughts of Captain Krozer have sometimes been more than a little “friendly”, but you’ve tried to suppress them. You don’t know how to react except you sort of back away. “Is something wrong lieutenant?” the general asks “I…uh…I don’t….should we be doing this?” “Oh the ranks? Forget about it. I just want sex, it’s not like I’m planning on falling in love. Unless you really feel uncomfortable about protocol, I’d respect it of course, but I’d be lying if I said I wasn’t disappointed.” “Well, no, I mean… I’ve been having these feelings of lust for you too captain.” You say untactfully. “Ha ha! Well that’s good to know I guess.” The captain laughs. “So what’s the problem then?” “…I just…I’ve never…” “Never…ohhhhh! Really? Though I guess it makes sense. You were trained to kill from birth; going from battlefield to battlefield quoting Empire doctrine (sigh)” the captain touches your face. “Sometimes I wonder if we go too far. Well don’t worry about it; we’ll have time to catch you up. And like I keep telling you, just relax… and call me Alison.” You and the cap…Alison have an interesting time. It certainly isn’t anything you’ve experienced before, but its possibly the most pleasurable thing you’ve ever experienced. You understand a little more to as why other soldiers hold it in such high regard. You know not to let it affect your duty and after a few days of down time, you are ready to serve the Emperor again. Everyone is, Captain Krozer is going to do it elsewhere though, namely the Arat province on the Felkan border. She calls you in to tell you that someone by the name of Mr. Mol has been impressed with your abilities and thinks you are able to handle the Rask frontier without any supervision. As of now you are in charge of Fort Destiny and been promoted to captain. You don’t know what to say. “Congratulations on your new command, though I will say I don’t envy it! After being here for six years myself, I’ll be glad to be sent to the Arat province. Those Felkans can’t possibly be any worse than the shit we’ve faced here.” “It was an honor to serve with you captain.” You say respectfully. “Oh come on, you don’t need to put up a tough front with me, I know you’ll miss me and cry in your pillows at night.” She says with a smirk. “I…won’t! I mean I’ll miss you, but…” “Keep working on developing that sense of humor, but it’s nice to know I’ll be missed.” She says and kisses you on the cheek “Good bye and remember to take a rest from all the killing sometimes and enjoy what you can okay?” With those last words, Alison walks out of her office…or rather your office. And so begins your command of Fort Destiny. > Year 25 “Another protest? What the hell is going on now?” you say. “I don’t know the exact details, just that the miners are protesting their work conditions in the town of Keplavisk.” Lieutenant Verant replies. “I’m getting sick of these protests, the Empire provides everything for these ungrateful wretches and they complain? They ought to be lucky we haven’t sent slaves to do their job! Alright send a detachment there and if they don’t break it up, kill a couple to make a point and remind them that it could be much worse.” “Yes sir.” You sit stuck at your desk wondering when something worthwhile is going to happen. When you were first assigned to this job, the frontier was still dangerous. Even with the elimination of the wendigos and the elven home, there were still minor hostile barbarian tribes running around and sometimes even tribes of ogres or the odd giant who had wandered down from further north. Eventually you eliminated all of those threats to a degree that they were no longer a factor. Then boredom set in as the area became peaceful. For a moment you tried to take Alison’s advice she once gave you, but the problem is, the peace lasted too long, at least for you. Lately though the boredom has become annoyance. There has been a shift in the average Empire citizen’s attitude, namely one of insolence. many have started to complain about their jobs, their food, their freedom, everything. At first you questioned if it wasn’t some sort of supernatural influence as that could at least be a rational explanation of this mass madness. When the first open protests started, you handled them in an efficient manner and they stopped for a while, but only for a while. It’s as if the citizens want you to kill them. And apparently the problem isn’t just here. If anything this sort of open disobedience has been rearing its ugly head in other parts of the Empire a lot more than it has here and a lot sooner. Don’t these people understand that the Empire protects them and gives them everything? If it were not for Emperor’s wisdom to expand, they wouldn’t even have their homes, jobs in whatever province they hail from, never mind the constant vigilance to protect them against monsters that would rip them apart. Sometimes you wish you had been transferred to the Arat province. At least there’s a war going on there. You can only imagine that Warrick and Gerald don’t have to put up with this nonsense. Assuming they are still alive, as you have heard nothing about them and despite your new ranking, you can’t seem to get any information on them either. No word about about Roldan or Brenda either, but you do know that the Nalin province is known to be one of the most orderly places in the Empire now. You would even settle for being transferred to Fort Defiance at this point, they at least have to still have to stem the tide of beasts and monsters from the north. You’ve also wondered about Kane and Edgar. They’re the only two you do have some updated information on, but while you’ve all been in this territory for years you haven’t seen them since the day you separated company. Oh you’ve heard a few stories about Edgar killing giants single handedly, but that’s about it. In fact you’re surprised that neither one of them has earned command of Fort Defiance like you have with Fort Destiny. Sometimes it’s funny how thinking about something causes it to happen. You get a message from Fort Defiance and it’s from Kane! He states that he’s just taken command of Fort Defiance and would like to speak with you in person about some possible joint military operations. You naturally leave for Fort Defiance immediately. A certain excitement and even happiness dwells within you, it’ll be good to see a fellow Eternal again, even if Edgar is probably going to still be combative with you. Who knows though? Maybe he’s changed, it’s been years after all. Your trip to Fort Defiance is uneventful and when you arrive at the fort it’s as large as you’ve heard, but then it would have to be to fend off giants. You are greeted by several heavily armored orc troops and what looks to be a battle mage. (You still never managed to get either assigned to your fort) “Welcome to Fort Defiance captain! I am to take you to General Kane. He is most eager to see you! Come this way!” the battle mage says and as you are escorted through a series of dimly lit corridors one thought goes through your mind: “General?” When you arrive at Kane’s office he looks a little different with his head completely shaved, but other than that he hasn’t changed. He also has another man in his office dressed in dark leather armor, with a cloak. You’ve heard of their reputation, but this is the first time you’ve seen a member of the Shadow Guard. You knew a few were stationed up here though. Kane stands up and greets you. “Well if it isn’t the Bane of Rask! Ha ha ha! How are you my brother?” Kane says in a jovial manner. “I’m fine…brother?” you reply being a little confused by Kane’s demeanor and him calling you brother. “Yes! Of course! We are brothers! We grew up together, we trained together, and we fought together, and we are Eternals! Would that not constitute a brotherly bond?” he says. “Heh, I suppose it would. Never thought about it before I guess.” You reply with a smile. “Hey I’d like you to meet another brother of ours, this is Cyrus. Remember him? He was in our class, but he got transferred to the Shadow Guard when they first separated us.” “Cyrus…oh yes, I do remember him. I have sometimes wondered what happened to some of during that first separation. I guess the rest went to the Shadow Guard then?” “Yes, but only a few of us survived Shadow Guard training. Very few.” “Sounds like us, a few of our class didn’t make it through our training either.” “No, it was nothing like what you went through. Trust me.” Cyrus says coldly. Kane quickly intervenes. “Don’t mind Cyrus, he’s a little on the serious side, sort of like you eh?” “As I recall I don’t remember you being so talkative or jolly either.” You say. “Hey what can I tell you, I’ve changed as the years went by! I’ve learned to take more joy in life and not worry so much about duty or about the Empire!” This last comment is cause for concern. “Not worry about the Empire? What kind of talk is that for an Eternal? And I have a few questions, how did you get promoted to general? I mean why would they need a general up here, this fort has been doing fine without one, the Rask frontier is as quiet as ever and there’s a war going on with the Felkan Kingdom. In fact, where is Edgar? I’ve heard so much about his deeds that I would’ve figured that he might get promoted to command here and certainly not to general.” At this point Kane and Cyrus look at each other and Kane looks back at you with a less cheery disposition. “Very well. It was only a matter of time before I was going to have to bring this up to you anyway. I’ve made myself general and as of recently this fort is no longer under Empire authority.” “You what?!” “I saw the light, with the help of Cyrus here I suppose. The Empire is crumbling, I give it a decade at best and we need to make sure we have a good position when the shit goes down. Don’t you see? That’s why I called you here. You’ve got the plebs further south of the Rask frontier under control and if we combined forces, nobody could stop us! You’re in shock for a moment. Nothing could have prepared you for something like this. “…Kane, you can’t believe that I would go along with something like this!” “But why not? Surely you have heard the reports of the mass civil unrest going on in the Empire, why even in your own area you have had to put civvies in their place.” “Yes, and that just means we have to work harder to preserve the Empire, not abandon it in its time of need!” “Bah! Why bother? It had its time in the sun and now its time for something new to take its place. What better than us? We’re Eternals after all. Just think we could even unite with some of our other siblings in this dying Empire to make ourselves even stronger!” You hold your head in your hands at Kane’s words of secession and treason. This is not the same man you knew, and he is certainly not your “brother.” You never thought the day would come when you’d have to kill a fellow Eternal. > You accept his offer It takes everything in you to not attack, but you’re hoping you can bide your time to gain a better advantage. You’re never really lied before though, so you take deep breath before speaking. “Kane… I think you’re right. Maybe I’ve always known on some level, but it just took someone close to me to point it out. I will join your cause… my brother.” Kane smiles and is certainly overjoyed at your response, but Cyrus looks less than enthusiastic, in fact he’s looking past you. “That’s great! I knew you’d join us! I told you Cyrus!” Kane says looking at Cyrus, but Cyrus is still looking past you, he makes a nod. “Cyrus…wait no!” Kane shouts “He’s lying Kane! Kill him!” You attempt to get up and attack the battle mage behind, but unfortunately he’s already anticipated that and stepped far enough way for you to not get to him in time before he’s already cast a lightning bolt straight in your face. If it had been your body, perhaps you would’ve survived, but a straight blast to your face fries not only your eyes so badly that they melt, but your brain as well. You drop down dead before you can hear Kane’s argument that you could’ve been “turned” to the cause.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 25 “Another protest? What the hell is going on now?” you say. “I don’t know the exact details, just that the miners are protesting their work conditions in the town of Keplavisk.” Lieutenant Verant replies. “I’m getting sick of these protests, the Empire provides everything for these ungrateful wretches and they complain? They ought to be lucky we haven’t sent slaves to do their job! Alright send a detachment there and if they don’t break it up, kill a couple to make a point and remind them that it could be much worse.” “Yes sir.” You sit stuck at your desk wondering when something worthwhile is going to happen. When you were first assigned to this job, the frontier was still dangerous. Even with the elimination of the wendigos and the elven home, there were still minor hostile barbarian tribes running around and sometimes even tribes of ogres or the odd giant who had wandered down from further north. Eventually you eliminated all of those threats to a degree that they were no longer a factor. Then boredom set in as the area became peaceful. For a moment you tried to take Alison’s advice she once gave you, but the problem is, the peace lasted too long, at least for you. Lately though the boredom has become annoyance. There has been a shift in the average Empire citizen’s attitude, namely one of insolence. many have started to complain about their jobs, their food, their freedom, everything. At first you questioned if it wasn’t some sort of supernatural influence as that could at least be a rational explanation of this mass madness. When the first open protests started, you handled them in an efficient manner and they stopped for a while, but only for a while. It’s as if the citizens want you to kill them. And apparently the problem isn’t just here. If anything this sort of open disobedience has been rearing its ugly head in other parts of the Empire a lot more than it has here and a lot sooner. Don’t these people understand that the Empire protects them and gives them everything? If it were not for Emperor’s wisdom to expand, they wouldn’t even have their homes, jobs in whatever province they hail from, never mind the constant vigilance to protect them against monsters that would rip them apart. Sometimes you wish you had been transferred to the Arat province. At least there’s a war going on there. You can only imagine that Warrick and Gerald don’t have to put up with this nonsense. Assuming they are still alive, as you have heard nothing about them and despite your new ranking, you can’t seem to get any information on them either. No word about about Roldan or Brenda either, but you do know that the Nalin province is known to be one of the most orderly places in the Empire now. You would even settle for being transferred to Fort Defiance at this point, they at least have to still have to stem the tide of beasts and monsters from the north. You’ve also wondered about Kane and Edgar. They’re the only two you do have some updated information on, but while you’ve all been in this territory for years you haven’t seen them since the day you separated company. Oh you’ve heard a few stories about Edgar killing giants single handedly, but that’s about it. In fact you’re surprised that neither one of them has earned command of Fort Defiance like you have with Fort Destiny. Sometimes it’s funny how thinking about something causes it to happen. You get a message from Fort Defiance and it’s from Kane! He states that he’s just taken command of Fort Defiance and would like to speak with you in person about some possible joint military operations. You naturally leave for Fort Defiance immediately. A certain excitement and even happiness dwells within you, it’ll be good to see a fellow Eternal again, even if Edgar is probably going to still be combative with you. Who knows though? Maybe he’s changed, it’s been years after all. Your trip to Fort Defiance is uneventful and when you arrive at the fort it’s as large as you’ve heard, but then it would have to be to fend off giants. You are greeted by several heavily armored orc troops and what looks to be a battle mage. (You still never managed to get either assigned to your fort) “Welcome to Fort Defiance captain! I am to take you to General Kane. He is most eager to see you! Come this way!” the battle mage says and as you are escorted through a series of dimly lit corridors one thought goes through your mind: “General?” When you arrive at Kane’s office he looks a little different with his head completely shaved, but other than that he hasn’t changed. He also has another man in his office dressed in dark leather armor, with a cloak. You’ve heard of their reputation, but this is the first time you’ve seen a member of the Shadow Guard. You knew a few were stationed up here though. Kane stands up and greets you. “Well if it isn’t the Bane of Rask! Ha ha ha! How are you my brother?” Kane says in a jovial manner. “I’m fine…brother?” you reply being a little confused by Kane’s demeanor and him calling you brother. “Yes! Of course! We are brothers! We grew up together, we trained together, and we fought together, and we are Eternals! Would that not constitute a brotherly bond?” he says. “Heh, I suppose it would. Never thought about it before I guess.” You reply with a smile. “Hey I’d like you to meet another brother of ours, this is Cyrus. Remember him? He was in our class, but he got transferred to the Shadow Guard when they first separated us.” “Cyrus…oh yes, I do remember him. I have sometimes wondered what happened to some of during that first separation. I guess the rest went to the Shadow Guard then?” “Yes, but only a few of us survived Shadow Guard training. Very few.” “Sounds like us, a few of our class didn’t make it through our training either.” “No, it was nothing like what you went through. Trust me.” Cyrus says coldly. Kane quickly intervenes. “Don’t mind Cyrus, he’s a little on the serious side, sort of like you eh?” “As I recall I don’t remember you being so talkative or jolly either.” You say. “Hey what can I tell you, I’ve changed as the years went by! I’ve learned to take more joy in life and not worry so much about duty or about the Empire!” This last comment is cause for concern. “Not worry about the Empire? What kind of talk is that for an Eternal? And I have a few questions, how did you get promoted to general? I mean why would they need a general up here, this fort has been doing fine without one, the Rask frontier is as quiet as ever and there’s a war going on with the Felkan Kingdom. In fact, where is Edgar? I’ve heard so much about his deeds that I would’ve figured that he might get promoted to command here and certainly not to general.” At this point Kane and Cyrus look at each other and Kane looks back at you with a less cheery disposition. “Very well. It was only a matter of time before I was going to have to bring this up to you anyway. I’ve made myself general and as of recently this fort is no longer under Empire authority.” “You what?!” “I saw the light, with the help of Cyrus here I suppose. The Empire is crumbling, I give it a decade at best and we need to make sure we have a good position when the shit goes down. Don’t you see? That’s why I called you here. You’ve got the plebs further south of the Rask frontier under control and if we combined forces, nobody could stop us! You’re in shock for a moment. Nothing could have prepared you for something like this. “…Kane, you can’t believe that I would go along with something like this!” “But why not? Surely you have heard the reports of the mass civil unrest going on in the Empire, why even in your own area you have had to put civvies in their place.” “Yes, and that just means we have to work harder to preserve the Empire, not abandon it in its time of need!” “Bah! Why bother? It had its time in the sun and now its time for something new to take its place. What better than us? We’re Eternals after all. Just think we could even unite with some of our other siblings in this dying Empire to make ourselves even stronger!” You hold your head in your hands at Kane’s words of secession and treason. This is not the same man you knew, and he is certainly not your “brother.” You never thought the day would come when you’d have to kill a fellow Eternal. > You decline his offer The idea is so repugnant to you that you can’t even bring yourself to even lie about joining him. It probably wouldn’t work anyway; you’ve never been a good liar. You breathe deeply before speaking again. “Kane, I am NOT going to help you. Now you do what you must, and I shall do what I must.” “Told you this was a waste of time, let us be done with this.” Cyrus says and points a small crossbow on his wrist and fires it at you, though Kane knocks his hand away causing the bolt to just hit your shoulder. You fall back in your chair and grab the battle mage who was still standing by. He falls to floor on top of you and you break his neck. You feel a little dizzy though; whatever was in that dart is putting you to sleep fast. You hear Kane and Cyrus arguing as large orcs stomp into the office and begin kicking you as you fall unconscious. When you wake up, you hear an unexpected familiar voice, though the most unexpected thing is that you woke up at all. “Hey, get up. Good thing that weak ass poison doesn’t work on us very well.” Edgar says helping you up. “Edgar? What’s happened here?” You ask looking around and finding yourself stripped of most of your clothing and in a cell. “I knew he wouldn’t be able to convince you. I told Kane that, but he kept going on about how you’d understand, just like how in time I would come to understand. He said that siblings may have their fights, but in the end they always make up.” “Is that how come he hasn’t killed us?” “I guess so, though I don’t think Cyrus would have such sentimental feelings and would have us killed if he had more say in the matter.” “Well, Cyrus at least seems to be thinking like an Eternal in that respect. Kane has apparently gone completely mad though…how the hell did this happen?!” “You got time for a story?” Edgar asks rhetorically before explaining from the beginning. Edgar says that when he and Kane first arrived they were met with a little hostility from everyone else and while their prowess in battle earned them respect, they still were never really “accepted” by anyone. Edgar says he didn’t care of course and was content with the respect that he had earned and getting accolades for slaying giants and such. Kane wasn’t handling the isolation as well and was becoming increasingly more withdrawn. He did his job, but he behaved in a manner that even the orc soldiers found a little unnerving. Nobody wanted to even eat with him, got to a point where the captain of the fort had to send him out primarily on scouting missions by himself. Edgar believes that Kane must’ve really taken the split of the team harder than any of you could’ve known. He suspects that might’ve first lead to his quirk of referring to other Eternals as siblings. He would often mention to Edgar sometimes about how much he missed spending time with you all and couldn’t wait for the day when you all would be together again. “(Sigh) All he needed was for me to interact with him on a regular basis, but I was too busy concerned with my own glory. Time in this cell has really given me time to reflect on a lot of bad choices I’ve made in the present and the past.” “What’s done is done now, but where does Cyrus come in?” you ask. Edgar explains that Cyrus was transferred here four years ago as part of a replacement Shadow Guard detachment to help with the latest giant incursion. He knows Kane was sent on a mission with the Shadow Guard during that time and that’s probably where they started to talk more to each other. Normally Shadow Guards don’t interact with anyone other than other Shadow Guards, but Kane hung around him to such a degree that Cyrus eventually began to talk with Kane on his own accord. “I don’t think Cyrus’ Shadow Guard buddies approved of it too much, but he was their leader so they didn’t say much.” Edgar says. “So how did they control over the whole fort?” Edgar explains again that Cyrus and Kane must’ve cooked up this plan in secret for years, as in time various changes began to occur. The only initial thing that Edgar began to notice was the increase in orc troops being sent here. Granted there was always some stationed here, but now they were starting to out number the human soldiers, and he thought they were mostly going to the front lines on the Felkan border. However, this area was still very dangerous, so ultimately more orc troops here didn’t raise any immediate alarms. The next thing he noticed was that there were less and less attacks by giants and ogres, but Edgar chalked that up to him killing so many of them that naturally they would probably have less members to spare now. Not to mention with all the orcs here now, the giants were having a tougher time of it. The third thing he noticed was Kane becoming less introverted and more aggressive towards the orcs. He witnessed several fights that Kane himself started with various orc leaders. He won with ease of course and it appeared as if he was just being combative out of boredom, but in retrospect there was very real purpose. To establish no doubt to as who is the “real leader.” Captain Ian wasn’t fond of this sort of behavior in any way though and reprimanded Kane several times, but it was obvious he didn’t care. “It was at this point I finally started to talk to Kane on a serious level, just to figure out what was going on with him. All he said to me, was you’ll see in another year brother, with a great big grin on his face. Of course when that year came I found out everything. His private orc army. his alliance with the neighboring giant and ogre tribes, his plans to unite this land completely under him and take on the Empire itself. As you can see I didn’t agree with his plans. I know I have my faults, but disloyalty isn’t one of them.” “He’s allied with ogres and giants? So wait, how long has Kane taken control of this place?” You ask. “We were still getting reports from here from Captain Ian up until last month.” “Hah! Captain Ian’s been dead for more than a few months now! Kane’s just been going through the motions of sending reports and messengers, probably to make sure you or nobody else sent anyone to investigate before he was ready to openly defy the Empire.” “By the Emperor I can’t believe I was so close and never suspected anything wrong going on up here, let alone treason!” you say. “If it’s any consolation, you weren’t the only one. Besides like I said, I was here and I should’ve been the one to do something before anyone. Instead I got myself captured. Tried to bust out a few times, I figured I’d either escape or die trying. There’s just too many of those tough orc bastards though. Even when I managed to get a weapon the blasted battle mage would cast some sort of spell and I’d go completely weak and groggy. Then I’d end up back here again. Heh, Kane’s so crazy now that he still believes that I’ll eventually side with him.” “Did you say battle mage? As in one?” “Yeah, used to have two and they probably would’ve liked to get more stationed here before unleashing their plan, but they had to make due with the ones that cooperated. I killed one of them before my first capture.” “Well they don’t have any now, because I killed the other one before I got sent here.” Edgar tries to contain his enthusiasm. “That’s great! I mean with you by my side and none of that magic shit to complicate things, you’ve given us a much improved chance to escape for good!” Never thought you’d hear Edgar to be so happy to fight along side you, and normally you might even be a little happy too, but right now you’re concerned with escape. The longer you’re gone, the more likely Lieutenant Verant will send someone up here to investigate. They’ll be killed of course and then Kane will undoubtedly push a full attack on to Fort Destiny ad you don’t have the highest hopes that they’d survive an attack by a combined army of orcs, ogres and giants without being prepared at least. You waste no time coming up with a plan. Simplest ones often work the best, Edgar tells you that it’ll be feeding time soon and that you should remain “unconscious” and he’ll do the rest. You get into position and eventually hear the footsteps of your orc jailer. “Here’s yer food, Ed!” one of them says carrying a bowl. “Hey! Why’d you dump a dead body into this cell with me?” Edgar says. “Wha? He ain’t dead he’s just knocked out! I should know I was one of guys that kicked him in da head! Har har har har!” “Well he died in his sleep then from your kick to his head. I recognize him as an Eternal and Kane’s gonna be pissed that you killed him!” “He ain’t dead! He sleep!” “I’m telling you he’s dead! Don’t believe me, you better check yourself.” “Oh no, I know you Ed. You gonna try bash my skull in as soon as I open door. If he really dead, then I just say you killed him.” “And you really think Kane’s gonna believe that? He knows Eternal don’t kill each other, that’s why he’s keeping me alive even though I escape!” The orc pauses for a moment and decides he can’t take the chance. “Bah, alright, I’ll check, but I’m tellin’ you he’s just still unconscious! That shadow guy hit ‘im with one of doze bolts of his. But YOU are gonna do something first.” The orc tells Edgar to turn his back and get close to the cell bars, at which point the orc shackles him so her is unable to attack him. Thank the Emperor that most orcs are still not the brightest lanterns. The orc approaches you and that’s when you spring into action. You struggle with the orc jailer until you manage to grab his dagger and repeatedly stab him in the throat with it to the point where you nearly decapitate him. After kicking the dead orc in the face you grab his keys and release Edgar. “Okay I know of a route we can try to escape through, nearly made it the last time, but again the mage showed up. That won’t be a problem this time and they probably won’t think I’ll try it again.” Edgar says. The obvious thing to do is to concentrate on escaping the fort, though another part of you wants to go back to find Kane and Cyrus to kill them. > You escape As much as you’d like to kill both Kane and Cyrus, you’re outnumbered and you can’t even be sure if you’d catch them together again in this big fort. Better to escape and come back later better prepared to punish them. Still you’re going to need some sort of gear to survive the cold outside of the fort. “We can’t just escape half naked like this. We’re going to need some sort of clothing or better yet armor and weapons.” You say “Yeah, there is a small supply room on the way. It isn’t the main one, but it shouldn’t have any guards by it either. We have to make our way to the kitchen area first, should be relatively empty right now.” It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you find some old battered armor and dull weapons. It will have to do. Edgar mentions that there is a garbage dump chute in the kitchen which leads underground, from there, there’s a long tunnel which eventually leads to a dead end with a hidden hatch. He says he’s knows it leads into a forest area, but not much more than that since the battle mage zapped him and he was dragged back by that time. You and Edgar sneak into the kitchen, but it isn’t completely empty. The cook and a couple of his assistants are there, you and Edgar make quick work of them before they notice you, though Edgar is a little sloppier than you and the assistant that he cuts down knocks over a bunch of pots as he body hits the floor. The clatter is quite loud and you waste no time in looking for the garbage chute. It’s foul and disgusting, but there’s no other option. You jump in and slide down quite easy due to the slimy remains of food greasing the chute. When you reach the bottom a giant pile of garbage cushions you. The smell is almost overpowering, but you have no time to worry about awful smells as you are attacked by larger than normal vermin feasting through the pile. Your boots squish through the disgusting muck as you swing your weapon to drive away or kill the aggressive rats. Edgar comes crashing down from the chute and helps you. “Ugh, forgot how bad this place smelled.” Edgar says kicking a rat. “Guess you forgot about the giant rats as well?” “No, but I figured it wouldn’t be that big of a surprise for you.” You and Edgar manage to fight your way down the small mountain of trash and make your way down the tunnel until you eventually get to a built in ladder leading up to a hatch. “Is this it? It seems like a terrible idea to have this at the fort. Anyone could sneak down here and infiltrate.” You mention. “Nah, it’s pretty well hidden from the outside, in fact it can only open from the inside. Not like any ogre is bright enough to notice it and a giant certainly couldn’t get down here. Plus it locks shut when you get outside. I think it was originally supposed to be an escape tunnel in the first place, but it looks like it got turned into a garbage pit instead. Come on.” Edgar opens up the hatch and holds it open for you as you make your way to the cold outside world. You look around and it is just as Edgar said, a forest area with no major distinguishing markers. You see that the sun is setting and use that as a guide for which general direction you need to go. You figure it’ll probably take a few days to get back to Fort Destiny, but you should be able to make it. You and Edgar walk a good half hour before you realize something is wrong. “Shhh. You hear that?” you ask. “Can’t be ogres, they would’ve attacked us by now.” “It probably isn’t…find cover!” you exclaim. Several bolts whiz past you as you duck down rolling around in the snow and run in a zig zag fashion getting behind several trees so as to not get hit. Edgar isn’t as quick as you and he is hit by two of the bolts. Not enough to kill him, but if they have that same toxin that you experienced on them he’s not going to stay conscious for long. The Shadow Guard assailants finally show themselves and jump out of the trees. Edgar is feeling the effects of the toxin, but he struggles to stay awake to defend himself. You find yourself fighting three of the shadows that circle around you. One of them attacks and you grab his arm breaking it in one quick move, when another attacks you, you shove his broken arm friend into his blade. They both fall to the ground. The third one lands a couple of hits on your back; cutting through the poor armor you’re wearing. You deliver a hefty back kick to his gut and follow up with a spinning swipe with your sword. Your sword’s edge is dull and not sharp enough to cleanly decapitate the shadow, instead it makes a large cruel gash in his neck which spurts blood like a small fountain. The result is still effective and he collapses into the snow. Your other adversary has gotten up off the ground and throws a dagger at you, which you just narrowly avoid. He tries to fight you fairly, but it’s clear he is no match for you and you easily dispatch him. You then finish off the shadow with the broken arm and wound in his belly. Edgar is still fighting the two shadows attacking him. Under normal circumstances, he’d probably easily dispatch them, but the toxin is having its effect and from the front and back their short swords stab him. He falls to the ground when the shadow behind him cuts at his tendons. You strike your blade into the skull of one of the shadows when he only crumples to his knees, you slam the dull blade on his head again splitting it open and revealing the gooey brains within. The last shadow tries to run away, and climb to a nearby tree in the hopes of escaping you, but you manage to jump up and grab hi dangling legs and pull him crashing to the ground. After a small scuffle you wrap your forearms around his neck and break it. You walk over to Edgar who is still struggling to stay awake, but he’s fighting more than just the toxin now, his wounds are quite severe. You kneel down beside him, it seems odd for you given your past history, but you feel a sense of sadness. “He…hey…did you get him?” “Yeah, Edgar, I got him.” “That’s… good. I’m sorr..” “It’s in the past Edgar. Don’t worry about it.” You tell him, as you know what he’s going to apologize for. He then quietly loses consciousness and stops breathing altogether. After a few moments of silence, you carry on to Fort Destiny without Edgar. You think about all the things you plan to do to Kane and Cyrus if you manage to get your hands on them the entire time you’re traveling back to Fort Destiny. Eventually you get to a town where you ride the rest of the way to Fort Destiny. Lieutenant Verant is relieved to see you. He says was just about to send someone up to Fort Defiance to see what happened to you. You’d really like to raise your entire force from the fort and march upon Fort Defiance immediately, but you question if you’d be able to take it. Other than the defenses being on full alert now, Kane may have already rallied his ogre and giant allies. It might be best if you report this back to the generals at home. Surely they’ll spare you some reinforcements for something like this, not to mention they’ll need to be warned anyway due to the Shadow Guard revolt that’s already been in planning for quite some time. Still, it could be awhile for you to wait, not to mention they may not send you any at all. All which would be wasted time you could’ve spent attacking Kane so he doesn’t get too dug in. > You wait for reinforcements With all the extra allies Kane has, you can’t possibly take the fort without heavy losses and with all the problems you’ve been having with peasants you’re still going to need enough troops to keep them in line afterwards. You need at least another army up here. You tell Verant to send a message to the generals back home about the situation and if they can provide reinforcements then to do so right away. In the meantime you’re going to build up the defenses on the fort and the towns in the surrounding area. A week or so passes before you get any sort of reply. You are given orders to hold the area, but that’s about it. With this new revelation of the Shadow Guard treachery and dissention within the orc ranks the generals are busily attempting to weed out any more within the home territories as well as having to redistribute regular soldiers where Shadow Guard were keeping the peasants in line. The war with the Felkans is also still going on, so any immediate reinforcements would go to that area first anyway. In short, you’re on your own as usual and reports are already coming in about ogre attacks on the outer villages. It’ll only be a matter of time before those are giants or Kane’s entire army of orcs. You curse your situation and prepare yourself for a long ongoing war. Year 26 “Shoot the bastards!” you shout at the catapult crews. They unleash another volley of rocks on the attacking giants. Several of the rocks hit their targets, but it’s not like you’re not taking a barrage of large boulders either, in fact the orcs have taken to lobbing large balls of dung over the walls and it’s already been starting to cause sickness among your troops. Especially after days of ongoing attack, a dwindling food supply and no relief in sight. The months of battling Kane’s traitor brigade has all lead up to this, completely surrounded by them. You did your best to hold them back, but ultimately Kane could replace his losses faster thanks to the brutality of his own troops. After ogres destroyed several of the smaller villages completely along with the mere threat of giants it wasn’t long that some of the peasant communities were willing to accept Kane’s “rule” more readily than the Empire’s, which they were already disgruntled with due to the lack of proper protection among other things. The Shadow Guard didn’t help matters as most of them that had been rooted out in the home territories fled up to the Rask under Cyrus’ leadership, along with some of the orcs that had heard about the rebellion. Any towns that hadn’t immediately fell under the sway of the direct fear from Kane’s army fell to the subversive and terror tactics of the Shadow Guard. “Get those orcs on the north side! They’re climbing up the fucking walls!” you shout. Boiling oil is thrown over the side of the wall, scalding the orcs on ladders. Some of them fall, others are tougher and maintain their grip. You shove the ladder back, making sure to get the ones that the oil failed to. You look around and see that the orcs have begun to break through the front door. You then have that familiar sense that you’ve had so many other times over the past few months. You duck down and roll while swinging your sword in front of you. You hit something and uncloak a Shadow Guard that has managed to infiltrate the fort. He isn’t the only one though. Several more appear nearby to kill the remaining men you have defending the walls. You continue to fight valiantly, cutting down many of the Shadow Guard that have managed to get inside the fort. A boulder crashes into the side of the wall destroying it and causing you to fall off the walkway and to the ground within the fort. You get back up as quickly as you can to see orcs pouring into the front gates and the remainder of your men slaughtered. Griping your sword one last time your only regret is not taking the opportunity to kill Kane and Cyrus a year ago when you were captured at Fort Defiance. Indeed you played everything a bit too cautiously. None of it matters now though, the only thing you can do is go out like a true warrior. If not victory, then you can take comfort in that at least. “For the Empire!” you shout and charge into the horde.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>As much as you’d like to kill both Kane and Cyrus, you’re outnumbered and you can’t even be sure if you’d catch them together again in this big fort. Better to escape and come back later better prepared to punish them. Still you’re going to need some sort of gear to survive the cold outside of the fort. “We can’t just escape half naked like this. We’re going to need some sort of clothing or better yet armor and weapons.” You say “Yeah, there is a small supply room on the way. It isn’t the main one, but it shouldn’t have any guards by it either. We have to make our way to the kitchen area first, should be relatively empty right now.” It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you find some old battered armor and dull weapons. It will have to do. Edgar mentions that there is a garbage dump chute in the kitchen which leads underground, from there, there’s a long tunnel which eventually leads to a dead end with a hidden hatch. He says he’s knows it leads into a forest area, but not much more than that since the battle mage zapped him and he was dragged back by that time. You and Edgar sneak into the kitchen, but it isn’t completely empty. The cook and a couple of his assistants are there, you and Edgar make quick work of them before they notice you, though Edgar is a little sloppier than you and the assistant that he cuts down knocks over a bunch of pots as he body hits the floor. The clatter is quite loud and you waste no time in looking for the garbage chute. It’s foul and disgusting, but there’s no other option. You jump in and slide down quite easy due to the slimy remains of food greasing the chute. When you reach the bottom a giant pile of garbage cushions you. The smell is almost overpowering, but you have no time to worry about awful smells as you are attacked by larger than normal vermin feasting through the pile. Your boots squish through the disgusting muck as you swing your weapon to drive away or kill the aggressive rats. Edgar comes crashing down from the chute and helps you. “Ugh, forgot how bad this place smelled.” Edgar says kicking a rat. “Guess you forgot about the giant rats as well?” “No, but I figured it wouldn’t be that big of a surprise for you.” You and Edgar manage to fight your way down the small mountain of trash and make your way down the tunnel until you eventually get to a built in ladder leading up to a hatch. “Is this it? It seems like a terrible idea to have this at the fort. Anyone could sneak down here and infiltrate.” You mention. “Nah, it’s pretty well hidden from the outside, in fact it can only open from the inside. Not like any ogre is bright enough to notice it and a giant certainly couldn’t get down here. Plus it locks shut when you get outside. I think it was originally supposed to be an escape tunnel in the first place, but it looks like it got turned into a garbage pit instead. Come on.” Edgar opens up the hatch and holds it open for you as you make your way to the cold outside world. You look around and it is just as Edgar said, a forest area with no major distinguishing markers. You see that the sun is setting and use that as a guide for which general direction you need to go. You figure it’ll probably take a few days to get back to Fort Destiny, but you should be able to make it. You and Edgar walk a good half hour before you realize something is wrong. “Shhh. You hear that?” you ask. “Can’t be ogres, they would’ve attacked us by now.” “It probably isn’t…find cover!” you exclaim. Several bolts whiz past you as you duck down rolling around in the snow and run in a zig zag fashion getting behind several trees so as to not get hit. Edgar isn’t as quick as you and he is hit by two of the bolts. Not enough to kill him, but if they have that same toxin that you experienced on them he’s not going to stay conscious for long. The Shadow Guard assailants finally show themselves and jump out of the trees. Edgar is feeling the effects of the toxin, but he struggles to stay awake to defend himself. You find yourself fighting three of the shadows that circle around you. One of them attacks and you grab his arm breaking it in one quick move, when another attacks you, you shove his broken arm friend into his blade. They both fall to the ground. The third one lands a couple of hits on your back; cutting through the poor armor you’re wearing. You deliver a hefty back kick to his gut and follow up with a spinning swipe with your sword. Your sword’s edge is dull and not sharp enough to cleanly decapitate the shadow, instead it makes a large cruel gash in his neck which spurts blood like a small fountain. The result is still effective and he collapses into the snow. Your other adversary has gotten up off the ground and throws a dagger at you, which you just narrowly avoid. He tries to fight you fairly, but it’s clear he is no match for you and you easily dispatch him. You then finish off the shadow with the broken arm and wound in his belly. Edgar is still fighting the two shadows attacking him. Under normal circumstances, he’d probably easily dispatch them, but the toxin is having its effect and from the front and back their short swords stab him. He falls to the ground when the shadow behind him cuts at his tendons. You strike your blade into the skull of one of the shadows when he only crumples to his knees, you slam the dull blade on his head again splitting it open and revealing the gooey brains within. The last shadow tries to run away, and climb to a nearby tree in the hopes of escaping you, but you manage to jump up and grab hi dangling legs and pull him crashing to the ground. After a small scuffle you wrap your forearms around his neck and break it. You walk over to Edgar who is still struggling to stay awake, but he’s fighting more than just the toxin now, his wounds are quite severe. You kneel down beside him, it seems odd for you given your past history, but you feel a sense of sadness. “He…hey…did you get him?” “Yeah, Edgar, I got him.” “That’s… good. I’m sorr..” “It’s in the past Edgar. Don’t worry about it.” You tell him, as you know what he’s going to apologize for. He then quietly loses consciousness and stops breathing altogether. After a few moments of silence, you carry on to Fort Destiny without Edgar. You think about all the things you plan to do to Kane and Cyrus if you manage to get your hands on them the entire time you’re traveling back to Fort Destiny. Eventually you get to a town where you ride the rest of the way to Fort Destiny. Lieutenant Verant is relieved to see you. He says was just about to send someone up to Fort Defiance to see what happened to you. You’d really like to raise your entire force from the fort and march upon Fort Defiance immediately, but you question if you’d be able to take it. Other than the defenses being on full alert now, Kane may have already rallied his ogre and giant allies. It might be best if you report this back to the generals at home. Surely they’ll spare you some reinforcements for something like this, not to mention they’ll need to be warned anyway due to the Shadow Guard revolt that’s already been in planning for quite some time. Still, it could be awhile for you to wait, not to mention they may not send you any at all. All which would be wasted time you could’ve spent attacking Kane so he doesn’t get too dug in. > You march upon the fort now You can’t wait. You may serve the Empire and be against Kane’s traitorous ways, but there is an unfortunate element in truth in what he says. If you need to get anything done around here, you’ll have to do it yourself, not rely on the Empire. You tell Verant to send a message to the generals back home about the situation and if they can provide reinforcements then to do so right away, but in any case you’re attacking Fort Defiance immediately. You muster up all your forces, troops, siege weapons, everything that could help you and leaving only a skeleton crew back to guard Fort Destiny. When you begin your march, you try to remain confident that you can take the fort. As soon as you start to enter the long stretches of snowy wilderness that precede Fort Defiance, tribes of ogres attack you. Kane’s already prepared. Within a mile of Fort Defiance and you can see large looming figures in the distance almost as big as the fort itself. You have to remind your troops to find their courage and that no overgrown abomination is going to best any soldier of the Empire. On the first day of the siege your catapults hurl their boulders at the fort and your ballistae fire at the giants. It’s an impressive volley, which damages the walls and critically wounds some of their giant allies, but the counter attack is just as brutal to your side. Multiple boulders comes crashing down on your men hurled by the giants. Fort Defiance’s own ballistae aim for your siege weapons, destroying several of them. By the third day, you pull your sword out of the last giant after stabbing him several times in the neck and jump several feet to the ground just before his falling body and crush you. Your men are still attempting to break down the doors of the fort which is heavily reinforced. Attempting to scale its walls results in them being scalded to death by boiling oil. The orcs have even resorted to catapulting their dung at you; it’s only going to be a matter of time before disease starts to take effect on your men. You would’ve tried the same thing, but orcs are notoriously resistant to such biological warfare. By the fourth day, your troops are dwindling and you’re still no closer to capturing the fort. Ogre tribes harass your people from the outside and you lead your best men to the hidden hatch you escaped from. Upon finding it again, you destroy the hatch door and descend. When you and your men arrive at the garbage pile though, you’re in for a minor surprise, as a troop of orcs are waiting for you. Apparently somebody figured you might try to get in this way. The battle with the orcs isn’t a pleasant one. Along with the smell, there is also the disgusting ichor that’s ankle deep as you fight the orcs. Through the filth and trash though you manage to maintain your composure and dispatch the orcs with the help of your men. After the fighting is over, your next plan is to climb up the chute and do damage from within. It takes a little exertion due to the chute being incredibly greasy, but eventually you manage to apply pressure to the sides of the chute and start climbing up it slowly. Your men do likewise. You’re about midway through this slimy tube when all of a sudden the top part opens up and your heart sinks when an orcish face appears. “Hah, boss waz right. Time to burn now!” he says and throws at torch at you. Normally this wouldn’t do much damage by itself, but with the combination of grease, oil and other flammable muck you’ve been rolling around it, you light up like a tinderbox along with the entire grease covered chute. You lose your grip and slide back down crashing into your men and setting them on fire as well. When you hit the pile of garbage below, you’re completely engulfed by the flames and the garbage pile goes up like an inferno. The screams of your men burning alive and your own skin crackling are the last sounds you hear.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>The idea is so repugnant to you that you can’t even bring yourself to even lie about joining him. It probably wouldn’t work anyway; you’ve never been a good liar. You breathe deeply before speaking again. “Kane, I am NOT going to help you. Now you do what you must, and I shall do what I must.” “Told you this was a waste of time, let us be done with this.” Cyrus says and points a small crossbow on his wrist and fires it at you, though Kane knocks his hand away causing the bolt to just hit your shoulder. You fall back in your chair and grab the battle mage who was still standing by. He falls to floor on top of you and you break his neck. You feel a little dizzy though; whatever was in that dart is putting you to sleep fast. You hear Kane and Cyrus arguing as large orcs stomp into the office and begin kicking you as you fall unconscious. When you wake up, you hear an unexpected familiar voice, though the most unexpected thing is that you woke up at all. “Hey, get up. Good thing that weak ass poison doesn’t work on us very well.” Edgar says helping you up. “Edgar? What’s happened here?” You ask looking around and finding yourself stripped of most of your clothing and in a cell. “I knew he wouldn’t be able to convince you. I told Kane that, but he kept going on about how you’d understand, just like how in time I would come to understand. He said that siblings may have their fights, but in the end they always make up.” “Is that how come he hasn’t killed us?” “I guess so, though I don’t think Cyrus would have such sentimental feelings and would have us killed if he had more say in the matter.” “Well, Cyrus at least seems to be thinking like an Eternal in that respect. Kane has apparently gone completely mad though…how the hell did this happen?!” “You got time for a story?” Edgar asks rhetorically before explaining from the beginning. Edgar says that when he and Kane first arrived they were met with a little hostility from everyone else and while their prowess in battle earned them respect, they still were never really “accepted” by anyone. Edgar says he didn’t care of course and was content with the respect that he had earned and getting accolades for slaying giants and such. Kane wasn’t handling the isolation as well and was becoming increasingly more withdrawn. He did his job, but he behaved in a manner that even the orc soldiers found a little unnerving. Nobody wanted to even eat with him, got to a point where the captain of the fort had to send him out primarily on scouting missions by himself. Edgar believes that Kane must’ve really taken the split of the team harder than any of you could’ve known. He suspects that might’ve first lead to his quirk of referring to other Eternals as siblings. He would often mention to Edgar sometimes about how much he missed spending time with you all and couldn’t wait for the day when you all would be together again. “(Sigh) All he needed was for me to interact with him on a regular basis, but I was too busy concerned with my own glory. Time in this cell has really given me time to reflect on a lot of bad choices I’ve made in the present and the past.” “What’s done is done now, but where does Cyrus come in?” you ask. Edgar explains that Cyrus was transferred here four years ago as part of a replacement Shadow Guard detachment to help with the latest giant incursion. He knows Kane was sent on a mission with the Shadow Guard during that time and that’s probably where they started to talk more to each other. Normally Shadow Guards don’t interact with anyone other than other Shadow Guards, but Kane hung around him to such a degree that Cyrus eventually began to talk with Kane on his own accord. “I don’t think Cyrus’ Shadow Guard buddies approved of it too much, but he was their leader so they didn’t say much.” Edgar says. “So how did they control over the whole fort?” Edgar explains again that Cyrus and Kane must’ve cooked up this plan in secret for years, as in time various changes began to occur. The only initial thing that Edgar began to notice was the increase in orc troops being sent here. Granted there was always some stationed here, but now they were starting to out number the human soldiers, and he thought they were mostly going to the front lines on the Felkan border. However, this area was still very dangerous, so ultimately more orc troops here didn’t raise any immediate alarms. The next thing he noticed was that there were less and less attacks by giants and ogres, but Edgar chalked that up to him killing so many of them that naturally they would probably have less members to spare now. Not to mention with all the orcs here now, the giants were having a tougher time of it. The third thing he noticed was Kane becoming less introverted and more aggressive towards the orcs. He witnessed several fights that Kane himself started with various orc leaders. He won with ease of course and it appeared as if he was just being combative out of boredom, but in retrospect there was very real purpose. To establish no doubt to as who is the “real leader.” Captain Ian wasn’t fond of this sort of behavior in any way though and reprimanded Kane several times, but it was obvious he didn’t care. “It was at this point I finally started to talk to Kane on a serious level, just to figure out what was going on with him. All he said to me, was you’ll see in another year brother, with a great big grin on his face. Of course when that year came I found out everything. His private orc army. his alliance with the neighboring giant and ogre tribes, his plans to unite this land completely under him and take on the Empire itself. As you can see I didn’t agree with his plans. I know I have my faults, but disloyalty isn’t one of them.” “He’s allied with ogres and giants? So wait, how long has Kane taken control of this place?” You ask. “We were still getting reports from here from Captain Ian up until last month.” “Hah! Captain Ian’s been dead for more than a few months now! Kane’s just been going through the motions of sending reports and messengers, probably to make sure you or nobody else sent anyone to investigate before he was ready to openly defy the Empire.” “By the Emperor I can’t believe I was so close and never suspected anything wrong going on up here, let alone treason!” you say. “If it’s any consolation, you weren’t the only one. Besides like I said, I was here and I should’ve been the one to do something before anyone. Instead I got myself captured. Tried to bust out a few times, I figured I’d either escape or die trying. There’s just too many of those tough orc bastards though. Even when I managed to get a weapon the blasted battle mage would cast some sort of spell and I’d go completely weak and groggy. Then I’d end up back here again. Heh, Kane’s so crazy now that he still believes that I’ll eventually side with him.” “Did you say battle mage? As in one?” “Yeah, used to have two and they probably would’ve liked to get more stationed here before unleashing their plan, but they had to make due with the ones that cooperated. I killed one of them before my first capture.” “Well they don’t have any now, because I killed the other one before I got sent here.” Edgar tries to contain his enthusiasm. “That’s great! I mean with you by my side and none of that magic shit to complicate things, you’ve given us a much improved chance to escape for good!” Never thought you’d hear Edgar to be so happy to fight along side you, and normally you might even be a little happy too, but right now you’re concerned with escape. The longer you’re gone, the more likely Lieutenant Verant will send someone up here to investigate. They’ll be killed of course and then Kane will undoubtedly push a full attack on to Fort Destiny ad you don’t have the highest hopes that they’d survive an attack by a combined army of orcs, ogres and giants without being prepared at least. You waste no time coming up with a plan. Simplest ones often work the best, Edgar tells you that it’ll be feeding time soon and that you should remain “unconscious” and he’ll do the rest. You get into position and eventually hear the footsteps of your orc jailer. “Here’s yer food, Ed!” one of them says carrying a bowl. “Hey! Why’d you dump a dead body into this cell with me?” Edgar says. “Wha? He ain’t dead he’s just knocked out! I should know I was one of guys that kicked him in da head! Har har har har!” “Well he died in his sleep then from your kick to his head. I recognize him as an Eternal and Kane’s gonna be pissed that you killed him!” “He ain’t dead! He sleep!” “I’m telling you he’s dead! Don’t believe me, you better check yourself.” “Oh no, I know you Ed. You gonna try bash my skull in as soon as I open door. If he really dead, then I just say you killed him.” “And you really think Kane’s gonna believe that? He knows Eternal don’t kill each other, that’s why he’s keeping me alive even though I escape!” The orc pauses for a moment and decides he can’t take the chance. “Bah, alright, I’ll check, but I’m tellin’ you he’s just still unconscious! That shadow guy hit ‘im with one of doze bolts of his. But YOU are gonna do something first.” The orc tells Edgar to turn his back and get close to the cell bars, at which point the orc shackles him so her is unable to attack him. Thank the Emperor that most orcs are still not the brightest lanterns. The orc approaches you and that’s when you spring into action. You struggle with the orc jailer until you manage to grab his dagger and repeatedly stab him in the throat with it to the point where you nearly decapitate him. After kicking the dead orc in the face you grab his keys and release Edgar. “Okay I know of a route we can try to escape through, nearly made it the last time, but again the mage showed up. That won’t be a problem this time and they probably won’t think I’ll try it again.” Edgar says. The obvious thing to do is to concentrate on escaping the fort, though another part of you wants to go back to find Kane and Cyrus to kill them. > You fine Kane and Cyrus “We can’t leave yet, we have to take care of Kane and Cyrus.” You say. “What? You don’t think it wouldn’t be a better idea to escape and then come back with an army or something?” Edgar replies “It would be preferable yes, but by that time they’ll be entrenched and possibly already on the move with their own army of giants, ogres and orcs. That’s less likely to happen without Kane or Cyrus here.” “You don’t think someone else will take their place?” “I KNOW someone else will take their place, but by getting rid of Kane and Cyrus that shaky allied army that they’ve built up will fall apart. It will then be far easier to handle seeing as it won’t commanded by Eternals.” “Well, that’s true…okay let’s do it.” Edgar suggests getting some basic armor with helmets to disguise and protect yourselves in and mentions the supply room in the human section of the fort should have some. It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you have to kill a couple human guards, and get dressed in some armor without raising an alarm. At least not an obvious one. “I told the others that you wouldn’t try to escape. Glad to see I was right.” A man’s voice says from somewhere. You and Edgar both grab weapons and look around putting your backs to each other. “Knew it was too easy.” Edgar says. “It still can be.” The voice remarks. “Who are you? Show yourself!” you demand. “And have you possibly kill me? Oh no, I know the skill and ruthlessness of the Eternals all too well having served with Cyrus for years, not to mention seeing Edgar in action. And your own reputation speaks on its own, Bane of Rask. There is no need for animosity however, I am willing to help you.” “It’s a Shadow Guard, he’s using his blasted magic tricks to stay invisible to us.” Edgar whispers. “If you’re here to help, why have you allowed this to treason to happen in the first place?” you ask still keeping your guard up. “Oh various reasons, but let’s just say the major reason is that Cyrus is a very convincing fellow. He probably doesn’t seem like it to you, but he has a certain charm about him. It’s how he’s managed to convince Kane to go along with all this I imagine.” “So this was all Cyrus’ idea.” You say still scanning the room. “Eh, it’s a little more complicated than that I think, even I’m not privy to all the details. I only know as much as I do because Cyrus is a little more talkative after sex…” “Okay, I didn’t need to hear about that!” Edgar exclaims. “Look we could stand around and talk all day until the guards realize something is wrong, or you can accept the help of me and the rest of the Shadow Guard. We have come to realize for a while now that this plan is not in our best interest and will only lead to our destruction.” The voice says, “You do realize that you have already participated in treason and this attempt at switching sides because you know you’ll lose anyway, will not save you?” you say undiplomatically. “Ha ha! Yes, I would expect no less from the Empire and especially not from an Eternal such as yourself. You Eternals, you think in such absolutes and that’s why you’ll be the death of us all…not YOU of course, but for the rest of us. (Sigh) I think the Shadow Guard should’ve broken away from the Empire years ago before you lot popped up. Anyway it hardly matters now, I’m still offering my help…” Before the man can complete his sentence you have managed to locate his whereabouts in the room and grab him. His invisibility disappears to reveal a mundane looking man in a gray cloak. As you hold your sword to him, Edgar does likewise. “I hate to burst your ego, but this isn’t the first time an Eternal has managed to detect me, you took longer though.” The gray-cloaked man says. “How can I trust someone who has defied the Emperor and participated in treasonous acts?” you ask, ignoring the Shadow Guard’s flippant nature. “You can’t. And being a Shadow Guard probably makes me even less trustworthy. The only thing I can say is you’ll have to make a leap of faith Eternal. I will confess this though. The Shadow Guard’s loyalty to the Empire is starting to be less than absolute. Granted there are still debates about this within our order and not everyone can decide on how we should do it. Personally I felt we should all just leave and not make a big mess about it. Obviously some, like Cyrus feel otherwise. Now I have just relayed perfectly good intelligence on a potential major threat to the Empire. You will be able to warn others after you take care of Kane and Cyrus.” > You trust the Shadow Guard You still don’t trust the Shadow Guard, but if what he’s claiming is even partly true then it is indeed something you need to warn others about. This idea of mass treason by the Shadow Guard is troubling to you as their reputations for loyalty to the Empire are impeccable…but then Eternals were supposed to be without disloyalty either. There will definitely be a reckoning after this immediate problem is taken care of. “Very well, we’ll accept your help, if only because there’s nothing you can do to stop us anyway.” You say releasing the man. “Spoken like an Eternal. Okay while you track down and face Kane, my brother and sister shadows will create chaos with the orc troops. That should give you plenty of time to kill him and escape.” “What about Cyrus?” you ask. “He’ll probably be with Kane discussing strategies as usual, at least I hope he will be. I don’t relish the thought of having to face him myself even with the rest of the shadows behind me. That would be a rather bloody break up and probably not in my favor. But I’m sure you two will have no problems. Let’s get to it shall we?” At this point you and Edgar reluctantly leave the Shadow Guard to carry out his part of the plan. “You don’t really trust him do you?” Edgar asks. “Of course not, but if there is the chance that he’ll help it’s a gamble I’m willing to take. We’re already severely outnumbered and in hostile territory if he was lying then nothing was really lost. Let’s get to Kane’s office, that’s probably where he’ll be.” You manage to walk through the halls of the fort without difficulty thanks to the face covering helmets. Everyone just assumes you’re just two soldiers going about your routines. When you arrive near the office there are several heavily armored orc guards milling around there. You and Edgar briefly wonder how quickly you can kill them before more come running, but fortune strikes, when another one comes running for a completely different reason. “Ay! Ay! You guyz! The prisoners have escaped and doze shadoze are in on it! They snuck up and attacked us in our own quarters! Come on!” the orc yells. “Wha?! Never did trust dat lot! We can’t leave, da boss is in his office!” one of the guard says. “We gotta tell ‘im anyway!” another guard adds about to enter the office. “Hey we’ll tell the general and you take care of the shadows. You orcs are tougher so you’ll be able to handle the situation better than we would. Besides you should go get yourselves some payback for what those bastards have done.” You pipe up and say. “Yeah! Da humie iz right! Okay, you tell da boss and we’ll take care of doze shadoze!” one of them says and they all going running off without realizing a thing. “You know I’ve been serving along side these orcs for years and it still baffles me how Captain Gruz was so articulate and intelligent when compared to the rest of his kind.” Edgar remarks. “Wonder about it later, we’ve got more important matters.” You say opening the door, and stepping into Kane’s office. Kane steps out of his private quarters wondering what’s going on. “What the hell is going on out there, I heard all this…you’re not my bodyguards!” “An Eternal shouldn’t need them, but then you’re no Eternal, you’re a traitor!” you shout. Kane draws his weapon and the fight commences. Kane always was one of the more skilled fighters when he served under you, but it’s obvious that he’s improved even more when he manages to disarm Edgar within moments and knocks him into the wall. “Why are you doing this brothers!? I’m trying to help us! We could join forces! We could all be a family again! It’s not too late!” Kane pleads while defending himself. “It is too late for you! You’ve been a fool to believe Cyrus’ lies, where is he?” you yell narrowly missing Kane. Kane ignores your questions and fights back with less reluctance. Edgar attempts to help you again, but Kane once more proves to be the better fighter, smashing him in the face and stabbing him in the leg. Edgar falls to the floor. “Cyrus was right, I wasted my time with you! And you never were the great warrior you thought you were!” Kane says almost landing a killing blow on Edgar, but you manage to save him by deflecting the sword blow. Kane attempts to counter attack but fails and you land a blow across his chest and then another across his face, blinding him in one eye. He drops his weapon and staggers back holding his hand on the gaping bloody wound. “(Pant) Why…you…I can’t…” he wheezes and tries to escape past you, but you stop him completely by running him through. You wrench the sword upward to slice further into his internal organs. Blood spills out from the wound and onto the floor and your feet. He looks at you with his remaining good eye. Surprisingly, he smiles. “I…forgive you…broth…” he gasps and dies. It’s strange; you feel satisfaction for killing a traitor to the Emperor, yet a small part of you feels something else. Sadness perhaps? You turn and see Edgar recovering from his wounds. “Thanks. Saving me again, must feel like old times.” Edgar says. “Old times didn’t involve me killing one of us, speaking of which we need to go find Cyrus.” You and Edgar leave Kane’s office and hear the sounds of chaos filling the halls. A human soldier turns the corner and you nearly decapitate him before he shouts at you to stop. He doesn’t recognize you since you still have the helmets on. “Hey hold on! I’m human! Man, looks like you guys must’ve fought some of those orc fuckers as well. Have you seen General Kane? He’s supposed to be keeping these idiots under control and they’ve completely lost it!” “General Kane’s dead. The orcs killed him.” You say. “He’s fuckin’ dead? Great, he and Cyrus got us into this mess and he’s dead and the other one is missing!” “Where is Cyrus?” you ask. “I don’t know, but what I do know is all those Shadow Guard assholes caused all this strife by attacking the orcs in the first place! Then they just took off! At this point I don’t know why I ever listened to this idiotic scheme of breaking away from the Empire! If we get out of this alive, we’ll be lucky if the Empire doesn’t hang us all for treason!” “You needn’t worry about that, I’ll take care of that right now.” You say and strike down traitor before he can act. You curse the fact that Cyrus and the rest of his shadows got away, but there’s no way to track them now, so you and Edgar decide to make your escape from the fort. Your escape is fairly easy. When you and Edgar arrive back at Fort Destiny where Lieutenant Verant says he was just about to send someone up to Fort Defiance to see what happened to you. Your own command is to raise every soldier from Fort Destiny and march upon Fort Defiance. By the time you arrive, the fort is half in ruins and burning. All the human soldiers have been killed and the surviving orcs have reverted back to their uncivilized nature. It’s a bloody battle, but after it’s all said and done, every orc is slaughtered for their lack of loyalty. You report the events to your superiors and tell them everything that happened and Edgar backs up the story with his confirmations as well as his own experiences at Fort Defiance. The news is devastating and drastic measures are taken in an attempt to maintain order. The first thing is Fort Defiance is completely abandoned with no plans to rebuild it. The area falls back under the dominion of giants and ogres once again. The small villages that do exist up there are soon destroyed, as they have no protection at all anymore. Fort Destiny takes up the duty of driving away the monstrous tribes that do wander further south now. The lives of the Empire citizens in the Rask frontier are now as hard as they were when you first arrived at the place. Next a full investigation is made on every Shadow Guard member, at least the ones the Empire manages to get a hold of. Many openly resist, while other still just make their escape when they can. After a series of major decisions, the Shadow Guard is purged, even some of the ones who claimed their undying loyalty. Their number, while small to begin with, is reduced to zero and bounties are placed on the few that escaped. Including Cyrus. As for the orcs, their kind is spared from any sort of major investigation, though it might be because most of them are serving on the front lines of Felkan War and enough of them are getting killed there to thin out their ranks. Not to mention they’re generally not seen as intelligent to be as much of a major threat and it was only due to the manipulation of Cyrus and Kane that they turned. Still, they are watched and they are never to be stationed in such a way that they outnumber human troops again. Questions still abound to as who allowed such orders to transfer so many to Fort Defiance in the first place. Oddly even though Cyrus and to a lesser extent Kane were the leaders of this attempted secession, no Eternal is investigated. If anything you’re rewarded with a medal for your service to the Empire. Edgar isn’t though for some reason. You maintain your post at the Rask frontier though Edgar is transferred to the Felkan front. You say your goodbyes to him on a friendlier note this time, which after what happened with Kane, you’re glad to do. Your position at Fort Destiny is less monotonous now, but its a thankless one as always. The citizens in the area still complain and protest even though you’re protecting them. And despite all their precautions and attempts to crack down on order, the events at Fort Defiance are just the beginning of what the Empire has yet to experience in the years to come. > Year 30 “This place won’t be the same without you sir. I don’t know how I’ll be able to run this place as well as you.” Lieutenant Verant says as you finish packing your things. “You’ll do fine lieutenant, or should I say captain. You’ll probably get an official promotion soon. Just remember, when the citizens protest I’ve found that flogging one family with children at random keeps the rest in line. Can’t really afford to execute them like we did in the old days, too many ogre attacks already doing a good job of that. Well at least you don’t need to worry about the giants as much anymore.” “You always did know best sir.” “Well, I tried to do what I could up here. I don’t know why I’m being stationed to Delerg Province. It’s one of the more peaceful places of the Empire next to the Nalin province. I would prefer to be here or on the Felkan frontlines where I could do more to serve, but I suppose the Emperor knows best where my skills will be used.” “Oh well I’ve heard the war with the Felkans is coming to an end soon.” “Yes, I’ve heard that as well…and it concerns me the things that I’ve heard why it’s ending. Mass riots in the major cities of the Empire, soldier shortages, even heard about some of those traitorous shadow criminals carrying out terrorist tactics. And because of these problems what do we do with the Felkans? Another non-aggression pact! We should be butchering them and burning down their cities, not making peace with them again. If all of the Emperor’s enemies had one neck, I would sever it with one sword swipe.” Verant says nothing after your rant. Indeed over the past few years he’s heard you rant about the troubles of the Empire a lot more and knows to keep quiet. But if you’re making more outbursts than usual, it’s only because the Empire has more problems than usual. Lately you’ve been questioning how “great” the Empire is supposed to be. This is not the place you heard about when you were being trained by Mistress or Captain Gruz. In fact, during your first assignment in the Nalin province you encountered decadent officers and disobedient citizens even then. This questioning of the Empire then makes you question the Emperor which causes you great concern for that it treasonous thinking. But still…how is it he has allowed this to happen to his land? He is supposed to be all wise and all-powerful, but you’ve not seen much evidence of either. Never mind the fact that you’ve never seen him at all. It’s a rare thought, but there have been even a few times where you wondered what would’ve happened if you had joined Kane when he asked. You leave Fort Destiny without another word and board the carriage to the Delerg province. A few days later you arrive and Delerg is everything you’ve heard about, very swampy. The town you’re scheduled to arrive in looks like it’s sinking into marsh, which might explain why it’s even called Sinkhole. While you don’t know why you’re here, you do know you’re supposed to meet with a contact here, though you don’t know who that is or where you’re supposed to meet. As you take in the sights of this dismal town, the villagers look like they can barely contain their fear of you. You aren’t sure if it’s because they’ve heard of your reputation, or if it’s due to their natural suspicious nature. The swamp folk have always been known to be that way. They were one of the few people that didn’t resist Empire dominion at all when they first came to this land, but despite this submissiveness the swamp folk still maintained their wary ways. “Well if isn’t the Bane of Rask! It’s been a long time!” a voice calls out to you. You turn around and see not one, but two familiar faces. “Roldan? Gerald?” you say seeing how much older they’ve gotten. It makes you realize just how much time has passed. “Of course it’s us!” Roldan says. “Yeah, we didn’t know you’d be the contact.” Gerald adds. “Contact? I’m not anyone’s contact. I’m supposed to meet someone here, you guys aren’t it?” you say. “Erm, no. In fact when Gerald arrived I thought he was the contact and vice versa. Well this is odd. I wonder who we’re supposed to be meeting?” You reply that you don’t know and then begin to feel slightly uneasy. With all your past experiences, you start to feel like this might be a trap, then another carriage comes into the town. When the passenger steps out, it’s an old, but still tough looking orc in battle armor. It’s Captain Gruz! He sees all three of you milling about in the open and shuffles over to you. “What in blazes are you lot doing out in the open like this? Any potential assassin could strike you down! I thought I taught you better than that! Come on let’s get into the tavern, we can talk there.” He scolds and then heads towards the tavern, you, Gerald and Roldan follow. The tavern is dark and nearly empty. The patrons inside see you four sit at a table and then move as far away as possible. “You thirsty? I sure am. Four ales!” Captain Gruz says. “I’m not thirsty captain.” You say. “They’re not for you, they’re for me! You guys order your own drinks! Anyway I imagine you’re all wondering what this small reunion is all about. Well let’s just say the Empire finally saw fit to take me off the sidelines and place me in charge of something worthwhile for a change. I’ll get right to the point and tell you, the Shadow Guard is here, or at least what’s left of them. For awhile we thought that they might be working with the Felkans, but they’re just taking advantage of the war.” This news causes you to sit forward and then look around. “Oh don’t worry, they’re not right HERE, lad. They’re in this province though; and you might be interested that Cyrus is the one leading this miserable little band of shadows. I imagine you and he got some unfinished business. In fact that’s why you’re here, since you’ve had a lot of experience in dealing with this situation before. As for you two, your own records are excellent and you’re Eternals. The only ones that are going to be skilled enough to handle this situation I think are Eternals.” “How come Edgar isn’t here? He also had experience with the Shadow Guard and was with me during the Fort Defiance incident.” “Eh, Edgar’s skills are best served on the Felkan frontlines right now. I know the war might be coming to an end, but there’s still quite a bit of fighting going on. Besides best not to have all you guys in one place.” “That’s a different perception than I remember you having when you were arguing with Mr. Mol fourteen years ago.” You say. “Heh, remembered that did you? Well, as I’m sure you know things change, ideas change. You get older and see things differently. Wouldn’t you agree?” You pause before answering, which causes Gruz to study you for a moment. “Yes, I suppose so.” You reluctantly reply. “Of course you do, lad. You’d be a bleeding idiot if you didn’t.” Gruz says taking a drink of one of his ales. “So, where are these Shadow Guard fanatics anyway?” Gerald asks. “An old temple deep in the swamps. Used to be their old place of worship back before their Empire days apparently. Looks like Cyrus really bought into that dead religion, though it’s also arrogant of him to try to hide right underneath our noses. Hell, who knows? Maybe he knew he’d get discovered eventually and was just itching for a fight. Anyway, we’ll have some extra help when we arrive there. Trust me, I’ve got it set up.” The remainder of the time is playing a little catch up with your former team members while Captain Gruz enjoys his ale. It’s interesting to see how vastly different their experiences have been. Gerald says his time was initially boring until the war broke out. From then on he and Warrick were constantly paired up to perform commando mission deep into Felkan territory. Dangerous work, but he says they were treated pretty well by everyone and held in high regard among their fellow soldiers. Even the citizens were less troublesome in the Arat province and the local women threw themselves at him and Warrick every night he laughs. Roldan mentions his time was mostly spent cleaning up the rest of the kobolds in the Nalin province, breaking small bandit rings, and ultimately trying to keep the peasants in line. No problems from the usksha again though. When Captain Anu was promoted and sent to the Felkan frontlines, Brenda got promoted to command Fort Glory. The most surprising thing though, he and Brenda apparently married. Wasn’t anything fancy and there was paperwork that had to be filled out (A lot of it) but it was completely approved of by the Empire. Your own tales sound remarkably grim when compared to theirs. The strangest thing about all this is how they’ve all had contact with each other either directly or through messages. Gerald and Roldan even mention how they got letters from Kane years ago before his actions at Fort Defiance. They both confirm how the letters sounded very longing of the “old days” and referring to them as “brother.” Warrick and Brenda apparently got similar ones too. You ask Gerald if he met Edgar when he was transferred there. He replies that he did, but said that he was mostly sent to fight Felkan armies directly right along side most of the orcish detachments. “Sheesh. He’s gotta love that considering his experiences with orcs at Fort Defiance.” You say. “Edgar’s an idiot. Always has been. I saw that even when I was training you guys. He’s a good warrior, but lacks vision. Surprised he’s lasted this long.” Captain Gruz suddenly replies. “Well, I agree he’s always had a tendency to act without thinking, but after my last dealings with him, I think he’s improved a bit. Changed his outlook. You know, got older and sees things differently now.” You reply. “Hmm. Maybe, but as far as I’m concerned being a meat shield is about the best thing he’s ever been good for, just like all the rest of dumb fuckers on the Felkan frontlines.” “Hey, I’m on the Felkan frontlines!” Gerald protests. “Yeah, and you’re not marching straight into those Felkan shooty weapons either. You’re being a lot more than just a meat shield like the rest of those stupid ass orcs.” “Rest of those orcs? Not to point out the obvious, but you’re an orc, I mean aren’t those your people?” Roldan asks. “Yeah and? Does that make us all relatives or some shit? Fuck my people! I got no patience for any of them anymore…” Captain Gruz begins to get loud and cause a scene. “Okay captain I think you’ve had enough. I think I saw an inn across the way, let’s get some rooms there and make plans to deal with the shadows tomorrow.” You suggest. “Grrm, maybe you’re right…” Captain Gruz replies and then promptly falls to the floor. Gerald tries to pick him up. “Somebody go get the rooms and the other person help me carry the captain.” Gerald says. > You help carry the captain “Go get the rooms Roldan, I’ll help Gerald.” You say. “Okay.” Roldan agrees and leaves. You and Gerald help the Captain Gruz up who is mumbling things the whole time. “Fucking idiots. It was perfect…who I am kidding? It was futile to begin with.” “Just settle down sir.” Gerald says trying to calm him down. “Or what? You’ll kill me too? Hey I’m not tryin’ ta put the moves on ya, you got your arm around me!” Gerald gets quiet really fast and even you start looking around. “Oh what? You think I didn’t hear about that incident? Ha ha ha! Relax, ya did the right thing, fuckin’ degenerate deserved it…” Gruz laughs. You’re just about to get to the door and that’s when you hear yelling and an explosion coming from the outside followed by screams. The force of it is enough to cause you all to fall back a bit. “Shit!” you blurt out and leave Gerald to tend to the captain. You look around and see a couple of damaged buildings, more than a few dead bodies in pieces. Your heart sinks though when you see Roldan lying on the ground in front of the damaged inn. When you rush over to him, his insides are clearly visible and one of his legs is gone. He struggles to breathe as he looks up at you. You can’t do anything for him. “Fuck. Damnit…” you quietly say and kneel down towards his bloody body. “…tell Brenda that I love her.” “I will.” “That’s good…that’s good…hey if we’re all…all siblings like Kane said…that…that doesn’t make Brenda…my sister…does it?” Roldan asks with a small smile. “Heh, I don’t think so, and even if it did so what? You found happiness with her.” You smile back. “Yeah…you’re right. You… usually were.” he says and then drifts away. This time you do feel sadness at the loss of one of your own. Especially when you had just gotten to know him again. Gerald dashes over to you and even captain Gruz has sobered up a bit from this incident and is now interrogating the nearest hysterical citizen. “Who the fuck did this?! Answer me woman!” he demands and slaps her a few times, but she just pathetically cries and begs him to stop. “Captain! Stop it! It’s obvious she doesn’t know anything!” Gerald shouts. “Maybe not, but someone here does.” You say. “Alright, listen up! I am an Eternal and the man laying dead next to me was also an Eternal! My wrath for his death shall be the likes you’ve never known and you don’t want to know. One of you saw something, so someone better start talking or else this little town you call home is going to get a whole lot bloodier.” Nobody says anything for a while and there’s just dead silence, but eventually a little girl comes out from behind a barrel and speaks up. “I saw something Mr. Eternal.” “Good, glad to see this town isn’t completely infested with cowards. You’re coming with me.” You say and take the girl to a room at the inn and proceed to question her. The girl is still a little nervous at first, but soon opens up quite a bit. She mentions that she was walking home from the general store and she saw Roldan leaving the tavern. He was almost to the inn when she saw these two figures shimming like they were almost invisible. She then says what happened next was very quick. The figures ran up to Roldan and then these two men appeared in gray cloaks. They both stabbed him several times before he could defend himself. Despite his wounds, he managed to stab one through the neck and grabbed the other when he tried to escape. She said at this point she had been hiding behind the barrel, but saw that the man in gray produced a gas sphere plant from his cloak and he yelled something she couldn’t understand. A blackish field started to emanate from the man, Roldan then fell to the ground and then the large explosion occurred killing several people that didn’t have the sense that the little girl did to get the hell out of there as soon as possible. “So much for the shadows not being here.” Gerald remarks. “Shit, I fucked up. I should’ve known that they might’ve realized that we we’re coming.” Captain Gruz says. “Doesn’t matter anyway. It’s obvious they’re prepared for a last stand sort of fight, if they’re willing to blow themselves up. No sense in depriving them of that, though I’m hoping they don’t start favoring blowing themselves up. It’s going to make fighting them more dangerous than it should be.” You say. “Mmm, I know what you mean. Serving on the Felkan frontlines I had to experience several of their own explosive type weapons first hand, but from what I’ve heard those gas plant spheres aren’t common and grow rarely even in this area. Even then, they aren’t explosive on their own. The shadow probably used some sort of magic to make it explode like that. Is that right little girl?” Gerald asks to confirm, to which she nods. “Alright enough talk, we all need to get some rest before wiping the bastards out tomorrow.” Captain Gruz says and lies down on his bed. At this point you send the little girl away and tell her she’s served the Empire well and leave with Gerald. “Do you really think Gruz should be coming with us tomorrow? I mean with his leg and his age and all.” Gerald asks. “If he wants to go on one last mission then I’m not going to deprive him of that. Don’t worry, he’ll keep up. I get the impression this is sort of personal to him.” “Personal to him? I imagine it’s personal to you a lot more.” “True, but I’m trying to not let it.” Of course that’s pretty hard to do when you have to put Roldan in a casket and sent back to Brenda. Gerald writes the letter to her. You can only imagine what her reaction is going to be about this news. This makes you wonder about the whole scenario that they were in love and got married. You know you briefly spoke to Roldan about this back at the tavern, but a lot of it still baffles you. How did it first come about? What was it like? Who initiated it? Was the attraction always there, even back when you were all in training? Could something like that ever happen to you? You think about the time you were with Captain Krozer and that’s the closest equivalent you have, but you know that wasn’t anything like love. You did respect her though and you’re pretty sure the feeling was mutual. Perhaps that’s how it started, but Brenda and Roldan were just in contact with each long enough to develop it further. Eventually you dismiss all these meaningless thoughts and rest up to prepare for your mission tomorrow. The next morning, you Gerald and Gruz set off on your journey. The trip through the swamps isn’t an easy one; it actually makes you long for the days of stomping through ice and snow. The whole time you’re traveling you’re constantly alert and feel like at anytime you could be attacked, which turns out to be true with the oversized insects and other minor hostile swamp animals dwelling here, but they aren’t the enemies you’re expecting. “So how many Empire troops are we going to have as back up?” Gerald asks Gruz during the trip. “Empire? I’m lucky I managed to get them to accept my request to go on this mission! They didn’t send me anyone, not that they’d be much help anyway. Most Empire soldiers would stick out like a sore thumb and get themselves killed before they even reached the place. No, I’m relying on the ones that found these ruins to begin with. Dark elven mercs. If anyone can hide out better than the shadows, it’ll be them.” Gruz replies. Dark elves. You hated having to work with them back in your early years on the Rask frontier, but you can’t deny their effectiveness. “Shh! Do you hear that?” you ask. “Probably another Sul Monkey. Those things are all over the place. Just glad it’s not mating season for them, otherwise we might be in big trouble. Hey, aren’t you humans related to them in some way?” Gruz asks. Gerald is about to reply, and then you hear a whizzing sound followed by a “thunk” sound. You then see Gerald with a large crossbow bolt directly in the center of his head. A single trickle of blood comes from the wound and drips off his nose. “I…been hit…” Gerald says and his eyes roll back as he falls into the soft mushy ground. “Shit!” Gruz shouts and ducks down into the mud. > You duck down into the mud as well You instinctively duck down into the mud like Gruz did; regrettably the hidden assassin anticipated that and begins shooting downward. You and Gruz both receive several bolts to the back. Gruz manages too shake off these annoyances partly because he’s wearing heavy armor and the other because as an orc his skin is pretty tough to begin with, especially with his experience. While you’re certainly wearing protective gear as well and an Eternal to boot, the bolts sink into your flesh a lot easier and deeper. The pain is great, but you manage to get back up in an effort to find better cover. Gruz spots the shadow assassin and engages him unfortunately two more shadows jump down from the trees to finish you off. Under normal circumstances you’d easily be able to handle the pair of them even with bolts in your back, but in typical shadow fashion, the bolts were dipped in some sort of poison, not strong enough to kill you, but enough to make you sleepy. And it’s this drowsiness that is your downfall. You swing at the two shadows a few times before they manage to land their own attacks on you. A quick slash to your neck releases an arterial spray and you’re dead before you even hit the ground.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>“Go get the rooms Roldan, I’ll help Gerald.” You say. “Okay.” Roldan agrees and leaves. You and Gerald help the Captain Gruz up who is mumbling things the whole time. “Fucking idiots. It was perfect…who I am kidding? It was futile to begin with.” “Just settle down sir.” Gerald says trying to calm him down. “Or what? You’ll kill me too? Hey I’m not tryin’ ta put the moves on ya, you got your arm around me!” Gerald gets quiet really fast and even you start looking around. “Oh what? You think I didn’t hear about that incident? Ha ha ha! Relax, ya did the right thing, fuckin’ degenerate deserved it…” Gruz laughs. You’re just about to get to the door and that’s when you hear yelling and an explosion coming from the outside followed by screams. The force of it is enough to cause you all to fall back a bit. “Shit!” you blurt out and leave Gerald to tend to the captain. You look around and see a couple of damaged buildings, more than a few dead bodies in pieces. Your heart sinks though when you see Roldan lying on the ground in front of the damaged inn. When you rush over to him, his insides are clearly visible and one of his legs is gone. He struggles to breathe as he looks up at you. You can’t do anything for him. “Fuck. Damnit…” you quietly say and kneel down towards his bloody body. “…tell Brenda that I love her.” “I will.” “That’s good…that’s good…hey if we’re all…all siblings like Kane said…that…that doesn’t make Brenda…my sister…does it?” Roldan asks with a small smile. “Heh, I don’t think so, and even if it did so what? You found happiness with her.” You smile back. “Yeah…you’re right. You… usually were.” he says and then drifts away. This time you do feel sadness at the loss of one of your own. Especially when you had just gotten to know him again. Gerald dashes over to you and even captain Gruz has sobered up a bit from this incident and is now interrogating the nearest hysterical citizen. “Who the fuck did this?! Answer me woman!” he demands and slaps her a few times, but she just pathetically cries and begs him to stop. “Captain! Stop it! It’s obvious she doesn’t know anything!” Gerald shouts. “Maybe not, but someone here does.” You say. “Alright, listen up! I am an Eternal and the man laying dead next to me was also an Eternal! My wrath for his death shall be the likes you’ve never known and you don’t want to know. One of you saw something, so someone better start talking or else this little town you call home is going to get a whole lot bloodier.” Nobody says anything for a while and there’s just dead silence, but eventually a little girl comes out from behind a barrel and speaks up. “I saw something Mr. Eternal.” “Good, glad to see this town isn’t completely infested with cowards. You’re coming with me.” You say and take the girl to a room at the inn and proceed to question her. The girl is still a little nervous at first, but soon opens up quite a bit. She mentions that she was walking home from the general store and she saw Roldan leaving the tavern. He was almost to the inn when she saw these two figures shimming like they were almost invisible. She then says what happened next was very quick. The figures ran up to Roldan and then these two men appeared in gray cloaks. They both stabbed him several times before he could defend himself. Despite his wounds, he managed to stab one through the neck and grabbed the other when he tried to escape. She said at this point she had been hiding behind the barrel, but saw that the man in gray produced a gas sphere plant from his cloak and he yelled something she couldn’t understand. A blackish field started to emanate from the man, Roldan then fell to the ground and then the large explosion occurred killing several people that didn’t have the sense that the little girl did to get the hell out of there as soon as possible. “So much for the shadows not being here.” Gerald remarks. “Shit, I fucked up. I should’ve known that they might’ve realized that we we’re coming.” Captain Gruz says. “Doesn’t matter anyway. It’s obvious they’re prepared for a last stand sort of fight, if they’re willing to blow themselves up. No sense in depriving them of that, though I’m hoping they don’t start favoring blowing themselves up. It’s going to make fighting them more dangerous than it should be.” You say. “Mmm, I know what you mean. Serving on the Felkan frontlines I had to experience several of their own explosive type weapons first hand, but from what I’ve heard those gas plant spheres aren’t common and grow rarely even in this area. Even then, they aren’t explosive on their own. The shadow probably used some sort of magic to make it explode like that. Is that right little girl?” Gerald asks to confirm, to which she nods. “Alright enough talk, we all need to get some rest before wiping the bastards out tomorrow.” Captain Gruz says and lies down on his bed. At this point you send the little girl away and tell her she’s served the Empire well and leave with Gerald. “Do you really think Gruz should be coming with us tomorrow? I mean with his leg and his age and all.” Gerald asks. “If he wants to go on one last mission then I’m not going to deprive him of that. Don’t worry, he’ll keep up. I get the impression this is sort of personal to him.” “Personal to him? I imagine it’s personal to you a lot more.” “True, but I’m trying to not let it.” Of course that’s pretty hard to do when you have to put Roldan in a casket and sent back to Brenda. Gerald writes the letter to her. You can only imagine what her reaction is going to be about this news. This makes you wonder about the whole scenario that they were in love and got married. You know you briefly spoke to Roldan about this back at the tavern, but a lot of it still baffles you. How did it first come about? What was it like? Who initiated it? Was the attraction always there, even back when you were all in training? Could something like that ever happen to you? You think about the time you were with Captain Krozer and that’s the closest equivalent you have, but you know that wasn’t anything like love. You did respect her though and you’re pretty sure the feeling was mutual. Perhaps that’s how it started, but Brenda and Roldan were just in contact with each long enough to develop it further. Eventually you dismiss all these meaningless thoughts and rest up to prepare for your mission tomorrow. The next morning, you Gerald and Gruz set off on your journey. The trip through the swamps isn’t an easy one; it actually makes you long for the days of stomping through ice and snow. The whole time you’re traveling you’re constantly alert and feel like at anytime you could be attacked, which turns out to be true with the oversized insects and other minor hostile swamp animals dwelling here, but they aren’t the enemies you’re expecting. “So how many Empire troops are we going to have as back up?” Gerald asks Gruz during the trip. “Empire? I’m lucky I managed to get them to accept my request to go on this mission! They didn’t send me anyone, not that they’d be much help anyway. Most Empire soldiers would stick out like a sore thumb and get themselves killed before they even reached the place. No, I’m relying on the ones that found these ruins to begin with. Dark elven mercs. If anyone can hide out better than the shadows, it’ll be them.” Gruz replies. Dark elves. You hated having to work with them back in your early years on the Rask frontier, but you can’t deny their effectiveness. “Shh! Do you hear that?” you ask. “Probably another Sul Monkey. Those things are all over the place. Just glad it’s not mating season for them, otherwise we might be in big trouble. Hey, aren’t you humans related to them in some way?” Gruz asks. Gerald is about to reply, and then you hear a whizzing sound followed by a “thunk” sound. You then see Gerald with a large crossbow bolt directly in the center of his head. A single trickle of blood comes from the wound and drips off his nose. “I…been hit…” Gerald says and his eyes roll back as he falls into the soft mushy ground. “Shit!” Gruz shouts and ducks down into the mud. > You hide behind a tree From the trajectory of the bolt, the assassin is in front and probably was trying to hit you instead of Gerald. You immediately run for the nearest tree as several more bolts whiz past you. When you reach the tree two Shadow Guards jump down from it and attempt to stab you. You kick one in the groin as hard as you can, while deflecting the blow of the other with your sword. You dodge another attack by falling to the ground and chopping the shadow at one of his legs, nearly hacking it off. When he falls in agony you finish him off with your sword. The one staggering around with damaged man part, finally recovers, but attempts to disappear again. You throw your dagger at him as he begins to turn invisible, impaling him in the stomach. Meanwhile it appears that Captain Gruz is taking care of the one who was shooting bolts at you. “Bastard!” he says with his boot on the shadow and chopping the shadow’s head in two with his axe. Blood and brains splatter everywhere. You move around and scan the area cautiously and try to see if there’s any more shadows lurking about, but if there were they would’ve either attack you by now or run off. When you’re confident that none are left you walk over to Gerald who is dead already. “FUCK!” you shout while kicking a nearby piece of clumped up mud. You don’t feel sadness this time so much as you feel frustration. All those years he was performing commando raids in Felkan territory and he gets killed like this? Not even in close combat! Somehow it doesn’t seem right. Just like how Roldan died. You search Gerald’s body and find the letter he was planning on sending Brenda about Roldan, it seems you will have to do it now. Perhaps even alter it. Captain Gruz walks over to you, he has a few bolts in him, but he doesn’t seem particularly bothered by them. “Feh, I’ve had way worse than this.” He says as he pulls them out. “Y’know we’re on our own now.” “What do you mean?” you ask. “I’m saying these bolts, they ain’t Shadow Guard, these are dark elven quality. That fucker over there with his head cleaved in two had one of those fancy repeating dark elven crossbows too. And while I know dark elves to be treacherous bitches that’ll switch sides to whoever’s paying the most, they would NEVER allow anyone to use their equipment. My guess is those mercs that were going to meet us are all dead, well either that or they ran off.” “Good, I want to kill the rest of these shadows anyway.” You say and proceed on to the ruins. Your next step of your journey confirms Gruz’s theory. You and he see signs of battle on your way to the ruins. Several of the bodies are dark elven, but an equal amount are Shadow Guard. “Looks like they were ambushed. Heh, pretty hard to do with dark elves. Still, it also looks like the dark elves gave the shadows a hell of a fight. Looks like those are the ruins up ahead. I’m guessing there probably aren’t too many left, this should be over pretty quick.” You and Gruz dispense with caution and boldly march into the ruins. You both look around as the crumbling statues of old forgotten gods loom over you. Eventually you find who you’re looking for in the remains of a temple that’s covered in vines and partially sinking into the swamp A single Shadow Guard stands over the bodies of several others of his kind. Near the bodies are empty flasks. “I’ll be with you soon my brothers and sisters. And especially you Draven.” Cyrus says looking at the bodies and ignoring you completely. “Aw, how sweet. Glad you decided not to pussy out like the rest of your buddies by poisoning yourself and are at least are willing to face your death like a man.” Gruz replies. “Yes, well it still remains to be seen Gruz. Though speaking of being a man, I’m impressed that you actually showed up here. I thought that you would’ve continued to hide and try to keep your involvement of these events a secret as you have for all these years.” This statement from Cyrus causes you to pause and look at Gruz. He looks guilty of something for a moment and then gives a toothy smile. “I wasn’t hiding Cyrus. I was waiting. Waiting until the day when I could finally track you down. It wasn’t my fuck up that got us into this mess. We could’ve been strong enough together to make a break from the Empire if you hadn’t decided to backstab us at Fort Destiny to save your own skin. Hah! See how well that turned out. Look at you now.” Even as jaded as you have become about the Empire, you are somewhat surprised about Captain Gruz…but in retrospect, somebody had to have some sort of input on having all those orcs transferred to Fort Defiance. Despite this revelation you’re too numb to excessively care. All you know is over the past few days you’ve seen two of your fellow Eternals die ignobly while doing their duty for the Empire. Something these traitors have obviously disregarded a long time ago. “Well, what’s it gonna be lad? You killin’ me or the shadow first?” Gruz asks. “I think I’ll stick with the original plan. We’ll kill the shadow together, then you and me are going to settle up.” You say calmly. “That’s the spirit boy!” Gruz laughs and steps towards Cyrus. Cyrus makes no more small talk or last minute threats. He focuses purely on combat. You expect him to use his Shadow Guard tricks like poison or invisibility, but he doesn’t. He easily dodges Gruz’s powerful yet clumsy attacks and lands a few well placed strikes on him, but Gruz shrugs them off like you’ve seen him do the whole time you’ve been fighting along side him. You can only imagine what an unstoppable juggernaut he must’ve been back in his younger days. As for you, you match Cyrus in sword skill. Whatever he learned from the Shadow Guard won’t help him in a face-to-face battle with you. All it takes is for you to take advantage of his divided concentration and you land a mortal blow, slicing his side clean open. Cyrus falls and deflects your attempt to split his head open, but he drops his sword from the force of your blow in the process. Weaponless, tired and bleeding out from a deep hole in his side, Cyrus accepts defeat. “Do it. Eternal slave of the Empire.” He says coldly and then you fulfill his request by decapitating him. You quickly turn to face Gruz, who already has his axe ready. “Alright Eternal, let’s finish this.” You and Gruz clash weapons. As you battle, you’re reminded of the times when you were still a child and how he taught you to fight. CLANG! How he told you to keep a calm head in battle. TING! How he told you to serve the Empire. SHING! How he had confidence in your skills. CLANK! How he saw you as a leader. CLANK! How he told you not to die for the Emperor…but to make the other dumb bastard die so that you could continue serving the Emperor SWIPE! SLICE! SLISH! SLISH! SLASH! How he told you that failure wasn’t an option. Gruz finally succumbs to his multiple wounds and falls to one knee leaning on his axe in an effort not to completely collapse. “Damn…shit….” Gruz gasps as he breathes heavily and feels his strength completely leaving him. “Why?” you ask him. “Why? Heh heh.” Chuckles a bit while at the same time coughing up some blood. “After all you’ve experienced in your service of the Empire, you have to ask me why? My people had already been tamed and conquered decades ago and I bought into the same bullshit you did when I was a little green snot that didn’t know any better. I worked my way up the ranks and did pretty good for myself, but for what? To be a lap dog that begged for a treat every time I did something right and get slapped down because I was rising too much above my so called station? I was still holding on to an idea that was long gone or never existed to begin with. It wasn’t until shortly after your training was complete that I started to seriously change my mind. The Felkan war and the conspiracy that the Shadow Guard came up with just made it easier… I think I’m gonna just lay down for a while.” Gruz says as he loses his last battle with staying conscious. You step towards him with your sword ready to strike, but instead you just watch him slowly drift off and hear his last words. “I lived a lot longer than I should have. This is a good death for an orc. I’ve seen your new replacements Eternal. They’re monsters. They’ll finish off what’s left of this decaying husk of an Empire, not save it. Good riddance. Heh, don’t worry though; you’ll probably survive the coming shit storm. You’ll outlive everyone.” He says and then finally dies. With the way things have been going lately, Gruz may be correct. It doesn’t necessarily make you feel any better though. > Year 35 Another rebellion put down. You wipe your sword of blood and shake your head as you look around at the chaos. This is the Quala province, the very heartland of the Empire. You shouldn’t have to be trying to maintain order here only a few miles away from the capital itself. “Ha ha ha! Come on bitch, give it up! I’m an Eternal, you oughta be flattered that I’m even wasting my time on your normal ass!” private Felding says as he attempts to rape a nearby girl. You briskly walk over to Felding and pull him off her. You know damn well that the rest of his kind are probably doing stuff like this all over the place, but this one is in your direct sight and under your command. “What the hell, captain? If you wanted first dibs you could’ve just said so! Ah look, now she’s getting away!” “We’re here to maintain order private, not create more chaos.” “Oh yeah? Coulda fooled me by destroying the entire town like this.” “Regrettable, but during battle only victory matters.” “Exactly! We won! So now it’s time to have our fun with these disobedient peasants. Y’know instill fear in them so they won’t do it again.” “You’re not instilling fear though, you’re just satisfying your own desires.” “Hey, who says we aren’t supposed to have fun while doing it?” It’s like talking to a brick wall. You’ve had these “New Eternals” under your command for a few months now and they are some of the most undisciplined troops you’ve ever had. You can try to encourage them, you can try to reason with them, you can punish them, and none of it has a real effect. The only constant is that they know of your reputation and know that you’re also an Eternal, which makes them just fearful of you enough that they don’t attempt to directly challenge your authority like they have with so many of their other commanders. If it were up to you, you would’ve had them all killed for treason as soon as they murdered their first CO, but for whatever reason the Empire wants them active. You’re guessing because the Empire’s desperate. So they were ultimately transferred to you and unfortunately you’re not allowed to kill them either…well unless they try to kill you first. You swear this must be what it’s like to be a svelk. They are like children, malicious hateful little children. It’s not even their suspect loyalty that baffles you; it’s their complete lack of discipline. Even Kane and Cyrus who opposed you had discipline. Hell, Edgar who was arguably the most emotional and hotheaded of the group was a hundred times more disciplined than any of these new “Eternals.” You remember back to your own training and there were a few of your fellows that didn’t learn proper discipline either. They never made it past Mistress and the few that did, didn’t survive Gruz. Whoever was in charge of their training did a horrible job and should’ve been executed for incompetence along with the rest of these vicious monsters. That old orc was right, they will destroy what’s left of the Empire, but you doubt if they’ll survive long after its downfall. You think back to all the real Eternals. You, Edgar and Brenda are the only ones left, as Warrick killed in the final days of the Felkan War. At least you assume that’s what happened, his body was never found and you know he would’ve rather died than let himself be captured to rot in a P.O.W. Camp. Either way it’s truly a loss you never ever got to talk with him again. From what you know Edgar is still stationed in the Arat province, probably trying to keep his own “eternals” in line to keep the peace there. As for poor Brenda you know she has her command in the Nalin province and probably still quietly grieving for Roldan. After all you’ve been through, it’s come to this and you’re wondering what the hell you’re still fighting for. The Emperor? You haven’t cared about that unknown ruler for years. For all you know he’s some feeble minded inbred idiot figure head that his advisors keep locked away while they bumble around ruling things probably about as well as he would. The Empire? Perhaps at one time, but as it has lost territory, respect and apparently all resemblance of sanity over the years you’ve lost all faith that it can ever regain any sort of glory it might have had, if it ever had it to begin with. You’ve tried your best to stem back the tide of chaos, but you’re only one man even if you are an Eternal. While you ponder your potential future, private Felding interrupts you. “Hey, cap? You’re in a bit of a daze there. So if you’re done I’m going to go now.” “Hold on, I have one more thing to tell you.” “(Sigh) What?” Felding says with an exasperated tone. “You’re not a fucking Eternal. None of you little shits are.” You say and run Felding through and pull up on the sword unleashing his blood and guts onto the ground. Felding makes a high pitched scream and slumps on top of his entrails after you remove the sword. “Shit! The cap just killed Felding!” another so called eternal shouts while he and his buddy have just come back from looting some farmer’s home. The pair of them look like they want to run, but you make it easy on them. “Go ahead and run or stay. I don’t care anymore. I’m leaving. I will tell you this though, if the Empire sends any of you unruly scum after me, know that I shall take great pleasure in not just killing you, but in drawing it out for as long as possible. Remember this.” And with that last warning, you leave your service to the Empire. The question now is, where will you go? What will you do? This all feels so wrong when you think about it. You’ve killed so many for abandoning, opposing, or attempting to betray the Empire and here you are doing the same thing. Was it all for nothing? Was it worth it? You don’t know. You always believed at the time you were right and that you were doing the right thing. Maybe you were, maybe you weren’t. You just know that you can’t serve something you don’t believe in anymore. Especially when everyone else around you doesn’t either. Speaking of not knowing, you don’t know how to do anything except kill people. While you’re certain that you’d be able to hire your skills out somewhere, the idea of being a mercenary is a little distasteful for you. You’d rather not push the svelk comparison that far. You could swear loyalty to another government you suppose. Perhaps the Felkan Kingdom? You’re not sure they’d want you, what with all their high tech weapons and your own government once fighting against them. The only other alternative for you is to carve out your own territory and rule it as your own. While it’s true you do have leadership qualities, you know nothing of actually running a government. You honestly wouldn’t know where to begin. > You become a mercenary You have no desire to serve another government that’s likely to be just as corrupt and useless as the one you served. You don’t really feel like carving out your own territory either, what could you gain, the petty power thrill of being another tyrant with delusions of grandeur? You’ve seen that story play out several times and it hasn’t gotten the people who pursued it anywhere. Maybe the svelk had it right. Ultimately serve nobody, but yourself. After all you’ve pretty much had to do that most of the time since the Empire rarely ever saw fit to help you out in any meaningful manner. The question is where can you find work as a mercenary without needing to work for any sort of government. You then remember, Rask. The Rask territory completely broke off from the Empire and declared itself independent years ago. No attempt has been made to retake it either, as far as you know Fort Destiny was just completely abandoned. The towns there have banded together as a loose alliance for protection and trade, but nothing more than that. Despite this, they still have need for warriors and such to defend against the many monsters that lurk in the wilderness. Sounds like a perfect place for you to earn a living and you’re already are quite familiar with the area. You find a nearby horse and set off for the north. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. When you eventually make it to the Rask borders the cold chill and snow are almost welcoming to you. As bad as it was here at times, this harsh place is probably the closest you can call home now, you only hope you can still make one here without too much problem. A few miles in and you see Fort Destiny in the distance, it looks about the same. You wonder what it’s being used for now, but you see several young men standing around outside, they look like guards. You approach and are stopped. “Halt, this is Kenneth’s Rest. If you’re here to trade then you may enter, but don’t cause any trouble or you’ll find yourself in more than you bargained for!” a young guard says. He’s wearing a patchwork Empire uniform, all of them are. You wonder if these were young recruits that just stayed when the Empire abandoned the place. If so then there are probably others as well, in fact the name Kenneth sounds familiar, but you can’t place it. In any case you could do with a small break so you decide to stop here, you also figure this would be as good a place as any to start looking for work. You tell the young man that you are not here to cause trouble, but to look for work. The young guard tells you that you might want to look for Kenneth as he usually needs various jobs done. He says he’s usually found at the inn that being where he keeps his office. You enter the fort and see that it has changed quite a bit with various traders selling and buying with each other in the courtyard. It still seems to have most of its defensive siege weapons, though they look like they’re in disrepair. You notice there are still guards patrolling the top walkways, though significantly less than when this place was still a military installation. It is at this time an older guard patrolling in the crowds sees you. “Hey! I know you! It’s the Bane of Rask!” he shouts. With this call, everyone else now turns to you. Some of the other older guards with long memories begin to realize it’s you as well and move in to advance with their halberds. The younger guards who never served under you do likewise, but from their own hesitation its apparent that stories about you have been told. One of the guards whispers to another who runs off. You take all this in stride; you figure that they believe you’re here to punish them all for desertion or treason. Amusing, since at one time that would’ve been true, but you’re actually here for the same reason. “Alright you just get off that horse slowly. We don’t want any trouble, we’re just trying to make a new life for ourselves.” “I understand that, but if I have to get off my horse for any reason, I promise you it won’t be in your best interest that I do so. I’m not here to cause trouble anyway. I just want to talk to Kenneth, I heard he’s the one who has several jobs that need done.” “Sounds like a trick to me.” One of the younger guards says. “I assure you as any of the men that have served under me here can attest to, I do not trick. How about I just wait here for Kenneth and the rest of you go about your business… or continue to hold your weapons pointed at my direction if you believe it will make you any safer. That’s fine too.” You wait a few minutes still on your horse, hoping you don’t need to turn this place into a bloodbath, and then Kenneth finally appears. That’s when you suddenly remember the name. “Lieutenant Verant! I knew the name Kenneth sounded familiar. Just forgot it was your first name, never having called you by it on a regular basis and all.” You remark. Kenneth looks like he’s about to collapse from fear. “Oh shit. Now look sir, we can explain all this. I mean…we thought…uh…” You hold up your hand for him to stop before he has a heart attack. “Verant…Kenneth. There is nothing you can say that could possibly prevent you and everyone here executed for treason to the Empire. Fortunately for you, I am no longer in the service of the Empire.” “You…you’re not?” “No. I am shall we say a free agent and looking for a way to put my combat skills to use.” “I…don’t know what to say.” “How about saying that you have some work for me?” And so your career as a mercenary begins… > Chapter 3A1: Bane of Rask Year 45 “Bastard!” you say landing a killing blow on the last auravrax. You do a double check of the cave just to make sure you’ve got all the beasts. It’s times like this you’re reminded of your kobold hunting days. Of course auravraxes are a lot furrier and stupider. Doesn’t make them any less dangerous though considering they’re basically balls of hair with lots of teeth and a vicious streak a mile wide. You wonder how it was you never encountered them before when you were posted up here. You can only assume that the larger creatures like ogres and wendigos kept them in check. Thanks to your depletion of such creatures other predators managed to gain better dominance. Nature is wonderful at balancing things out that way. After making a check you pile up the bodies and start skinning. You figure between the payment for this job and the sale you’ll make on the pelts you’ll have enough money for at least of week’s worth of wine, women and song. “Nah, to hell with the song. More women.” You chuckle to yourself. Thoughts about such “common” pleasures would’ve never entered your head decades ago. Makes you realize how much you’re changed since then, but it’s a good change you think. For the first time, you’ve actually been enjoying life rather than just going through the motions of it like a golem. Life is so much simpler and easier when you don’t have anyone to answer to; especially when that “someone” doesn’t even know what the fuck they’re doing half of the time. Life of course still has its bad moments, but compared to your time serving the Empire, it’s like a non-stop party. The Empire, now just another government resigned to the trash heap of history. All of its years of power and whatever glory it claimed it had completely gone. And of course much like Mother Nature, the smaller predators get to take their chance in the sun now that the big one is extinct. One of those smaller predators being one your old fellow Eternals, Edgar. You don’t know all the details, but from the rumors you’ve heard he’s declared himself a general and is calling the territory in his control, The Eternal Dominion. He apparently managed to get some of those chaotic eternal wannabes in some semblance of order to help him as well. When you first heard about this you could only shake your head in disappointment. Not even so much for what he’s doing, but more with how he’s doing it. It’s almost like he’s going down the same path that Kane did, but with even less planning and followers that are probably more duplicitous than Shadow Guards. You’d think that he would’ve learned something from that mess. Still, it’s his life and you have yours. You stop reminiscing about the past and concentrate on skinning the auravraxes. When you’re finished you cook up one of them to eat and then get some sleep. The next day you set off to Keplavisk with your furs. When you get to Keplavisk, the usual people acknowledge you. Some are friendly, some aren’t, and others with longer memories hate your guts for your action when you were trying to maintain order here a long time ago. Just one of the things you have to put up with, after all you still have your reputation of being… “Bane of Rask! Bane of Rask! Hey wait up!” Ulivik yells. “(Sigh) Boy, I told you to stop calling me by that ridiculous name. In fact I told you to stop following me period!” “Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are those auravrax furs? Did you kill all of them? I bet you just went in and totally destroyed them without fear!” Ulivik says while making sword whooshing sounds. You roll your eyes at the teenager’s over enthusiasm and resign yourself to him following you while you head to the town hall. For whatever reason he sees you as some sort of brave “hero” though you wish he wouldn’t. You can’t get too mad at him though, not his fault he’s a dark elf brought up by humans. There’s got to be a lot of confusion going on there. You mostly ignore Ulivik’s incessant questioning until you get to the town hall where upon his guard run him off with racial slurs and threats. You enter the building and see the mayor. Mayor Stundle is sitting his fat ass at his desk doing nothing of any importance as usual. “Ah Mr. Bane, I can see by the numerous pelts you’re carrying that you’ve taken care of the problem, I knew you would. That’s why you’re the best merc in the Confederation. Your payment is on the desk there.” “Good, and my name isn’t Bane you know. I keep telling people that.” “Indeed it may not be, but that’s what everyone knows you as. Can’t fight fame or maybe in your case infamy. Heh heh.” “Yeah, anyway I showed you the proof, I’ve got some furs to sell.” “Got a special job for you if you want.” “Maybe later, I’m going to enjoy myself.” “Okay, but I can’t promise you it’ll be available when you get back.” As you leave Mayor Stundle’s office, Flog is just entering with several ogre scalps. He displays his obvious dislike of you as usual. As thorough as you were when you destroyed Fort Defiance, Flog survived because he did the smart thing of running away and hiding as soon as he saw your army approaching. “Outta da way Bane, Flog has to see fat mayor!” “He’s all yours.” You remark not really wanting to deal with his attitude today, of course in typical orc fashion, Flog feels the need to press the issue. He sees the auravrax furs and makes his move. “Gruh. You kill little furry things. Flog kill big ogres! More proof that Flog better merc than you!” “Sure Flog, whatever.” You say dismissively which of course annoys Flog even more. “Flog gonna kill you one day Bane!” he shouts as you walk away. “Sure Flog, whenever you’re ready.” You say almost yawning. Another time and place you would’ve killed him for speaking to you in such a manner, but over the years you’ve mellowed with age. Besides he’s been threatening to kill you for the last eight years. The first few times you took him seriously. Now it’s just boring. If he really ever wants to try he knows where to find you, not like you’re hiding. After selling your furs you make you take your money to the closest tavern where you proceed to make good on your claim of relaxing. After a couple days of carousing you’re lying in bed with a couple of serving wenches and you decide that you should probably get back to work. No point in waiting around until all your coin is gone, you’ve had your fun now its time to get back to what you’re really good at, killing stuff. You tell the girls in your room to leave and get prepared to go find some more work. You’ve barely stepped out of the inn and Ulivik has already found you and nearly gets himself stabbed for sneaking up on you. “Hey Mr. Bane, it’s just me!” he says with a worried tone. “Boy, didn’t I tell you to never sneak up on me like that? I could’ve killed you and I doubt if anyone would’ve blamed me for it!” you shout “Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are you going on another mission?” “What do you think?” “I think you are! But Mayor Stundle already gave out all of the jobs, you’ll probably have to go to another town.” “And how do you know this?” “Because I tried to sign up, but I got thrown out of the town hall and called names.” “Sounds about right, but how did you get in there in the first place?” “I snuck in. I think I’m getting really good at it!” “Hmm, sounds like your svelk heritage is finally paying off.” You say. “Svelk?” Ulivik asks as if you’ve spoken a made up word. “Svelk, you know it’s the proper name for you dark elves, you mean you’ve never heard the term?” “No, I’ve been called a dark elf before, but I mostly get called a lot of other names.” “Well life’s tough kid, now you go run along…” “Hey why don’t I come with you on your next mission!?” And there it is. You knew the day was coming where he’d start asking you to bring him with you. “Yeah, no. I work alone.” “Aw come on! I need the experience! I try to sign up for even the easy jobs and I get thrown out! I’ve even tried going door to door asking if there are any monsters they need killing and they usually just say, yeah the one standing front of me! Then they slam the door in my face! It’s not fair!” “Why do you want to be a merc anyway? I mean I know you’ve got a family that takes care of you. They must, if they were willing to take on the ostracizing that would come in raising a dark elf baby.” “They do and I know they love me, but working as a hide tanner is boring! I want to be a mercenary and live a life of adventure! I mean I’ve heard stories of how my race is composed of nothing but mercenaries! Just think, a long proud line of brave ancestors that lived a glorious life of excitement! I should be as noble as them!” You almost laugh when hearing how Ulivik has spoken of his race. He truly is out of touch as there is absolutely nothing glorious, proud or noble about them. Even brave is debatable most of the time. “Ulivik, if you really want to be a merc, why not just go to Kenneth’s Rest? He doesn’t give a shit who he hires. Hell, he hires dark elves on a regular basis.” “I would, but uh, I’m not allowed to leave the town…but I know if you were with me, my parents would let me go! So can I please come with you?!” This scenario is just so bizarre; you hardly believe that it’s happening, a dark elf practically begging you to teach him to be a mercenary. The crazy thing about all this is you’re actually considering it. You must finally be suffering from some of the blows you’ve taken to the head in the past. It’s the only explanation. > You take Ulivik with you You decide to humor the boy and agree. Chances are, he’s not going to get permission from his parents anyway and when that happens he’ll be less likely to bother you again. If he does get permission, well it’s not that far to Kenneth’s Rest and you were going there anyway. Plus you’ll have given him the chance he wants and again he’ll be less likely to bother you. “Alright Ulivik, you go ask your parents, but I’m taking you to Kenneth’s Rest and no further. And when we get there, you’re on your own, don’t think that you’re going to be tagging along with me anywhere else.” “Okay! That’s great! I’ll be right be back…uh could you come with me, so they know I’m telling the truth?” “Oh fer…fine.” You follow Ulivik back to his parent’s store which smells heavily of leather. The pair of them are working on some sort of the hide when you both walk in. “Mom! Dad! Mr. Bane said he’d take me to Kenneth’s Rest and teach me to be a mercenary! So can I go now?” “Hey wait I never said I’d teach…” you start to say before Ulivik’s dad interjects his own comments. “Oh is that right? And how do you know that? How do you know he won’t just rob and kill you along some lonely road?” “Or worse!” his mother says. “Hey wait a minute now…” “But this isn’t fair! You said if I could find somebody to teach me, that you’d allow me to go!” Ulivik whines. “Yeah, well we didn’t think you’d actually be successful, let alone get a cold hearted killer like Bane here to agree. Which makes me wonder why he did…” “Trust me, at this point I’m wondering the same thing.” You reply. “Ulivik, why can’t you just be interested in the family business? It’s a more honorable profession than being a mercenary. It’s honest work.” “Yeah and the workin’ man is a sucker! Look at where we live!” “Hey! We get by just fine, and this business has put food in your belly, clothes on your back and a roof over your head! So don’t you dare bad mouth this proud family tradition!” “Yeah, well I’m not really your son anyway! And you’re not my real parents! I hate this place and every here hates me!” Ulivik screams and leaves slamming the door. You’re left in an awkward situation with his parents. “Okay, so I guess that settles that, I’ll just be going now…” you say. “No, you get back here you sonofabitch.” Ulivik’s dad says. “Excuse me?” “I called you a sonofabitch, now if you want to kill me for that you can do it after hearing what I’ve got to say first.” “Heh, okay. It’s been a weird sort of day today anyway, I’ll play.” You say with a smile. “Yeah, well I ain’t playing. Look, I know all about you, and you probably don’t know me at all but I remember your ruthless reputation when you were still in service of the Empire. There was a family that lived down the block from me and my wife. We we’re friends and they even had a couple of children. Children that we would sometimes love to entertain because we couldn’t have any of our own. But this family wasn’t happy with the Empire’s rules so they along with several others protested…” You stop the tanner right there. “Yeah, yeah, I know what you’re going to say, I had them all killed for treason and had their heads put on pikes. Well I was trying to maintain order and I did what I had to do to get the job done. I’m sure this story pales in comparison to others have screamed at me in the past and you don’t even need to make your point about hating me, because I’m used to it anyway. Besides you don’t want your son going to Kenneth’s Rest and I’m certainly not going to drag him along. If anything I’d wish he’d stop looking up to me as some sort of hero and following me around. I was hoping by doing this for him I’d finally be rid of him. So if you don’t mind, I’ll be going now and I’ll also be disappointing you again, by not killing you before I leave.” You turn to leave and that’s when you get another unusual request. “If you take him to Kenneth’s Rest, will you also look after him?” Ulivik’s mother asks. “What?!” “If you want money to do so, we can pay. Just can you look after him for a while at least?” “Okay…now I’m confused. I thought not only did you not want him to go, but that I was also a ruthless bastard that would probably rob and kill him along a lonely road?” “Yeah, we don’t want him to go, and yeah you are a ruthless bastard…but I also know you actually do have some sort of code of honor. You might’ve left the Empire behind, but the regimented way of thinking you have is still there. You wouldn’t bother killing my boy unless you felt he was a direct danger to you, and I think we both know that isn’t the case.” Ulivik’s dad says. “Well that’s the truth.” “The other thing is…we’re not going to be able to stop him. He’s been getting more and more restless about this, and he’s going to want to pursue this career path whether we want him to or not. At this point he’s just going to run away from home and who knows what trouble he’ll get into. (sigh) Maybe it’s just his nature, bein’ a dark elf and all, but for good or ill, me and my wife have taken on the responsibility of raising him. And part of that is making sure he has the survival skills that he’ll need to make it in this world. We can’t teach him that, but you could. Look, like my wife said, we can pay you a good sum just for you teach him the basics, or whatever else is involved, if you need more, I dunno we’ll try to figure out something.” You’re speechless for a moment. Just when you think you’ve seen the worst in people, something like this happens and surprises you. “I’m not sure what you expect me to do. I mean this job isn’t something I can teach like from a book. Most of what he’s going to have to learn is going to be from direct experience. I mean I suppose I could teach him some combat skills, but the rest is going to mainly be up to him.” “Well do what you can, and take this in the meantime.” Uliviki’s mother hands you a small bag. When you look inside, it’s nothing but gold coins. This has to be some of their savings, possibly all of their savings. They must really trust you, if they’ve given you this much. “I’ll do my best. You have my word as an Eternal.” You say and pocket the bag of coins. With those last words you exit the tanner’s store intending to find Ulivik. Fortunately you know he isn’t far. “Ulivik, I know you’re around the corner. Stop sulking, or pouting or whatever teenage angst you’re doing and let’s go.” Ulivik slowly comes out from behind the corner. “You’re taking me with you?” “Yeah, I scared your parents into letting you come with me. Now grab whatever gear you want to take and let’s go before all the good jobs are taken.” Ulivik is completely giddy at this turn of events and runs back into the store to get his stuff. You on the other hand are wondering how the hell you got yourself into this. Then you feel the bag of coins again and remember. On your journey to Kenneth’s Rest, you explain to Ulivik some of the things he should know such as haggling for better prices on jobs and the art of intimidation. You also teach him a few combat moves. He’s a rookie to be sure, but his agility allows him from getting hurt too badly. When you get to Kenneth’s Rest, the place is as busy as always. Ulivik is more than a little distracted by the surroundings, and you have to keep reminding him to stay alert. “Hey stop staring at the harlots and pay attention! Just because fighting isn’t supposed to be allowed here, doesn’t mean it doesn’t happen. In fact people around here love to start trouble. Don’t stare at anyone in the eye for too long and make sure you don’t bump into anybody. You could either get into a fight, or someone might even try to pick your pocket.” “Okay. Here isn’t the job board that way?” “Job board? Hah. I never use those things. I go straight to the source. Trust me, if you want to get a job that pays well; get to know and make contact with the owners or government officials. Fortunately Kenneth used to work for me at one time, so it was quite easy for me to make contact with him. And when we find him, just keep your mouth shut, and let me do all the talking.” Eventually you find Kennth, he’s as jumpy as ever whenever you first see him. “Sir! I didn’t expect you to be down this way so soon? What can I do for you today?” “Kenneth, will you relax? It’s been what, like ten years now? I’m not your superior officer anymore; you don’t have to keep calling me sir and getting all nervous and shit.” “I know sir, just old habits you know? Who’s this with you?” “This here is Ulivik, and he’s going to be my apprentice for a while.” “Apprentice? Seriously? Never pegged you as the teaching type.” “Right, Kenneth, like all those years of training soldiers in this very fort count for nothing at all.” “No, that’s not what I mean…I just oh I dunno. It’s just odd I guess. He’s a svelk, how come he’s not with his own people?” “That’s a long and unusual story, and one I don’t have time to go into. Besides we’re not here to satisfy your curiosity, we’re here for jobs, but seeing as this is Ulivik’s first time and all, can we get something maybe a little less…lethal?” “Hmm, usually that sort of stuff is on the boards, but I think I got something. Oh! There’s a nest of auravraxes a few miles from here.” “Ugh, more of those furry things? I just wiped out a nest of them a week ago!” “Well that’s all I got that’s on the easy side. I mean I’ve got some other jobs too, but you said this was more for training your apprentice than anything else.” “I can take on a harder task Mr. Bane. I mean I have to learn from experience right?” Ulivik pipes up forgetting that he was supposed to keep his mouth shut. Still, he might have a point. > You take on the easy job Ulivik might think he’s ready, but he’s definitely not. Killing auravraxes might be easy for you, but they’ll be more than enough for him to handle. Anything harder and he may very well be killed in the blink of an eye. Normally this would just be on the job training, but you were sort of paid to look after him for a while at least. “Give us the auravrax nest job.” You say. Ulivik looks a little disappointed, but he doesn’t speak out of turn again. Kenneth proceeds to tell you exactly where the creatures have been spotted in large quantities and the pair of you are on your way. Along the way, you tell Ulivik how he should approach fighting these things and how not to take them lightly as they can easily take an arm off or any other limb if you aren’t careful. He seems to understand the risk. As you get closer to their nest, you begin to encounter the furry fiends. Ulivik slightly freezes up when they spot you and attack. You have to snap him out of it and take up the fighting slack. “Come on kid, move in and attack! This is the moment of truth!” you shout. Fortunately, this motivates him to do just that. Of course after the fight, he’s got a very different view of things now. He’s out of breath, his heart is racing and he’s probably feeling a mix of excitement and fear, or perhaps just fear in his case. “So, is it everything you expected it to be?” you ask. “I…yeah, I mean no. I mean…(pant) that was intense.” “Yeah, well it’s about to get even more intense, we’ve still got a whole bunch more to kill.” The auravrax nest is another typical hole in the ground filled with them. Standard stuff for you, but its Ulivik’s true test. If he can make it through alive and in one piece, he might just have what it takes after all. You let him do most of the fighting, only intervening when it really looks like he’s going to get himself eaten or when you’re directly attacked. After he thinks he’s killed them all, you point out that he should double check the entire dwelling just in case. “What? But we got ‘em all! I mean if any were still alive they would’ve attacked by now.” “Not necessarily. A few of the smarter ones will actually find some place to hide and attack when you think you’re safe and let your guard down. Trust me, you better double check. It might be boring, but this is part of the job and you will do it if you want to stay alive. And while you’re at it bring the bodies of the dead ones back here for skinning. You always need proof and the furs usually fetch a good price. It’s a good way to earn extra money. Off your go, and if I hear any more whining from your apprenticeship is at an end and you truly will be on your own.” Ulivik certainly doesn’t want that, so he obeys what you tell him to do. You can sort of tell his “hero worship” is already starting to wane a bit though, but that’s good. It’ll keep him grounded and show him that this isn’t some glorious profession that he thinks it is. You figure after about a week of this and he’ll probably be ready to go back to wanting to take up his dad’s business or at least considering it. Eventually after all the double checking, skinning and some sleep you head back to Kenneth’s Rest. “I know I asked you this earlier, but it bears repeating. Is it everything you thought it would be?” “Some of it I suppose, I dunno it’s weird. Part of me almost wants to go back to take up my dad’s business.” He says, causing you to smile to yourself at being correct. “Well if you want to get out, the best time to do it is when you’re ahead. If you’re going to stick with it though, I’m going to warn you, my combat training is only going to get tougher.” “Tougher? But you saw me handle myself.” “I saw you nearly get your head bitten off several times if I hadn’t been there to help. And if you think if I’m being mean, you have no idea what being mean really is. MY first training instructor was a sadistic svelk bitch and out of all the people I’ve ever met, she still ranks number one.” “So is this why you agreed to train me? Some sort of revenge then?” Ulivik asks. “Ha ha ha! Is that what you think? If I was going to hold grudges for something like that, I’d be bringing genocide to the svelk race. No, if anything she helped me survive and that’s what I’m trying to do for you, assuming you even want to pursue this path. I’d say you’d better decide what your priorities are between now and by the time we get our payment from Kenneth.” Ulivik is silent for the rest of the way, makes for a nice change. Still, you are wondering if he’s going to let his steadily decreasing opinion of you change his mind about being a merc. Eventually you get back to Kenneth’s Rest which is busy as usual, you also run into another face you haven’t seen in a while, though you weren’t really missing it in the first place. “Well if it isn’t the infamous Bane of Rask, heard you were around.” Eldolith remarks with her small group of svelk milling about behind her. “Eldolith, I notice your little band of cutthroats is getting smaller and smaller. Keep this up and you’ll soon have no more warm bodies to hide behind and actually have to do the fighting yourself.” “And I’ve heard you acquired yourself a new one. What’s wrong, human aging finally catching up with you at last Eternal? Is this him? A svelk? Hmmm he is very young, is he your pleasure boy?” Before you can reply, Ulivik steps up and speaks. “I am a mercenary, like you and the rest of our kind!” This of course causes laughter among Edolith and her men. “You? You’re no mercenary, let alone one of our kind following around a human like some harlot in heat. No, what you are is a poor mockery of what a svelk should be. Now be gone, your mere presence offends me.” Edolith says and turns her back on you both. Ulivik nearly takes the bait, but you intervene and hold him back from getting himself killed. Eldolith and the rest of her group laugh and head to the inn. “Easy, there. Words nothing more. I’m sure you’ve heard worse when you were still working as a tanner.” “Perhaps, but this is different! I’m a mercenary now, not some weakling tanner!” “To most you’re still a snot nosed kid that doesn’t know shit and that would be a correct assessment, especially to a svelk. Now I’m sure harsh words from one of your own kind has filled you with a bruised ego, anger and disappointment, but if you try to challenge her, she’d cut you down before you even knew what was happening, as would any of her men.” “We could take them together!” “We? No, I might be able to take them. You on the other hand would get in my way and get yourself killed. Besides I am here to train you to become a mercenary, not be your personal avenger. Part of this training is learning when to pick your battles. Now I suggest you ignore her words for now, and let us get our payment from Kenneth. Money tends to cheer most up.” Ulivik obeys and follows, then he asks an amusing question. “Is she the svelk bitch you spoke of that trained you?” “Ha ha, no not her. Eldolith pales in comparison. No, she’s just another arrogant svelk merc that likes to do a lot of posturing. She’s actually really insecure about her leadership position. Always has been, even when she was hired by the Empire decades ago, but those are stories for another time.” You and Ulivik soon meet up with Kenneth who gives you your payment. This does cheer up Ulivik a little and soon he’s forgotten Eldolith’s insults. Predictably he spends most of his coin on some strumpet looking for an easy mark, she still gives him a good time though. The next day, Ulivik’s training continues as it does for at least a year after which time you figure he’s ready to go out on his own. He’s still a little reckless for his own good, but you can sense he really does want to be independent. His hero worship of you is gone and he may even dislike you now, but the respect is still there as it always has been. Part of you feels glad that the “job” is over with, but another part of you feels a sense of loss. As strange as it may seem, you started not minding Ulivik’s company. It’s been a long time since you’ve lead anybody into battle or otherwise. Ulivik may have only been one svelk trainee, but it still brought back memories of the “old days”. The old days, back when you had more of a purpose. In some ways training Ulivik gave you a higher purpose than just killing for coin again. You also think back to Eldolith’s words about human aging. Sure they’re meaningless now, but how long can you truly keep up a mercenary life? You are definitely in better shape than most humans your age and barring violence you still probably have several years left, but the future is something you are starting to ponder about. Despite being an Eternal, you ARE still human, and from your own experience, being an Eternal does not make one immortal. Growing “old” is something you never considered, at one time you always figured you’d just die in battle one day. That day may still come, but even you have to admit that the prospect of dying in battle no longer holds the same “appeal” as it once did when you were in the service of the Empire. At one time you also wondered what other skills you had besides killing. Now you see that you haven’t given yourself as much credit as you should have. You have decades of combat experience behind you, experience that you could easily pass on to others if they were willing to pay for the knowledge. You begin to entertain the idea that maybe you should open up some sort of combat training school. The more you think about it, the more the idea appeals to you. You’re going to have to remain a mercenary for quite awhile still as you attempt to gain the coin to get such a place started, and probably still go on jobs even a little afterwards, but you feel like you have a true purpose again. And so you set off with your new goal in mind… > Year 55 After another hard day of training various citizens of Rask, you lie in your bed thinking about how much has changed over the years. Never did you think that you’d be running a real business, though to be honest if it wasn’t for legitimate paranoia on the part of the Rask Alliance, you’d probably be spending all of your time still as a merc, as it stands you’re practically responsible for training the closest thing to an army that Rask has, though it’s probably more of an organized militia. It’ll be the first line of defense if the Eternal Dominion starts to look to this way for expansion. When the ED started re-conquering the old territory of the Empire it was only natural that the towns and villages of Rask started getting worried. They didn’t break away from the Empire only to replace it with something similar or worse. It was just their luck (and yours) that you wanted to become a professional combat instructor. Soon people from all over Rask were coming to see you. You hardly ever have to do any sort of mercenary work anymore and the mayor of Keplavisk is overjoyed by the fact that you set up shop in his town. As for the Eternal Dominion threat, you aren’t sure what to think. There has been no formal declaration of war or even a diplomatic visit to Rask yet, but that doesn’t mean there won’t be, Rask has lots of resources after all. Still, the ED has its hands full still trying to keep everyone in line from the top to the bottom while attempting to gain more holdings. Mass orc migration to Rask are becoming common, even the svelk are more welcome in Rask again. Partly due to the possible need for more mercs if war comes to pass and partly due to dark elves being disliked by the ED, which apparently frowns upon mercenaries (and probably the attitudes of the dark elves in general). You have to hand it to “General” Edgar though, you didn’t think he’d be able to get those chaotic brats calling themselves “eternals” organized, though it sounds like they’re still as sadistic as ever and if the rumors are true, another generation of Eternals are being trained as well. You can’t even imagine what they’re going to be like. If war is coming like everyone thinks it is, you know immediately that you’re probably going to be nominated and begged by the various mayors and council members to be some sort of commander. You aren’t sure if you’d accept the position though you probably will mainly because you don’t want to be bothered moving anymore and you’ll be damned if you’ll live under the rule of some half assed Eternals. Part of you wonders what the hell is going through Edgar’s mind. He seemed more level headed the last time you saw him, like the incident with Kane forced him to mature, but you guess his aspirations for personal glory were just too great to keep suppressed for long. You also wonder about Brenda, she’s the only other old Eternal that was left, and you have no idea if she’s even still alive or serving with Edgar. You get your answer and then some in a few days. Another hard day of training various citizens of Rask and you’re ready to close up shop and then two figures wearing hoods enter. You have flashbacks to fighting the Shadow Guard and you draw your sword. “Hold on! It’s me! Warrick! See?” a familiar voice says and reveals himself from under the hood. The face is much older than you remember and sporting an eye patch, and the hair is now nearly gone. But considering you thought Warrick to be dead, you aren’t completely convinced until the second cloaked figure reveals herself and speaks. “I told you wearing these things was a bad idea. He probably thought we were Shadow Guards!” she says. Her face is also much older and the hair is completely gray, but you definitely know this one is Brenda. Between the pair of them it truly makes you realize how much time has passed since you saw them. “And I told you, we need to keep a low profile, this situation is dangerous to the both of us.” Warrick says. “Warrick back from the dead and Brenda, I was just recently thinking about what had become of you.” “We need to talk to you about Edgar.” Warrick says cutting right to the point. “Yeah I thought so…okay let me lock up and we can talk about this in my quarters.” The first thing you find out is that Warrick is now working for the Felkan Kingdom. He says it’s a long story, but it has its roots in his becoming disillusioned with the Empire much like you did. Warrick also goes on to say that’s one of the reasons why he’s here. Edgar definitely has plans to attack it in the future and the crown hopes to avoid another long and troublesome war by recruiting allies this time. He mentions real Felkan diplomats will probably be arriving in Rask soon to speak with the leaders of the towns, but he was sent to specifically reach out to you, because whether you knew it or not, your reputation here carries weight. As for Brenda, her position is much more dangerous. She is currently serving the Eternal Dominion, (another long story) but is trying to encourage an underground dissident movement. Not really difficult considering how oppressive Edgar’s regime is. It is the hope of the Felkan Kingdom that the ED will wear itself out on keeping down riots and other potential conquests like Rask before it turns its eyes on the Felkan Kingdom. You tell Warrick that he’s probably wasted a trip as the paranoid mentality of the Raskians are already preparing for war with the ED and will have no problem allying with the Felkan Kingdom and that you’ll no doubt be called upon to command the people you’ve been training. Warrick seems relived to hear that, and you and he begin to do a little catching up. Brenda participates as well, though the whole time she seems a little preoccupied. Eventually as the night goes on, Warrick says he must be getting back to report to his superiors. Brenda says that she is not ready to leave as she wishes to speak to you about Roldan and his last days with you. Warrick understands, but warns her that she should not be away for too long so as to arouse suspicion. He would hate to have her sacrifices should lead to her death. “Sacrifices…as if he would know about such things. When the Empire needed him the most what did he do? He ran to the fucking enemy. Now his new masters give him commands and the running lapdog thinks he’s free, but he’s still a slave.” She remarks with distain, before continuing. “Edgar may be an egomaniac with delusions of grandeur like he always was, but he at least tried to keep the Empire together, even if it is in a different form now. He believes in something better, even if he’s not exactly intelligent enough to carry out that idea. And you, you’re worst of them all. You just dropped out altogether and dedicating yourself to nothing, but coin like a fucking svelk. What the hell happened to you? You used be our leader.” “I’m not exactly sure what your point is, but if this all pent up anger at me due to Roldan dying I…” “Don’t you dare fucking mention him! I heard enough of hollow apologies in that damn letter you wrote to me.” “They were Eternals as we all are. Dying in combat is always a possibility for us, I know their deaths weren’t the most glorious, but at the time they died doing something they believed in. I can hardly help that the institution that they believed in, crumbled soon afterwards. I tried like hell to maintain my own belief in the Empire despite having it time after time again tested. Eventually I saw the light when I had to command a bunch of those new eternals while attempting to put down mass riots near the capital. Was leaving the right decision? I don’t know, but it was for ME. The fact is ALL of our lives were nothing but duty and dedication to a corrupt government that deserved none of it. Kane knew that, Gruz knew that, and as much as I still hate them to this day, the Shadow Guard knew that. When the Empire was in its death throes it affected us all differently. I can’t help the fact that you decided to stay loyal and it didn’t work out resulting in you eventually having to capitulate to Edgar later on. At least you and Roldan had an experience that none of us will ever have. You have at least that to cherish.” Brenda is silent for a moment as she takes in your statement. She looks at a ring on her finger, which is obviously still her wedding ring to Roldan. She smiles and then speaks. “You’re right I suppose. You usually were when we all served under you. Even you couldn’t have prevented the Empire from falling, the damage was done long before we came into existence. I guess I just never got over Roldan’s death and had nobody except you to blame since you were the only one still alive. The funny thing is I didn’t start blaming you until I found out you left the Empire. You were always our leader, and it seemed unthinkable that you would leave willingly. You know I think none of us really saw anyone else as their leader except you. It’s probably why Kane wanted you to join him, it’s no doubt why Warrick insisted on reaching out to you and it’s why Edgar sent me…” “Excuse me?” “One of the things you were wrong about and Warrick too. I am not helping him though he still thinks I am. There is no underground resistance, or at least none that matters. Warrick and his Felkan masters think they can undermine the Eternal Dominion, but they are quite wrong. When Edgar first came to me and explained his cause and ideas I realized it was a just and worthy one. I joined in an effort to help with some of the details that Edgar himself is not nearly as skilled at, still he has proven himself to be more charismatic than he once was, at least to the other eternals and that’s who is mainly important. He wants to create a nation where we Eternals are in control, as it should’ve been.” “…so why would he want me for, wouldn’t he consider me an enemy like Warrick?” “No, not like Warrick. While your abandonment did sadden Edgar, he always figured you had a good reason. He never questioned it. And now that you’ve told me your views I see he was right. It’s really quite odd to see how high of regard he holds you. I guess your time with him during Kane’s attempted secession really impacted him.” “Brenda, this is a lot to take in, what exactly are you expecting from me then?” “As Warrick said, your reputation carries weight here and you have the ear of several of the mayors here. Perhaps you could explain to them that even with training that resistance will be useless and that the ED will just slaughter everyone. Better that they should surrender now and have a benevolent overseer such as…you running things.” “And you really think Raskians are going to go for that idea?” “What does it matter? They are going to be conquered eventually anyway. I merely suggest other options to Edgar’s plan, which was to convince you to just come with me where you could take command of a battalion to conquer Rask seeing as you know the place the best.” “Heh, sounds like him. So what was the plan if I refuse altogether? Killing me I suppose?” “Didn’t come up though I even asked him about it, but as I said Edgar really believes that you’ll help us. Perhaps in some way he didn’t want to think about the alternative. I’m guessing that you are considering the alternative?” “Don’t see why I shouldn’t, do you?” “You would have a true purpose again. Serving an idea greater than yourself.” “I have a true purpose now. I’m training others to fight against those that would take their lives. The Raskians don’t want to be ruled over and quite frankly neither do I, let alone by Edgar.” “No! You would be different! You, like myself would be given an equal place in the decision making process! Even the other Eternal don’t get that.” “Yeah, that’s the other thing, I’m loathed to live in a land that considers those new…things, eternals.” “They are much different now, true they still have their sadistic streak, but only towards the non-eternals and who cares about them?” “I’m sure the non-eternals do, and while they may very well be inferior, enough of them can topple any government. We saw it happen, and it’ll happen to you too if you aren’t careful.” “So are you saying you won’t join us?” You get the impression that if you say no, she’s going to attack you and you’ll have to defend yourself. Killing Brenda is something you do not want to do, but lying and saying yes is duplicity you’d rather not engage in. > You say no You didn’t lie to Kane when he wanted you to join him and you aren’t going to lie to Brenda, but you are going to try to reason with her. “Brenda, I didn’t join Kane all those years ago, because his path wasn’t mine and I’m not joining you and Edgar for the same reasons. However I would hope that we don’t end up like me and him did.” “What you think I’m going to try to kill you? No, I doubt if I could by myself. I fear I probably haven’t kept up my combat skills as honed as you have. To be quite honest, I wasn’t sure what I was going to do, if you rejected the offer. I guess I’ll give Edgar the bad news, but I know he’s not going to take it well and he’ll definitely attack this place with his army and I doubt if you’ll be spared for old times sake.” “Then you’re going to have to convince him not to. Look, this place is not going to bend to his will. The paranoia and the idea of freedom is stronger here than it has ever been. If you attack Rask, be prepared to suffer considerable losses as I personally will make sure of it. This is my home now. I’m not leaving and I’m not serving another empire either. Even if you win, you will not easily recover from the losses let alone be able to fight the Felkan Kingdom, in fact they will most likely take advantage of the chaos. Now you’ve been in contact with Warrick long enough to know that the Felkan Kingdom is counting on you being disorganized and weak from attacking Rask. If you want to play it smart? Attack them instead and don’t worry about Rask.” “What’s stopping Rask from attacking us if they ally with the Felkan Kingdom?” “They won’t trust me. The Felkan Kingdom can send all the diplomats they want, but the Raskians are ultimately not going to stick their necks out for them.” “And you think Edgar will go for this idea?” “You know what? He’ll go for it, because if he TRULY respects me, he’ll fucking listen to my advice which has never steered him wrong, not to mention I saved his damn life more than once. I’m telling you to tell him, that he needs to consolidate his forces, get his house in order, maybe retake a few other areas of the old Empire and THEN attack the Felkan Kingdom if he absolutely needs to. Rask is just death zone, it didn’t do the Empire any good and they only held on to it for as long as they did because I was here. I say that not as a boast, but as truth. Does Edgar have anyone like me in his army? I doubt it. The hostile inhabitants here didn’t call me the Bane of Rask for nothing. A name, which I’m still called, even by those I’m helping. If he sets an army in these lands, I’ll make sure they’ll start calling me the Bane of Edgar.” Brenda smiles a bit again at your last remark. “You always did have a way with words. I missed that sometimes. Okay, well I guess I’ll go then, to deliver your message.” “Brenda y’know there is another option. You could stay here, or go somewhere else. You don’t need to follow Edgar. You’re fully capable of doing something else with your life.” “Trust me, it’s tempting. I even thought about joining Warrick when he first approached me, but it’s not for me. Warrick’s path to me is one of a traitor, even if I do understand it and your path is one of freedom…something I guess I just can’t comprehend. I still need the structure and hierarchy. I dunno, maybe I just need to be with other likeminded Eternals. None of them are Roldan, but I don’t feel as lonely.” And there it is at last. The real reason why Brenda is following Edgar, you knew it couldn’t be because she blindly believed in his cause. You can’t imagine what is going on in her head and there will be no talking her out of her choice, but you’re glad you won’t have to fight her and hopefully her message to Edgar will get through to him as well. You bid farewell to Brenda, probably for the last time. You go to bed that night, but you don’t really sleep, you just wonder what events the coming months will hold. Months pass and just as Warrick said, diplomats from the Felkan Kingdom visit Rask. As you thought, they get a lot of promises of an alliance and some trade deals, but that’s about it. The general consensus of the Raskians is that they won’t be committing any troops unless war comes directly to their doorsteps. Great, now you just hope that Edgar follows your advice… Year 58 Edgar took your advice, or at least you guess he did. He never attacked Rask. Never even sent anyone, he did however send thousands across the Felkan borders a couple years ago. The war is still going on and you hear it’s even more brutal than the one with the Empire. Edgar has adapted with the times unlike the Empire and is implementing stolen technology from the Felkans. You can only imagine how Warrick is faring and while it is unfortunate, you stopped being their “leader” decades ago and their motives, goals and dreams are their own concerns not yours. And your only concern lately is getting old. Every day you notice new pains in your joints and muscles. You’re slower than you once were and not quite as strong anymore. You wonder how your fellow Eternals feel about getting old, though perhaps due to still being engaged in warfare, maybe they don’t dwell on it as much. Brenda and Warrick will probably expect to die in battle, as for Edgar, the fool probably believes he’ll live forever. You don’t have as many students anymore, as many of the other towns have taken to creating their own combat schools, mostly run by those you taught. Mercenary work is even harder to come by nowadays; thanks to you each town actually has competent militias that can clean out hostiles without much mercenary aid anymore. Indeed they need something to do considering Edgar never attacked Rask. Even the ogre tribes in the far north have settled down. Last you heard, Flog “retired” at one of their primitive villages, a forced wedding to an ogre bride for killing her husband to be. Bet he wishes he’d died with his fellows at Fort Defiance now! Eldolith ended up taking her remaining men to work for the Felkan Kingdom, one of the last mercenary squads to stay in Rask. Ulivik said his goodbyes to his family and you even before the mercenary work dried up. Said he was bored of it and wanted to see more of the world and become an “adventurer.” You think his parents were even less pleased to hear that than when he wanted to be a merc, and you’ve never quite understood the appeal of the wandering life of an adventurer either, but you wished him the best. When he left, he thanked you one more time for taking the time to teach him when nobody else would. You were always glad he got over his resentment of you due to your harsh training. And while it is true you did initially train him for coin and swore an oath to his parents to look after him during that time, it is because of those actions that you discovered a little more about yourself and focused yourself in the direction to open up your combat school. Of course your actions have now changed Rask to an extent that you may have very well put yourself out of a job, but you aren’t worried. You still get students from Keplavisk, so you’ll probably always have a bit of business. Even if you don’t, you’ve been doing some saving over the years. You can only prepare yourself now, for whatever changes might come in the future. > Year 65 You get a knock on the door to which causes you to wonder who would be bothering you at this time of night. You’re more than a little annoyed since you were sleeping. “Go away, I ain’t getting up.” you say from your chair trying to go back to sleep. “Open the fuck up, you useless old man!” you hear from outside and it’s enough to motivate you to answer it and punch out the fool who said it. When you open it however, an unexpected visitor meets you. “Ulivik?” “Yeah, it’s me! Well, aren’t you going to invite me in?” he laughs. “Yeah sure.” You say and the both of you head to your quarters to sit and talk. You still shaking the cobwebs after being awaken from your slumber. “Were you asleep?” “Yeah, what of it?” “Nothing! Just sort of surprised, I mean I know it’s night, but its still pretty early.” “Eh, it’s been kind of a lazy day today, felt like sleeping for most of it.” “You didn’t teach a class today?” “Class? School’s been officially closed for about two years now. I mean I get few people that seek me out looking to increase their skills every once in awhile, but nowadays everyone goes to that new military academy they opened up here.” “Oh, I was wondering what that big new building looming near the edge of town was, so they didn’t offer you a job there?” “Eh, they did, but I didn’t want it. People who I originally trained run it and most of them I didn’t even like when I was teaching them, so I’d rather not have to follow whatever silly guidelines they’ve come up with for that place. Anyway, I sometimes get paid to give speeches on tactics and strategies there. I get by. So where have you been and what brings you back?” Ulivik mentions he mainly returned to when he heard his father had died and that he’s probably going to be around for a while to look after his mother. He then excitedly goes on about his various adventures of exploring ruins, caves and finding treasures and lost trinkets. Not enough to get rich, but he’s not in it for that. You enjoy hearing about it all, it’s not like you really go anywhere or do as much anymore. And as the years go on, you are finding yourself with less and less to do. You sort of thought your school and teaching would occupy your time and that if you got bored of that you could always break it up with a little mercenary work. But both of those options are pretty much closed off to you at this point, at least in Rask. The place is less wild and more peaceful now than it ever was under the Empire. You could move you suppose, but it’s not such a bad life maybe you should just settle in and enjoy your elderly years in relative peace… “..and so then I got my head split open and my entrails eaten by the clawbeast and died. Hey! Are you still with me?” Ulivik asks. “Huh? Yeah you got your entrails eaten and died.” You answer. “Well glad to see you’re still listening.” Ulivik laughs. “Sorry, just a little preoccupied. Anyway, go on.” Ulivik knows something’s up with you, and he’s got a pretty good idea what it is. “Hey, have you ever thought about leaving Rask and joining your old buddies in the Eternal Dominion?” he asks. “Wha…oh I don’t think that’s for me. Besides I only have two there, dunno if one of them is even still alive and I never really was exactly friends with Edgar. Speaking of which did you have much trouble traveling through the ED? I heard they aren’t too fond of svelk there ever since most of your people have been hiring themselves out to the Felkans.” Well as you once pointed out, we’re not really liked anywhere we go, but I never really kept to the populated areas while in the ED so I didn’t have too many problems. However, I did find that dropping your name helped me a few times. You’re sort of known there.” “Huh. Dunno, why I would be, not like I was ever part of the place. Guess Edgar really did look up to me. Unexpected.” “Didn’t he offer you a job too one time?” “Yeah. Don’t think it’s still available though. Like I said, my time serving big governments is over with. I wasted more than thirty years of my life doing it. Not going to waste the remaining years I have left even if it’s a high position of power. Besides, I’m still not sure that I wouldn’t have to kill Edgar if I ever got into an argument with him over something.” “Surely it would be more interesting than sleeping all day.” “Hah, probably. I dunno, I just feel like Edgar’s Eternal Dominion is just mimicking a lot of the old Empire. Sure it’s doing well now, but ultimately it’s going to fall just like the Empire did, so what’s the point?” “Hmm, well you could offer your services to the Felkan Kingdom, I think they could use the help.” “Yeah, no. I’m not into lost causes. Did that before too and saw the results. The Felkan Kingdom could’ve won the war if they didn’t fight so defensively. There were many times early in the war where they should’ve pressed an attack and took territory. Their fate is probably sealed at this point. Only a matter of time, assuming the ED keeps with it’s policy of total conquest, and doesn’t fuck it up. Anyway don’t get me started on how I nearly got dragged into serving on both sides of that conflict.” “Okay, but how about another proposal?” “I’ll bite. What is it?” “Well, as you know I’m going to be here awhile looking after my mother, but I need something to do. Rask still has areas of it that are largely unexplored. I sort wondered if you’d like to come with me on an adventure in this very area.” “Oh? And where would this place be? Most of the places you’re speaking of involve mountains, and as bored as I am, I’m not about to go dragging my ass up a fucking mountain.” “Ha ha, nah not the mountains, though it still might involve a little bit of climbing.” “Okay, so where?” “The Wendigo Hills.” Now there’s name that’s spoken of in only whispers nowadays in Rask. Everyone knows about it and doesn’t speak about it, let alone go near it, from humans to ogres and even the few giants still left. Ever since you wiped them out forty five years ago, there have been little problems from those evil spirits. Years later after you first left Rask you heard the various villages got their holy men together to perform some sort of ritual to make sure none of the spirits managed to ever escape from those cursed hills ever again. Of course every once in a blue moon some unfortunate idiot…usually an adventurer gets himself possessed and no expense is spared in hunting down the creature and destroying it. Now it looks like Ulivik is intent on being that new unfortunate idiot. “Have you lost your fucking mind, because if you haven’t, then you will if you go there and that’s if you’re lucky. I went to that blasted place once, I had a company of soldiers with me and I was in my prime. I barely got out of that place alive and you know what happened to the few soldiers that survived with me? Four of them ultimately committed suicide from their nightmares and the other two got discharged and thrown in the asylum for just going batshit insane. No, I’m not going and if you got any sense, you won’t either. That place does shit your mind. The spirits there are pure evil, and they are not to be trifled with.” "No, I have a remedy for that! Look at these!" Ulivik says and produces two amulets with a faint blue glow. "Let me guess, these things are magical and they're supposed to protect us from getting possessed." "Correct! Even when I was little, I heard there was supposed to be great treasure in those hills. Nobody has ever had the skill to go in there and claim it, but I want to be the first because I truly feel like I'm ready now. You're the about the one who has traveled the most in those hills and survived. You would be a great help and we can even share whatever we find! Come on, it'll be like old times!" "Old" being the key word here. While you were wondering if you were becoming more complacent in your old age, you aren't sure if going to the Wendigo Hills is something you want to do just to prove "you still got it." > You help Ulivik Ulivik may be an accomplished warrior now, but out of all the tales he’s told you about his adventures; he still hasn’t faced anything like the wendigos and he’s going to get himself killed or worse if he goes into this with just the hope of some magic bauble around his neck. As much as you’re loathed to go through this again, you decide to help Ulivik. “Alright I’ll go, but as soon as I think we’re in a shitload of danger that we can’t handle, you better listen to me, because this isn’t going to be the fun adventure you think it’s going to be. Understand?” “Sure, but I really don’t think it’s going to be as bad as all that.” “No, it’ll probably be worse. Now if you don’t mind I’m going to get some sleep and get my mind focused on this fool’s task.” “Fool’s task? You’re coming with me.” “Yeah, which says more about my own foolishness than yours, because you don’t know any better. I know we got these magic amulets or whatever, but these… things are going to try to get inside your head and if they succeed, it’s all over. If that happens to you, I won’t hesitate to put a sword through your head, and I expect you to do the same.” “Ha ha you’d kill me so easily?” Ulivik laughs, but you’re in no mood. “Hello, I don’t believe we’ve met…by the gods have you remembered nothing of the stories of my past? Of course I’d fucking do it so easily! I’ve killed innocent men and their entire families just because they disagreed with how the Empire was doing things, hell I even killed one of my Eternal brothers because of it. Wouldn’t be anything to kill someone who was turned into a mindless beast even if…” You stop yourself right there. “Even if what?” Ulivik asks. “Even if…he’s too stupid to see this is a really bad idea! Anyway, I’m ranting and I’m tired. I’m going to bed, you can let yourself out. And don’t say that I don’t have to go, because I’m already committed now. I gave you my word as an Eternal.” Ulivik knows when you say something like that, you’re being serious, so he just nods and tells you he’ll be by tomorrow morning before leaving. As for you, you head off to bed with a myriad of thoughts going on in your head. “Can’t believe I nearly said he was like a son to me. What the fuck am I thinkin’ about? Better get your head in the game old man, because wendigos are going to thrive on that. They live on weakness.” You mumble before drifting off to sleep. The next morning you and Ulivik set off for the infamous Wendigo Hills. Along the way, you go on about your own major conflicts with them, even when they were originally just thought to be people infected with lycanthropy like the rest of the old barbarian tribes around Rask. Ulivik listens to you in fascination like he did when he was much younger as you’ve never spoken of your experience with the wendigos before to him except in passing. It’s good to know he’s still listening. “So after that battle, no wendigo has ever left those hills?” Ulivik asks. “Eh, we had a couple that still managed to snag bodies and kill a few people before being brought down and exorcised by some of the local hedge wizards we recruited later, but that was mainly due to people idiotically still going into the hills in the first place. Sort of like what we’re doing.” You say. “But if they’re spirits can’t they just float about possessing people?” “You’d think so, but for whatever reason they can’t leave these the hills in pure spirit form, they need a body. That’s why when they’re killed they immediately try to hop into a new one or else they get pulled back to the hills. Dunno why, and I don’t think anyone’s bothered to learn the history either. Everyone’s just glad they were deprived of nearly all of their bodies by a certain Eternal decades ago.” “Ha ha, but what about animals? Couldn’t they just possess animals and leave the hills that way?” “Always wondered that myself, but again if they could I’d imagine they’d still be a major threat. Besides, when I traversed those hills I didn’t see a single animal, not one, of course I assumed that they probably ate them all. The wendigo are basically consumption and hunger in its purest form. They aren’t big thinkers in the scheme of things and it’s fortunate that they never organized past their barbarian tribal hosts.” “Sounds like it, but if they are all spirits as you say, then we shouldn’t experience any physical combat at all and with these amulets and our steel trap minds we should be fine! We might even find some sort of ancient lore about how the wendigos came to be tied to those hills!” “Well you’re as optimistic as ever. I suppose that’s good, it’ll keep your mind better prepared when the wendigos try to oppressively crush your free will. Y’know, now that I think about it, I think that’s what partially saved me. My mind was so dedicated to the Empire back in those days, the wendigos were trying to crush something that wasn’t really my own to begin with.” “And now?” “Now? I got my impenetrable cynicism to protect me, which I’ll definitely put more stock in than this ridiculous magical amulet that’ll undoubtedly fail to do anything.” “Looks like you’re off to a good start with your cynicism.” The after a couple days of travel, you eventually make it to the base of the Wendigo Hills. The markings and warning signs line stretch up, down and all the way around as far as you know. No real physical barriers of course, but even those dumb ass ogres that can’t read know better than to pass the line. Of course they usually knew better to begin with, which proves that they’re smarter in that respect. You take a deep breath and step past the markings and make your way up the forested hills. It’s at this point your amulet starts to glow a brighter blue, Ulivik claims “that’s how you know that it’s working!” Great. Still, you don’t hear any sinister whispers yet, but there is still that dead silence you remember. As if nothing living is here. Ulivik, mentions that he found a crude and well worn map of some of the Rask area during his trip through Eternal Dominion lands and wants to explore some ruins that are clearly marked on it. You mention you haven’t been here in a long time, but you don’t remember ever seeing any, so you can’t be as of much help as he might’ve thought. Ulivik says he doesn’t care though, he’s just glad to have you along. “That map is probably old Empire. Like really old Empire, and much might’ve changed since then. It could also be inaccurate to begin with.” “Yeah, that’s true, but we might as well find out. It’s the journey, not necessarily the destination that’s important! That’s what adventuring is all about.” “Funny, I always thought it was the misguided hope of finding lots of loot and the avoidance of a real job.” You reply. “That’s just a bonus.” Ulivik comments and you allow yourself to chuckle. Never thought you’d do that while in this cursed place. After a half hour or so of walking, you start to get an uneasy feeling of being watched. You mention this to Ulivik and he says he’s getting that impression too. You ask him if he’s hearing anything, but he says he isn’t except the snow crunching under foot. Neither are you, maybe the amulets are working, but it’s obvious the presence of the wendigos is near. Another hour of travel and you and Ulivik see something you didn’t expect. “Do you see that? That’s a rabbit! I thought you said nothing was living here?” Ulivik says. “When I came through I didn’t see a living creature, so I just assumed there wasn’t. I guess there is though.” You reply. “Maybe the wendigo aren’t here anymore and everyone has been scared of this place for decades for no reason.” “I wouldn’t go that far. Something is definitely here and just because we’re seeing rabbits doesn’t mean it’s safe. It just means animals must not be suitable hosts for them.” “Well…hey that rabbit it’s hopping towards us. Hmm, a little larger than average and hopping towards people is rather unusual behavior for a ra…” Before Ulivik can finish, his leg is leaped upon and viciously attacked by the rabbit. After some hollering from the surprise, you grab the little furry beast and break its neck. You toss its lifeless body in the snow while Ulivik examines the bite marks in his pants “Fuck, that thing chewed through my pant leg and broke the skin! You never mentioned killer rabbits on your travel to here.” “That’s because I didn’t encounter any, and I doubt if that was really a rabbit anymore. It would seem that animals CAN be hosts after all, they just need a human one or something similar to leave the hills. Anyway, we should really get out here, there are more coming.” “What? So? I’m sure we can handle a few overgrown possessed rabbits.” Ulivik says still preoccupied with his very minor wound. “A few, sure, but how about hundreds of them?” you say and draw his attention to literally that number popping up all around you. The glaring red eyes of hundreds of possessed bunnies are upon you and their herbivore buck teeth have now been replaced with the toothy fangs of a carnivore hungry for flesh. And they look like they haven’t tasted a bi-ped in a long time… > You fight your way back home You slash out at the nearest rabbits and shout at Ulivik that you need to get the hell out of here. “What?! We can’t run from rabbits! We’ve both fought worse than this!” Ulivik shouts chopping down a few more of them. “First of all they aren’t just rabbits, they’re rabbits with wendigos in them. Second of all rabbits are notorious for breeding at an alarming rate. Chances are there are even more bunny bodies for the wendigos to take control of even if we manage to kill all of the ones here. Running from rabbits might not exactly be the bravest thing, but constantly being assaulted by a horde while going deeper into enemy territory and trying to find something that might not even be there anymore is just stupid.” You say hacking at more of them and shaking off the ones jumping on you. “…agh! Oh all right!” Ulivik shouts and the pair of you manage to cut a path through the rabbit mass and make a break for it.” You and Ulivik run chopping up rabbits along the way as the “little” nippers are hopping after you and occasionally leaping on you and get a few bites in. This might all be very comical if your life wasn’t in mortal danger. “SHIT!” Ulivik shouts when a group of rabbits catch up and pile on one of his ankles, biting and clawing at it. He falls down face first into the snow and you immediately get rid of the rabbits around Ulivik who is doing likewise. “Get off! Get off!” he shouts killing them. While you’re kneeling down trying to help, one of the rabbits jumps on your back and with his teeth takes the amulet chain and leaps off with it. “What the…get that little furry bastard!” you shout when you feel it lifted from around your neck, but it’s too late the rabbit has run off with it and the rest of the horde is coming. “Come on we gotta get outta here!” Ulivik says and the pair of you resume your escape. Unfortunately you’re starting to hear the whispers again. The multitude of them, though one in particular stands out. “Welcome back Bane of Rask, we’ve been waiting for you…I’VE been waiting for you.” A voice in your head says. “Shit, it’s starting, they’re getting inside my head!” you say stomping on another rabbit. “Just ignore it like you did last time!” Ulivik exclaims. “Easy for you to say! Argh dammit! My fucking head!” “You’ve gotten old Bane…you should just give up and let me take over, you’ll be able to lifetimes…” the voice says. “Shut up.” “Why do you resist, you’re too weak now. Just submit and this will all go easier…” Between the spiritual assaults on your mind and Ulivik’s chewed up ankle the pair of you aren’t exactly running the fastest anymore. You have to stop many times to fight your way through, but it may be true that luck favors the fool and the pair of you have been mighty foolish for doing this in the first place, and eventually you see the end in sight. “There! The markers! If we get past those we’ll be fine!” Ulivik speaks too soon however as it is at this point several hundred white rabbits who were blending in with the snow open their eyes and reveal the glowing red pin points of evil within them. They sit between you and the closest escape and a larger gray rabbit comes bounding out of a nearby hole in the ground. It’s nearly the size of a bear. You fought a gray wendigo before; you would guess this is the same one. Their leader and the main one that’s been taunting you the whole time. “Give up Bane! Your time on this earth is over!” “SHUT THE FUCK UP!” “Become meat then! I’ll just use your svelk friend since you seem to care for him so much!” You hadn’t heard it yet even with the assault on your head, but all of the rabbits in unison make that awful howling noise that you tried so hard to forget about. Even Ulivik with his magical protection winces at the noise. The battle is then joined as they run at you. You feel bites and slashes of several little claws and teeth breaking your skin. In a way the physical pain helps since its counter acting the mental attack still going on in your head. The wendigo leader clumsily leaps towards you even stepping on his own smaller brethren. You roll away and give him a couple chops to his head, succeeding in lopping off part of his ear. This only serves to anger him further and he does a short rush into you, knocking you down. Other rabbits immediately take advantage of the situation and hop on top you and start to bite. You’re busily trying to get them off of you and then the leader smacks you in the head with his oversized claws. You fall into the snow again, this time in a daze. “You call yourself an Eternal…such arrogance of an incredibly short lived race. WE have more right to be known as eternals and I will make you suffer for your hubris!” you hear the voice say and then several long fangs sink into the lower part of your leg as the leader attempts to eat you alive. Now you aren’t exactly sure at this point due to the extreme physical pain, but you believe the wendigo leader has most likely bitten straight through your leg and if it hasn’t been completely severed yet, it’s only hanging on by broken bone and torn skin. You yell out and muster all your remaining strength, sit up and bring your sword down onto the wendigo leader’s head. Blood spurts everywhere as you twist it into his skull and your own leg is still chewed on in the death throes of the wendigo’s host. Ulivik, who was being overwhelmed by the rest of the rabbits, finally manages to get to you and runs his own sword into the side of the gray wendigo several times causing it to finally release its fangs from your mangled leg. You quickly remove it from the wendigo’s mouth and see a good portion of your leg completely destroyed and bleeding profusely. Despite this fact, you’re determined that you are NOT going to die today. You didn’t get this far just to be eaten by some possessed fucking rabbits. Ulivik helps you up and you hop as fast as you can towards the markers leaving a trail of gore in your wake. When you fall, you crawl as fast as you can instead. Ulivik tries to carry you, but you tell him to just keep the rest of the rabbits off of the pair of you. Exhausted and severely injured you manage to make it past the safety barrier, causing the attack to completely cease and you no longer hear the whispers in your head any longer. The rabbits all stare at you from afar. You’re only about ten feet away and you can feel their hatred all the way from here. Ulivik drags you further away from the wendigo area until you tell him to stop. “Hey! Stop it, I’m not a fucking rag doll!” you shout. “I need to do something about this leg and fast, I’m beginning to feel really dizzy over here. Make a fire and quickly!” One quick look and you know there’s no way it can be saved. It’s only hanging on as it is. You make the decision and chop through the remaining bone and muscle that was still connecting it to the rest of your body. This part doesn’t hurt as it’s mostly already disconnected from any nerves anyway. The following part of applying your heated sword to stop the bleeding hurts like hell though. Dizzy and weakened from this whole ordeal, you see that you’ve stopped the bleeding and fall unconscious mumbling “Don’t leave my leg here.” A couple days later you finally wake up, though you almost weren’t expecting to. “Ah, you’re up, good. Your new leg is finished; I had the wood carver make one for you after I dragged your body back to town. The people here were shocked to see you laid out in such a manner. They thought you were dead at first.” “Ugh, I sort of wish I was…I’m hardly the supreme warrior I once was, if I’m getting my leg chewed off by oversized rabbits. I’m just not quite ashamed enough to kill myself over it, my will to survive is just too strong I guess.” “It’s my fault anyway, I should’ve went into that area myself…” “Oh no. Don’t start doing that. Blaming yourself for what MIGHT have happened is a losing battle. Trust me, I’ve had that same battle. I’m an adult I make my own decisions and I chose to go with you, besides if I hadn’t have come you would’ve had all those little killer wendigo bunnies all over your ass instead and knowing you, you would’ve still insisted on heading to those ruins and gotten yourself killed in the process.” “Ha ha, maybe so.” “(Sigh) fucking rabbits...you know they must’ve been cannibalizing themselves in those forms for years. Well the wendigos might not have killed me, but I’m sure my reputation is. Ah fuck it, if I get a few snickers from the locals for losing my leg to a damned rabbit, it’s not the worst thing in the world.” “Yeah, about that…I sort of lied. I told everyone you saved my life from a ten-foot wendigo that had taken host in an ogre turning it into a complete abomination with rows of teeth and that it was planning to organize a way for the rest of its fellows to leave the barrier.” “What?!” “I know you don’t like to lie, but I just thought it sounded a lot more impressive. I mean you know the situation was really dangerous and I know the situation was really dangerous, but everyone else would just think…rabbits? And then laugh like you said.” “First of all, I’m not actually opposed to lying, I just don’t do it when I respect the person enough not to do it to them. Anyway, I guess you were just concerned about my reputation. I won’t argue the point and it’s done now, besides it’s not like anyone’s going to confirm it by going up there. Hopefully I just don’t get anymore snot nosed kids following me around town begging me to train them because those days are long over.” You laugh. You and Ulivik both talk for a few more hours before he eventually leaves to go see his mother. You take the opportunity to inspect your new wooden leg and try it on. It’s going to take some time getting used to, but most major changes do and you’ve survived those. > Year 75 As the years creep up on you and despite missing part of your leg, you still feel don’t feel in any ill health. It’s mostly just aches and pains from your more physical years catching up with you. After the leg incident though, you took that permanent position at the Keplavisk military academy as a strategy instructor, though nowadays it’s looking like it’ll become the Rask military academy. Rask is in the process of becoming a “real nation” rather than just a collection of allied towns. You don’t really know all the politics of it, but the main guiding force was justified Raskian paranoia again. Ever since the Eternal Dominion’s war with the Felkan Kingdom grinded to a halt, the ED has been making overtures to Rask to join them in the veiled form of threats rather than any sort of diplomatic alliance agreements. While starting a war on two fronts is always a bad idea you’re guessing Edgar needs the resources that Rask has to make his final push to conquer the Felkans once and for all. You’re also guessing he’s intent on ignoring your advice of not attacking Rask too, you’re just surprised he held out this long. You’re not really worried about it if it comes to war. The Raskians may not have the unnaturally bred “eternals” like the ED does, but they’re trained well enough to make the cost very high if they are in invaded. You should know, you trained most of them. You hear a knock on your door and you slowly make your way over. “Mail for you Mr. Bane.” A delivery girl says to you when you open up the door. You toss a gold coin to her and take your letter. At first you figure it’s from Ulivik, no doubt telling you about whatever grand adventure he’s on this time. The last time he was here, he was for his mother’s funeral. He kept his composure for the most part, but it still wasn’t a good time for him. He didn’t say it in so many words, but he did say that you were the only family he had left. You didn’t follow up, but the pair you said your goodbyes both of you knowing that you had that bond similar to that of a father and son. But this letter isn’t from Ulivik, it’s mysteriously labeled as from “a friend.” Considering you’ve never really had any, you’re baffled to as who it could be. When you open it you see that it’s from Edgar, several pages in fact. You sit down to read all of it. The beginning of it hopes that the letter has found you as he wants you to take in all of what he has to tell you. He begins by stating that he’s dying. He mentions his health is deteriorating by the day and he doesn’t know how much longer he has left. His “successors” are likely to start a war with Rask soon after his death, it’s only due to their respect that they don’t. The same way his respect for you caused him not to. The majority of the letter explains that he wants you to understand why he did what he did and how he wished that you had joined him. He says the incident with Kane never left him and how if he’d only been there to listen to him and help him more, none of that might’ve happened. Perhaps even the Empire would’ve survived. (You doubt that though, it would’ve just taken longer) When the Empire was in its last days he saw how chaotic the new eternals were and realized they needed guidance and a purpose much like Kane did. He always thought that you’d do it, but you left leaving him as the only person willing to. He says it was very difficult and while they ultimately they fell in line, but without the purpose of conquest they wouldn’t stay that way for long. So he began forging a new empire as it were, with the eternals as the leaders as it always should’ve been. The newer generations of eternals were better disciplined, as he made sure their training went very much the same way yours did. Still, they are much more arrogant that he ever was. They believe it is their destiny to rule the world and he believes that he’s set something in motion that even he is no longer in control of. “Ah Edgar, always getting yourself in over your head.” You say to yourself. The rest of the letter mentions that you two are the last of the old Eternals. Warrick died in Battle of Yaquan when the ED successfully took the city from the Felkans eleven years ago. He says that while he still considered him a traitor to side with former enemies like that, he took no pleasure in his death and heard he died well. Brenda died four years ago, but she apparently had become increasingly withdrawn years before that, to the point where she no longer even participated in the major decisions concerning the ED. She was found dead by her own hand with a note stating that she wished to be burned and her ashes scattered near Fort Glory like she did with her husband Roldan. This wish was of course granted. Edgar’s last portion of the message also states that he has a last request as well, he wants you to come to the Eternal Dominion as he would like to see you again. He knows that you’ve had your differences and you weren’t ever friends, but right now, you’re the closest thing he’s got. He’s already made the arrangements to let you through and will have an escort waiting for you on the Rask/ED borders for the next few days. He also has placed a separate message with his seal on it, so that they may identify you. The message ends there. > You take a trip to the Eternal Dominion If Edgar wants to see you, then why not? If he had anything sinister planned for you like having his escort kill you when you arrive. Besides you’re old and you didn’t worry about dying in combat when you were twenty, you’re not going to start worrying about it now. You pack a few things for your trip and get your horse ready since you know Rask carriages don’t travel through ED territory anymore. It’s hard getting on damn a horse ever since losing part of your leg, but you’re not about to walk the way there! When you reach the border the next day, you see a group of soldiers camped out in the distance beyond it. You see an ED Flag flying so you assume that’s the escort Edgar told you about. When you approach several of the soldiers point muskets at you…heh you sometimes forget of how technology has marched on. They immediately ask for identification and you state your name and hand them the message with Edgar’s seal on it. The leader, who is a blonde woman with fair features reads through it and greets you. “Greetings sir. My apologies on the initial caution, but we had to be sure. I am Sergeant Kalah, and I am to escort you to Prime Eternal Edgar. I am told he will be most pleased to see you, though I must admit I was also curious about you myself. Many are, as the Prime Eternal has mentioned you several times in high regard.” “Heh, yeah I’ve heard about that before. Never get used to it though. Well let’s get on our way then.” Sergeant Kalah is very talkative on your trip, and goes on about great the ED is, and how it provides for all. She sounds very much like you did a long time ago. You’re a little curious about something so you interrupt her propaganda speak. “Tell me sergeant, you and your men are all on the youngish side, what generation of eternal are you exactly?” “Me sir? I am fourth! We all are, we are newest eternals to serve directly in combat and I’m proud to say that we are so far the first to have natural night vision!” “You can see in the dark eh? That must come in pretty handy. Wish I’d had that back in the day.” “Oh yes, the glorious Eternal Dominion was able to fight those treacherous svelk mercenaries that the cowardly Felkans employ on equal footing when we were deployed!” “Hmm, any other natural abilities?” “The fourth generation also regenerates better than the third even though they were the first to have such abilities. Under the right circumstances we can potentially regenerate a lost limb.” “Now THAT is something I definitely would’ve liked to had!” you say knocking on your wooden leg. “Still, with all these advantages I’m sort of surprised you haven’t utterly crushed the Felkans yet.” “I believe we would, even with our resource shortages. Most of us do! We have the Felkans on the run, I do not understand why we have not pressed forward with our attacks, I long to be in combat again…but it is not my place to question the Prime Eternal’s decisions, I’m sure he has a good reason…” Wow, that line sounds familiar. “Well all I can say is, sometimes the political aspects of a nation are more complicated than the wars.” You reply Sergeant Kalah doesn’t argue, but just says that you may have more wisdom about such things. Kalah and you continue to speak with each other about various subjects and she’s courteous the entire time, in fact she’s downright friendly. You definitely weren’t expecting that and it’s sort of a nice change of pace. While traveling through a town, a couple of pathetic peasants are being beaten in the streets by another soldier, though his uniform seems to be a different color even though it has the same markings. “You there! Why are you beating these peasants! What crime have they committed?” she demands. “Ma’am! These peasants were caught stealing food.” “Well you shouldn’t be beating them just for that…you should be chopping their hands off!” Kalah says, followed by pleas and screams of the peasants. “…yes ma’am…alright get over here you lousy thieving scum, let’s make this quick!” the soldier says drawing his sword and striking out at the screaming peasant. However, in his enthusiasm to follow orders he ends up hacking off the peasant’s entire arm. More screaming arises from the female peasant who rushes to what is probably are dying husband. Sergeant Kalah rolls her eyes. “I swear never let a human do an Eternal’s job…men shoot all three of them.” “No wait!” the soldier says before several musket balls hit his body. The two peasants are also killed instantly. The onlookers of this event duck and hide, but the sergeant makes her point known. “Listen up! This town is now on watch! If I hear of anymore thievery or other crimes, I’ll be back to burn down this whole town! And for those of you in charge of keeping the law around here, I better see more competence displayed in the future than I saw today or I’ll have you drawn and quartered! You are ALL servants of the Eternals! We are your masters, we know better than you and you will OBEY.” And there it is, the ruthless arrogance. It would appear than Kalah’s friendliness extends only to other Eternals. Can’t say you’re surprised though. You all move on and eventually you reach the capital and the palace where Edgar resides. Funny how this is the first time you’ve ever been to the palace after all those years serving the Empire. “This is where we part company, but I must say I hope we meet again in the future, it was an honor to meet you.” “And it was a pleasure to meet you too…” you say and then you decide to give her a big fat thrill. “…and if I may say if we have more eternals as pretty and commanding as you, we will no doubt rule for thousands of years to come.” “…I…oh…well thank you sir!” she stutters and smiles before riding off. New guards accompany you into the palace and through it. You’ve never been in here before, so you do a little sight seeing as you walk. Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. Did Edgar get married? You’ve never heard of their being any sort of “queen” of the ED you always assumed he was just ruling alone. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. “Oh so you decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. “Well, I certainly can say your military is politer than the royalty around here.” “That is probably because they believe all the stories Prime Eternal Edgar says about you. Such is the foolishness of youth.” “And who the hell are you exactly?” “Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true eternal who served with honor!” “Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say and Rissok gets in your face. “Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” “Well nothing is stopping you. You got the guards here, Edgar’s too sick to prevent it and I’ve only got one leg, so I’d say it’s a fair fight.” You remark. “Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you may enter at any time. Before you do, you have to ask the woman who she is because you get the impression she isn’t an eternal. You just sense it. “My apologies, I didn’t know that Edgar was even married. What title do you go by, queen? Emperess?” “(sniff) No, I’m none of those things. I’m just Eva. Sometime Lady Eva if we’re being formal, but I am not married to Edgar nor am I common knowledge to a majority of the public, I am merely his companion of sorts. He could not marry me, for concern of marrying a non-eternal might weaken his position of leadership. I understood this from the beginning though and do not blame him for it. Eternals have more wisdom on these matters.” You’re pretty sure that isn’t necessarily true, but you understand Edgar’s rationale and Eva seems to genuinely be in love with him. You ask her if she wants to come in with you, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you enter the bedroom. When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. “Edgar? ” “(wheeze) ah…you came…I knew you would. (cough cough) You’re also looking much better than I am…minus a leg I see. How did that happen?” “Long story…but you! How the hell did you get this sick?! Other than physical pains racking my body, I’ve never been actually sick. I didn’t think we could!” “Well…after you’ve suffered five or six assassination attempts all laced with various poisons, it tends to fuck up your body a lot quicker…anyway there isn’t much time left I doubt if I’ll make it through the night (cough cough) you’ve read my letter I take it?” “Yes.” “Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” “Don’t you have a successor? What about Eva?” “I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but we can’t have children. We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do.” “Hmm, I have to admit, I always wondered why all those strumpets I slept with during my merc days never came back with little bundles demanding support.” You reply. “Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the person I think could be a successor…” You already know where Edgar is going with this. “Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged me out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to me! I haven’t even been living in the ED since it’s formation!” “That doesn’t matter! You’re still an Eternal! One of the first and probably the best of us! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to.” Sheesh, you haven’t even agreed to anything and Edgar’s already suggesting mass purges. It’s like you never left the Empire. “Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) I tried to do what you might’ve done if only you’d taken the reins of power, but I can’t go on any longer. The only person who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier is you. I’m asking you not just as former comrade in arms…but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power and that idiot Rissok will probably the worst of the lot before Edgar’s body is even cold. Still, this is his dying request. You could always accept his proposal just to appease him on his deathbed. > You lie and tell him you'll accept the position This is his last request, what could it hurt to reassure him on his deathbed? It’s not like he’s going to know after he dies. “Okay, Edgar. I’ll take it, but I’m still skeptical that I’ll do as good a job as you.” You say to Edgar who manages to smile. “Thank you, but as I have said, you will find that you will have more support than you think. Now then, let us talk, I wish to know what you’ve been up to. So many years have passed and my own time is short.” You oblige Edgar and try to tell him as much as you can about what you’ve been doing since you first left the Empire. He seems to enjoy your tales while interjecting a few of his own, but he mostly just listens as the hours pass his life tether to this world begins to slip away. Finally he has stopped listening completely and died. You sit in silence for a moment to say goodbye to your former comrade in arms…no, a brother. You are about to leave and that’s when Rissok comes barging in with a couple of guards and Eva. “Is he dead yet?” Rissok asks. “Yes, and show some fucking respect.” You say. “Respect? I have been serving the Prime with distinction for years! What have you done, except turn your back on the eternal name! You’re no better than that traitor Warrick! Worse, you think to come here to steal the throne, well not on my watch!” At this point Rissok pulls out a flintlock pistol and points it at you. “Steal the throne? Hah! I wouldn’t want to run this asylum even if I was begged to, which I was.” “I knew it! I knew the Prime wanted to see you for such a reason!” “Yeah, and I said I wasn’t interested, so you can just calm the hell down…” “Rissok stop it! Is your lust for power so overwhelming that you can’t even contain yourself even in the presence of my dead loved one’s body?” Eva shouts tearfully. “Shaddup, ya human harlot!” Rissok says and smacks Eva in the face with the flintlock, dropping her to the floor. You take this opportunity to rush at Rissok, but unfortunately you aren’t as fast as you used to be. Rissok manages to step backward just in time to shoot you in the chest. You fall to the ground mortally wounded. “And so ends the first generation. You had your time in the sun, now it is time for the seconds to take over where you failed. Guard, finish this relic off.” “Nah, we’re not following you either.” A guard says and raises his own musket to Rissok and blows his head off. Rissok’s body collapses on to the floor next to you, blood, skull and brains leaking all over the place. Staring at Rissok’s headless body, you chuckle in between your dying gasps before finally passing from this world.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>If Edgar wants to see you, then why not? If he had anything sinister planned for you like having his escort kill you when you arrive. Besides you’re old and you didn’t worry about dying in combat when you were twenty, you’re not going to start worrying about it now. You pack a few things for your trip and get your horse ready since you know Rask carriages don’t travel through ED territory anymore. It’s hard getting on damn a horse ever since losing part of your leg, but you’re not about to walk the way there! When you reach the border the next day, you see a group of soldiers camped out in the distance beyond it. You see an ED Flag flying so you assume that’s the escort Edgar told you about. When you approach several of the soldiers point muskets at you…heh you sometimes forget of how technology has marched on. They immediately ask for identification and you state your name and hand them the message with Edgar’s seal on it. The leader, who is a blonde woman with fair features reads through it and greets you. “Greetings sir. My apologies on the initial caution, but we had to be sure. I am Sergeant Kalah, and I am to escort you to Prime Eternal Edgar. I am told he will be most pleased to see you, though I must admit I was also curious about you myself. Many are, as the Prime Eternal has mentioned you several times in high regard.” “Heh, yeah I’ve heard about that before. Never get used to it though. Well let’s get on our way then.” Sergeant Kalah is very talkative on your trip, and goes on about great the ED is, and how it provides for all. She sounds very much like you did a long time ago. You’re a little curious about something so you interrupt her propaganda speak. “Tell me sergeant, you and your men are all on the youngish side, what generation of eternal are you exactly?” “Me sir? I am fourth! We all are, we are newest eternals to serve directly in combat and I’m proud to say that we are so far the first to have natural night vision!” “You can see in the dark eh? That must come in pretty handy. Wish I’d had that back in the day.” “Oh yes, the glorious Eternal Dominion was able to fight those treacherous svelk mercenaries that the cowardly Felkans employ on equal footing when we were deployed!” “Hmm, any other natural abilities?” “The fourth generation also regenerates better than the third even though they were the first to have such abilities. Under the right circumstances we can potentially regenerate a lost limb.” “Now THAT is something I definitely would’ve liked to had!” you say knocking on your wooden leg. “Still, with all these advantages I’m sort of surprised you haven’t utterly crushed the Felkans yet.” “I believe we would, even with our resource shortages. Most of us do! We have the Felkans on the run, I do not understand why we have not pressed forward with our attacks, I long to be in combat again…but it is not my place to question the Prime Eternal’s decisions, I’m sure he has a good reason…” Wow, that line sounds familiar. “Well all I can say is, sometimes the political aspects of a nation are more complicated than the wars.” You reply Sergeant Kalah doesn’t argue, but just says that you may have more wisdom about such things. Kalah and you continue to speak with each other about various subjects and she’s courteous the entire time, in fact she’s downright friendly. You definitely weren’t expecting that and it’s sort of a nice change of pace. While traveling through a town, a couple of pathetic peasants are being beaten in the streets by another soldier, though his uniform seems to be a different color even though it has the same markings. “You there! Why are you beating these peasants! What crime have they committed?” she demands. “Ma’am! These peasants were caught stealing food.” “Well you shouldn’t be beating them just for that…you should be chopping their hands off!” Kalah says, followed by pleas and screams of the peasants. “…yes ma’am…alright get over here you lousy thieving scum, let’s make this quick!” the soldier says drawing his sword and striking out at the screaming peasant. However, in his enthusiasm to follow orders he ends up hacking off the peasant’s entire arm. More screaming arises from the female peasant who rushes to what is probably are dying husband. Sergeant Kalah rolls her eyes. “I swear never let a human do an Eternal’s job…men shoot all three of them.” “No wait!” the soldier says before several musket balls hit his body. The two peasants are also killed instantly. The onlookers of this event duck and hide, but the sergeant makes her point known. “Listen up! This town is now on watch! If I hear of anymore thievery or other crimes, I’ll be back to burn down this whole town! And for those of you in charge of keeping the law around here, I better see more competence displayed in the future than I saw today or I’ll have you drawn and quartered! You are ALL servants of the Eternals! We are your masters, we know better than you and you will OBEY.” And there it is, the ruthless arrogance. It would appear than Kalah’s friendliness extends only to other Eternals. Can’t say you’re surprised though. You all move on and eventually you reach the capital and the palace where Edgar resides. Funny how this is the first time you’ve ever been to the palace after all those years serving the Empire. “This is where we part company, but I must say I hope we meet again in the future, it was an honor to meet you.” “And it was a pleasure to meet you too…” you say and then you decide to give her a big fat thrill. “…and if I may say if we have more eternals as pretty and commanding as you, we will no doubt rule for thousands of years to come.” “…I…oh…well thank you sir!” she stutters and smiles before riding off. New guards accompany you into the palace and through it. You’ve never been in here before, so you do a little sight seeing as you walk. Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. Did Edgar get married? You’ve never heard of their being any sort of “queen” of the ED you always assumed he was just ruling alone. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. “Oh so you decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. “Well, I certainly can say your military is politer than the royalty around here.” “That is probably because they believe all the stories Prime Eternal Edgar says about you. Such is the foolishness of youth.” “And who the hell are you exactly?” “Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true eternal who served with honor!” “Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say and Rissok gets in your face. “Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” “Well nothing is stopping you. You got the guards here, Edgar’s too sick to prevent it and I’ve only got one leg, so I’d say it’s a fair fight.” You remark. “Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you may enter at any time. Before you do, you have to ask the woman who she is because you get the impression she isn’t an eternal. You just sense it. “My apologies, I didn’t know that Edgar was even married. What title do you go by, queen? Emperess?” “(sniff) No, I’m none of those things. I’m just Eva. Sometime Lady Eva if we’re being formal, but I am not married to Edgar nor am I common knowledge to a majority of the public, I am merely his companion of sorts. He could not marry me, for concern of marrying a non-eternal might weaken his position of leadership. I understood this from the beginning though and do not blame him for it. Eternals have more wisdom on these matters.” You’re pretty sure that isn’t necessarily true, but you understand Edgar’s rationale and Eva seems to genuinely be in love with him. You ask her if she wants to come in with you, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you enter the bedroom. When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. “Edgar? ” “(wheeze) ah…you came…I knew you would. (cough cough) You’re also looking much better than I am…minus a leg I see. How did that happen?” “Long story…but you! How the hell did you get this sick?! Other than physical pains racking my body, I’ve never been actually sick. I didn’t think we could!” “Well…after you’ve suffered five or six assassination attempts all laced with various poisons, it tends to fuck up your body a lot quicker…anyway there isn’t much time left I doubt if I’ll make it through the night (cough cough) you’ve read my letter I take it?” “Yes.” “Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” “Don’t you have a successor? What about Eva?” “I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but we can’t have children. We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do.” “Hmm, I have to admit, I always wondered why all those strumpets I slept with during my merc days never came back with little bundles demanding support.” You reply. “Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the person I think could be a successor…” You already know where Edgar is going with this. “Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged me out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to me! I haven’t even been living in the ED since it’s formation!” “That doesn’t matter! You’re still an Eternal! One of the first and probably the best of us! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to.” Sheesh, you haven’t even agreed to anything and Edgar’s already suggesting mass purges. It’s like you never left the Empire. “Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) I tried to do what you might’ve done if only you’d taken the reins of power, but I can’t go on any longer. The only person who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier is you. I’m asking you not just as former comrade in arms…but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power and that idiot Rissok will probably the worst of the lot before Edgar’s body is even cold. Still, this is his dying request. You could always accept his proposal just to appease him on his deathbed. > You tell the truth and decline You didn’t lie to Kane when he asked you to join him. You didn’t lie to Brenda when she asked you to join the Eternal Dominion And you aren’t going to lie to Edgar now. It might not be what he wants to hear, but it’s what he’s going to hear. “Edgar, I’m not accepting this position. First of all it’s not realistic despite what you want to believe and I think deep down you know that. Second of all, if I wanted the reins of power as you say, I would’ve taken them a long time ago. Did I ever think about it? Sure, but I came to the conclusion that it wouldn’t lead to anywhere good…and given your condition I’d say I was half right. I say half right, because it is apparent that you did gain a loving wife out it, or whatever she is to you.” Edgar is silent while you continue. “And while I don’t say my own path was any better, it was ultimately mine and it’s one I intend to finish whatever the future may hold for it. Edgar, don’t worry about what you accomplished and if it’ll last. Just be proud of it now and spend your last moments with your wife. That’s who you need to be concerned about.” Edgar hacks and coughs up blood and spits it into a nearby bucket and struggles to breathe, but manages to answer you. “Very well…you’ve made your point. And you’re probably right. You usually were. (wheeze) Bring my…my wife in. I do wish to spend the last moments with her…and farewell…my brother.” “Farewell Edgar.” You say with a nod and leave. You step outside and tell Eva that Edgar wants to spend his remaining time left with her. She seems happy with this idea though of course still upset. She runs in and one of the guards says he will escort you out. On the way out, you run into Rissok in the halls and once again he gets into your face. “Leaving again are we? Just as well you aren’t welcome here anyway. In fact I’d suggest you make it quick. As soon as Edgar’s breathes his last breath I’m going to make a lot of changes around here.” “You’re saying you’re going to be in charge after Edgar?” “Of course! Others might say they are, but they’ll be silenced soon enough, just like all traitors will be. I am the only one qualified to run this nation! “Hm, well…we can’t have that.” you say and with a quick motion you pull out your dagger and stab Rissok in the neck. Blood spurts out like a fountain when you pull it out and Rissok gurgles clutching his throat attempting to curse you the entire time. You pretty much expected to get your head blown off by the guard standing next to you, but he just stood there and did nothing. “I had a feeling you were going to do that.” He says in an almost bored tone. “How old is that dagger anyway? That design was outdated even before I was born. We use a much lighter weight metal now that allows a for a smoother cut.” “Still gets the job done. So I’m guessing by me being still alive, you have no objections with his death?” “Feh, you could’ve killed him in front of the entire army and nobody would’ve lifted a finger. He was an asshole and I know I wouldn’t have followed him even if the entire Eternal Dominion depended on it. Besides, we third generation eternals are more fit to run things than any of the seconds. Just glad you didn’t decide to stick around, would’ve hated to have to kill a legend.” “Well if you ever decide to go to war with Rask, you might still get your chance.” You say and the pair of you leave Rissok’s body behind in the corridor as you exit the palace. A carriage takes you back to the border where a horse is supplied to you to make the rest of journey home. And you are certainly glad to get back. It’s certainly been a strange few days for you, but then you’re use to strangeness going on in your life. A couple days later you get the news that Edgar has died and that the new leadership of the Eternal Dominion as of now is uncertain. Rask of course is still fully expecting war to come their way, but you suspect that probably other than a few skirmishes, most of the fighting will be within the ED itself, or pushing ahead against the Felkan Kingdom. You also realize that you really are the last one left now. Kane, Roldan, Gerald, Warrick, Brenda and Edgar all gone. The thought saddens you and you’re reminded of the phrase Gruz told you as he died. “You’ll outlive everyone…” It looks like it’s come true at last. Oh sure there still are all the newer eternals around, but you were the first to be the perfect Empire soldiers in the misguided hope that you could save it. A project that failed utterly for its leaders. You think about some of the other Eternals in your class that didn’t even make it past training, or the few like Cyrus that were transferred to the Shadow Guard. You also heard there was a group of eternals that came before you, though all of them died in training and never even made it into the field while the Empire was still “perfecting” their plan. You wonder if all of you had made it and kept together as a separate unit, would it have made a difference? Who knows? You wonder if you’ll even be remembered as the years go by. Not just years or decades, but centuries. Edgar tried to create something to last and while he’ll probably have the best chance out of everyone in your group, ultimately history may just list him as a footnote as some obscure ruler. As for the rest of you, you’ll be forgotten. At best, you may have the “honor” being brought up in tall tale by drunkards and bards in taverns, which you can live with, but you’d like the rest of your old friends… no, your old brothers and sister to be remembered. That’s when you get the idea. You shall write you memoirs. Maybe nobody will read them or care, but what the hell, you need something to occupy your time in your twilight years. You’ve got a lot of it after all. Grabbing a quill and some parchment you begin to write. You want to get as much down as you can, but of course a lot of history has passed and you’re having a little difficulty of where to start. “Damn, I should’ve done this a lot sooner…oh yeah…might as well start with her.” Mistress was her name, and that was about the only thing I ever knew about her. Oh that and the fact that she was a sadistic svelk bitch that helped trained me and my bothers and sister to be killers. Not just killers though, Eternals. This is our story.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 75 As the years creep up on you and despite missing part of your leg, you still feel don’t feel in any ill health. It’s mostly just aches and pains from your more physical years catching up with you. After the leg incident though, you took that permanent position at the Keplavisk military academy as a strategy instructor, though nowadays it’s looking like it’ll become the Rask military academy. Rask is in the process of becoming a “real nation” rather than just a collection of allied towns. You don’t really know all the politics of it, but the main guiding force was justified Raskian paranoia again. Ever since the Eternal Dominion’s war with the Felkan Kingdom grinded to a halt, the ED has been making overtures to Rask to join them in the veiled form of threats rather than any sort of diplomatic alliance agreements. While starting a war on two fronts is always a bad idea you’re guessing Edgar needs the resources that Rask has to make his final push to conquer the Felkans once and for all. You’re also guessing he’s intent on ignoring your advice of not attacking Rask too, you’re just surprised he held out this long. You’re not really worried about it if it comes to war. The Raskians may not have the unnaturally bred “eternals” like the ED does, but they’re trained well enough to make the cost very high if they are in invaded. You should know, you trained most of them. You hear a knock on your door and you slowly make your way over. “Mail for you Mr. Bane.” A delivery girl says to you when you open up the door. You toss a gold coin to her and take your letter. At first you figure it’s from Ulivik, no doubt telling you about whatever grand adventure he’s on this time. The last time he was here, he was for his mother’s funeral. He kept his composure for the most part, but it still wasn’t a good time for him. He didn’t say it in so many words, but he did say that you were the only family he had left. You didn’t follow up, but the pair you said your goodbyes both of you knowing that you had that bond similar to that of a father and son. But this letter isn’t from Ulivik, it’s mysteriously labeled as from “a friend.” Considering you’ve never really had any, you’re baffled to as who it could be. When you open it you see that it’s from Edgar, several pages in fact. You sit down to read all of it. The beginning of it hopes that the letter has found you as he wants you to take in all of what he has to tell you. He begins by stating that he’s dying. He mentions his health is deteriorating by the day and he doesn’t know how much longer he has left. His “successors” are likely to start a war with Rask soon after his death, it’s only due to their respect that they don’t. The same way his respect for you caused him not to. The majority of the letter explains that he wants you to understand why he did what he did and how he wished that you had joined him. He says the incident with Kane never left him and how if he’d only been there to listen to him and help him more, none of that might’ve happened. Perhaps even the Empire would’ve survived. (You doubt that though, it would’ve just taken longer) When the Empire was in its last days he saw how chaotic the new eternals were and realized they needed guidance and a purpose much like Kane did. He always thought that you’d do it, but you left leaving him as the only person willing to. He says it was very difficult and while they ultimately they fell in line, but without the purpose of conquest they wouldn’t stay that way for long. So he began forging a new empire as it were, with the eternals as the leaders as it always should’ve been. The newer generations of eternals were better disciplined, as he made sure their training went very much the same way yours did. Still, they are much more arrogant that he ever was. They believe it is their destiny to rule the world and he believes that he’s set something in motion that even he is no longer in control of. “Ah Edgar, always getting yourself in over your head.” You say to yourself. The rest of the letter mentions that you two are the last of the old Eternals. Warrick died in Battle of Yaquan when the ED successfully took the city from the Felkans eleven years ago. He says that while he still considered him a traitor to side with former enemies like that, he took no pleasure in his death and heard he died well. Brenda died four years ago, but she apparently had become increasingly withdrawn years before that, to the point where she no longer even participated in the major decisions concerning the ED. She was found dead by her own hand with a note stating that she wished to be burned and her ashes scattered near Fort Glory like she did with her husband Roldan. This wish was of course granted. Edgar’s last portion of the message also states that he has a last request as well, he wants you to come to the Eternal Dominion as he would like to see you again. He knows that you’ve had your differences and you weren’t ever friends, but right now, you’re the closest thing he’s got. He’s already made the arrangements to let you through and will have an escort waiting for you on the Rask/ED borders for the next few days. He also has placed a separate message with his seal on it, so that they may identify you. The message ends there. > You write a letter back to Edgar While Edgar may not have any ill will towards you, you just aren’t sure about his subjects. You decide it wouldn’t be the best idea to go deep into Eternal Dominion territory, but Edgar does deserve a letter back, so you begin to write. When you’re finished with the letter, the next day you have a professional letter carrier take care of it with your instructions to where it is suppose to be sent. Hopefully it gets to Edgar. As the days pass into weeks, you receive the news that Edgar has died and that the Raskians are all concerned that war with the ED may come soon. You aren’t really concerned about such things, but you do feel a little bad that you didn’t visit Edgar now. You hope he got your letter in time, but you guess you’ll never know. It feels odd knowing that you’re the last eternal left from the “original” group. The rest of your days are spent mostly going about your business. War never comes to Rask as the Eternal Dominion seems to descend into civil war after Edgar’s death. There are some changes in Rask society, but you just find yourself with less and less to keep yourself occupied. Still, you do enjoy the visits from Ulivik whenever he has the time. Year 101 During one of Ulivik’s visits, you finally lose the battle you’ve successfully been fighting for over a century and death at last takes you peacefully in your sleep. The day after your death Ulivik finds you. After his own short immediate morning period, he makes the arrangements to have your body burned as requested. He then takes your ashes to a high hill and scatters them to the winds. “Rask may not have originally been your home, but it became your home. And now you’re part of it forever.” He says as his final words to you. While never remembered on a large scale, tall tales about you pop up in taverns in Rask from time to time of various things you did or didn’t do and Ulivik would always speak fondly of you whenever he was asked about his own past.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Ulivik may be an accomplished warrior now, but out of all the tales he’s told you about his adventures; he still hasn’t faced anything like the wendigos and he’s going to get himself killed or worse if he goes into this with just the hope of some magic bauble around his neck. As much as you’re loathed to go through this again, you decide to help Ulivik. “Alright I’ll go, but as soon as I think we’re in a shitload of danger that we can’t handle, you better listen to me, because this isn’t going to be the fun adventure you think it’s going to be. Understand?” “Sure, but I really don’t think it’s going to be as bad as all that.” “No, it’ll probably be worse. Now if you don’t mind I’m going to get some sleep and get my mind focused on this fool’s task.” “Fool’s task? You’re coming with me.” “Yeah, which says more about my own foolishness than yours, because you don’t know any better. I know we got these magic amulets or whatever, but these… things are going to try to get inside your head and if they succeed, it’s all over. If that happens to you, I won’t hesitate to put a sword through your head, and I expect you to do the same.” “Ha ha you’d kill me so easily?” Ulivik laughs, but you’re in no mood. “Hello, I don’t believe we’ve met…by the gods have you remembered nothing of the stories of my past? Of course I’d fucking do it so easily! I’ve killed innocent men and their entire families just because they disagreed with how the Empire was doing things, hell I even killed one of my Eternal brothers because of it. Wouldn’t be anything to kill someone who was turned into a mindless beast even if…” You stop yourself right there. “Even if what?” Ulivik asks. “Even if…he’s too stupid to see this is a really bad idea! Anyway, I’m ranting and I’m tired. I’m going to bed, you can let yourself out. And don’t say that I don’t have to go, because I’m already committed now. I gave you my word as an Eternal.” Ulivik knows when you say something like that, you’re being serious, so he just nods and tells you he’ll be by tomorrow morning before leaving. As for you, you head off to bed with a myriad of thoughts going on in your head. “Can’t believe I nearly said he was like a son to me. What the fuck am I thinkin’ about? Better get your head in the game old man, because wendigos are going to thrive on that. They live on weakness.” You mumble before drifting off to sleep. The next morning you and Ulivik set off for the infamous Wendigo Hills. Along the way, you go on about your own major conflicts with them, even when they were originally just thought to be people infected with lycanthropy like the rest of the old barbarian tribes around Rask. Ulivik listens to you in fascination like he did when he was much younger as you’ve never spoken of your experience with the wendigos before to him except in passing. It’s good to know he’s still listening. “So after that battle, no wendigo has ever left those hills?” Ulivik asks. “Eh, we had a couple that still managed to snag bodies and kill a few people before being brought down and exorcised by some of the local hedge wizards we recruited later, but that was mainly due to people idiotically still going into the hills in the first place. Sort of like what we’re doing.” You say. “But if they’re spirits can’t they just float about possessing people?” “You’d think so, but for whatever reason they can’t leave these the hills in pure spirit form, they need a body. That’s why when they’re killed they immediately try to hop into a new one or else they get pulled back to the hills. Dunno why, and I don’t think anyone’s bothered to learn the history either. Everyone’s just glad they were deprived of nearly all of their bodies by a certain Eternal decades ago.” “Ha ha, but what about animals? Couldn’t they just possess animals and leave the hills that way?” “Always wondered that myself, but again if they could I’d imagine they’d still be a major threat. Besides, when I traversed those hills I didn’t see a single animal, not one, of course I assumed that they probably ate them all. The wendigo are basically consumption and hunger in its purest form. They aren’t big thinkers in the scheme of things and it’s fortunate that they never organized past their barbarian tribal hosts.” “Sounds like it, but if they are all spirits as you say, then we shouldn’t experience any physical combat at all and with these amulets and our steel trap minds we should be fine! We might even find some sort of ancient lore about how the wendigos came to be tied to those hills!” “Well you’re as optimistic as ever. I suppose that’s good, it’ll keep your mind better prepared when the wendigos try to oppressively crush your free will. Y’know, now that I think about it, I think that’s what partially saved me. My mind was so dedicated to the Empire back in those days, the wendigos were trying to crush something that wasn’t really my own to begin with.” “And now?” “Now? I got my impenetrable cynicism to protect me, which I’ll definitely put more stock in than this ridiculous magical amulet that’ll undoubtedly fail to do anything.” “Looks like you’re off to a good start with your cynicism.” The after a couple days of travel, you eventually make it to the base of the Wendigo Hills. The markings and warning signs line stretch up, down and all the way around as far as you know. No real physical barriers of course, but even those dumb ass ogres that can’t read know better than to pass the line. Of course they usually knew better to begin with, which proves that they’re smarter in that respect. You take a deep breath and step past the markings and make your way up the forested hills. It’s at this point your amulet starts to glow a brighter blue, Ulivik claims “that’s how you know that it’s working!” Great. Still, you don’t hear any sinister whispers yet, but there is still that dead silence you remember. As if nothing living is here. Ulivik, mentions that he found a crude and well worn map of some of the Rask area during his trip through Eternal Dominion lands and wants to explore some ruins that are clearly marked on it. You mention you haven’t been here in a long time, but you don’t remember ever seeing any, so you can’t be as of much help as he might’ve thought. Ulivik says he doesn’t care though, he’s just glad to have you along. “That map is probably old Empire. Like really old Empire, and much might’ve changed since then. It could also be inaccurate to begin with.” “Yeah, that’s true, but we might as well find out. It’s the journey, not necessarily the destination that’s important! That’s what adventuring is all about.” “Funny, I always thought it was the misguided hope of finding lots of loot and the avoidance of a real job.” You reply. “That’s just a bonus.” Ulivik comments and you allow yourself to chuckle. Never thought you’d do that while in this cursed place. After a half hour or so of walking, you start to get an uneasy feeling of being watched. You mention this to Ulivik and he says he’s getting that impression too. You ask him if he’s hearing anything, but he says he isn’t except the snow crunching under foot. Neither are you, maybe the amulets are working, but it’s obvious the presence of the wendigos is near. Another hour of travel and you and Ulivik see something you didn’t expect. “Do you see that? That’s a rabbit! I thought you said nothing was living here?” Ulivik says. “When I came through I didn’t see a living creature, so I just assumed there wasn’t. I guess there is though.” You reply. “Maybe the wendigo aren’t here anymore and everyone has been scared of this place for decades for no reason.” “I wouldn’t go that far. Something is definitely here and just because we’re seeing rabbits doesn’t mean it’s safe. It just means animals must not be suitable hosts for them.” “Well…hey that rabbit it’s hopping towards us. Hmm, a little larger than average and hopping towards people is rather unusual behavior for a ra…” Before Ulivik can finish, his leg is leaped upon and viciously attacked by the rabbit. After some hollering from the surprise, you grab the little furry beast and break its neck. You toss its lifeless body in the snow while Ulivik examines the bite marks in his pants “Fuck, that thing chewed through my pant leg and broke the skin! You never mentioned killer rabbits on your travel to here.” “That’s because I didn’t encounter any, and I doubt if that was really a rabbit anymore. It would seem that animals CAN be hosts after all, they just need a human one or something similar to leave the hills. Anyway, we should really get out here, there are more coming.” “What? So? I’m sure we can handle a few overgrown possessed rabbits.” Ulivik says still preoccupied with his very minor wound. “A few, sure, but how about hundreds of them?” you say and draw his attention to literally that number popping up all around you. The glaring red eyes of hundreds of possessed bunnies are upon you and their herbivore buck teeth have now been replaced with the toothy fangs of a carnivore hungry for flesh. And they look like they haven’t tasted a bi-ped in a long time… > You fight your way to the ruins You’ve come this far, no sense in running back home now especially not from rabbits, even if they are possessed by wendigo spirits. “Come on let’s get to that ruin of yours, hopefully we’ll be less out in the open there!” you shout slashing out at the nearest bunch of bunnies. “It should be nearby, this way!” The pair of you run chopping up rabbits along the way as the “little” nippers are hopping after you and occasionally leaping on you and get a few bites in. This might all be very comical if your life wasn’t in mortal danger. After about fifteen minutes of this, you’re still practically waist deep in rabbits and no closer to your goal. You’re starting to regret your initial decision. “Ulivik, what the fuck man? I though you said it was close by?!” “It is! It is! I just need to look at my map again!” Ulivik says fumbling with his map. “Ulivik we don’t have time for all that! We’re getting surrounded, and like normal rabbits they seem to have multiplied severely. They’re going to wear us down by attrition if this keeps up.” “Hold on I, agh!” White rabbits, which were blending into the snow, suddenly pop up and bite at the legs and ankles of you and Ulivik. This causes Ulivik to fall to his hands and knees in the snow as they continue their attack. “Get off! Get off!” he shouts killing them, unfortunately one the rabbits jumps on his back and with his teeth takes the amulet chain and leaps off with it. “Ulivik no! Your amulet! We need to get the fuck outta here now!” “Arrrrgh! My head feels like it’s going to explode! Shut up! Shut up!” Ulivik yells. The mental assault has already begun and you tell Ulivik to quickly try to think about other things and drown out the wendigo voices, he’s obviously in pain though. In the meantime you’re attempting to drag him back the way you came while still fighting off rabbits. More and more of the ferocious furballs leap on to you and Ulivik, and sure enough your own amulet chain is eventually broken off as well. “Welcome back Bane of Rask, we always knew you’d come back.” You hear in your head and then a gray rabbit the size of a bear comes bounding out of a hole in the ground. It is at this point, the wendigos make their awful howl in unison. Ulivik screams in pain and you’re not feeling so great yourself, but you refuse to be beaten by an overgrown rabbit. You quickly run over to the wendigo leader and hack at its head, putting out one of its eyes. The beast roars and succeeds in smacking you to the ground with its claws. “Foolish mortal! You cannot hope to win this battle! Give up now and let me take over…” You ignore the taunts of the wendigo leader, you ignore the whispers of the wendigos’ mental assault, you ignore the countless bites into your flesh from their hosts. You just focus on one thing. Killing that gray sonofabitch. You roll out of the way the leader’s attack and shove your sword in his side and then using your dagger you put out his other eye. Blind and still enraged he clumsily tries to lash out against you with his claws again, but once again you dodge and pulling your sword of his side, you shove it into his head this time and twist it back and forth making sure it cuts through skull, brains and everything else. “You haven’t won…” you hear in your head while stomping on some nearby rabbits still biting at your ankles. Ulivik is staggering towards you with a trail of his own dead rabbits in his wake. “Ulivik, come on we still need to get outta here, before the leader regroups with a new body!” you say and grab at Ulivik to help pull him towards you. Ulivik stares at you blankly for a moment, and then his demeanor changes to a less friendly one. Your heart sinks knowing what has happened, and you try to let go, but his own grip becomes very tight as his nails dig into your flesh. “I told you, you couldn’t win.” In Ulivik’s body, the wendigo is much quicker than you and manages to knock your sword out of your hand and then knock you to the ground. You scramble for your weapon, but you feel a kick to your head followed by a couple of stomps to it. Bloody and dazed, you lose consciousness before you are made into the wendigo’s long awaited meal.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 65 You get a knock on the door to which causes you to wonder who would be bothering you at this time of night. You’re more than a little annoyed since you were sleeping. “Go away, I ain’t getting up.” you say from your chair trying to go back to sleep. “Open the fuck up, you useless old man!” you hear from outside and it’s enough to motivate you to answer it and punch out the fool who said it. When you open it however, an unexpected visitor meets you. “Ulivik?” “Yeah, it’s me! Well, aren’t you going to invite me in?” he laughs. “Yeah sure.” You say and the both of you head to your quarters to sit and talk. You still shaking the cobwebs after being awaken from your slumber. “Were you asleep?” “Yeah, what of it?” “Nothing! Just sort of surprised, I mean I know it’s night, but its still pretty early.” “Eh, it’s been kind of a lazy day today, felt like sleeping for most of it.” “You didn’t teach a class today?” “Class? School’s been officially closed for about two years now. I mean I get few people that seek me out looking to increase their skills every once in awhile, but nowadays everyone goes to that new military academy they opened up here.” “Oh, I was wondering what that big new building looming near the edge of town was, so they didn’t offer you a job there?” “Eh, they did, but I didn’t want it. People who I originally trained run it and most of them I didn’t even like when I was teaching them, so I’d rather not have to follow whatever silly guidelines they’ve come up with for that place. Anyway, I sometimes get paid to give speeches on tactics and strategies there. I get by. So where have you been and what brings you back?” Ulivik mentions he mainly returned to when he heard his father had died and that he’s probably going to be around for a while to look after his mother. He then excitedly goes on about his various adventures of exploring ruins, caves and finding treasures and lost trinkets. Not enough to get rich, but he’s not in it for that. You enjoy hearing about it all, it’s not like you really go anywhere or do as much anymore. And as the years go on, you are finding yourself with less and less to do. You sort of thought your school and teaching would occupy your time and that if you got bored of that you could always break it up with a little mercenary work. But both of those options are pretty much closed off to you at this point, at least in Rask. The place is less wild and more peaceful now than it ever was under the Empire. You could move you suppose, but it’s not such a bad life maybe you should just settle in and enjoy your elderly years in relative peace… “..and so then I got my head split open and my entrails eaten by the clawbeast and died. Hey! Are you still with me?” Ulivik asks. “Huh? Yeah you got your entrails eaten and died.” You answer. “Well glad to see you’re still listening.” Ulivik laughs. “Sorry, just a little preoccupied. Anyway, go on.” Ulivik knows something’s up with you, and he’s got a pretty good idea what it is. “Hey, have you ever thought about leaving Rask and joining your old buddies in the Eternal Dominion?” he asks. “Wha…oh I don’t think that’s for me. Besides I only have two there, dunno if one of them is even still alive and I never really was exactly friends with Edgar. Speaking of which did you have much trouble traveling through the ED? I heard they aren’t too fond of svelk there ever since most of your people have been hiring themselves out to the Felkans.” Well as you once pointed out, we’re not really liked anywhere we go, but I never really kept to the populated areas while in the ED so I didn’t have too many problems. However, I did find that dropping your name helped me a few times. You’re sort of known there.” “Huh. Dunno, why I would be, not like I was ever part of the place. Guess Edgar really did look up to me. Unexpected.” “Didn’t he offer you a job too one time?” “Yeah. Don’t think it’s still available though. Like I said, my time serving big governments is over with. I wasted more than thirty years of my life doing it. Not going to waste the remaining years I have left even if it’s a high position of power. Besides, I’m still not sure that I wouldn’t have to kill Edgar if I ever got into an argument with him over something.” “Surely it would be more interesting than sleeping all day.” “Hah, probably. I dunno, I just feel like Edgar’s Eternal Dominion is just mimicking a lot of the old Empire. Sure it’s doing well now, but ultimately it’s going to fall just like the Empire did, so what’s the point?” “Hmm, well you could offer your services to the Felkan Kingdom, I think they could use the help.” “Yeah, no. I’m not into lost causes. Did that before too and saw the results. The Felkan Kingdom could’ve won the war if they didn’t fight so defensively. There were many times early in the war where they should’ve pressed an attack and took territory. Their fate is probably sealed at this point. Only a matter of time, assuming the ED keeps with it’s policy of total conquest, and doesn’t fuck it up. Anyway don’t get me started on how I nearly got dragged into serving on both sides of that conflict.” “Okay, but how about another proposal?” “I’ll bite. What is it?” “Well, as you know I’m going to be here awhile looking after my mother, but I need something to do. Rask still has areas of it that are largely unexplored. I sort wondered if you’d like to come with me on an adventure in this very area.” “Oh? And where would this place be? Most of the places you’re speaking of involve mountains, and as bored as I am, I’m not about to go dragging my ass up a fucking mountain.” “Ha ha, nah not the mountains, though it still might involve a little bit of climbing.” “Okay, so where?” “The Wendigo Hills.” Now there’s name that’s spoken of in only whispers nowadays in Rask. Everyone knows about it and doesn’t speak about it, let alone go near it, from humans to ogres and even the few giants still left. Ever since you wiped them out forty five years ago, there have been little problems from those evil spirits. Years later after you first left Rask you heard the various villages got their holy men together to perform some sort of ritual to make sure none of the spirits managed to ever escape from those cursed hills ever again. Of course every once in a blue moon some unfortunate idiot…usually an adventurer gets himself possessed and no expense is spared in hunting down the creature and destroying it. Now it looks like Ulivik is intent on being that new unfortunate idiot. “Have you lost your fucking mind, because if you haven’t, then you will if you go there and that’s if you’re lucky. I went to that blasted place once, I had a company of soldiers with me and I was in my prime. I barely got out of that place alive and you know what happened to the few soldiers that survived with me? Four of them ultimately committed suicide from their nightmares and the other two got discharged and thrown in the asylum for just going batshit insane. No, I’m not going and if you got any sense, you won’t either. That place does shit your mind. The spirits there are pure evil, and they are not to be trifled with.” "No, I have a remedy for that! Look at these!" Ulivik says and produces two amulets with a faint blue glow. "Let me guess, these things are magical and they're supposed to protect us from getting possessed." "Correct! Even when I was little, I heard there was supposed to be great treasure in those hills. Nobody has ever had the skill to go in there and claim it, but I want to be the first because I truly feel like I'm ready now. You're the about the one who has traveled the most in those hills and survived. You would be a great help and we can even share whatever we find! Come on, it'll be like old times!" "Old" being the key word here. While you were wondering if you were becoming more complacent in your old age, you aren't sure if going to the Wendigo Hills is something you want to do just to prove "you still got it." > You stay home Complacent or not, you’re really thinking that this is just a bad idea all the way round. “Ulivik, I’m telling you, this isn’t a good idea. I’m not about to place your faith in some amulet that may or may not work and you shouldn’t either. I know you’re an adventurer and all, but some places are just better left alone.” “Oh come on! The man I knew wouldn’t have backed down from a challenge like this!” “The man you knew was twenty years younger, and I still had a purpose for my wandering. I was a merc, remember? Look, if the fact that I won’t go traipsing around in wendigo territory looking for ruins that might not even be there and wearing an amulet hoping it’ll protect me disappoints you, well I guess I’m just going to have to disappoint you.” Ulivik does indeed look disappointed, but he doesn’t argue the point anymore. Instead he just abruptly gathers his belongings and starts to leave. “Ulivik, I really wish you’d heed my advice on this. Think about it, have I ever lead you wrong?” He stops for a moment, and thinks, but continues his exit. “No, maybe you haven’t, but just as you have picked your path to become an old man who is content on resting on his laurels now. I still feel the zest for excitement and danger, and I am compelled to do what I must. It’s just a shame we couldn’t have shared in it together just one more time.” Ulivik says and leaves. Once again you are left by yourself to reflect on your life and Ulivik’s words. He might have his own point about resting on your “laurels” but what the hell, it’s not like you haven’t deserved it. You could go back and forth on such things, but honestly you’re a little more concerned about Ulivik and what he’s potentially going to get himself into. Still, he’s an adult and capable of making his own decisions. Days pass and you don’t hear anything from Ulivik. True he was a little mad at you, but you’re pretty sure he’d come back to see you before he left. You begin to fear the worst. You end up going to his mother’s house to see if he’s been there or shown up, but she says she hasn’t seen him. She’s worried as well, though she’s understandably more upset about it. Your next move is to go to the militia and make a report, you don’t expect anything to be done, but you figure that the “risk” of a possible wendigo possession is more than enough to keep all the towns alert about it. You are nearly tempted to go looking for him in wendigo territory yourself, but you decide that it would only serve in getting you killed as well, and there’s no way you’d even be able to track him. Weeks pass into months and there is still no sign of Ulivik. No wendigo attacks either, so you can only assume that he wasn’t possessed, just killed and eaten. Many times you go back and forth in your head wondering if you’d just gone with him that maybe he’d still be alive…or maybe there would be two dead instead of one. Can’t second-guess your decisions, you learned that a long time ago, but still you feel saddened by Ulivik’s passing. He had a lot of potential and in some odd way he almost felt like a son to you. Life goes on though, but it feels a little emptier. Year 73 The rest of your years have been spent mostly going about your life with increasingly less and less for you to do. There are some changes in society, but ultimately you begin to feel the decline of your own will to live. You never thought you’d feel that way, but there it is. You just don’t have anything else to keep you motivated anymore. The thrill of living finally disappears from you entirely and you are found dead by your own hand. While you were not sick and still in relatively good health for a man your age, you decided that you would end it before you might not be in such a condition to do so. A note explaining your suicide is left nearby and the town gives you a proper cremation. Some of your old students turn out for it and say a few words, but in time you are soon forgotten and only brought up as the subject of “tall tales” by drunkards in Rask taverns every once in a blue moon.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 55 After another hard day of training various citizens of Rask, you lie in your bed thinking about how much has changed over the years. Never did you think that you’d be running a real business, though to be honest if it wasn’t for legitimate paranoia on the part of the Rask Alliance, you’d probably be spending all of your time still as a merc, as it stands you’re practically responsible for training the closest thing to an army that Rask has, though it’s probably more of an organized militia. It’ll be the first line of defense if the Eternal Dominion starts to look to this way for expansion. When the ED started re-conquering the old territory of the Empire it was only natural that the towns and villages of Rask started getting worried. They didn’t break away from the Empire only to replace it with something similar or worse. It was just their luck (and yours) that you wanted to become a professional combat instructor. Soon people from all over Rask were coming to see you. You hardly ever have to do any sort of mercenary work anymore and the mayor of Keplavisk is overjoyed by the fact that you set up shop in his town. As for the Eternal Dominion threat, you aren’t sure what to think. There has been no formal declaration of war or even a diplomatic visit to Rask yet, but that doesn’t mean there won’t be, Rask has lots of resources after all. Still, the ED has its hands full still trying to keep everyone in line from the top to the bottom while attempting to gain more holdings. Mass orc migration to Rask are becoming common, even the svelk are more welcome in Rask again. Partly due to the possible need for more mercs if war comes to pass and partly due to dark elves being disliked by the ED, which apparently frowns upon mercenaries (and probably the attitudes of the dark elves in general). You have to hand it to “General” Edgar though, you didn’t think he’d be able to get those chaotic brats calling themselves “eternals” organized, though it sounds like they’re still as sadistic as ever and if the rumors are true, another generation of Eternals are being trained as well. You can’t even imagine what they’re going to be like. If war is coming like everyone thinks it is, you know immediately that you’re probably going to be nominated and begged by the various mayors and council members to be some sort of commander. You aren’t sure if you’d accept the position though you probably will mainly because you don’t want to be bothered moving anymore and you’ll be damned if you’ll live under the rule of some half assed Eternals. Part of you wonders what the hell is going through Edgar’s mind. He seemed more level headed the last time you saw him, like the incident with Kane forced him to mature, but you guess his aspirations for personal glory were just too great to keep suppressed for long. You also wonder about Brenda, she’s the only other old Eternal that was left, and you have no idea if she’s even still alive or serving with Edgar. You get your answer and then some in a few days. Another hard day of training various citizens of Rask and you’re ready to close up shop and then two figures wearing hoods enter. You have flashbacks to fighting the Shadow Guard and you draw your sword. “Hold on! It’s me! Warrick! See?” a familiar voice says and reveals himself from under the hood. The face is much older than you remember and sporting an eye patch, and the hair is now nearly gone. But considering you thought Warrick to be dead, you aren’t completely convinced until the second cloaked figure reveals herself and speaks. “I told you wearing these things was a bad idea. He probably thought we were Shadow Guards!” she says. Her face is also much older and the hair is completely gray, but you definitely know this one is Brenda. Between the pair of them it truly makes you realize how much time has passed since you saw them. “And I told you, we need to keep a low profile, this situation is dangerous to the both of us.” Warrick says. “Warrick back from the dead and Brenda, I was just recently thinking about what had become of you.” “We need to talk to you about Edgar.” Warrick says cutting right to the point. “Yeah I thought so…okay let me lock up and we can talk about this in my quarters.” The first thing you find out is that Warrick is now working for the Felkan Kingdom. He says it’s a long story, but it has its roots in his becoming disillusioned with the Empire much like you did. Warrick also goes on to say that’s one of the reasons why he’s here. Edgar definitely has plans to attack it in the future and the crown hopes to avoid another long and troublesome war by recruiting allies this time. He mentions real Felkan diplomats will probably be arriving in Rask soon to speak with the leaders of the towns, but he was sent to specifically reach out to you, because whether you knew it or not, your reputation here carries weight. As for Brenda, her position is much more dangerous. She is currently serving the Eternal Dominion, (another long story) but is trying to encourage an underground dissident movement. Not really difficult considering how oppressive Edgar’s regime is. It is the hope of the Felkan Kingdom that the ED will wear itself out on keeping down riots and other potential conquests like Rask before it turns its eyes on the Felkan Kingdom. You tell Warrick that he’s probably wasted a trip as the paranoid mentality of the Raskians are already preparing for war with the ED and will have no problem allying with the Felkan Kingdom and that you’ll no doubt be called upon to command the people you’ve been training. Warrick seems relived to hear that, and you and he begin to do a little catching up. Brenda participates as well, though the whole time she seems a little preoccupied. Eventually as the night goes on, Warrick says he must be getting back to report to his superiors. Brenda says that she is not ready to leave as she wishes to speak to you about Roldan and his last days with you. Warrick understands, but warns her that she should not be away for too long so as to arouse suspicion. He would hate to have her sacrifices should lead to her death. “Sacrifices…as if he would know about such things. When the Empire needed him the most what did he do? He ran to the fucking enemy. Now his new masters give him commands and the running lapdog thinks he’s free, but he’s still a slave.” She remarks with distain, before continuing. “Edgar may be an egomaniac with delusions of grandeur like he always was, but he at least tried to keep the Empire together, even if it is in a different form now. He believes in something better, even if he’s not exactly intelligent enough to carry out that idea. And you, you’re worst of them all. You just dropped out altogether and dedicating yourself to nothing, but coin like a fucking svelk. What the hell happened to you? You used be our leader.” “I’m not exactly sure what your point is, but if this all pent up anger at me due to Roldan dying I…” “Don’t you dare fucking mention him! I heard enough of hollow apologies in that damn letter you wrote to me.” “They were Eternals as we all are. Dying in combat is always a possibility for us, I know their deaths weren’t the most glorious, but at the time they died doing something they believed in. I can hardly help that the institution that they believed in, crumbled soon afterwards. I tried like hell to maintain my own belief in the Empire despite having it time after time again tested. Eventually I saw the light when I had to command a bunch of those new eternals while attempting to put down mass riots near the capital. Was leaving the right decision? I don’t know, but it was for ME. The fact is ALL of our lives were nothing but duty and dedication to a corrupt government that deserved none of it. Kane knew that, Gruz knew that, and as much as I still hate them to this day, the Shadow Guard knew that. When the Empire was in its death throes it affected us all differently. I can’t help the fact that you decided to stay loyal and it didn’t work out resulting in you eventually having to capitulate to Edgar later on. At least you and Roldan had an experience that none of us will ever have. You have at least that to cherish.” Brenda is silent for a moment as she takes in your statement. She looks at a ring on her finger, which is obviously still her wedding ring to Roldan. She smiles and then speaks. “You’re right I suppose. You usually were when we all served under you. Even you couldn’t have prevented the Empire from falling, the damage was done long before we came into existence. I guess I just never got over Roldan’s death and had nobody except you to blame since you were the only one still alive. The funny thing is I didn’t start blaming you until I found out you left the Empire. You were always our leader, and it seemed unthinkable that you would leave willingly. You know I think none of us really saw anyone else as their leader except you. It’s probably why Kane wanted you to join him, it’s no doubt why Warrick insisted on reaching out to you and it’s why Edgar sent me…” “Excuse me?” “One of the things you were wrong about and Warrick too. I am not helping him though he still thinks I am. There is no underground resistance, or at least none that matters. Warrick and his Felkan masters think they can undermine the Eternal Dominion, but they are quite wrong. When Edgar first came to me and explained his cause and ideas I realized it was a just and worthy one. I joined in an effort to help with some of the details that Edgar himself is not nearly as skilled at, still he has proven himself to be more charismatic than he once was, at least to the other eternals and that’s who is mainly important. He wants to create a nation where we Eternals are in control, as it should’ve been.” “…so why would he want me for, wouldn’t he consider me an enemy like Warrick?” “No, not like Warrick. While your abandonment did sadden Edgar, he always figured you had a good reason. He never questioned it. And now that you’ve told me your views I see he was right. It’s really quite odd to see how high of regard he holds you. I guess your time with him during Kane’s attempted secession really impacted him.” “Brenda, this is a lot to take in, what exactly are you expecting from me then?” “As Warrick said, your reputation carries weight here and you have the ear of several of the mayors here. Perhaps you could explain to them that even with training that resistance will be useless and that the ED will just slaughter everyone. Better that they should surrender now and have a benevolent overseer such as…you running things.” “And you really think Raskians are going to go for that idea?” “What does it matter? They are going to be conquered eventually anyway. I merely suggest other options to Edgar’s plan, which was to convince you to just come with me where you could take command of a battalion to conquer Rask seeing as you know the place the best.” “Heh, sounds like him. So what was the plan if I refuse altogether? Killing me I suppose?” “Didn’t come up though I even asked him about it, but as I said Edgar really believes that you’ll help us. Perhaps in some way he didn’t want to think about the alternative. I’m guessing that you are considering the alternative?” “Don’t see why I shouldn’t, do you?” “You would have a true purpose again. Serving an idea greater than yourself.” “I have a true purpose now. I’m training others to fight against those that would take their lives. The Raskians don’t want to be ruled over and quite frankly neither do I, let alone by Edgar.” “No! You would be different! You, like myself would be given an equal place in the decision making process! Even the other Eternal don’t get that.” “Yeah, that’s the other thing, I’m loathed to live in a land that considers those new…things, eternals.” “They are much different now, true they still have their sadistic streak, but only towards the non-eternals and who cares about them?” “I’m sure the non-eternals do, and while they may very well be inferior, enough of them can topple any government. We saw it happen, and it’ll happen to you too if you aren’t careful.” “So are you saying you won’t join us?” You get the impression that if you say no, she’s going to attack you and you’ll have to defend yourself. Killing Brenda is something you do not want to do, but lying and saying yes is duplicity you’d rather not engage in. > You lie and say yes This is probably going to bite you in the ass later, but you just can’t bring yourself to kill Brenda…at least not this day. It may very well come in the future though. “Alright Brenda, I’ll help you, but I’m staying here in Rask. Forgive me, if I’m not quite trusting enough to go walking into ED territory just yet.” “Well I guess I can understand your caution, but what are you going to do up here to help us?” “I’ll do what you said I’ll try to convince people that they should submit to the ED, it will most likely still require a lot of bloodshed and it this goal isn’t going to be an immediate one. However, I’m confident that I can do this, I have enough supporters to raise an a big enough army to get me started. I know this territory the best so any wannabe freedom fighters hoping to escape into the wilderness to wage a guerilla war won’t be a problem either. When I think the time is right, I’ll contact the ED to step in to mop up and to reinforce order, but I really think your armies would be better spent on hitting the Felkan Kingdom and hard. If they’re putting out feelers for alliances with Rask, then they’re probably desperate. You tell Edgar I’ve personally suggested this, he’ll listen. He should, after all I’ve never given him bad advice before.” That last part is very difficult for you to say, knowing that you’re blatantly lying. The worst part is Brenda doesn’t even question you. She too believes that you’re being completely genuine and requires no further “proof” that you’re actually going to do what you say other than your word and your impeccable past reputation. She leaves a little happier than when she arrived. You on the other hand are a little sadder. At best The Edgar will follow your advice and the Felkan Kingdom will do enough damage to the Eternal Dominion that they won’t be in any condition to attack Rask. It may even collapse. Not exactly great for Edgar or Brenda, but at least you wouldn’t need to fight against them. At worst…well you’d rather not have to think about that, but you’ve always prepared for the worst. The next day you suggest to the mayor of Keplavisk that Rask seriously invest in thinking about building a proper military academy, possibly even a professional army. In the following months several meetings with the heads of the Rask towns occur. You give your opinion on the Eternal Dominion situation, but you leave out the whole meeting with Brenda and Warrick of course. Eventually the politicians agree that more protection might be necessary and steps to ensure it are taken. Since you brought all this to their attention, you are nominated to run the military academy. Year 58 Edgar took your advice…at least initially. He sent thousands across the Felkan borders a couple years ago. The war with the Felkan Kingdom is currently at a stalemate, but you hear it’s even more brutal than the one with the Empire. Edgar has adapted with the times unlike the Empire and has implementied stolen technology from the Felkans. You can only imagine how Warrick has fared, but you got your own problems due to your lying, though maybe it was inevitable, who can say? When it became apparent that you weren’t actually doing anything to help bring Rask under the Eternal Dominion banner, Edgar correctly came to the conclusion that you lied. Sensing that Rask may even be gearing up for their own invasion, Edgar risks a two front war and strikes out at Rask. While the Eternal Dominion is certainly short of man power due to their war with the Felkan Kingdom, they make up for it with ruthless fanaticism and of course the fact that they’re using updated technology as well. Their first major push is at Kenneth’s Rest. The old fort stands strong for a day before it is taken. Everyone that wasn’t killed during the battle or escaped was executed upon capture. This happens with a couple of the smaller villages before the Raskian army manages to stop the advance. From the butchery that the ED troops have been displaying it’s obvious that they aren’t taking prisoners. On the Raskian side, patriotism goes up and they have no intention on surrendering if that was even indeed an option. Mercenaries, who were previously beginning to leave due to the lack of jobs for them suddenly become in the market again. They are used mainly for harassment purposes such as destroying supply lines. Flog has turned out to be quite the asset. He sees the Eternal Dominion to be nothing more than the Empire under a new name (And he really hated the Empire) and has managed to unite some of the more “civilized” ogre tribes to help destroy the inheritors of the Empire legacy. Eldolith still runs her small svelk band and charges the highest price as usual for her services. Ulivik even has a small group of humans following him now. They mostly consist of survivors who managed to escape death at the hands of the ED attacks on their homes and in it for revenge not the money, in fact neither is Ulivik anymore. Ever since the invasion he gave up his mercenary life in exchange for that of a patriot fighting for his family and home. You’re glad to see he has become a competent warrior. Due to your warning of this threat years before, your position at the academy and all your years of combat experience you are made into a full blown general and practically given extensive powers over all military functions. A very powerful position, in fact it’s rather ironic. You didn’t ask or even want to “rule” over Rask, but your current arrangement practically makes you a potential dictator. Even more so due to the fact that you’re an Eternal, a representation of a past oppressor and a current aggressor towards Rask. While the politicians have given you this role, not all Raskians are happy with this idea, but as long as you’re fighting the Eternal Dominion no disgruntled Raskian has tried to assassinate you yet. While you miss being able to personally lead troops into battle, you still try to be as close to the action as you can, by traveling with the army rather than staying in an office somewhere. The war with the ED has already taken quite a toll on Rask, and it doesn’t look lik it’s going to end anytime soon. The best you can do is dig in and make sure you make the ED pay for every inch they step deeper into Rask territory. > Year 65 As you settle down for the night, you think about how you got in this position. As the war started to drag on, the tactics changed from one of conquest to one of annihilation. The ED began outright destroying any village and town they managed to capture. They sent in suicidal fanatics to blow themselves up or blow up mines and other areas of production. They managed to poison the water supply of one towns, but the worst was their intentional sacrifices in the Wendigo Hills. The ED dragged over a hundred of their own citizens into the Wendigo Hills, which had been off limits to any right thinking being ever since you went into that cursed territory. The wendigos had been confined there for decades with no sentient hosts to possess and allow their escape, but that all changed when presented with the new ones the ED provided. The wendigos of course immediately ran amok with their new bodies and became a problem for everyone. In the meantime the ED attempted one last push on Keplavisk. It was a bloodbath on both sides and the cost was high, but ultimately it never fell, and it was that the last major battle with the ED. Hostilities with the Eternal Dominion aren’t over, but they have stopped mostly due to their own internal problems. As powerful as they were, they couldn’t keep up a two front war with two foes that had no intention on rolling over. It was only a matter of time before attrition took its toll on the ED and fortunately the arrogance of the younger eternals caused them to finally question Edgar’s abilities to lead properly. Wasn’t long before they started squabbling amongst themselves. Of course the damage they did to Rask left a permanent mark. You were initially hailed as a hero by most and the rebuilding process begun, but Rask was in terrible condition. Towns and villages that hadn’t been completely destroyed were still wrecked to a degree that would take months or even a year to recover. This wouldn’t be so bad, if they weren’t also under protected due to a shortage of soldiers from the war. Wendigos, bandits, other monsters and even rogue eternals from the ED are such a problem that it makes the rebuilding process even longer and you conclude that spreading the soldiers too thin will ultimately hurt you in the long run. You argue with the remaining politicians that what needs to be done is to cluster and re-group. Keplavisk is still the most intact and has always been the “capital” of Rask of sorts and it’s the biggest town to the point that’s its practically a city. You say that the remaining Raskian population should move to Keplavisk where the focus can be directed into rebuilding it and protection can be easier. This isn’t a popular decision. Some Raskians don’t understand why you can’t just station more troops at their respective towns, but the fact remains you won’t have enough to defend Keplavisk, if you stretch them out any more and quite frankly Keplavisk is the most important city if Rask has any hope of not descending into anarchic wilderness again. Some citizens of Keplavisk don’t especially like the idea of “immigrants” moving into their city, but the major accusation is that since the mayor of Keplavisk was killed (along with most of his immediate staff) in the last battle with the ED, you’re about the closest thing to a leader. As such, some of the pessimists who claimed you would become a dictator with the powers that were given you at the start of the war are sort of becoming true. So you ultimately play the role that was given you. The first thing you do is call back all soldiers to Keplavisk and urge all other Raskians to do likewise. You say nobody has to come and you won’t force anybody, but as of now, you’re focusing only on Keplavisk and defense will be solely on the shoulders of the towns themselves. Fortunately as a successful military leader, you’re popular with the soldiers, so most of them return. Some originally lived in Keplavisk, some had no home any more, and some sensed a better life so they brought their families with them. With absolutely no more protection anymore, this has the bonus effect of bringing in non-military Raskians to Keplavisk as well though a lot aren’t exactly happy about it. The citizens that stubbornly stayed to rebuild their own homes didn’t last too long. By the end of the year only a few of the villages far north (that were mostly spared the ravages of war anyway) exist as other beacons of civilization. Kaplavisk on the other hand is transformed from a town half in ruins to a well defended prosperous city state by the end of that same year. No longer is town hall the “center of government”, but rather the military academy, which also serves as your new home. Defenses are as best as you can get them, sturdy walls, cannons, implementation of firearms and when you can draft them, people with minor magic powers to upkeep wards to prevent wendigos from sneaking into the city. True there are still the occasional protests about how there is much less “freedom” now, but it never really gets out of hand. Well at least not yet. The major rabble-rouser unfortunately is Ulivik of all people. His years as a “freedom fighter” against the Eternal Dominion have changed a bit of his outlook on life, namely he sees that Rask won the war just only to be conquered by an Eternal anyway. You tried to speak to him personally about this, but he seems firm in his beliefs. He states that when you trained him to be a mercenary even though you were tough, he still respected you. When you fought against the ED he mentions that his original worship of you almost returned as nobody did more to prevent them from taking over than you did. But now that you’ve allowed people to die without protection just because they wouldn’t do what you say and turned his home into a police state he cannot just stand by and do nothing. He says he doesn’t want to fight you for a couple reasons, but if it comes down to it, he will. He’s put you in a difficult position, which normally wouldn’t be very difficult if he were anyone else. You have a slight soft spot for Ulivik, but that soft spot only goes so far. You’ve got to deal with him some how because if you let him continue he’ll gain more followers, despite his svelk origins. Capitulating to him isn’t an option either, you start giving in now, you’ll have to give in later, maybe not even to him, but others with similar ideas and you can’t afford to start loosening up the reins. At least not anytime soon. You need to come up with an idea before you can get some sleep tonight. > You execution It is with a heavy heart and regret that this has to be done, but the only way you’re going make this problem go away is by making an example out of him. While it’s possible he’ll become a martyr, his “cause” is still manageable for your soldiers if a riot breaks out. After he’s dead, it’s unlikely anyone else will take up the mantle and those that might’ve been on the fence will fall in line. Besides he’s a svelk, who is going to shed many tears over him? Having made this decision you finally get some sleep, though not very restful sleep. The next day you order for Ulivik’s arrest along with his main followers. This doesn’t go over well. Ulivik refuses to be taken into custody and puts up a fight. A very good fight that involves him escaping completely and several soldiers dead. You order a full manhunt for Ulivik, but he proves quite elusive. In the meantime you execute his followers, but this is when other citizens start expressing a dislike for how you’re handling things. The major advantage you have is the military, but as you crack down harder, the soldiers become slightly overworked. Some of them even have their own disagreement with how you’re doing things. Before you know it you’ve got small riots in the streets and Ulivik keeps popping up every now and then just to stir the chaos even more. Before you know it, work places like woodmills and mines have to shut down due to you having to keep more troops inside the city rather on the outside to protect the workers. It’s all falling apart. You put down riots, execute more people, but ultimately it all come to a head one late night in your own room. You wake up and grab your weapon to see Ulivik lurking in the shadows. He’s obviously snuck in, and most likely killed any guards nearby. Doesn’t matter, you’ll either kill him or he’ll kill you before anyone arrives. “I figured it would come to this.” You say and prepare for battle. The two of you clash and you give him a good fight, but his youth, speed and dedication to his cause are an advantage, while you are old, slower and at this point you don’t even care anymore. He eventually slashes you across the chest and runs you through. You fall to the floor feeling the life drain from you. “Ugh…shit that really hurts (cough).” You say coughing up blood. “Why didn’t you just give the people more freedom?” Ulivik asksin a demanding tone. The strange thing is, in retrospect you don’t have a really good answer except… “I…guess the old Eternal ways of (cough) domination and war just got the better of me…heh knew there was a reason why I originally didn’t try to become a tyrant all those years ago. It never ends well…” “It didn’t have to be this way!” Ulivik now exclaims almost as if he’s holding back tears. “Maybe…but now’s your chance to make it better. Hope you’re prepared for it…I was getting tired of it anyway…” you say and pass from this world.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 65 As you settle down for the night, you think about how you got in this position. As the war started to drag on, the tactics changed from one of conquest to one of annihilation. The ED began outright destroying any village and town they managed to capture. They sent in suicidal fanatics to blow themselves up or blow up mines and other areas of production. They managed to poison the water supply of one towns, but the worst was their intentional sacrifices in the Wendigo Hills. The ED dragged over a hundred of their own citizens into the Wendigo Hills, which had been off limits to any right thinking being ever since you went into that cursed territory. The wendigos had been confined there for decades with no sentient hosts to possess and allow their escape, but that all changed when presented with the new ones the ED provided. The wendigos of course immediately ran amok with their new bodies and became a problem for everyone. In the meantime the ED attempted one last push on Keplavisk. It was a bloodbath on both sides and the cost was high, but ultimately it never fell, and it was that the last major battle with the ED. Hostilities with the Eternal Dominion aren’t over, but they have stopped mostly due to their own internal problems. As powerful as they were, they couldn’t keep up a two front war with two foes that had no intention on rolling over. It was only a matter of time before attrition took its toll on the ED and fortunately the arrogance of the younger eternals caused them to finally question Edgar’s abilities to lead properly. Wasn’t long before they started squabbling amongst themselves. Of course the damage they did to Rask left a permanent mark. You were initially hailed as a hero by most and the rebuilding process begun, but Rask was in terrible condition. Towns and villages that hadn’t been completely destroyed were still wrecked to a degree that would take months or even a year to recover. This wouldn’t be so bad, if they weren’t also under protected due to a shortage of soldiers from the war. Wendigos, bandits, other monsters and even rogue eternals from the ED are such a problem that it makes the rebuilding process even longer and you conclude that spreading the soldiers too thin will ultimately hurt you in the long run. You argue with the remaining politicians that what needs to be done is to cluster and re-group. Keplavisk is still the most intact and has always been the “capital” of Rask of sorts and it’s the biggest town to the point that’s its practically a city. You say that the remaining Raskian population should move to Keplavisk where the focus can be directed into rebuilding it and protection can be easier. This isn’t a popular decision. Some Raskians don’t understand why you can’t just station more troops at their respective towns, but the fact remains you won’t have enough to defend Keplavisk, if you stretch them out any more and quite frankly Keplavisk is the most important city if Rask has any hope of not descending into anarchic wilderness again. Some citizens of Keplavisk don’t especially like the idea of “immigrants” moving into their city, but the major accusation is that since the mayor of Keplavisk was killed (along with most of his immediate staff) in the last battle with the ED, you’re about the closest thing to a leader. As such, some of the pessimists who claimed you would become a dictator with the powers that were given you at the start of the war are sort of becoming true. So you ultimately play the role that was given you. The first thing you do is call back all soldiers to Keplavisk and urge all other Raskians to do likewise. You say nobody has to come and you won’t force anybody, but as of now, you’re focusing only on Keplavisk and defense will be solely on the shoulders of the towns themselves. Fortunately as a successful military leader, you’re popular with the soldiers, so most of them return. Some originally lived in Keplavisk, some had no home any more, and some sensed a better life so they brought their families with them. With absolutely no more protection anymore, this has the bonus effect of bringing in non-military Raskians to Keplavisk as well though a lot aren’t exactly happy about it. The citizens that stubbornly stayed to rebuild their own homes didn’t last too long. By the end of the year only a few of the villages far north (that were mostly spared the ravages of war anyway) exist as other beacons of civilization. Kaplavisk on the other hand is transformed from a town half in ruins to a well defended prosperous city state by the end of that same year. No longer is town hall the “center of government”, but rather the military academy, which also serves as your new home. Defenses are as best as you can get them, sturdy walls, cannons, implementation of firearms and when you can draft them, people with minor magic powers to upkeep wards to prevent wendigos from sneaking into the city. True there are still the occasional protests about how there is much less “freedom” now, but it never really gets out of hand. Well at least not yet. The major rabble-rouser unfortunately is Ulivik of all people. His years as a “freedom fighter” against the Eternal Dominion have changed a bit of his outlook on life, namely he sees that Rask won the war just only to be conquered by an Eternal anyway. You tried to speak to him personally about this, but he seems firm in his beliefs. He states that when you trained him to be a mercenary even though you were tough, he still respected you. When you fought against the ED he mentions that his original worship of you almost returned as nobody did more to prevent them from taking over than you did. But now that you’ve allowed people to die without protection just because they wouldn’t do what you say and turned his home into a police state he cannot just stand by and do nothing. He says he doesn’t want to fight you for a couple reasons, but if it comes down to it, he will. He’s put you in a difficult position, which normally wouldn’t be very difficult if he were anyone else. You have a slight soft spot for Ulivik, but that soft spot only goes so far. You’ve got to deal with him some how because if you let him continue he’ll gain more followers, despite his svelk origins. Capitulating to him isn’t an option either, you start giving in now, you’ll have to give in later, maybe not even to him, but others with similar ideas and you can’t afford to start loosening up the reins. At least not anytime soon. You need to come up with an idea before you can get some sleep tonight. > You exile You don’t think you could bring yourself to kill Ulivik directly or indirectly, besides it’s not likely to help anything. He’d most likely become a martyr and you’d never be done fighting future uprisings in his name. You then come up with an idea: Exile. If people are really unhappy here they can get the hell out and they can take their chances making it on their own. It has the potential to cause an exodus, but you doubt if it will. Not many with families will be willing to leave and it’s still less harsh than execution. You are giving people a chance to live after all, it’s up to them if they can survive in Rask without the benefit of protection or survive long enough for them to leave it entirely. Not killing dissidents, it’s a radical idea in it’s own right, but you’re going to gamble on it. Having made this decision you finally get some sleep, though not exactly restful sleep. The next day when Ulivik is protesting with his little group in front of the academy you and several soldiers march up to him. “Okay Ulivik, this ends today.” You say. “And so it begins, I was wondering when you’d finally let loose and start threatening people for speaking out against you. That’s what you used to do back in your Empire days isn’t it? Well we aren’t going quietly to be executed, as I said, if you want a fight, I’m more than willin to give it to you right here and now!” “I’m not executing you Ulivik.” “Well we’re not going to rot in your jails either.” “Will you shut the fuck up? I’ve heard your complaints outside my window for the past several months, the least you can do is listen to me for a change.” “Very well, but this better be good.” “Don’t presume to tell me what is good, because this isn’t a compromise. I’m going to say this once and once only and this is going out to all of you. Any more dissension or acts of stirring up shit for no reason, and you’re gone. And what I mean by gone, I mean exile. And not just you, I’m talking ALL your family, all your friends and even your fucking pets. All of you that don’t like how things are being run in this city, well you can get the fuck out. Let’s see you do better out there. Lots of luck…” Ulivik is a little surprised by your tactic, but it doesn’t deter him and he gets in your face. You keep your soldiers back. “You can’t just throw people out of the city! These people have a right, we ALL have a right to live here and voice our concerns when the government is failing to provide a suitable quality of life!” Ulivik exclaims. “Failing? What the hell are you talking about? We’re protecting everyone from bandits, monsters, eternal dominion hold outs and do I even need to mention the wendigos? Nobody starves, everyone has a job, and all people have to do is follow a few simple fucking rules. I’m not demanding people bring me their virgin daughters! I’m not having people routinely tortured for not believing in some religion! Yeah there have been some sacrifices like food rationing and curfews, but I’ve been pretty damn fair about everything and YOU of all people should know that!” Ulivik stops for a moment and while it seems like he knows you have a point, he refuses to back down still. Perhaps you taught him too well. “So basically what you’re saying is we should just be grateful that you’re not Edgar…” And that’s the last straw, you lose your temper and proving you can still be quick for your age, you punch Ulivik in face. He staggers back and is disoriented enough for your soldiers to get a firm grip on him. He tries to twist free, but you have four soldiers lift him up grabbing one of his limbs each. “Let me go tyrant! Too cowardly to face me in battle? So much for your eternal bravery!” “Lucky for you, since you weren’t even fast enough to dodge my punch, open the gates and throw his ass out. And if the rest of you want to join him, you can pack your shit and go too!” As you and the soldiers escort Ulivik out of the city, the rest of his followers lose their courage. Most of them have families and friends and aren’t willing to risk your wrath anymore. Other citizens look on at the spectacle and just stare in silent awe. The only one making any sort of noise is Ulivik who is cursing you and everyone else who isn’t helping him. You ignore his curses, and just simmer in anger at the situation. Eventually you reach the gates and with a mighty heave your soldiers throw Ulivik a few feet and face first into the snow. He scrambles to get up and upon turning around; your soldiers draw several muskets on him. “Goodbye, Ulivik, don’t come back or else I won’t be as merciful next time.” You say from the gate. “Merciful? You’re throwing me out of my own fucking home you bastard!” “At least I’m not throwing your mother out as well, and at least you’re still alive.” “Fuck you. I can’t believe I used to look up to you.” “And I never told you to, you chose to do that! And you chose this path as well. I’m merely doing what I think is best, just like I did then. (sigh) I’m sorry it has to be this way, but you’ll survive Ulivik…I know I taught you that…close the gates.” As the gates close you see Ulivik just standing by himself looking very alone. It’s sort of sad. He started out as a disliked “outsider” due to his race in this town when he was growing up and now he has at last been banished from it for good. Not even one of his so called followers or even a bystander pleaded for him or even joined him by leaving. He did a lot for Rask during the war and he was speaking out for their “rights”, but that doesn’t seem to account for shit in the scheme of things to people. While it’s a fortunate situation, it still doesn’t seem right even if he was opposing you. Over the next few months you half expect Ulivik to be attacking soldiers outside the gates of the city and holding some sort of one man vendetta or possibly even gathering a small group of bandits robbing the miners or loggers and such, but that doesn’t happen. He’s gone, but you’re confident he’s not dead. You just hope he’s moved on to better things. As for you and everyone else life goes on. Year 75 With age catching up on you every day you sometimes wonder if it’s even worth getting out of bed anymore. You tire of the tedious act of governing, but you have no real successor to take your place. There are a couple of officers you have in mind, which could do a competent job you suppose, and that’s when you make a major decision. You decide to step down from power and hand this mess over to someone else. Since you know whoever you pick is going to have to be a strong leader and nip any potential coups in the bud, you pick the three most charismatic, intelligent and loyal that you can think of and call them into the training area in front of an audience of soldiers. You then announce that the three men will fight to the death and whoever is left standing gets to be in charge. The three officers look a little surprised and the audience is silent, but it doesn’t take long for one of the men to try to sneak attack on one of the others. The fight is a good one. As you watch you fight back to the days when you watched your classmates fight each other for Mistress. That was so long ago and as crazy as it seems you’ve actually been missing those days lately, everything much simpler at least. All of them are gone now. Last you heard of Edgar is that he was assassinated four years ago as the Eternal Dominion continued to fragment into petty fiefdoms ruled by equally petty eternal warlords. You don’t know about Warrick or Brenda, but you sometimes like to think they managed to escape the madness and are living satisfying lives. Barring that, you hope they died well in whatever battle that was their last. Eventually one man is left standing. Bruised, bloody and battered, but victorious. It is at this point you stand up and congratulate him and make another announcement to the crowd. “Captain Eddings has proved himself worthy of succeeding me. I trust you will serve this man as well as you have served me all these years. Congratulations Eckers, you’ve just been promoted to…uh general I guess.” “Thank you sir, I will do everything in my power to ensure the safety and prosperity of the city.” Eddings remarks with pride. “I’m sure you will, I’m sure you will, why don’t you head to the infirmary first though. As for me I’m going back to sleep. You can catch up with me later if you need some explanation on anything, but I left some notes on my desk for you as a general guideline.” You say and head back to your room. You know you’ll probably still be running things for a while at least and probably be consulted many times, but you still feel as if a weight has been lifted off you. The problem is, you wonder how you’ll spend your free time. You’ll think of something you suppose.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You decide to humor the boy and agree. Chances are, he’s not going to get permission from his parents anyway and when that happens he’ll be less likely to bother you again. If he does get permission, well it’s not that far to Kenneth’s Rest and you were going there anyway. Plus you’ll have given him the chance he wants and again he’ll be less likely to bother you. “Alright Ulivik, you go ask your parents, but I’m taking you to Kenneth’s Rest and no further. And when we get there, you’re on your own, don’t think that you’re going to be tagging along with me anywhere else.” “Okay! That’s great! I’ll be right be back…uh could you come with me, so they know I’m telling the truth?” “Oh fer…fine.” You follow Ulivik back to his parent’s store which smells heavily of leather. The pair of them are working on some sort of the hide when you both walk in. “Mom! Dad! Mr. Bane said he’d take me to Kenneth’s Rest and teach me to be a mercenary! So can I go now?” “Hey wait I never said I’d teach…” you start to say before Ulivik’s dad interjects his own comments. “Oh is that right? And how do you know that? How do you know he won’t just rob and kill you along some lonely road?” “Or worse!” his mother says. “Hey wait a minute now…” “But this isn’t fair! You said if I could find somebody to teach me, that you’d allow me to go!” Ulivik whines. “Yeah, well we didn’t think you’d actually be successful, let alone get a cold hearted killer like Bane here to agree. Which makes me wonder why he did…” “Trust me, at this point I’m wondering the same thing.” You reply. “Ulivik, why can’t you just be interested in the family business? It’s a more honorable profession than being a mercenary. It’s honest work.” “Yeah and the workin’ man is a sucker! Look at where we live!” “Hey! We get by just fine, and this business has put food in your belly, clothes on your back and a roof over your head! So don’t you dare bad mouth this proud family tradition!” “Yeah, well I’m not really your son anyway! And you’re not my real parents! I hate this place and every here hates me!” Ulivik screams and leaves slamming the door. You’re left in an awkward situation with his parents. “Okay, so I guess that settles that, I’ll just be going now…” you say. “No, you get back here you sonofabitch.” Ulivik’s dad says. “Excuse me?” “I called you a sonofabitch, now if you want to kill me for that you can do it after hearing what I’ve got to say first.” “Heh, okay. It’s been a weird sort of day today anyway, I’ll play.” You say with a smile. “Yeah, well I ain’t playing. Look, I know all about you, and you probably don’t know me at all but I remember your ruthless reputation when you were still in service of the Empire. There was a family that lived down the block from me and my wife. We we’re friends and they even had a couple of children. Children that we would sometimes love to entertain because we couldn’t have any of our own. But this family wasn’t happy with the Empire’s rules so they along with several others protested…” You stop the tanner right there. “Yeah, yeah, I know what you’re going to say, I had them all killed for treason and had their heads put on pikes. Well I was trying to maintain order and I did what I had to do to get the job done. I’m sure this story pales in comparison to others have screamed at me in the past and you don’t even need to make your point about hating me, because I’m used to it anyway. Besides you don’t want your son going to Kenneth’s Rest and I’m certainly not going to drag him along. If anything I’d wish he’d stop looking up to me as some sort of hero and following me around. I was hoping by doing this for him I’d finally be rid of him. So if you don’t mind, I’ll be going now and I’ll also be disappointing you again, by not killing you before I leave.” You turn to leave and that’s when you get another unusual request. “If you take him to Kenneth’s Rest, will you also look after him?” Ulivik’s mother asks. “What?!” “If you want money to do so, we can pay. Just can you look after him for a while at least?” “Okay…now I’m confused. I thought not only did you not want him to go, but that I was also a ruthless bastard that would probably rob and kill him along a lonely road?” “Yeah, we don’t want him to go, and yeah you are a ruthless bastard…but I also know you actually do have some sort of code of honor. You might’ve left the Empire behind, but the regimented way of thinking you have is still there. You wouldn’t bother killing my boy unless you felt he was a direct danger to you, and I think we both know that isn’t the case.” Ulivik’s dad says. “Well that’s the truth.” “The other thing is…we’re not going to be able to stop him. He’s been getting more and more restless about this, and he’s going to want to pursue this career path whether we want him to or not. At this point he’s just going to run away from home and who knows what trouble he’ll get into. (sigh) Maybe it’s just his nature, bein’ a dark elf and all, but for good or ill, me and my wife have taken on the responsibility of raising him. And part of that is making sure he has the survival skills that he’ll need to make it in this world. We can’t teach him that, but you could. Look, like my wife said, we can pay you a good sum just for you teach him the basics, or whatever else is involved, if you need more, I dunno we’ll try to figure out something.” You’re speechless for a moment. Just when you think you’ve seen the worst in people, something like this happens and surprises you. “I’m not sure what you expect me to do. I mean this job isn’t something I can teach like from a book. Most of what he’s going to have to learn is going to be from direct experience. I mean I suppose I could teach him some combat skills, but the rest is going to mainly be up to him.” “Well do what you can, and take this in the meantime.” Uliviki’s mother hands you a small bag. When you look inside, it’s nothing but gold coins. This has to be some of their savings, possibly all of their savings. They must really trust you, if they’ve given you this much. “I’ll do my best. You have my word as an Eternal.” You say and pocket the bag of coins. With those last words you exit the tanner’s store intending to find Ulivik. Fortunately you know he isn’t far. “Ulivik, I know you’re around the corner. Stop sulking, or pouting or whatever teenage angst you’re doing and let’s go.” Ulivik slowly comes out from behind the corner. “You’re taking me with you?” “Yeah, I scared your parents into letting you come with me. Now grab whatever gear you want to take and let’s go before all the good jobs are taken.” Ulivik is completely giddy at this turn of events and runs back into the store to get his stuff. You on the other hand are wondering how the hell you got yourself into this. Then you feel the bag of coins again and remember. On your journey to Kenneth’s Rest, you explain to Ulivik some of the things he should know such as haggling for better prices on jobs and the art of intimidation. You also teach him a few combat moves. He’s a rookie to be sure, but his agility allows him from getting hurt too badly. When you get to Kenneth’s Rest, the place is as busy as always. Ulivik is more than a little distracted by the surroundings, and you have to keep reminding him to stay alert. “Hey stop staring at the harlots and pay attention! Just because fighting isn’t supposed to be allowed here, doesn’t mean it doesn’t happen. In fact people around here love to start trouble. Don’t stare at anyone in the eye for too long and make sure you don’t bump into anybody. You could either get into a fight, or someone might even try to pick your pocket.” “Okay. Here isn’t the job board that way?” “Job board? Hah. I never use those things. I go straight to the source. Trust me, if you want to get a job that pays well; get to know and make contact with the owners or government officials. Fortunately Kenneth used to work for me at one time, so it was quite easy for me to make contact with him. And when we find him, just keep your mouth shut, and let me do all the talking.” Eventually you find Kennth, he’s as jumpy as ever whenever you first see him. “Sir! I didn’t expect you to be down this way so soon? What can I do for you today?” “Kenneth, will you relax? It’s been what, like ten years now? I’m not your superior officer anymore; you don’t have to keep calling me sir and getting all nervous and shit.” “I know sir, just old habits you know? Who’s this with you?” “This here is Ulivik, and he’s going to be my apprentice for a while.” “Apprentice? Seriously? Never pegged you as the teaching type.” “Right, Kenneth, like all those years of training soldiers in this very fort count for nothing at all.” “No, that’s not what I mean…I just oh I dunno. It’s just odd I guess. He’s a svelk, how come he’s not with his own people?” “That’s a long and unusual story, and one I don’t have time to go into. Besides we’re not here to satisfy your curiosity, we’re here for jobs, but seeing as this is Ulivik’s first time and all, can we get something maybe a little less…lethal?” “Hmm, usually that sort of stuff is on the boards, but I think I got something. Oh! There’s a nest of auravraxes a few miles from here.” “Ugh, more of those furry things? I just wiped out a nest of them a week ago!” “Well that’s all I got that’s on the easy side. I mean I’ve got some other jobs too, but you said this was more for training your apprentice than anything else.” “I can take on a harder task Mr. Bane. I mean I have to learn from experience right?” Ulivik pipes up forgetting that he was supposed to keep his mouth shut. Still, he might have a point. > You take a harder job Nothing like trial by fire, if Ulivik thinks he can handle it, he’ll learn soon enough. “Kenneth just give us whatever job pays the most currently right now.” You say. “Oh okay then, that’s easy. There’s a troll somewhere south of here near the old Empire border. Dunno exactly where he’s making his home, I’m guess there’s a hole in the ground somewhere though, anyway it’s been eating a lot of travelers and merchants on the roads whenever it’s feeling a little hungry. It’s only just arrived, but it’s hurting business and for some reason none of these fucking cowards will go and kill it!” Kenneth shouts so everyone in the bar can hear him. “A troll? Where the hell did he come from? They’re rare enough as it is, and even less likely to wander around above ground.” You remark. “I have no idea, but it’s ruining business. So are you going to take the job?” “Yeah sure, should be interesting.” You say. You and Ulivik get up and leave who looks less enthusiastic now. “What’s wrong with you?” “Oh uh, nothing. Just didn’t expect it would be a troll. You only hear about them in stories.” “Yeah, well this ain’t no story and they’re quite real. I should know I’ve fought one before when I was serving as a soldier here. Damn thing blended in the darkness of the cave and took out three men before we even knew what was going on. Now it’s a common misconception that you can only kill them with fire, but that’s probably the best way to kill ‘em anyway given how tough their skin is, let alone their regenerative abilities…” At this point Ulivik begins to look pale, an amazing feat for a dark elf. You address the situation before continuing. “Okay and I can tell by your look, you’re having second thoughts about all this. If you want to back out, there’s still time you know. Do you want to back out?” Ulivik’s silence isn’t an answer. “Look, you better tell me now because when we’re facing nine feet of green and black horror I don’t want to be having to pull your fat out of the fire because you’re freezing up in terror.” “I’m not backing out and I won’t freeze up!” he exclaims. “Okay then, come on we need to get a few extra supplies.” Ulivik’s answer doesn’t exactly convince you that he still isn’t scared about all this, but sometimes fear can be a good thing. Keeps you on your toes. Besides one would have to be a complete moron to not be a little worried about facing a troll. The only time you faced one, wasn’t exactly a picnic and you had the advantage of numbers on your side. Normally you don’t waste your money on things like explosives, but you make an exception and buy a couple of firebombs along with some oil flasks, torches and a whetstone to make sure your sword is extra sharp. Along the way to your destination, you tell Ulivik how he should approach fighting the thing and whatever he does to not let it corner him or get the drop on him. If either one happens he’s dead. You also tell him that unlike an ogre or a giant, trolls are a lot faster and sneakier than their size would indicate. You travel for about a good portion of the day on your way towards the southern Rask border. You stick to the road since you figure if the troll has been ambushing merchants and travelers, he’s got to be stalking the road. When night comes you make a camp along side of it, but there still is no sign of any troll yet. “Hey you said these things don’t usually come out from underground?” Ulivik asks. “Well the one I encountered was living in a cave that was being mined, and all the other stories I’ve heard and you’ve probably heard is that they’re completely subterranean. Whatever the truth is, this one has been lurking above ground and out in the open, so maybe they just don’t like sunlight. Probably has a home somewhere nearby, but there aren’t any hills or mountains in this part of Rask, just forest. Could be living in there I suppose, but I’m betting he’s probably got a hidden entrance in the ground somewhere and he’s living right underneath us.” This of course causes Ulivik to start looking at the ground around him. “How do we know it’ll even show up?” “We don’t, but if it’s been attacking people like Kenneth says it has, then us lingering around the road will probably draw its attention. Of course there’s no point in sitting around and using up all our energy by staying up all night. We’ll be taking shifts. You seem to be alert already so you’re taking first watch while I get a little rest.” When you close your eyes you begin to slowly drift off, though you’ve always been sort of a light sleeper, so you never really fall into a deep sleep. What wakes you up completely is a sickening cracking sound and heavy breathing. You stand up with your sword in hand and you’re just in time to see a large gangly figure with its hands around Ulivik’s head which is now completely backwards. He didn’t even have a chance. Seeing you, the troll emits a low growl and drops Ulivik’s body. The troll lurches and leaps about in a chaotic manner. It tries to circle you in such a way that it’ll be behind you, but you don’t allow that to happen. Eventually it gets frustrated and attacks you head on. Fighting the troll is harder than the last time you fought one before and not just due to the fact that you had back up. The open space of the outside world is actually more beneficial for the troll’s fighting style which is jerky and involves a lot of leaping around. Many times the creature manages to smash you with its hardened fists due to its extended reach alone. Feels like getting hit by fucking battering ram. Your own hits against it don’t seem to do anything, except the one time when you actually manage to cleave one of the troll’s legs off just below the knee. This doesn’t deter its attack though. It merely backs off long enough for it to change its fighting style. It comes at you on all fours (or rather threes in this case). During this time you’ve taken the opportunity to light up one of the firebombs to throw at the thing, but by the time you light it, it’s already upon you and knocked you down. Pinnining you to the ground as best it can, the troll punches you in the face, breaking your nose to a point where it practically explodes into a mess of blood. You gasps for air as it follows up by sinking its teeth deep into your sword arm. The sound of bone cracking is a sure sign that it won’t be long before the troll chews it off completely. In the meantime the firebomb you lit fell close by and its fuse is still burning down. Somehow between your eyes covered in blood, the difficulty breathing and the pain wracking your entire body while a troll is eating you alive, you manage to grab the firebomb with your good arm and hold it right near the troll’s head. You get a minor satisfaction at the troll’s expression when he sees the bomb just before it goes off, blowing the pair of you up.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Chapter 3A1: Bane of Rask Year 45 “Bastard!” you say landing a killing blow on the last auravrax. You do a double check of the cave just to make sure you’ve got all the beasts. It’s times like this you’re reminded of your kobold hunting days. Of course auravraxes are a lot furrier and stupider. Doesn’t make them any less dangerous though considering they’re basically balls of hair with lots of teeth and a vicious streak a mile wide. You wonder how it was you never encountered them before when you were posted up here. You can only assume that the larger creatures like ogres and wendigos kept them in check. Thanks to your depletion of such creatures other predators managed to gain better dominance. Nature is wonderful at balancing things out that way. After making a check you pile up the bodies and start skinning. You figure between the payment for this job and the sale you’ll make on the pelts you’ll have enough money for at least of week’s worth of wine, women and song. “Nah, to hell with the song. More women.” You chuckle to yourself. Thoughts about such “common” pleasures would’ve never entered your head decades ago. Makes you realize how much you’re changed since then, but it’s a good change you think. For the first time, you’ve actually been enjoying life rather than just going through the motions of it like a golem. Life is so much simpler and easier when you don’t have anyone to answer to; especially when that “someone” doesn’t even know what the fuck they’re doing half of the time. Life of course still has its bad moments, but compared to your time serving the Empire, it’s like a non-stop party. The Empire, now just another government resigned to the trash heap of history. All of its years of power and whatever glory it claimed it had completely gone. And of course much like Mother Nature, the smaller predators get to take their chance in the sun now that the big one is extinct. One of those smaller predators being one your old fellow Eternals, Edgar. You don’t know all the details, but from the rumors you’ve heard he’s declared himself a general and is calling the territory in his control, The Eternal Dominion. He apparently managed to get some of those chaotic eternal wannabes in some semblance of order to help him as well. When you first heard about this you could only shake your head in disappointment. Not even so much for what he’s doing, but more with how he’s doing it. It’s almost like he’s going down the same path that Kane did, but with even less planning and followers that are probably more duplicitous than Shadow Guards. You’d think that he would’ve learned something from that mess. Still, it’s his life and you have yours. You stop reminiscing about the past and concentrate on skinning the auravraxes. When you’re finished you cook up one of them to eat and then get some sleep. The next day you set off to Keplavisk with your furs. When you get to Keplavisk, the usual people acknowledge you. Some are friendly, some aren’t, and others with longer memories hate your guts for your action when you were trying to maintain order here a long time ago. Just one of the things you have to put up with, after all you still have your reputation of being… “Bane of Rask! Bane of Rask! Hey wait up!” Ulivik yells. “(Sigh) Boy, I told you to stop calling me by that ridiculous name. In fact I told you to stop following me period!” “Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are those auravrax furs? Did you kill all of them? I bet you just went in and totally destroyed them without fear!” Ulivik says while making sword whooshing sounds. You roll your eyes at the teenager’s over enthusiasm and resign yourself to him following you while you head to the town hall. For whatever reason he sees you as some sort of brave “hero” though you wish he wouldn’t. You can’t get too mad at him though, not his fault he’s a dark elf brought up by humans. There’s got to be a lot of confusion going on there. You mostly ignore Ulivik’s incessant questioning until you get to the town hall where upon his guard run him off with racial slurs and threats. You enter the building and see the mayor. Mayor Stundle is sitting his fat ass at his desk doing nothing of any importance as usual. “Ah Mr. Bane, I can see by the numerous pelts you’re carrying that you’ve taken care of the problem, I knew you would. That’s why you’re the best merc in the Confederation. Your payment is on the desk there.” “Good, and my name isn’t Bane you know. I keep telling people that.” “Indeed it may not be, but that’s what everyone knows you as. Can’t fight fame or maybe in your case infamy. Heh heh.” “Yeah, anyway I showed you the proof, I’ve got some furs to sell.” “Got a special job for you if you want.” “Maybe later, I’m going to enjoy myself.” “Okay, but I can’t promise you it’ll be available when you get back.” As you leave Mayor Stundle’s office, Flog is just entering with several ogre scalps. He displays his obvious dislike of you as usual. As thorough as you were when you destroyed Fort Defiance, Flog survived because he did the smart thing of running away and hiding as soon as he saw your army approaching. “Outta da way Bane, Flog has to see fat mayor!” “He’s all yours.” You remark not really wanting to deal with his attitude today, of course in typical orc fashion, Flog feels the need to press the issue. He sees the auravrax furs and makes his move. “Gruh. You kill little furry things. Flog kill big ogres! More proof that Flog better merc than you!” “Sure Flog, whatever.” You say dismissively which of course annoys Flog even more. “Flog gonna kill you one day Bane!” he shouts as you walk away. “Sure Flog, whenever you’re ready.” You say almost yawning. Another time and place you would’ve killed him for speaking to you in such a manner, but over the years you’ve mellowed with age. Besides he’s been threatening to kill you for the last eight years. The first few times you took him seriously. Now it’s just boring. If he really ever wants to try he knows where to find you, not like you’re hiding. After selling your furs you make you take your money to the closest tavern where you proceed to make good on your claim of relaxing. After a couple days of carousing you’re lying in bed with a couple of serving wenches and you decide that you should probably get back to work. No point in waiting around until all your coin is gone, you’ve had your fun now its time to get back to what you’re really good at, killing stuff. You tell the girls in your room to leave and get prepared to go find some more work. You’ve barely stepped out of the inn and Ulivik has already found you and nearly gets himself stabbed for sneaking up on you. “Hey Mr. Bane, it’s just me!” he says with a worried tone. “Boy, didn’t I tell you to never sneak up on me like that? I could’ve killed you and I doubt if anyone would’ve blamed me for it!” you shout “Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are you going on another mission?” “What do you think?” “I think you are! But Mayor Stundle already gave out all of the jobs, you’ll probably have to go to another town.” “And how do you know this?” “Because I tried to sign up, but I got thrown out of the town hall and called names.” “Sounds about right, but how did you get in there in the first place?” “I snuck in. I think I’m getting really good at it!” “Hmm, sounds like your svelk heritage is finally paying off.” You say. “Svelk?” Ulivik asks as if you’ve spoken a made up word. “Svelk, you know it’s the proper name for you dark elves, you mean you’ve never heard the term?” “No, I’ve been called a dark elf before, but I mostly get called a lot of other names.” “Well life’s tough kid, now you go run along…” “Hey why don’t I come with you on your next mission!?” And there it is. You knew the day was coming where he’d start asking you to bring him with you. “Yeah, no. I work alone.” “Aw come on! I need the experience! I try to sign up for even the easy jobs and I get thrown out! I’ve even tried going door to door asking if there are any monsters they need killing and they usually just say, yeah the one standing front of me! Then they slam the door in my face! It’s not fair!” “Why do you want to be a merc anyway? I mean I know you’ve got a family that takes care of you. They must, if they were willing to take on the ostracizing that would come in raising a dark elf baby.” “They do and I know they love me, but working as a hide tanner is boring! I want to be a mercenary and live a life of adventure! I mean I’ve heard stories of how my race is composed of nothing but mercenaries! Just think, a long proud line of brave ancestors that lived a glorious life of excitement! I should be as noble as them!” You almost laugh when hearing how Ulivik has spoken of his race. He truly is out of touch as there is absolutely nothing glorious, proud or noble about them. Even brave is debatable most of the time. “Ulivik, if you really want to be a merc, why not just go to Kenneth’s Rest? He doesn’t give a shit who he hires. Hell, he hires dark elves on a regular basis.” “I would, but uh, I’m not allowed to leave the town…but I know if you were with me, my parents would let me go! So can I please come with you?!” This scenario is just so bizarre; you hardly believe that it’s happening, a dark elf practically begging you to teach him to be a mercenary. The crazy thing about all this is you’re actually considering it. You must finally be suffering from some of the blows you’ve taken to the head in the past. It’s the only explanation. > You don't take Ulivik While it’s an interesting possibility, you’re not training soldiers anymore; you’re done with that mess and quite frankly, you doubt if Ulivik would make a good warrior of any kind. “Look kid, I’ve put up with you for quite some time now, but enough is enough. I told you, go down to Kenneth’s Rest and get a job. If you’re too much of a sissy to disobey your parents, then you ain’t gonna have what it takes to be a merc in the first place. Now leave me the hell alone, or I’m gonna hurt you very very badly and you don’t want that.” Ulivik tries to beg some more, but after a few menacing glares and threatening steps towards him, he backs off, saddened by your hostility. Having gotten rid of Ulivik, you set off for a different town further north, they’re always having problems up there. A few months later when you’re back in Keplavisk, you fully expect Ulivik to be bothering you again, but you see no sign of him which is odd since he always seems to know exactly when you come into town. While getting a drink at the tavern you ask the barkeep in passing where he is. “Oh that dark elven boy? Ran off and got himself killed a couple months ago. Damn fool was trying to be a mercenary and I guess some bandits finally taught him that he wasn’t. Good riddance I say. Don’t need any of their kind around, didn’t like ‘em when they were doing thug work for the Empire…erm, no offence Mr. Bane…” “Hmm, just gimme my drink.” You say. While Ulivik’s death doesn’t affect you on any emotional level, you are a little surprised to hear about it. You didn’t think he actually would have the heart to try to strike out on his own. Oh well, that’s how it is in this business though, one moment you’re here the next you aren’t. Everything is fleeting and you can’t worry about tomorrow, you just have to live for today. Life for you continues on as usual. Year 50 You wake up from another night of debauchery and predictably you feel pretty terrible from it. Your head hurts and your body aches all over, of course your body would ache anyway. The years have been taking a toll on how you push yourself physically and the battles you fight. The excessive parties in between really don’t help though. You just lay in bed for a while dreading the fact that you’ll be running out of coin soon again and have to go to work again. It’s an endless cycle, and while the freedom you’ve enjoyed since leaving the Empire has been nice, the past couple of years you’ve started feel like something is missing. Namely purpose and direction. The Empire had numerous faults, but in the beginning it did give you such things and part of you misses it. You begin to wonder if you shouldn’t go join Edgar in his Eternal Dominion or maybe offer to serve the Felkan Kingdom to give yourself some sort of goal larger than yourself. You quickly dismiss such thoughts though for several reasons, one of the biggest ones being that you now you’ve had your taste of freedom, you don’t really want to be following orders from a large government again. (Let alone Edgar) Of course maybe you just need a change of scenery and just leave this area entirely. There certainly nothing really tying you down except perhaps your own comfort of familiarity. You’ve spent more than half of your life in Rask, hell it’s actually been more of your “home” than the Empire ever was so despite your emotional disconnect with people, you ‘re a little attached to the area. > You leave Rask You’ve lived in Rask as an “occupier” and as a “citizen” and neither one have really fulfilled you. You decide that it might very well be time to leave. You have no idea where you’re going to go or what you’re going to do, but you guess you’ll figure it out eventually. You pack up what belongings you can carry and do a little shopping for other necessities before you set off on your journey. When you eventually get to the Rask border, you take a look back, wondering if you’ll ever return one day… You don’t. You spend your remaining years traveling far from Rask, far from old Empire territory and far from any land you’ve ever known. While some of it is interesting, you still never feel “content.” You mostly support yourself just by living off the land and doing some occasional mercenary work when passing through towns and villages. You never do settle down in one area for long though. You might be an Eternal and your fighting spirit is always willing, but that doesn’t stop the ravages of time from taking their toll on your body. Between the constant traveling and the combat, your body is aching all the time. You aren’t as fast or as strong as you used to be and you often forget you aren’t young anymore, or more likely you have full knowledge of it and are just too stubborn to change. Your unwillingness to settle down and die peacefully in your bed eventually catches up with you during a mercenary job you take in some small town in a far away land. Bandits are raiding the town on a regular basis and you take part in defending it. You do well enough for a man your age, but ultimately you are brought down by several of them who manage to surround and gain the advantage over you. You fall to several sword blows to your body and collapse in a bloody heap in the streets of the town.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>While it’s an interesting possibility, you’re not training soldiers anymore; you’re done with that mess and quite frankly, you doubt if Ulivik would make a good warrior of any kind. “Look kid, I’ve put up with you for quite some time now, but enough is enough. I told you, go down to Kenneth’s Rest and get a job. If you’re too much of a sissy to disobey your parents, then you ain’t gonna have what it takes to be a merc in the first place. Now leave me the hell alone, or I’m gonna hurt you very very badly and you don’t want that.” Ulivik tries to beg some more, but after a few menacing glares and threatening steps towards him, he backs off, saddened by your hostility. Having gotten rid of Ulivik, you set off for a different town further north, they’re always having problems up there. A few months later when you’re back in Keplavisk, you fully expect Ulivik to be bothering you again, but you see no sign of him which is odd since he always seems to know exactly when you come into town. While getting a drink at the tavern you ask the barkeep in passing where he is. “Oh that dark elven boy? Ran off and got himself killed a couple months ago. Damn fool was trying to be a mercenary and I guess some bandits finally taught him that he wasn’t. Good riddance I say. Don’t need any of their kind around, didn’t like ‘em when they were doing thug work for the Empire…erm, no offence Mr. Bane…” “Hmm, just gimme my drink.” You say. While Ulivik’s death doesn’t affect you on any emotional level, you are a little surprised to hear about it. You didn’t think he actually would have the heart to try to strike out on his own. Oh well, that’s how it is in this business though, one moment you’re here the next you aren’t. Everything is fleeting and you can’t worry about tomorrow, you just have to live for today. Life for you continues on as usual. Year 50 You wake up from another night of debauchery and predictably you feel pretty terrible from it. Your head hurts and your body aches all over, of course your body would ache anyway. The years have been taking a toll on how you push yourself physically and the battles you fight. The excessive parties in between really don’t help though. You just lay in bed for a while dreading the fact that you’ll be running out of coin soon again and have to go to work again. It’s an endless cycle, and while the freedom you’ve enjoyed since leaving the Empire has been nice, the past couple of years you’ve started feel like something is missing. Namely purpose and direction. The Empire had numerous faults, but in the beginning it did give you such things and part of you misses it. You begin to wonder if you shouldn’t go join Edgar in his Eternal Dominion or maybe offer to serve the Felkan Kingdom to give yourself some sort of goal larger than yourself. You quickly dismiss such thoughts though for several reasons, one of the biggest ones being that you now you’ve had your taste of freedom, you don’t really want to be following orders from a large government again. (Let alone Edgar) Of course maybe you just need a change of scenery and just leave this area entirely. There certainly nothing really tying you down except perhaps your own comfort of familiarity. You’ve spent more than half of your life in Rask, hell it’s actually been more of your “home” than the Empire ever was so despite your emotional disconnect with people, you ‘re a little attached to the area. > You stick around You may be in a “rut” but you realize you’re too old to just start all over again, somewhere else and quite frankly you don’t really want to. Rask is your home now, and while life might not be perfect here, it’s a lot better than how your life was during the Empire. You just need to push that lingering Empire indoctrination from your mind that you thought was gone. You roll out of bed and get yourself in the frame of mind to go to work again… Year 54 “And that’s how I killed the last giant in Rask! Another round!” you exclaim as everyone in the tavern hangs on your every word. Later you continue your tradition of bedding whatever wench that is pretty enough and willing that night. The past four years have been relatively good for you, or at least you’ve been trying to make the best of them. Since your last self reflection you’ve funneled your energy in not only your mercenary work, but to be the best one in Rask by deliberately taking on the most dangerous jobs as well as blatantly stealing jobs from other mercs. While this has made you a lot more famous with the average citizens who appreciate your monster and bandit slaying, it’s also made you quite unpopular with all the rest of the mercs. Naturally this unpopularity puts a target on your back and while most of the mercs are far too scared to actually to confront you face to face they do eventually build up a coalition to take you out once and for all. One day on your way to take out what you believe to be a bandit hideout, you’re traveling into a wooded area and get the impression that something is amiss, like you’re walking into an ambush. At first you think it might be the bandits who caught on to you, but you’ve dealt with too many of those types to know that they’re either too stupid to lay an ambush or they’re smart enough to have already run away. That’s when you draw your sword… “Alright, I know you’re all out there! I guess this has been a long time coming, so let’s get this shit over. The merc population needs a little thinning out anyway.” You shout. Predictably Flog comes out hiding with a motley group of humans and even a couple of ogres he must’ve intimidated into joining him. “Flog told you he’d kill you one day! Today is da day!” “Took you long enough and you still need a group to help you…” you hear the crunch of a twig behind you and you instinctively duck and roll to your left as several bolts go flying into trees narrowly missing you. “Reload!” you hear a female svelk voice shout while you run for cover behind some rocks. “Hey! This is Flog’s kill! Told you not to try to kill him, just prevent his escape!” “Hah! You got Eldolith to help you? You working for orcs now Eldy? My how far you’ve come from once working for the Empire!” you mock. “You won’t be laughing for too much longer Eternal. You’ve stolen your last job from us!” Eldolith shouts back. While you hide behind the rocks, Flog orders some of the other mercs to go after you, doesn’t take any time for you at all to kill several of them. Eldolith orders another volley of bolts from her men, but you use a merc you grabbed as a shield and run deeper in the forest. Flog’s ogres run after you and thanks to their great stamina, they manage to catch up to you before long, you stop your running, spin around and with as much force as you can you chop at one of the ogre’s legs. He doesn’t stop in time and you nearly chop it completely off, unfortunately he crashes into you bellowing in pain the whole time. You crawl out from under the one leg ogre and finish him off, only to have his buddy nearly cave your head in with his club. You shove your dagger upwards into the ogre’s balls and his low growls and snarls become high-pitched squeaks as his manhood is now shredded. He falls to his knees and before you can finish him off, the svelks arrive with their blasted repeating crossbows again. A couple take aim immediately while two others attempt to run around behind you. Having little in the way of options you run to the nearest tree for cover and try to get close enough to cut one of them down. You succeed in dodging and reaching the first two, who put up a poor showing of swordsmanship, but the other two that ran around in back of you fire their own volleys and you feel the piercing pain of two bolts going into your left leg and another going into your back. You collapse on top of one of the other dead svelk. The pain is coursing throughout your body, but you’re in a vulnerable position, and in order to survive you can only hope you’re fast enough to get the drop on them. Playing dead you rely on your hearing to sense how close the svelk are stepping through the snow to check on you. This is harder than in sounds with a severely wounded ogre moaning about his wounds the whole time. You also see two other images running towards you, it’s Flog and Eldolith. You can’t wait any longer. You grab one of the dead svelk’s crossbows and with all your strength you roll on your back (Biting your lip at the pain due to the bolt there) and fire at the surprised svelks moving towards you. You were never an expert on ranged weapons, but you don’t miss at your range and the two svelk go down. You then point it at the balless ogre and put him out of his misery with a single bolt to his head. “Shit! He’s got one of the crossbows!” Eldolith shouts and pulls out her own with taking cover. Flog on the other hand doesn’t seem particularly worried. “No more hiding! Flog put an end to Bane once and for all!” he yells and charged at you with his axe. You shoot your remaining bolts at him, but only succeed in hitting Flog in the arm, which barely stops his stride. You scramble to get up and throw the crossbow at Flog who bats away the oncoming object. Flog swings his axe and catches you with a glancing blow to your chest, ripping your armor and breaking the skin. You stagger backwards trying not to fall again. “Yooze gonna die today Bane! Ha ha ha ha ha!” Flog laughs followed by a sudden yell of pain as he feels several bolts go into his own back. He immediately stops his advance on you and falls to one knee coughing up blood. “Traitorous dark elven bitch!” he shouts. This gives you enough time to stagger away again and grab another one of the dead svelk crossbows and hide again. You aren’t feeling so great yourself; you know the svelk bolts probably were dipped in some sort of poison. In fact you’re surprised it hasn’t incapacitated you yet. You just hope you can get through this quick enough to drag yourself back to the closest town. You look out from behind your cover just in time to see Flog attempting to advance on Eldolith and her firing another volley into his body. She ends up having to step back quite a bit and reload again before finally finishing him off. He falls backwards into the snow looking like a pin cushion. “Bad move Eldy. Should’ve let Flog wear me down a lot more and then killed him.” You shout. “Wear you down? Hah, he would’ve killed you, in your current condition. No, I want the pleasure of killing you myself.” While she pontificates you attempt to shoot at her from behind your cover, but you miss. “Nice try. How are you feeling over there Bane? Not too good I imagine. Had to make sure the poison was really strong, I know how you Eternals got that annoying resistance to the stuff.” At this point, you are indeed starting to feel quite unwell. You begin to feel nauseous and you’re having a hard time standing up. When you begin retching, you hear Eldolith speak again. “You know Bane, this is near the same area where I helped your old captain kill all those elves. That was a good day too. You’re starting to sound pretty bad over there Bane, how about you just give yourself up and let me finish you off? Wouldn’t you rather be killed by a worthy foe rather than just succumb to the poison? There’s no shame in being beaten by your betters.” You’re running out of time and you know it. “Alright…you got a point damn you. I’m coming out, here I’ll throw out the crossbow just to reassure you!” you shout and throw your crossbow from behind your cover. “Good, good, glad to see you submitting to the inevitable. Now come out slowly.” The way you’re feeling right now, you doubt if you could come out any other way. You see Eldolith pointing her crossbow at you while stepping out from her own cover and moving closer towards you. She smirks and in typical svelk fashion can’t help but gloat. “I must say I am surprised that you decided to surrender, I would’ve thought your eternal pride would’ve prevented such a thing. But I guess those days are long gone just like the Empire you once served eh?” “Just get this over with.” You say and then fall to your hands and knees in the snow vomiting up blood. “Mmm, perhaps I’ll enjoy watching you squirm some more. The once great Bane of Rask finally…” You knew you could count on Eldolith being a typical svelk. While she’s taunting you, she doesn’t pay attention that your hands are doing something rather simple such as balling up the hardened snow. With all your strength you throw the snowball at her. Being caught off guard she dodges it and shoots wildly at you. You manage to roll out of the way and grab the crossbow you threw away. You unload the entire thing at her and as luck would have it, the bolts land true for the most part. Three of them go into her side and another into her neck. She falls into the snow coughing up blood and holding on to her side. You hear her cursing you with her dying breaths as you attempt to leave the area. While you have won, you know you aren’t going to survive too much longer. You manage to crawl a few more meters before the poison finally takes it toll. Your last thoughts are nostalgic ones. You allow yourself to smile at the times you got to enjoy life and your past victories, even this one. Yes this is a good death you think and then you pass on.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Chapter 3A1: Bane of Rask Year 45 “Bastard!” you say landing a killing blow on the last auravrax. You do a double check of the cave just to make sure you’ve got all the beasts. It’s times like this you’re reminded of your kobold hunting days. Of course auravraxes are a lot furrier and stupider. Doesn’t make them any less dangerous though considering they’re basically balls of hair with lots of teeth and a vicious streak a mile wide. You wonder how it was you never encountered them before when you were posted up here. You can only assume that the larger creatures like ogres and wendigos kept them in check. Thanks to your depletion of such creatures other predators managed to gain better dominance. Nature is wonderful at balancing things out that way. After making a check you pile up the bodies and start skinning. You figure between the payment for this job and the sale you’ll make on the pelts you’ll have enough money for at least of week’s worth of wine, women and song. “Nah, to hell with the song. More women.” You chuckle to yourself. Thoughts about such “common” pleasures would’ve never entered your head decades ago. Makes you realize how much you’re changed since then, but it’s a good change you think. For the first time, you’ve actually been enjoying life rather than just going through the motions of it like a golem. Life is so much simpler and easier when you don’t have anyone to answer to; especially when that “someone” doesn’t even know what the fuck they’re doing half of the time. Life of course still has its bad moments, but compared to your time serving the Empire, it’s like a non-stop party. The Empire, now just another government resigned to the trash heap of history. All of its years of power and whatever glory it claimed it had completely gone. And of course much like Mother Nature, the smaller predators get to take their chance in the sun now that the big one is extinct. One of those smaller predators being one your old fellow Eternals, Edgar. You don’t know all the details, but from the rumors you’ve heard he’s declared himself a general and is calling the territory in his control, The Eternal Dominion. He apparently managed to get some of those chaotic eternal wannabes in some semblance of order to help him as well. When you first heard about this you could only shake your head in disappointment. Not even so much for what he’s doing, but more with how he’s doing it. It’s almost like he’s going down the same path that Kane did, but with even less planning and followers that are probably more duplicitous than Shadow Guards. You’d think that he would’ve learned something from that mess. Still, it’s his life and you have yours. You stop reminiscing about the past and concentrate on skinning the auravraxes. When you’re finished you cook up one of them to eat and then get some sleep. The next day you set off to Keplavisk with your furs. When you get to Keplavisk, the usual people acknowledge you. Some are friendly, some aren’t, and others with longer memories hate your guts for your action when you were trying to maintain order here a long time ago. Just one of the things you have to put up with, after all you still have your reputation of being… “Bane of Rask! Bane of Rask! Hey wait up!” Ulivik yells. “(Sigh) Boy, I told you to stop calling me by that ridiculous name. In fact I told you to stop following me period!” “Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are those auravrax furs? Did you kill all of them? I bet you just went in and totally destroyed them without fear!” Ulivik says while making sword whooshing sounds. You roll your eyes at the teenager’s over enthusiasm and resign yourself to him following you while you head to the town hall. For whatever reason he sees you as some sort of brave “hero” though you wish he wouldn’t. You can’t get too mad at him though, not his fault he’s a dark elf brought up by humans. There’s got to be a lot of confusion going on there. You mostly ignore Ulivik’s incessant questioning until you get to the town hall where upon his guard run him off with racial slurs and threats. You enter the building and see the mayor. Mayor Stundle is sitting his fat ass at his desk doing nothing of any importance as usual. “Ah Mr. Bane, I can see by the numerous pelts you’re carrying that you’ve taken care of the problem, I knew you would. That’s why you’re the best merc in the Confederation. Your payment is on the desk there.” “Good, and my name isn’t Bane you know. I keep telling people that.” “Indeed it may not be, but that’s what everyone knows you as. Can’t fight fame or maybe in your case infamy. Heh heh.” “Yeah, anyway I showed you the proof, I’ve got some furs to sell.” “Got a special job for you if you want.” “Maybe later, I’m going to enjoy myself.” “Okay, but I can’t promise you it’ll be available when you get back.” As you leave Mayor Stundle’s office, Flog is just entering with several ogre scalps. He displays his obvious dislike of you as usual. As thorough as you were when you destroyed Fort Defiance, Flog survived because he did the smart thing of running away and hiding as soon as he saw your army approaching. “Outta da way Bane, Flog has to see fat mayor!” “He’s all yours.” You remark not really wanting to deal with his attitude today, of course in typical orc fashion, Flog feels the need to press the issue. He sees the auravrax furs and makes his move. “Gruh. You kill little furry things. Flog kill big ogres! More proof that Flog better merc than you!” “Sure Flog, whatever.” You say dismissively which of course annoys Flog even more. “Flog gonna kill you one day Bane!” he shouts as you walk away. “Sure Flog, whenever you’re ready.” You say almost yawning. Another time and place you would’ve killed him for speaking to you in such a manner, but over the years you’ve mellowed with age. Besides he’s been threatening to kill you for the last eight years. The first few times you took him seriously. Now it’s just boring. If he really ever wants to try he knows where to find you, not like you’re hiding. After selling your furs you make you take your money to the closest tavern where you proceed to make good on your claim of relaxing. After a couple days of carousing you’re lying in bed with a couple of serving wenches and you decide that you should probably get back to work. No point in waiting around until all your coin is gone, you’ve had your fun now its time to get back to what you’re really good at, killing stuff. You tell the girls in your room to leave and get prepared to go find some more work. You’ve barely stepped out of the inn and Ulivik has already found you and nearly gets himself stabbed for sneaking up on you. “Hey Mr. Bane, it’s just me!” he says with a worried tone. “Boy, didn’t I tell you to never sneak up on me like that? I could’ve killed you and I doubt if anyone would’ve blamed me for it!” you shout “Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are you going on another mission?” “What do you think?” “I think you are! But Mayor Stundle already gave out all of the jobs, you’ll probably have to go to another town.” “And how do you know this?” “Because I tried to sign up, but I got thrown out of the town hall and called names.” “Sounds about right, but how did you get in there in the first place?” “I snuck in. I think I’m getting really good at it!” “Hmm, sounds like your svelk heritage is finally paying off.” You say. “Svelk?” Ulivik asks as if you’ve spoken a made up word. “Svelk, you know it’s the proper name for you dark elves, you mean you’ve never heard the term?” “No, I’ve been called a dark elf before, but I mostly get called a lot of other names.” “Well life’s tough kid, now you go run along…” “Hey why don’t I come with you on your next mission!?” And there it is. You knew the day was coming where he’d start asking you to bring him with you. “Yeah, no. I work alone.” “Aw come on! I need the experience! I try to sign up for even the easy jobs and I get thrown out! I’ve even tried going door to door asking if there are any monsters they need killing and they usually just say, yeah the one standing front of me! Then they slam the door in my face! It’s not fair!” “Why do you want to be a merc anyway? I mean I know you’ve got a family that takes care of you. They must, if they were willing to take on the ostracizing that would come in raising a dark elf baby.” “They do and I know they love me, but working as a hide tanner is boring! I want to be a mercenary and live a life of adventure! I mean I’ve heard stories of how my race is composed of nothing but mercenaries! Just think, a long proud line of brave ancestors that lived a glorious life of excitement! I should be as noble as them!” You almost laugh when hearing how Ulivik has spoken of his race. He truly is out of touch as there is absolutely nothing glorious, proud or noble about them. Even brave is debatable most of the time. “Ulivik, if you really want to be a merc, why not just go to Kenneth’s Rest? He doesn’t give a shit who he hires. Hell, he hires dark elves on a regular basis.” “I would, but uh, I’m not allowed to leave the town…but I know if you were with me, my parents would let me go! So can I please come with you?!” This scenario is just so bizarre; you hardly believe that it’s happening, a dark elf practically begging you to teach him to be a mercenary. The crazy thing about all this is you’re actually considering it. You must finally be suffering from some of the blows you’ve taken to the head in the past. It’s the only explanation. > You ulivik (Outcast) Ulivik is a strange young man. First of all he’s a svelk that had been abandoned as a baby, presumably by one of the many mercenaries that travel through the area. It’s not uncommon for dark elf mothers to abandon their young if they are an “inconvenience”, it is however less common for these babies to survive, let alone taken care of by others. Ulivik was that lucky rarity that a human couple that couldn’t have any children of their own literally stumbled upon him in the woods. Other than that, he hasn’t exactly been all that lucky. Given the reputation of his kind, it’s hardly surprising that he’s practically run off or insulted everywhere he goes. How his adopted parent’s business hasn’t suffered is amazing, but it’s a small enough town that people understand that the couple was trying for a child for a very long time and keep their dislike for the svelk youth to a minimum. Doesn’t stop other youths from being complete bastards to him though. Perhaps due to his outcast nature he’s latched on to the idea of a mercenary life of being a glorious life of excitement and adventure. Naturally when he found out that you were one of the best mercenaries in the region, he attached himself to you almost immediately and whenever you’re in town, he asks you a bunch of questions. Even getting hostile with him doesn’t drive him away since he’s so used to it, so nowadays you just resign yourself to the temporary annoyance. He’s sort of a good example of the whole nature vs. nurture nonsense you overheard some drunk philosopher babbling about in a local tavern once. You have to admit, sometimes you feel a little sorry for him, never thought you’d feel that way towards anyone, let alone a svelk.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 35 Another rebellion put down. You wipe your sword of blood and shake your head as you look around at the chaos. This is the Quala province, the very heartland of the Empire. You shouldn’t have to be trying to maintain order here only a few miles away from the capital itself. “Ha ha ha! Come on bitch, give it up! I’m an Eternal, you oughta be flattered that I’m even wasting my time on your normal ass!” private Felding says as he attempts to rape a nearby girl. You briskly walk over to Felding and pull him off her. You know damn well that the rest of his kind are probably doing stuff like this all over the place, but this one is in your direct sight and under your command. “What the hell, captain? If you wanted first dibs you could’ve just said so! Ah look, now she’s getting away!” “We’re here to maintain order private, not create more chaos.” “Oh yeah? Coulda fooled me by destroying the entire town like this.” “Regrettable, but during battle only victory matters.” “Exactly! We won! So now it’s time to have our fun with these disobedient peasants. Y’know instill fear in them so they won’t do it again.” “You’re not instilling fear though, you’re just satisfying your own desires.” “Hey, who says we aren’t supposed to have fun while doing it?” It’s like talking to a brick wall. You’ve had these “New Eternals” under your command for a few months now and they are some of the most undisciplined troops you’ve ever had. You can try to encourage them, you can try to reason with them, you can punish them, and none of it has a real effect. The only constant is that they know of your reputation and know that you’re also an Eternal, which makes them just fearful of you enough that they don’t attempt to directly challenge your authority like they have with so many of their other commanders. If it were up to you, you would’ve had them all killed for treason as soon as they murdered their first CO, but for whatever reason the Empire wants them active. You’re guessing because the Empire’s desperate. So they were ultimately transferred to you and unfortunately you’re not allowed to kill them either…well unless they try to kill you first. You swear this must be what it’s like to be a svelk. They are like children, malicious hateful little children. It’s not even their suspect loyalty that baffles you; it’s their complete lack of discipline. Even Kane and Cyrus who opposed you had discipline. Hell, Edgar who was arguably the most emotional and hotheaded of the group was a hundred times more disciplined than any of these new “Eternals.” You remember back to your own training and there were a few of your fellows that didn’t learn proper discipline either. They never made it past Mistress and the few that did, didn’t survive Gruz. Whoever was in charge of their training did a horrible job and should’ve been executed for incompetence along with the rest of these vicious monsters. That old orc was right, they will destroy what’s left of the Empire, but you doubt if they’ll survive long after its downfall. You think back to all the real Eternals. You, Edgar and Brenda are the only ones left, as Warrick killed in the final days of the Felkan War. At least you assume that’s what happened, his body was never found and you know he would’ve rather died than let himself be captured to rot in a P.O.W. Camp. Either way it’s truly a loss you never ever got to talk with him again. From what you know Edgar is still stationed in the Arat province, probably trying to keep his own “eternals” in line to keep the peace there. As for poor Brenda you know she has her command in the Nalin province and probably still quietly grieving for Roldan. After all you’ve been through, it’s come to this and you’re wondering what the hell you’re still fighting for. The Emperor? You haven’t cared about that unknown ruler for years. For all you know he’s some feeble minded inbred idiot figure head that his advisors keep locked away while they bumble around ruling things probably about as well as he would. The Empire? Perhaps at one time, but as it has lost territory, respect and apparently all resemblance of sanity over the years you’ve lost all faith that it can ever regain any sort of glory it might have had, if it ever had it to begin with. You’ve tried your best to stem back the tide of chaos, but you’re only one man even if you are an Eternal. While you ponder your potential future, private Felding interrupts you. “Hey, cap? You’re in a bit of a daze there. So if you’re done I’m going to go now.” “Hold on, I have one more thing to tell you.” “(Sigh) What?” Felding says with an exasperated tone. “You’re not a fucking Eternal. None of you little shits are.” You say and run Felding through and pull up on the sword unleashing his blood and guts onto the ground. Felding makes a high pitched scream and slumps on top of his entrails after you remove the sword. “Shit! The cap just killed Felding!” another so called eternal shouts while he and his buddy have just come back from looting some farmer’s home. The pair of them look like they want to run, but you make it easy on them. “Go ahead and run or stay. I don’t care anymore. I’m leaving. I will tell you this though, if the Empire sends any of you unruly scum after me, know that I shall take great pleasure in not just killing you, but in drawing it out for as long as possible. Remember this.” And with that last warning, you leave your service to the Empire. The question now is, where will you go? What will you do? This all feels so wrong when you think about it. You’ve killed so many for abandoning, opposing, or attempting to betray the Empire and here you are doing the same thing. Was it all for nothing? Was it worth it? You don’t know. You always believed at the time you were right and that you were doing the right thing. Maybe you were, maybe you weren’t. You just know that you can’t serve something you don’t believe in anymore. Especially when everyone else around you doesn’t either. Speaking of not knowing, you don’t know how to do anything except kill people. While you’re certain that you’d be able to hire your skills out somewhere, the idea of being a mercenary is a little distasteful for you. You’d rather not push the svelk comparison that far. You could swear loyalty to another government you suppose. Perhaps the Felkan Kingdom? You’re not sure they’d want you, what with all their high tech weapons and your own government once fighting against them. The only other alternative for you is to carve out your own territory and rule it as your own. While it’s true you do have leadership qualities, you know nothing of actually running a government. You honestly wouldn’t know where to begin. > You serve another government You can’t bring yourself to be some lawless mercenary like a svelk and you can’t fathom even trying to run your own piece of territory. You’re no ruler. You’re a warrior that currently has no direction or mission. The only chance to find purpose is to pledge yourself to another nation. Again, the only one you know of any note is the Felkan Kingdom. You only know a little about them based on the propaganda the Empire has told you as well as the brief conversation you had with Gerald when you temporarily reunited with him. Technically the Empire is at peace with the Felkan Kingdom, but there are still skirmishes. Though nowdays it’s due to rogue Empire soldiers (and peasants too) becoming outright bandits rather than any patriotic reason. The Felkan Kingdom has been trying to keep out Empire refugees as well, which means you’ll probably just get turned around, if not outright fired upon. Still with shitty situation you’re in, getting shot doesn’t even seem like a bad option at this point You find a nearby horse and set off for the west. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. When you get to the Arat province you find it in a bit better condition than other territory you’ve rode through, though when you ride through the town of Bucklesberg the peasants give you hateful glances or just outright run into their homes. You see in the middle of the town square several heads stuck on pikes with their eyes gouged out, some of them of children. In the very center of that is a pole with a sign attached. THIS TOWN IS UNDER THE DOMINION OF THE ETERNALS. LAW WILL THRIVE UNDER THE NEW ORDER. DISOBEDIENCE WILL BE CRUSHED. OBEY AND LIVE. REBEL AND DIE. -GENERAL EDGAR You read the sign twice you to make sure what you’re reading is correct. You almost wish you could say you’re surprised, and perhaps that small naive part of you still is, but you’re disappointed more than anything else. You of course don’t know the whole story, but quite frankly you don’t even want to know. All this revelation does is make you want to get out of Empire lands as quick as possible because it seems like it really was ever good for is turning everybody into a wannabe sovereign. You hasten your pace to the Felkan border as you don’t wish to have any potential conflict with this new “regime” that seems to be trying to form here. It’s a shame, because you did think about trying to find Edgar before going to the border hoping that maybe he’d join you. Now? He’d probably try to convince you to join him. Seen that story play out too, you’d rather not have to go through it again. Edgar obviously has chosen his path to deal with the Empire’s inevitable collapse and you must choose yours. Eventually you get to the Felkan border which is predictably well guarded by several men with their fancy musket weapons. From what you’ve heard they aren’t very sporting, but can blow through even a heavily armored orc instantly. Could’ve used some of those yourself ten years ago. “Alright just stop right there. You come any closer and you’ll have a brand new hole in your body.” One of them says pointing his weapon at you. “Sheesh Harry, can’t you come up with a better threat than that?” “Fuck you Wally, we’re turning back refugees every damn day, they can’t all be winners.” “Uh guys, I don’t think this one’s a refugee, he’s wearing military armor.” Another one says which at this point all of them point their weapons at you. You take this in stride you figured they wouldn’t exactly be welcoming. “Alright I don’t know why the hell an Empire soldier is here, but I suggest you just turn right back around. We’re supposed to be at peace now in case you didn’t know it, which judging by some of you lot you don’t.” Harry says. “I no longer serve the Empire, I request to serve your kingdom instead.” You say. “Ha ha ha, yeah right. Look even if we were inclined to believe you, we don’t need your kind especially since you can’t even keep your own shit together. We know you’re having a civil war or whatever it is right now. You’re lucky our king is such a pussy that he refuses to take advantage of the situation otherwise, we’d fucking own the Arat province right now.” Harry replies. “Hell yeah Harry! We should’ve just marched in and took it when they were begging for peace!” Wally adds The one soldier’s words are most interesting. Especially how he speaks about his ruler so freely and without fear. It is apparent that despite their dislike of their ruler, yet they are very dedicated to their nation. It is sort of a comforting thing to see after so many you’ve encountered over the years weren’t. Perhaps you could find a place here, assuming you can get past this first obstacle. “Very well gentlemen the only thing I can tell you that might convince you, is that I am an Eternal, born and bred for combat. I say with no boast that I am the best of my kind and while I am not yet familiar with your weapons, I dare say my combat skill and knowledge would allow me to learn rather quickly. All I ask is that I be allowed to speak with someone with more authority so that I can be given a proper chance.” “Eternal? You ain’t no Eternal, you’re way too old. I’ve seen those bastards running around on the other side of the border and they’re either in their twenties or younger. Dunno why you’d claim to be one of them for anyway, they’re not even human, they’re fucking soulless monsters. Heard enough horror stories from all the refugees we have to turn away. Some of those stories…pretty heartbreaking stuff…” Harry says getting a little choked about one of the stories he seems to be thinking about. It’s at that point one of his buddies pipes up. “Hey, uh maybe he’s one of those OTHER Eternals.” “Oh an original? I dunno, didn’t they not make too many of them?” Wally asks as if any of his buddies know. “How the hell should I know Wally?” “Well you were the fucker that brought it up! All right there’s an easy way to do this. Chuck, head back to Fort Soot, and see Captain Warrick, he’ll…” “Hold on did you say Captain Warrick?” you ask. “Yeah? And?” “I know him seeing as we practically grew up together. He was believed to be dead, how is it that he’s a captain in the Felkan military?” “Hmm, well perhaps you can ask him that yourself, if you really do know him. Okay change of plan, we’ll take you to see Captain Warrick, but you better not try anything funny. We’ll need you to get off that horse and hand over your weapons. Chuck and Wally, you’re with me, the rest of you keep an eye on the border as usual, we’ll be back soon.” You comply with their demands and have them march you to Fort Soot. The thing you notice immediately are all the trenches built into the land. Left overs from the war you imagine. When you get to Fort Soot it isn’t particularly large, though it does seem to be heavily defended with weapons you’ve heard about before. Cannons they’re called, and they are very devastating. You remember Gerald telling you how they could destroy stone golems as if they were made of paper. Makes you wonder why for all it’s power that the Empire didn’t fund money and time into developing such wonders as it certainly would’ve helped a lot more than their Eternal project. You quietly chuckle at the irony of that thought briefly thinking what you would’ve been doing now if there hadn’t been such a project. Probably not marching into a Felkan fort that’s for sure. When you are brought into Warrick’s office it’s like a trip to the past. Warrick’s changed quite a bit. He’s wearing an eyepatch for one thing and he’s lost most of his hair, but you’d still recognize him. He also recognizes you though he’s still having trouble believing it. “By the gods, is it really you?” “Yes, it’s me. By the gods? Not by the Emperor anymore I see.” “Nope and never will be again, which brings me to my next question. Why have you come here? I certainly hope it isn’t on some fool mission to bring me to justice for being a traitor…” “Ha ha. Maybe at one time, but not anymore either. I guess you could say, I’m also a traitor, though I don’t think I am. The Empire betrayed itself a long time ago and I can’t serve a place that has not even the slightest concept of honor or loyalty even if it was the one that taught me such ideals.” “I must say, I am a little surprised that you of all people would come to that conclusion. You were the most dedicated of all of us. I know that you are telling the truth though, as you were never a liar. So you’ve left the Empire then and come here to…?” “Pledge myself to the Felkan Kingdom, though it seems I wasn’t the only one who had that idea.” “Hah, yeah a bit of a long story that. Before we continue I’ll have to clear this with a lot of people first, and you’re probably going to have to prove yourself several times, but if you’re serious about this then you’ll most likely be accepted. I’ve found things work with a little more leniency in the Felkan Kingdom.” “All I want is a new chance.” And so began your service to the Felkan Kingdom. > Chapter 3A2: For the Kingdom! Year 40 “I don’t understand why the hell we haven’t just gone marching into the Arat province and taken it from the Eternal Dominion. We have superior weaponry, and they aren’t even that organized. I don’t care how skilled they are in combat, they can’t stop a bullet.” A soldier complains. “So, do you think we’ll really be going to war again?” his buddy asks. “Is there any fucking doubt? The Empire might be dead, but that Eternal Dominion or whatever it’s called took its place and from what I can gather the ones running that are complete monsters. No small feat considering how the Empire was run…uh no offense sarge.” You shake your head as a sign that you could care less how they discuss the Empire, as you’re busy keeping on the look out for potential enemies and you tell them to stop talking and do likewise. Felkan soldiers tend to be a little more chatty than you’re used to, they also tend to be a little over confident in battle at times due to their reliance on firearms. Their melee skills aren’t bad, but they aren’t anywhere near those of a say an Empire soldier, let alone an Eternal. You learned how to handle a musket pretty quickly, but much like the same reason you avoided using bows and such, ranged combat just isn’t quite your thing. Still, you appreciate their destructive power and having an advantage so you have no problems carrying around a couple of flintlock pistols on your person. Another thing that’s different is a government that isn’t actually interested in conquest despite its people often expressing such desires. You’ve never met the king or any of the royals, but from what you’ve heard the king is more of a scholar rather than a warrior ruler. Some consider this a weakness, but you aren’t convinced that it is. The king apparently believes conquest would just drain the coffers of what is currently a healthy economy (despite a recent war) and it’s better to put that money to other uses. The Felkans in general are always looking for new ways to advance the quality of life for all through scientific advancement. You don’t remember that sort of thing in the Empire where the status quo was law. While magic was reserved for the elite and still not common in the Empire, it’s practically non-existent in the Felkan Kingdom, which might explain their tendency towards scientific endeavors. Well that, and the fact that a good number of gnomes live among them who probably produce most of the great inventions in the kingdom. Still, you often hear a lot of criticism about the king; sometimes it makes you wonder if there shouldn’t be cause for concern. If this were the Empire you would’ve been expected to harshly discipline all of those soldiers that insulted the Emperor. Here, there is a lot more freedom in what you can say. Yes, there are so many differences from the Empire and you often feel out of place. Hell you feel strange enough only being a sergeant again. Five years and they still haven’t felt that you warrant a promotion to a higher rank, you don’t know why they still don’t trust you as much as they trust Warrick considering he actually fought against them directly. Of course he actually saved the lives of some important Felkan royals, so that’s probably the reason. They don’t keep you stationed on the frontlines of the Arat border like they do with Warrick either, for the past several years you’ve been stationed at a fort at the other end of the kingdom, though the fort is so small it’s more like an outpost. Fort Green is located near a small village called Blossomdale and that’s basically what you’ve been defending. It’s a rather dull assignment and only broken up by the occasional skirmishes with gnolls, bandits or other denizens living in the untouched forests and the hills. You’ve tried to make the best of things. You keep your mind mostly focused on your job like you always do. One good thing is that the soldiers that serve under you don’t seem to mind your Eternal origins, but you do get the impression they’re a little afraid of you. Your superior officer Captain Eckers seems okay with you as well. He’s the only one stationed here that’s older than you and probably sees you as someone he has a little more in common with, not to mention you bring a little more discipline to the fort and encourage more drilling and combat training. Eventually your shift is over and as usual, nothing happened today. Your replacements take over your post and you make your way back to the fort. The rest of the soldiers head to Blossumdale presumably for a little R&R as they often do. When you get back to the fort, somebody tells you that Captain Eckers wants to see you, so you proceed to his office. “Have a seat sergeant. So was today any different than yesterday? Any hostiles to be dispatched or anything?” “No sir, things were quiet as usual.” You answer. “I figured as much. It’s been like this for the past eight months. You know it’s always been slow around here, but lately…(sigh) I don’t know. I suppose we should be glad this place isn’t under attack constantly, but the boredom of nothing to do is frustrating.” “I know the feeling sir.” “Heh, I’ll bet. Bred for war and all that…you once had a command at a fort at one time did you not?” “Yes sir I did, in Rask.” “Yeah, I’ve heard about that area. I’ll bet you never ran out of fighting up there.” “Well sir, we sort of did since I did my best to try to exterminate the most dangerous threats. For a while things got slow then we had a series of uprisings became a problem and I had to be in involved in putting those down so I wasn’t quite as bored anymore.” “Uprisings. Now that would be an interesting event, though I don’t think I’m quite that bored yet. Still, I wonder if one wouldn’t do some good. Get those royals off their asses and actually do something for a change.” “I’m sure they do what they can…the land is prosperous after all.” You say unsure of how to react and still wondering why you were called in here. “Yeah, yeah, I know, but really what good is that going to do when the Eternal Dominion comes beating down our door? I served on the front lines of the war with the Empire from beginning to end, and I saw shit that even I wasn’t prepared to see. Even with our technological advantage, sometimes I don’t know how we managed to hold the Empire off…I guess you guys really had a lot of internal problems.” “Yes, yes we did sir. A lot.” “Right, and that’s the only reason why we held out. If the Empire had been a united front like it used to be… well me and you probably wouldn’t be having this conversation.” “Captain, if I may interject for a moment. I have heard citizens and soldiers on more than one occasion suggest that the Felkan Kingdom should become more aggressive. I’m puzzled to as why if things are going well. after all the Empire engaged in continual conquest and I think we know how that turned out.” “You have a point about the Empire, but you also should remember the Empire lasted several centuries before collapsing. I don’t presume to know exactly all the problems you had, but I can tell you what the problems we have are and why the people are getting sick of it.” “And what are those sir?” “Fucking gnomes.” “Gnomes? Don’t they provide all the wonderful inventions for this Kingdom?” “Yeah, and they also have been using us as protection for decades and the royals are in their fucking pockets. We aren’t really ruled by the royals, the damned gnomish inventors and businessmen rule us. They don’t want us expanding too much, because then we just might be harder to control. They also don’t want us to become too strong militarily because we just might turn it against them. I mean hell, I think you’ve seen how our soldiers aren’t exactly the best fighters and rely on firearms. I shudder to think if we ever had to actually fight without them. It didn’t always used to be that way, at least not back in my day. That’s why you’re a damn breath of fresh air. You’re actually a REAL warrior.” You just sit and listen as the captain begins getting even angrier during his rant. “You know why I’m stationed here in the ass end of nowhere? Because I spoke my mind on what I thought about gnomes and suggested we needed to stop being pussies and actually start taking more land. I mean take this place for example. If we had just a couple more platoons, and the orders, we could march into those hills nearby and wipe out all those damned gnolls for good. But what do we do instead? Wait around for the fuckers to attack us then sit here with our thumbs up our asses until they rebuild and do it all over again. We’re better than that! Or at least we used to be!” at this point Captain Eckers slams his fist on his desk. He’s silent with his head looking down for a moment and then looks up to address you. “…forgive me sergeant, I get a little emotional about this stuff sometimes. I really shouldn’t. Thank you for your report and listening. I just need someone to speak my mind to sometimes…anyway dismissed.” You get up and leave, thinking about what has transpired. It basically sounds like the captain doesn’t believe in his government anymore. You know what that’s like, but you just aren’t sure if it’s as bad as he’s claiming or he’s just a bitter old man that’s mad because times changed and he pissed off the wrong people in charge of his career. However as you’re reminded he isn’t the only person you’ve heard speaking out, he just happens to be the only one that’s gone into more detail than you’re used to. You also wonder if he told you all this stuff for a reason, is he hinting for you to do something? And what could you do? You’re a lower rank than him and not exactly high on the hierarchy. You’re also pretty much an outsider. Stirring up trouble isn’t exactly something you should be doing, and you pledged yourself to serve the kingdom and its king, not overthrow it. If you were going to be doing that, you might as well have joined the Eternal Dominion. You aren’t sure of what to make of all this gnome business though, if that is even true. You’ve never paid too much attention to them being in a lot of the positions of power. Part of you though does make you wonder about who you’re really serving and if it is really the gnomes like the captain claims, then your whole oath to the kingdom is pretty much a joke. Then again if they really are controlling everything, does it really make a difference? Things seem to still be running well and you personally just don’t have any real proof that there is some conspiracy even though it wouldn’t surprise you too much if there was one going on. One thing you know though, if others are feeling like the captain does, this isn’t going to go away. This is going to get worse; in fact it may already be too late to stop something from occurring. You could very well find yourself serving in another collapsing government again. > You report to the captain You don’t know if this is actually going to do any good, but if the captain ever decides to suddenly secede from the Felkan Kingdom, you want someone to know that you weren’t part of it from the beginning. The problem there isn’t a higher-ranking officer at the fort and you don’t really know anybody that you could report this to. You suppose you write a letter to Major Samuels at Fort Smoke. He’s in charge of the whole Ibim province, but then you think what if he feels the same way as the captain? If that’s the case, then you’d probably become hated not just at your fort, but in other circles as well. You’d possibly even be demoted or worse. You’ve managed to make a life here with minimal friction, and you’d hate to just throw that all away, but you have to do something. For good or ill your duty is to the kingdom now and you need to defend against all potential threats, external and internal, and from your experience the internal ones are the worst. That’s when you come up with the idea that you’ll write to Warrick about this. He might not be able to do anything about it considering he’s in another province, but he’s about the only one you can trust and maybe he knows something and can at least give you advice. You write a letter to Warrick that night and hand it to a professional courier in Blossumdale the next day. Not having anything else to do, you return to your duties. Days pass into weeks and weeks pass into months. Just when you’re starting to wonder if your letter got intercepted and someone having sinister plans for you, you get a letter back from Warrick. You’re anxious to see his reply and you find a quiet place to open it up and read it private. You’re expecting a long letter, but instead you get a short one that’s to the point. Things are already in motion to remedy the situation soon and your duty to the kingdom has been noted. Warrick You can only guess that Captain Eckers will soon be gone with wording like that. You didn’t expect anything to be done either, just advice. Warrick must have better connections than you thought. Another week passes since you received Warrick’s reply and Fort Green is visited by a general with his personal assistants, a couple of royals and a well-dressed gnome. The visit is unexpected by everyone, especially Captain Eckers since he’d know first if anyone was scheduled to visit. Captain Eckers and several others are taken into rooms and questioned separately. The rest of you are ordered to go about your business and to not interfere. Later you are called in as well. You find yourself face to face with one of the generals. General Benson. He’s probably about the same age as Eckers, though obviously more successful. “Sergeant, I’m going to make this quick. You are the one who wrote the letter to Captain Warrick are you not?” General Benson asks. “Yes, sir.” “And why did you write to Captain Warrick about your concerns? Why not write to Major Samuels? He is the superior officer in charge of this province.” “Well, I wasn’t sure if I should sir. For all I knew he might’ve had sympathies with Captain Eckers and if that had been the case, my situation would not have been a good one.” “Hold on sergeant, are you telling me Major Samuels is also part of this?” “No, I don’t even know the Major sir, I was just being cautious on my part. I wrote to Warrick because…well he’s the only person I felt I could absolutely trust.” The general is silent for a moment while he looks you up and down. “Tell me, have you had any conflict while being here?” “Conflict with the other soldiers? No sir, can’t say that I have, I tend to just do my job and keep to myself as far as social matters are concerned.” “What about your relationship with Captain Eckers?” “It’s a respectful one sir, I feel no malice towards him nor perceive any towards me.” “Yet you felt the need to report him.” “Well sir, I thought it was something that might be needed to be brought to the attention of those in a higher position than me. Dissension in the ranks is no good sir. These sorts of things need to be taken care of before they spread. I know from direct experience, sir.” “Hmmm, yes I suppose you would…” General Benson continues to study you as if he’s trying to read your mind, after a minute of this, he backs off and starts to pack up some papers on a nearby desk. “I think we have everything we need to know. We weren’t exactly sure about you for a long time, and quite frankly some of us still aren’t. Your lack of trust among your fellow soldiers is concerning, but considering what we’ve found here, possibly understandable. As of now, I’m promoting you to captain and putting you in charge of Fort Green until further notice. You’ll be receiving some new soldiers soon to replace the men that will be leaving here. And hopefully this reward for your dedication to the Kingdom alleviates some of your trust issues.” “It will sir. It will. Thanks you sir.” “Very good, you’re dismissed.” You step out of the room feeling a sense of accomplishment. This is truly the first time since you pledged loyalty to the Felkan Kingdom that you feel appreciated. With this new command you actually feel like you’re back to where you’re supposed to be again, which is something you haven’t felt since you were taken off of your command in Rask. Granted Fort Green is no Fort Destiny, but it’s better than where you were. As for Captain Eckers, he and several other soldiers are escorted out of the fort as the rest of you stand by and watch. On his way out Eckers glares at you, he doesn’t say anything, but you can feel as if his stare is burning a hole in you. He knows someone said something, and he knows that someone was you. It’s too bad it had to be this way, but what’s done is done and it’s time to move on. Over the next few months you begin running the fort a lot more efficiently, the soldiers aren’t particularly thrilled about it since they’ve gotten used to not doing as much under Captain Eckers, which is another good reason why he needed to leave. Instead of whining, he should’ve been thinking up stuff to keep everyone’s mind’s occupied. After a few more months of extra training, you pick the soldier who has shown the most promise and pull them aside in your office for a talk. “Let’s see… Sergeant Dawn Young…easy name to remember. You’re one of the newer transfers here. Says that before you came here, you served on the Kilania Plains. Not exactly familiar with that area, but I hear it’s infested with centaurs. Half man half horse or something like that?” “Yes sir, they are little more than wild beast. They get drunk, breed, start fights and from what I can tell that’s about it.” “Hmm, bet they were a joy to fight. Well from your record it says you successfully lead several attacks on them. I’m guessing they are no longer a problem anymore?” “Well they are less of a problem than they were. I was told to hold back, by my commanding officer at the time. I know if we had pressed against them though we could’ve wiped them out completely though.” She remark with a slightly annoyed tone. Sounds like typical Felkan policy. You have to admit, Eckers did have a point about certain things. While you’re not going to support possible rebellion like he did, you are going to change some things. “Okay you sound like the kind of soldier I need. Consider yourself promoted to lieutenant and you’re my new second.” “…wow…thank you sir!” “Don’t go thanking me just yet, you still have live to enjoy it. I want you to take two platoons of soldiers, march over to those hills a few miles away and I want you to wipe out ALL of the gnolls that you see.” “All of them sir?” “All of them. Their warriors, their citizens, their women, their children. If there are little baby gnolls sucking on marrowbones in their cribs, I want you to kill them too.” Your orders are a little shocking to Dawn. She’s probably never heard anyone commanding the murder of infants before let alone the total war doctrine you’re following, even if it is against a bunch of barbaric monsters. “Lieutenant, am I going to have to find someone else to do this?” you ask. “…Um no sir. I just…well…the other soldiers sir. I’m not sure if they’ll follow such orders.” “Oh yes they will. Because it’s going to be YOUR job to make sure they follow them. Besides I’ve noticed guns tend to take away a lot of the emotional impact of killing. Not even like you have to look someone in the eye and take away their life. You can sit back comfortably from a few feet away and pull the trigger. They’ll be able to kill baby gnolls a lot easier than you think, and after this first time, it’s only going to get easier. I’m sure you’ll do fine, I have faith that you’re up to this task. I wouldn’t have picked you if I didn’t. You’re dismissed.” Looking a little overwhelmed, Dawn nods and leaves your office. Now all you have to concern yourself about is whether your changes get you thrown out of the fort like Captain Eckers. > Year 45 “They’ll probably attack at night sir.” Dawn says to you. “Yeah, gnolls are predictable that way. Is Blossumdale under control? “Yes sir, we executed most of the rabble rousers, the rest have shut up complaining about food rationing and troops permanently stationed in the town now sir.” “Good. Ooooooh I’m gonna hear it for that one.” You groan. “I don’t see why sir, you were merely keeping order and doing what needed to be done to help protect the kingdom.” “Perhaps, but the top brass won’t see it that way. There won’t be any way to keep this one quiet. News is going to travel eventually, despite the fact that I’m already keeping a lot of stuff out of the reports as it is. Hell, I’ve been getting blamed for stirring up a so called hornet’s nest with the gnolls since this war began.” “That’s not true sir, if you hadn’t sent me into those hills all those years ago, we wouldn’t have found out that they’d been planning a mass invasion for quite some time.” “That may be the case, but it doesn’t change the fact that they need to blame me for whatever reason.” “Sir if they’re so displeased with you, why have they not just replaced you?” “Good question. I imagine it’s because the gnolls are a very real threat and that I am actually doing a good job at holding back the gnolls with what little resources I do have. Everyone is still so worried about the Eternal Dominion possibly invading that they’re shoving all the troops along that border. Oh well, I guess I should be grateful they finally sent us some new cannons, though it took three years to get them. Okay lieutenant, that will be all, I suggest you prepare everyone because I get the feeling the gnolls’ attack tonight is going to be a big one.” Dawn nods and leaves your office. She’s a good second; you couldn’t have picked a better choice. You’re actually proud of how all your soldiers have stepped up over the past few years. All they needed was a little more discipline and something to keep them focused like a relentless army of hyena men eager to rip them apart and feast on their bodies. Despite the fact that the top brass nearly hates you and you’re on the eve of what is probably going to be a vicious battle. You feel good, like the best you’ve felt in years. You have a command, you have soldiers that are utterly dedicated and you have a ruthless enemy to fight. The excitement of battle is near and you can’t wait to bask in the violence of it. This is what you were BORN for. As darkness falls, you stand on top of the battlements and see the gnolls arrive right on time. They might be fierce warriors, but their ongoing crap strategy of throwing as many troops at you as possible isn’t working for them. You think orcs might’ve even been smarter than that, well at least Gruz would’ve been. There are an awful lot of them though this time, it appears that you were right, tonight’s battle is going to be a big one. As the horde gets closer, you also see several flying creatures in the distance. Wyverns. The bastards actually managed to tame wyverns. Looks like they’re a little brighter than you initially gave them credit for. You tell the cannon crews to fire upon the wyverns as soon as they get in range, all musket men on top of the fort as well. You stare down at the temporary wall you’ve built around the fort where some of your other troops are guarding and hope it’ll hold up well. They’ll eventually break it down, but hopefully not before heavy losses. You also hope the fortifications at Blossumdale will hold out. You couldn’t spare as many troops there, but you’re confident that Dawn will be able to handle the situation if the gnolls split up their attack. The battle starts off with the gnolls attempting a rain of arrows technique, fortunately you prepared for that by having everyone equipped with shields nearby. The Felkans as a general rule don’t use them too much anymore due to their reliance on firearms, but your re-emphasis on close combat training made your request for a shipment of shields quite logical. The wyverns then dive in from above while the horde concentrates on below. A couple of your new cannons prove their worth by landing a nice cannon ball into the side of one their heads, even better when it crashes into the gnoll horde. Another cannon ball tears a hole in the wing of another causing it and it’s rider to attempt a crash landing in the distance. Out of the remaining three wyverns, one veers away and heads to Blossumdale, while the other two focus on the fort. You order all your men to fire upon one of them which riddles it with gunshot wounds. Not enough to kill it however as lands on the fort and manages crush and bite some of the cannon crews. It’s rider fires a bow taking out a musket man next to you, and that’s when you make a running leap forward to stab the wyvern right in the neck. Blood gushes out and the beast flails about, causing the rider to fall off and over the fort walls to the ground below. You dodge the beast’s attempt at biting you in two and make a long slash cut through one of it’s wing so it can’t fly away. It tries to smash you with it’s tail, but you roll out of the way and finally land a killing blow by jumping on its back and running your sword through the top of it’s head. The other wyvern has been faring better against the remaining men on the fort roof, though it’s rider lies dead with a gunshot wound to his face. Since the beast is intent on hovering above rather than actually landing you have to make another running jump to grab on to one of its feet. The creature attempts to shake you off, but you manage to hang on long enough to stab upward several times into it’s soft underbelly. The creature twists and roars in pain, this time managing to cause you to fall to the fort roof, you are then covered in gouts of wyvern blood and chunks of entrails. You order your remaining men to fire upon it as it desperately tries to fly away. The musket balls do their job and the beast falls to the war zone bellow, unfortunately crashing into one of the temporary walls you put up. Granted the dead beast’s bulk is now acting a small block now, but the gnoll horde has a slightly easier access than it did before. You tell your men to start firing upon the horde, which is starting to surround the entire fort, while you rush down to the ground floor to help out the rest of your troops. You also notice that some of the horde is indeed breaking off into a separate group and moving past the fort towards Blossumdale. Ladders go up to scale the walls, and axes attempt to bring them down completely. Some of the gnolls have already gotten in. Won’t be long before they completely overrun this first layer of defense. After hacking down several of them, you tell all your men to fall back to the front gates and inside the fort. You have everyone barricade the doors as best you can while telling several soldiers on top to start dropping firebombs on the gnolls from the roof. Several explosions deafen the ears of all involved in this battle, smokes completely envelopes the fort and gnoll body parts are covering the battlefield. After briefly falling back, the gnolls continue their attack and try to scale the fort walls with ladders and break down the front gates with a battering ram. “We’re out of firebombs and we’re running low on gunpowder sir!” one of your men says. “We’ve greatly decreased their numbers now, we can take the rest of them hand to hand, hell just start dropping the rest of the cannon balls on their heads when they try to come up!” The gnolls fail at scaling the walls, but their size and strength makes their attempts at breaking down the front gate a lot more successful. Dozens of them come pouring in and you’re the first one to charge into battle. You aren’t even paying much attention to the rest of your troops at this point, you’re goal is to just kill as many as these gnolls as possible. You were covered in blood already, now you’ve just replaced one coat of blood for another. Eventually after lopping off the heads of several of these hyenas you see one their number arrive standing much larger than the rest. It’s the leader. The biggest one is ALWAYS the leader with these types. After making that annoying laughing growl sound that they love to make the gnoll leader sees you and swings his huge morning star into the floor near your feet. When he lifts it up to strike again you attempt to close the gap and you duck just in time for it to miss your head. You bring the gnoll leader down with a chop to his shins. Like a great tree he falls to his knees and you chop his head off like you’ve done with so many of his other kin. One of the gnolls seeing their leader dead, and already taken considerable losses, the gnoll shouts something in his strange language and they begin to retreat. “We’ve won!” a soldier shouts. “No, not yet, we’ve still got gnolls at Blossumdale, not to mention not all of these fuckers are running away yet.” While you are pretty certain the battle here is indeed finishing up, you aren’t sure what the situation is at Blossumdale. Besides Blossumdale, part of you is specifically concerned about Dawn, you know you really shouldn’t be as she’s a very capable soldier, but the concern is still there. There is still mopping up to do around the fort, but you really should send reinforcements to Blossumdale, the question is whether or not you should lead them personally. > You lead the reinforcements personally The situation at Blossumdale needs to be looked after directly, the fort will be fine now. Besides saving the town, your concern for Dawn is great and you want to make sure she’s okay. After dispatching the remaining gnolls in the fort, you order a platoon to accompany you to Blossumdale while the rest of the soldiers reinforce the fort. You rush as quickly as you can to Blossumdale. Call it bad luck, rash behavior, or the fate of the battle, but unfortunately you never make it. On your way to Blossumdale, gnolls that retreated from the fort are still very much lurking about on the fringes of the area. A group of them notices you, but you’re in such a hurry you don’t notice them in time. Several arrows fly out from their hiding spot and bring down several of your men. You try to look for somewhere to hide and take cover, but you’re completely out in the open. A couple more arrows fly and they hit their mark, and one that flies into your neck is the last one you feel. As you lay dying, you can only hope that Dawn is alive and well, because you aren’t due to your lapse in judgment.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 45 “They’ll probably attack at night sir.” Dawn says to you. “Yeah, gnolls are predictable that way. Is Blossumdale under control? “Yes sir, we executed most of the rabble rousers, the rest have shut up complaining about food rationing and troops permanently stationed in the town now sir.” “Good. Ooooooh I’m gonna hear it for that one.” You groan. “I don’t see why sir, you were merely keeping order and doing what needed to be done to help protect the kingdom.” “Perhaps, but the top brass won’t see it that way. There won’t be any way to keep this one quiet. News is going to travel eventually, despite the fact that I’m already keeping a lot of stuff out of the reports as it is. Hell, I’ve been getting blamed for stirring up a so called hornet’s nest with the gnolls since this war began.” “That’s not true sir, if you hadn’t sent me into those hills all those years ago, we wouldn’t have found out that they’d been planning a mass invasion for quite some time.” “That may be the case, but it doesn’t change the fact that they need to blame me for whatever reason.” “Sir if they’re so displeased with you, why have they not just replaced you?” “Good question. I imagine it’s because the gnolls are a very real threat and that I am actually doing a good job at holding back the gnolls with what little resources I do have. Everyone is still so worried about the Eternal Dominion possibly invading that they’re shoving all the troops along that border. Oh well, I guess I should be grateful they finally sent us some new cannons, though it took three years to get them. Okay lieutenant, that will be all, I suggest you prepare everyone because I get the feeling the gnolls’ attack tonight is going to be a big one.” Dawn nods and leaves your office. She’s a good second; you couldn’t have picked a better choice. You’re actually proud of how all your soldiers have stepped up over the past few years. All they needed was a little more discipline and something to keep them focused like a relentless army of hyena men eager to rip them apart and feast on their bodies. Despite the fact that the top brass nearly hates you and you’re on the eve of what is probably going to be a vicious battle. You feel good, like the best you’ve felt in years. You have a command, you have soldiers that are utterly dedicated and you have a ruthless enemy to fight. The excitement of battle is near and you can’t wait to bask in the violence of it. This is what you were BORN for. As darkness falls, you stand on top of the battlements and see the gnolls arrive right on time. They might be fierce warriors, but their ongoing crap strategy of throwing as many troops at you as possible isn’t working for them. You think orcs might’ve even been smarter than that, well at least Gruz would’ve been. There are an awful lot of them though this time, it appears that you were right, tonight’s battle is going to be a big one. As the horde gets closer, you also see several flying creatures in the distance. Wyverns. The bastards actually managed to tame wyverns. Looks like they’re a little brighter than you initially gave them credit for. You tell the cannon crews to fire upon the wyverns as soon as they get in range, all musket men on top of the fort as well. You stare down at the temporary wall you’ve built around the fort where some of your other troops are guarding and hope it’ll hold up well. They’ll eventually break it down, but hopefully not before heavy losses. You also hope the fortifications at Blossumdale will hold out. You couldn’t spare as many troops there, but you’re confident that Dawn will be able to handle the situation if the gnolls split up their attack. The battle starts off with the gnolls attempting a rain of arrows technique, fortunately you prepared for that by having everyone equipped with shields nearby. The Felkans as a general rule don’t use them too much anymore due to their reliance on firearms, but your re-emphasis on close combat training made your request for a shipment of shields quite logical. The wyverns then dive in from above while the horde concentrates on below. A couple of your new cannons prove their worth by landing a nice cannon ball into the side of one their heads, even better when it crashes into the gnoll horde. Another cannon ball tears a hole in the wing of another causing it and it’s rider to attempt a crash landing in the distance. Out of the remaining three wyverns, one veers away and heads to Blossumdale, while the other two focus on the fort. You order all your men to fire upon one of them which riddles it with gunshot wounds. Not enough to kill it however as lands on the fort and manages crush and bite some of the cannon crews. It’s rider fires a bow taking out a musket man next to you, and that’s when you make a running leap forward to stab the wyvern right in the neck. Blood gushes out and the beast flails about, causing the rider to fall off and over the fort walls to the ground below. You dodge the beast’s attempt at biting you in two and make a long slash cut through one of it’s wing so it can’t fly away. It tries to smash you with it’s tail, but you roll out of the way and finally land a killing blow by jumping on its back and running your sword through the top of it’s head. The other wyvern has been faring better against the remaining men on the fort roof, though it’s rider lies dead with a gunshot wound to his face. Since the beast is intent on hovering above rather than actually landing you have to make another running jump to grab on to one of its feet. The creature attempts to shake you off, but you manage to hang on long enough to stab upward several times into it’s soft underbelly. The creature twists and roars in pain, this time managing to cause you to fall to the fort roof, you are then covered in gouts of wyvern blood and chunks of entrails. You order your remaining men to fire upon it as it desperately tries to fly away. The musket balls do their job and the beast falls to the war zone bellow, unfortunately crashing into one of the temporary walls you put up. Granted the dead beast’s bulk is now acting a small block now, but the gnoll horde has a slightly easier access than it did before. You tell your men to start firing upon the horde, which is starting to surround the entire fort, while you rush down to the ground floor to help out the rest of your troops. You also notice that some of the horde is indeed breaking off into a separate group and moving past the fort towards Blossumdale. Ladders go up to scale the walls, and axes attempt to bring them down completely. Some of the gnolls have already gotten in. Won’t be long before they completely overrun this first layer of defense. After hacking down several of them, you tell all your men to fall back to the front gates and inside the fort. You have everyone barricade the doors as best you can while telling several soldiers on top to start dropping firebombs on the gnolls from the roof. Several explosions deafen the ears of all involved in this battle, smokes completely envelopes the fort and gnoll body parts are covering the battlefield. After briefly falling back, the gnolls continue their attack and try to scale the fort walls with ladders and break down the front gates with a battering ram. “We’re out of firebombs and we’re running low on gunpowder sir!” one of your men says. “We’ve greatly decreased their numbers now, we can take the rest of them hand to hand, hell just start dropping the rest of the cannon balls on their heads when they try to come up!” The gnolls fail at scaling the walls, but their size and strength makes their attempts at breaking down the front gate a lot more successful. Dozens of them come pouring in and you’re the first one to charge into battle. You aren’t even paying much attention to the rest of your troops at this point, you’re goal is to just kill as many as these gnolls as possible. You were covered in blood already, now you’ve just replaced one coat of blood for another. Eventually after lopping off the heads of several of these hyenas you see one their number arrive standing much larger than the rest. It’s the leader. The biggest one is ALWAYS the leader with these types. After making that annoying laughing growl sound that they love to make the gnoll leader sees you and swings his huge morning star into the floor near your feet. When he lifts it up to strike again you attempt to close the gap and you duck just in time for it to miss your head. You bring the gnoll leader down with a chop to his shins. Like a great tree he falls to his knees and you chop his head off like you’ve done with so many of his other kin. One of the gnolls seeing their leader dead, and already taken considerable losses, the gnoll shouts something in his strange language and they begin to retreat. “We’ve won!” a soldier shouts. “No, not yet, we’ve still got gnolls at Blossumdale, not to mention not all of these fuckers are running away yet.” While you are pretty certain the battle here is indeed finishing up, you aren’t sure what the situation is at Blossumdale. Besides Blossumdale, part of you is specifically concerned about Dawn, you know you really shouldn’t be as she’s a very capable soldier, but the concern is still there. There is still mopping up to do around the fort, but you really should send reinforcements to Blossumdale, the question is whether or not you should lead them personally. > You stay behind and secure the fort You need to stay here and oversee the purging of this fort, and the surrounding area. You can’t start running off half assed because you’re a little worried about one soldier even if she is one of the best ones you’ve had under your command. (Not including your fellow Eternals of course) After slaying all the gnolls still in the fort, you regroup your soldiers and tell one of the sergeants to head over the Blossumdale with a couple platoons and help in whatever way they can. You tell the rest of your soldiers to start rebuilding the walls, clear out the dead bodies and to help you do a sweep of the area. Your sweep of the area is a tedious, but vital one. A lot of the gnolls retreated to various areas just enough to be out of sight, but were obviously still attempting to regroup again. Good thing you stayed behind to mop up all these little clusters so they didn’t form a big one again. By the time you’re satisfied with your results, the sun is coming up and you return to the fort more than a little tired. When you get back, you’re happy to see Dawn there. “Sir, Blossumdale still stands sir, the rest of the soldiers are securing it and the area.” “Glad to hear it, and glad to see you made it out in one peace. Was the fighting heavy?” “It was, but from the looks of it, the fighting was worse here. The only problem we had is with a wyvern.” “Lucky you only had one. We had four of them and I had to kill two of them myself.” “That’s one more than me then, sir.” You smile at her remark and after a brief discussion on what the next course of action will be, you get some rest. Over the next few months the gnoll attacks die down, but they don’t stop completely. Most of your activities involve going further into the wilderness and taking out whatever villages or camps they have. In the meantime your superiors are telling you to stop your actions as the war has been won and now you’re just using up valuable manpower and resources. You really aren’t though; you’ve been doing just fine with the limited supplies that they see fit to give you. Somehow this situation seems very familiar… While your superiors do a lot of complaining, nothing actually happens to you. It would seem they’re bitching at you just for the sake of bitching. The gnolls might not actually be able to invade properly anymore, but if you let them regroup again, they’ll try it. Your goal is to purge them all, or at the very least drive them away so they don’t try it ever again. Year 50 “This is bullshit sir, executing those protestors was the right thing to do!” “Calm down lieutenant.” You say to Dawn. “No sir, this isn’t right! They can’t punish you just for doing your fucking job!” “Okay lieutenant I said calm down! Now listen, I need you on your best behavior, because they’re going to question all of us. I saw this happen to my predecessor. (sigh) Who knows maybe I did go too far, I mean I haven’t exactly been following Felkan policies, I’ve been sort of doing my own thing out here for the past ten years.” “Yeah, but your actions are protecting the kingdom! How can that be wrong?” You look at Dawn and see that she’s changed quite a bit since she stood here in this office several years ago hesitant to kill baby gnolls. She’s practically like an Empire soldier now. Everyone in this fort is and that’s what is no doubt getting you into trouble. Still, they shouldn’t be blamed for what you just ordered them to do. “Well, maybe I was protecting the kingdom, but I still wasn’t following the laws. And I certainly broke enough of them. Just don’t worry; I’ll do everything in my power to make sure nobody here gets blamed. I mean you were all just following orders.” “Thank you sir, but I knew exactly what I was doing and if they put you against the wall in front of a firing squad for treason, then I want to be standing right next to you.” “…that’s a very…enthusiastic sentiment, but I don’t think that will be necessary. I mean maybe this won’t even be all that bad, they did at least warn me that they were coming. They didn’t even do that with Eckers. Look lieutenant…Dawn, whatever happens don’t go doing something foolish like trying to save me or sacrificing yourself or something. Just continue to serve the kingdom and try to follow the laws the best you can, okay?” Dawn is visible upset by all this. She turns her head for a moment while sniffling, then turns back to you and agrees. She then excuses herself to get ready for this investigation. Wasn’t really until this moment that you see that you’ve have a very deep effect on her. You didn’t expect to, as you treated her like any one else under your command, well maybe you did compliment her a little bit more, but that’s only because she did more. Eventually the investigation group gets arrives. To your surprise it consists of only two people, General Benson, and that gnome you saw before during Captain Ecker’s investigation, you certainly hope this turns out a lot better. All your troops stand at attention and you greet the general. After a brief exchange the well dress gnome parts company with the general who approaches you and just shakes his head. “I knew we made a bad decision.” He says and motions you to your office. You sit down and the general sits down and he begins his questions right away. “Let’s get right to it shall we? You are aware that you’re serving the Felkan Kingdom aren’t you?” “Yes sir.” “Oh? You do? Well then, is there any particular reason why you’re treating this area as if you still serving your long dead Empire?” “I’m not sure I follow you sir.” “Don’t play stupid with me, I’ve read the reports and followed all your actions for the past ten years! You’ve trained these soldiers to the point that they’re fanatically loyal and dedicated, you started a war with the gnolls and didn’t stop hostilities until you completely eliminated their species, during which time you executed several Felkan citizens in Blossumdale and now you’ve done it again! Tell me, is war, murder and genocide all they taught you in the Empire?” “Basically.” “You might not want to be so flip with me, Eternal, your ass is just a step away from the gallows yourself.” “Sir, with all due respect if I was such a problem for the past ten years, why not get rid of me before now?” “Ohhh, believe me, if I’d had any say in the matter you would’ve been.” “Sir, everything I’ve done has been for the good of the Felkan Kingdom. I mean loyal and dedicated soldiers, since when is that a bad thing? Soldiers are supposed to follow orders of their superiors and government. That’s sort of their whole purpose.” “That’s rather ironic coming from you who seems to blatantly ignores orders like not starting wars.” “Sir, the gnolls were an ongoing problem even if they weren’t planning an invasion. Isn’t it better that they’re all dead so that Felkan citizens don’t have to worry about getting robbed and killed on the roads? Blossomdale probably wouldn’t be standing if we hadn’t stopped them.” “Do you really want to bring up Blossumdale captain?” “Why the hell not? You’re bringing everything else up.” You say starting to get angry. “Watch your tone, and if you insist…I already know your half assed excuse for executing citizens during the war with the gnolls, but please explain to me why you did it again this time, just so I can try to understand your fucked Eternal logic.” “Well it’s rather simple, some of the citizens were protesting the new tax that the king imposed. They were in front of the town hall screaming at their mayor as if he was directly to blame. We stepped in to calm them down, they started getting more violent and began throwing rocks. We told them to stop, they didn’t, so we opened fire on them. After rounding up the main rabble rousers who didn’t get shot the first time, we executed them properly.” “And that’s it? That’s your excuse for gunning down several citizens?” “If they hadn’t done , what we told them not to do, they’d still be alive right now, sir.” “And there it is again, they didn’t do what you told them to do, so they got killed, but when it comes to you, you apparently do whatever the hell you want.” “That’s not true sir I was trying to stop a potential rebellion, you can ask the mayor and any of my soldiers about the situation and…” “I’m not asking them, I’m asking you! You wantonly executing protestors like that is more likely to cause a damn rebellion not stop one! Or… maybe that’s what you really want Eternal? I mean that’s what you’re doing isn’t it? You train the troops to be utterly loyal, not to the Kingdom but to YOU. You’re starting wars, you’re executing Felkans which is going to cause more harm than good. Maybe this is your way of getting revenge on us? Perhaps you’re trying to start your own little Empire with you as the emperor this time?” You can’t believe these accusations. Here you’ve been doing what you can for the Felkan Kingdom by fighting off hostiles and putting down dissidents and you’re the one getting accused of treason. You just rub your hands over your face trying hard not to chuckle too much at the dark humor in all this. General Benson just stares at you disapprovingly as he usually does, but remains silent. It is at this point the well-dressed gnome walks in and nods at the general, he lights up some pipeweed and stands in the corner observing. It’s at that moment you think back to Captain Ecker’s accusations on the gnomes. Maybe he was right after all. Hardly matters at this point, because as far you’re concerned everyone in charge here has been an asshole. “Sir, I chopped up a shitload of gnolls and executed dissidents in the service of this fucking kingdom and the whole time I’ve done it all I’ve gotten is bitching and general ungratefulness, yet I haven’t complained. I didn’t even complain when you fuckers never sent me supplies on time to help fight the gnoll invasion. I execute some worthless fucking peasants stirring up shit, and I’m the fucking bad guy some how. Sir, I don’t need to re-create the Empire, because as fucked up as the government policies are here, I THOUGHT I WAS STILL SERVING THE FUCKING THING!” you shout. You slump back in your chair still fuming after your outburst, and that’s when the gnome speaks up in between puffs of his pipe. “So, Eternal did you want to leave?” he asks. “What?” “I’m asking you, did you want to leave? If you can’t find a place here, then perhaps it would be better if you left. In gratitude of all your service to the kingdom, this is a one time offer for you to leave free and clear. There will be no repercussions except that you can never return here.” > You leave You’ve tried to fit in here, but maybe it just isn’t meant to be. The Felkan Kingdom hasn’t given you the sense of purpose that you wanted except during the time you were fighting the gnolls and that’s only because you created an environment that you felt comfortable in. This place operates in such a way that is at odds with how you do things and this “generous” offer that the gnome has given you is probably the best you’re going to get, if you insist on staying. When you tell the gnome you’re going to leave, General Benson is obviously pleased, though the gnome doesn’t gloat. He simply nods and tells you that perhaps this is for the best. He assures you that nobody will be punished for any of the actions taken place her and that Lieutenant Young will take command of the fort. He also says he hopes you can find somewhere you belong. You pack up your stuff and attempt to make a silent exit, but that’s doomed to failure. Most of your soldiers want you to stay and even want to join you, but you tell them all that the Felkan Kingdom needs them and that there duty is here. Dawn is the most upset, but she manages to keep it together As you put Fort Green and the Felkan Kingdom further behind you, you start to wonder what you’re going to do now. Thinking back to what the gnome said, “Some place you belong” and you wonder if you do belong in the Eternal Dominion. From what you’ve heard Edgar’s been getting more organized, he’s even managed to conquer some of the old territories that the Empire lost. Perhaps he could use your help and maybe you could find your place there. Another part of you wonders if you shouldn’t just leave this whole region. Travel to someplace far away and completely different. Maybe you need a brand new start. > You travel to the Eternal Dominion You’re an Eternal and while you never cared much for the new generation of Eternals, it’s probably the best chance you’ve got at feeling a sense of greater purpose. Eternal Dominion is in its own way sort of the successor to the Empire, so maybe with a little work, you can get things going to how you like them again. As you make your trek back east, you get the feeling that you’re being followed, but when you reach the outskirts of the Eternal Dominion you no longer have that feeling. You travel through the southern portion of the Arat province and stop at a small village where you ask the local innkeeper where the nearest Eternal stronghold is. He tells you there’s a new fort several miles away where there are some Eternals stationed, he also mentions that you shouldn’t go messing around with them as they don’t like anyone who isn’t an Eternal to be wandering near there without reason. “Well guess they’ll like me then.” You say and leave. When you get to the fort you are predictably stopped and given the hard looks. You’re not intimidated in the least and explain who you are. They seem a little skeptical at first, obviously they’ve heard of you, but since they never served directly under you, they aren’t sure what you look like. One of them tells you to wait, while one of their fellows goes to ask someone inside. You stand around waiting, while the remaining guards continue to give you dirty looks. Eventually one of them comes back out. “Well? You confirmed who I was?” “Yeah, our captain said he served under you, during the rebellions in Quala. Watch your head.” This strange remark causes you to instinctively look up just in time to see someone pointing a musket at you from the top of the fort. Then you hear a loud blast and the top of your head is blown off in an explosion of skull and gray matter. You continue to stand and stare up for a moment and with what’s left of your brain you realize the bastard who just shot you was one those new eternals present when you killed private Felding. Your body then collapses in a heap, while the rest of the new eternals congratulate their captain on his shot.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You’ve tried to fit in here, but maybe it just isn’t meant to be. The Felkan Kingdom hasn’t given you the sense of purpose that you wanted except during the time you were fighting the gnolls and that’s only because you created an environment that you felt comfortable in. This place operates in such a way that is at odds with how you do things and this “generous” offer that the gnome has given you is probably the best you’re going to get, if you insist on staying. When you tell the gnome you’re going to leave, General Benson is obviously pleased, though the gnome doesn’t gloat. He simply nods and tells you that perhaps this is for the best. He assures you that nobody will be punished for any of the actions taken place her and that Lieutenant Young will take command of the fort. He also says he hopes you can find somewhere you belong. You pack up your stuff and attempt to make a silent exit, but that’s doomed to failure. Most of your soldiers want you to stay and even want to join you, but you tell them all that the Felkan Kingdom needs them and that there duty is here. Dawn is the most upset, but she manages to keep it together As you put Fort Green and the Felkan Kingdom further behind you, you start to wonder what you’re going to do now. Thinking back to what the gnome said, “Some place you belong” and you wonder if you do belong in the Eternal Dominion. From what you’ve heard Edgar’s been getting more organized, he’s even managed to conquer some of the old territories that the Empire lost. Perhaps he could use your help and maybe you could find your place there. Another part of you wonders if you shouldn’t just leave this whole region. Travel to someplace far away and completely different. Maybe you need a brand new start. > You travel to a distant land You don’t feel as if the Eternal Dominion is really the place for you. You couldn’t stand the new generation of eternals and you doubt if you’ll like the ones coming after them. You aren’t even sure if Edgar would be all that friendly to you as it’s a pretty fair bet that he knows you went to join the Felkan Kingdom. Who knows how he’d react and with an entire nation under his command the odds wouldn’t be in your favor. So that only leaves one choice for you. Leaving these lands completely and finding your place elsewhere. It’s a little daunting as you’re wading into unknown waters as it were, but after all the things you’ve faced in your life you’re ready for the next challenge. You travel further west putting the Felkan Kingdom far behind you. Over the course of the next three days you live off the land and basically just observe your surroundings. You haven’t even been attacked, which you figured you would be by something the further you got from civilization. You have gotten the impression that you’re being followed however… The next night you make camp as usual and go to sleep, or at least you pretend to. You “sleep” for a couple hours and then get up in the middle of the night to circle around whoever it is that’s following you. Eventually behind a large rock in a small copse of trees you find your stalker. You had a feeling who it might be, but you weren’t sure. “I really hope you aren’t following me, why I think you’re following me.” You say to Dawn. She awakens slightly groggy, but still fully aware of her surroundings. “Damn, I thought I was being sneaky.” Dawn remarks while slowly getting up. “You might’ve been had it been anyone other than me, so why are you following me?” “I’m not here to kill you, if that’s what you think sir.” “I didn’t actually, though I sort of wish you were, might make this a whole lot easier.” “You…you aren’t going to kill me are you?!” Dawn says in alarm. “What? No! What I am going to do is send you back home. I’m sure you’ve been AWOL long enough.” “I’m not going back home sir, I resigned my position shortly after you left.” “You what? Dawn, why did you do that? You had a command position!” “I didn’t want it sir, I don’t want to serve the Felkan Kingdom, I want to be with you.” “(Sigh) See this is the reason why I hoped you weren’t following me.” “Sir, I…” “Stop calling me sir! I’m not your commanding officer anymore! Look…I think I know why you’re following me and I don’t think it’s a good idea.” Dawn doesn’t immediately comment and the both of you are silent for a moment, as the pair of you knows you’re referring to feelings she has for you go beyond simple respect. And while you’ve been pretty closely guarded about the situation as well, it would be a lie to say you don’t feel something for her as well. “Oh… and why is that exactly?” she slowly asks. “Because I don’t know where the hell I’m going or know what the hell I’m going to do with myself now. All of what I was taught to believe in, is gone and there is no getting that back. I’m literally lost and I doubt if I’ll ever settle down.” “Well if I come with you, perhaps you’ll be a little less lost with another set of eyes helping you.” “Dawn. You have a country. A home. A life. You even have a command if you get back there quick enough. You have something to fight for, do you really want to give that up?” “If I don’t have you, then yes. Maybe because of your upbringing, you hold such things in very high regard. Most people don’t work that way, you know.” “(Sigh) Yes I know, but what I’m saying is coming with me is unlikely to result in us settling down and living out our lives in some sort of wedded bliss with a house and kids.” “And who says I want that? I will be happy just as long as I’m by your side. If that means forever wandering, then I’ll be right there wandering next to you. My life before I met you, wasn’t a great one as you probably know and I only joined the military as an escape from poverty. You believed in me enough to give me my very first command. You taught me that I was capable of more when I sometimes wasn’t even sure myself. After all you’ve done for me it wouldn’t be right for me to leave you when you’re feeling something similar now.” Even you can’t help but be touched by that remark and you aren’t exactly sure of how to respond. When Dawn approaches closer to you, and the pair of you look into each other’s eyes, the response is certain and the pair of you kiss, finally taking those first steps towards your love for each other. The next morning after your passionate embrace, you and Dawn begin your journey together and leave the known region far behind. In the years that follow the pair of you wander, seeing new sights and getting into adventures. Several times you genuinely attempt to find a place where you feel comfortable, but it just never happens. While the pair of you never do settle down, your love continues to last. What ultimately happens to the both of you is lost to time.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You need to stay here and oversee the purging of this fort, and the surrounding area. You can’t start running off half assed because you’re a little worried about one soldier even if she is one of the best ones you’ve had under your command. (Not including your fellow Eternals of course) After slaying all the gnolls still in the fort, you regroup your soldiers and tell one of the sergeants to head over the Blossumdale with a couple platoons and help in whatever way they can. You tell the rest of your soldiers to start rebuilding the walls, clear out the dead bodies and to help you do a sweep of the area. Your sweep of the area is a tedious, but vital one. A lot of the gnolls retreated to various areas just enough to be out of sight, but were obviously still attempting to regroup again. Good thing you stayed behind to mop up all these little clusters so they didn’t form a big one again. By the time you’re satisfied with your results, the sun is coming up and you return to the fort more than a little tired. When you get back, you’re happy to see Dawn there. “Sir, Blossumdale still stands sir, the rest of the soldiers are securing it and the area.” “Glad to hear it, and glad to see you made it out in one peace. Was the fighting heavy?” “It was, but from the looks of it, the fighting was worse here. The only problem we had is with a wyvern.” “Lucky you only had one. We had four of them and I had to kill two of them myself.” “That’s one more than me then, sir.” You smile at her remark and after a brief discussion on what the next course of action will be, you get some rest. Over the next few months the gnoll attacks die down, but they don’t stop completely. Most of your activities involve going further into the wilderness and taking out whatever villages or camps they have. In the meantime your superiors are telling you to stop your actions as the war has been won and now you’re just using up valuable manpower and resources. You really aren’t though; you’ve been doing just fine with the limited supplies that they see fit to give you. Somehow this situation seems very familiar… While your superiors do a lot of complaining, nothing actually happens to you. It would seem they’re bitching at you just for the sake of bitching. The gnolls might not actually be able to invade properly anymore, but if you let them regroup again, they’ll try it. Your goal is to purge them all, or at the very least drive them away so they don’t try it ever again. Year 50 “This is bullshit sir, executing those protestors was the right thing to do!” “Calm down lieutenant.” You say to Dawn. “No sir, this isn’t right! They can’t punish you just for doing your fucking job!” “Okay lieutenant I said calm down! Now listen, I need you on your best behavior, because they’re going to question all of us. I saw this happen to my predecessor. (sigh) Who knows maybe I did go too far, I mean I haven’t exactly been following Felkan policies, I’ve been sort of doing my own thing out here for the past ten years.” “Yeah, but your actions are protecting the kingdom! How can that be wrong?” You look at Dawn and see that she’s changed quite a bit since she stood here in this office several years ago hesitant to kill baby gnolls. She’s practically like an Empire soldier now. Everyone in this fort is and that’s what is no doubt getting you into trouble. Still, they shouldn’t be blamed for what you just ordered them to do. “Well, maybe I was protecting the kingdom, but I still wasn’t following the laws. And I certainly broke enough of them. Just don’t worry; I’ll do everything in my power to make sure nobody here gets blamed. I mean you were all just following orders.” “Thank you sir, but I knew exactly what I was doing and if they put you against the wall in front of a firing squad for treason, then I want to be standing right next to you.” “…that’s a very…enthusiastic sentiment, but I don’t think that will be necessary. I mean maybe this won’t even be all that bad, they did at least warn me that they were coming. They didn’t even do that with Eckers. Look lieutenant…Dawn, whatever happens don’t go doing something foolish like trying to save me or sacrificing yourself or something. Just continue to serve the kingdom and try to follow the laws the best you can, okay?” Dawn is visible upset by all this. She turns her head for a moment while sniffling, then turns back to you and agrees. She then excuses herself to get ready for this investigation. Wasn’t really until this moment that you see that you’ve have a very deep effect on her. You didn’t expect to, as you treated her like any one else under your command, well maybe you did compliment her a little bit more, but that’s only because she did more. Eventually the investigation group gets arrives. To your surprise it consists of only two people, General Benson, and that gnome you saw before during Captain Ecker’s investigation, you certainly hope this turns out a lot better. All your troops stand at attention and you greet the general. After a brief exchange the well dress gnome parts company with the general who approaches you and just shakes his head. “I knew we made a bad decision.” He says and motions you to your office. You sit down and the general sits down and he begins his questions right away. “Let’s get right to it shall we? You are aware that you’re serving the Felkan Kingdom aren’t you?” “Yes sir.” “Oh? You do? Well then, is there any particular reason why you’re treating this area as if you still serving your long dead Empire?” “I’m not sure I follow you sir.” “Don’t play stupid with me, I’ve read the reports and followed all your actions for the past ten years! You’ve trained these soldiers to the point that they’re fanatically loyal and dedicated, you started a war with the gnolls and didn’t stop hostilities until you completely eliminated their species, during which time you executed several Felkan citizens in Blossumdale and now you’ve done it again! Tell me, is war, murder and genocide all they taught you in the Empire?” “Basically.” “You might not want to be so flip with me, Eternal, your ass is just a step away from the gallows yourself.” “Sir, with all due respect if I was such a problem for the past ten years, why not get rid of me before now?” “Ohhh, believe me, if I’d had any say in the matter you would’ve been.” “Sir, everything I’ve done has been for the good of the Felkan Kingdom. I mean loyal and dedicated soldiers, since when is that a bad thing? Soldiers are supposed to follow orders of their superiors and government. That’s sort of their whole purpose.” “That’s rather ironic coming from you who seems to blatantly ignores orders like not starting wars.” “Sir, the gnolls were an ongoing problem even if they weren’t planning an invasion. Isn’t it better that they’re all dead so that Felkan citizens don’t have to worry about getting robbed and killed on the roads? Blossomdale probably wouldn’t be standing if we hadn’t stopped them.” “Do you really want to bring up Blossumdale captain?” “Why the hell not? You’re bringing everything else up.” You say starting to get angry. “Watch your tone, and if you insist…I already know your half assed excuse for executing citizens during the war with the gnolls, but please explain to me why you did it again this time, just so I can try to understand your fucked Eternal logic.” “Well it’s rather simple, some of the citizens were protesting the new tax that the king imposed. They were in front of the town hall screaming at their mayor as if he was directly to blame. We stepped in to calm them down, they started getting more violent and began throwing rocks. We told them to stop, they didn’t, so we opened fire on them. After rounding up the main rabble rousers who didn’t get shot the first time, we executed them properly.” “And that’s it? That’s your excuse for gunning down several citizens?” “If they hadn’t done , what we told them not to do, they’d still be alive right now, sir.” “And there it is again, they didn’t do what you told them to do, so they got killed, but when it comes to you, you apparently do whatever the hell you want.” “That’s not true sir I was trying to stop a potential rebellion, you can ask the mayor and any of my soldiers about the situation and…” “I’m not asking them, I’m asking you! You wantonly executing protestors like that is more likely to cause a damn rebellion not stop one! Or… maybe that’s what you really want Eternal? I mean that’s what you’re doing isn’t it? You train the troops to be utterly loyal, not to the Kingdom but to YOU. You’re starting wars, you’re executing Felkans which is going to cause more harm than good. Maybe this is your way of getting revenge on us? Perhaps you’re trying to start your own little Empire with you as the emperor this time?” You can’t believe these accusations. Here you’ve been doing what you can for the Felkan Kingdom by fighting off hostiles and putting down dissidents and you’re the one getting accused of treason. You just rub your hands over your face trying hard not to chuckle too much at the dark humor in all this. General Benson just stares at you disapprovingly as he usually does, but remains silent. It is at this point the well-dressed gnome walks in and nods at the general, he lights up some pipeweed and stands in the corner observing. It’s at that moment you think back to Captain Ecker’s accusations on the gnomes. Maybe he was right after all. Hardly matters at this point, because as far you’re concerned everyone in charge here has been an asshole. “Sir, I chopped up a shitload of gnolls and executed dissidents in the service of this fucking kingdom and the whole time I’ve done it all I’ve gotten is bitching and general ungratefulness, yet I haven’t complained. I didn’t even complain when you fuckers never sent me supplies on time to help fight the gnoll invasion. I execute some worthless fucking peasants stirring up shit, and I’m the fucking bad guy some how. Sir, I don’t need to re-create the Empire, because as fucked up as the government policies are here, I THOUGHT I WAS STILL SERVING THE FUCKING THING!” you shout. You slump back in your chair still fuming after your outburst, and that’s when the gnome speaks up in between puffs of his pipe. “So, Eternal did you want to leave?” he asks. “What?” “I’m asking you, did you want to leave? If you can’t find a place here, then perhaps it would be better if you left. In gratitude of all your service to the kingdom, this is a one time offer for you to leave free and clear. There will be no repercussions except that you can never return here.” > You continue to stay As tempting as it might be to leave, you did that once before and it hasn’t turned out that great. Besides where would you go now? The only place that you know of that has any resemblance of civilization is the Eternal Dominion, and you’re fairly certain you wouldn’t be welcomed. Right now you’re sort of wishing that you’d stuck around during the last days of the Empire instead of leaving. Perhaps you could’ve made more of a difference than you thought, or maybe you could’ve fit in better among the ranks of the Eternal Dominion. The general was probably correct on a few points. You have tried to make this place more “Empire like”, but it’s all you know. You can only change so much. You wonder how Warrick managed to adapt as well as he did in a much shorter period of time. The only other option is leaving this land far behind and living as a directionless wanderer hoping that you find something. You can’t do that either. You’ve made your choice and you have to stick by it now for good or ill. “I want to stay. I pledged myself to this Kingdom and I meant it. So whatever punishment you feel is necessary, I’ll accept, but I just ask that you don’t punish anyone under my command. They’re good soldiers and only did what they were told to do.” The gnome asks the general to step outside and for you to stay put. You do so and wait in your office mostly staring at the various objects in it. Eventually the gnome returns, he pulls up a chair and sits across from you. “First things first, you’re not going to be punished for and anything and your actions have been appreciated. Perhaps not by everyone in the kingdom, but in certain circles they are. Personally, I don’t think you were intentionally trying to carve out your own piece of land, I truly believe you were doing what was best for the Felkan Kingdom. However, some are still concerned with your Empire past. I know you can’t help what you were and in some cases still are, but there is always a slight fear there. Especially you being one those Eternals and all.” “Warrick’s an Eternal, he directly fought against the Felkan Kingdom and he seems be accepted.” You point out. “Warrick, is a special case…(sigh) I probably shouldn’t even be telling you this, but considering the cluster fuck this situation is becoming, I’m going to be just as honest as you have with me. Warrick didn’t voluntarily join the kingdom, he was made that way.” “Made? What do you mean? Mind control? Torture?” you say in shock at this revelation. “I doubt if any torture would cause anyone to switch their allegiances, at least not permanently and we don’t engage in any sort of magic mumbo jumbo around here. No, Warrick was a dedicated foe against the Felkan Kingdom. We tried to get him and his partner for a long time, but never could catch them. Things got even worse when his partner was replaced by that Edgar fellow. By the gods, Edgar was a menace on the battlefield…anyway back to Warrick. Warrick as you probably know was mainly engaged in sabotage and similar tactics. Well, his luck just ran out one day ironically towards the last days of the war. Had a small explosive hit the side of his face by one of the many traps set up.” “But he lived.” “Yes, but he wouldn’t have if our medics hadn’t been nearby at the time. When he was found he was bleeding from his eye socket and didn’t even know where he was or who he was. Soldiers probably would’ve probably killed him, but like I said, he was luckily found by a couple of gnome medics, they decided to…re-align him instead. Memories are an unpredictable thing, so attempting to practically reconstruct his entire past would’ve been a fool’s errand, instead they just slowly over time convinced him that he had willingly joined the Felkan Kingdom due to his disillusionment of the Empire as he healed up. It worked a lot better than we thought, I can only guess that Warrick may have had some genuine disillusionment with the Empire.” “But isn’t that still risky? Couldn’t he still remember what really happened one day?” “Doubt it, as I’m sure you’re aware from talking with him, his memory when discussing anything before his injury is patchy. In any case we also keep an eye on him…you seem to be taking this well, I would’ve thought you might’ve been angry and trying to kill me by now.” “Maybe at one time I would’ve been furious, perhaps a small part of me is, but I’m more baffled by the idea that you’d go through the trouble that you as opposed to the more efficient task of killing him.” “Ahh yes, well that is one of the failings of my race I believe. A lot of us are non-violent at heart; ironic considering that we also develop some of the most destructive weapons in the known world. Peace through superior firepower I suppose.” With the way the gnome is speaking, he’s practically telling you how things are really run in the Felkan Kingdom. His very presence is proof of it. “So it’s true? The gnomes do really run the kingdom?” you ask. “Heh, I wish that was the case, certainly we have a lot of influence, but nothing is ever certain. There are always complications.” “So why are you telling me all this? Aren’t you worried that I’ll kill you and try to free Warrick from your brainwashing techniques or try to stir up anti-gnome rhetoric like Eckers or others?” “You could certainly try, but I doubt if you’d be very successful. The only thing you might be able to do is easily kill me and start a small rebellion with your company of Empire-like troops. You’d probably do a lot of damage, but you wouldn’t topple the kingdom. Besides what I’m telling you, I’m telling you for a reason.” The gnome stops smoking completely and leans forward as best he can with as short as he is. “There are changes coming Eternal, necessary changes to keep the Kingdom from falling and quite frankly I believe we NEED someone like you. The conspiracy theory that we gnomes run everything is only half true. The fact is, we’re suffering from as much infighting as any other race does. Tell me Eternal, were you aware that a long time ago the gnomes used to live in the Empire as slaves? Hell we were responsible for most of the technological advancements that the Empire even had, like the aqueducts and such. Good thing we never discovered gunpowder during that time, we’d probably still be living under Empire boots.” “Yes, I did study Empire history when I was little, it was required. Don’t remember anything specific being said about your people though, just that you were slaves.” “Heh, figures that they would play down our achievements. Truth is, while we were slaves we had comfortable positions. We were treated well and kept safe. Wasn’t until we saw what the Empire did to our Halfling cousins that we made the decision to make a mass exodus. They were slaves too, but not treated as well, so naturally they wanted equal rights like any normal citizen. When they didn’t get that, they pushed harder. When the Empire pushed back, it wasn’t a pretty.” “Yes, the Halfling uprising. I read about that.” “Uprising? It was more like a slaughter. We tried to warn them against such actions, but they were too proud even though they had no chance. The Empire as you know wiped them all out. I believe it was the first time we saw the Empire practice genocide on such a scale. We couldn’t fight the Empire, but we couldn’t stay for fear of our own lives. After all what would’ve happened if the Empire decided that we were also getting too uppity one day? When we eventually arrived to these lands the Felkans didn’t even have a kingdom yet, but when it started looking like they would get organized, we made the decision to ingrain ourselves into helping shape it. We would not become slave again, but living in a powerful nation could protect us if the Empire ever started expanding this way, and given the past few decades I’d say we were right.” A fascinating little part of history you have to admit, but you still aren’t sure what this all has to do with you. “So, exactly how do I fit in here?” “The Empire might be gone, but you and specifically the Eternal Dominion are its successors. And from what I can tell the ED looks like its every bit as ruthless as the Empire, perhaps even more so. Some of us are starting to believe the Felkan policies on aggression need to be altered. Due to our past with seeing first hand of what happened to the Halflings, our people are generally disgusted by the thought of slavery or total annihilation of any race. Hence all the policies against engaging in wars of conquest and aggression and the more relaxed political views…well at least until you came along.” “Well I know why I act the way I do, but there were others who obviously don’t agree with the policies long before I showed up.” “And that’s true too. Mostly humans though, I suppose humans just have a natural tendency towards conquest. That’s why my circle believes we need to let go of our past a bit and start changing before the grumblings get worse. Perhaps a little nationalism is what the Felkan Kingdom needs to direct the hatred towards external threats rather than crumbling from within. And as bad as I feel saying this, what you did with the gnolls was very necessary.” “Well if it eases your conscience I probably didn’t strictly wipe out ALL the gnolls, I’m sure quite a few of them just ran far away.” “Doesn’t really matter, they’re gone and no longer a threat. The fact is we’re probably going to need more like you when we eventually go up against the ED, if only because of your experience, let alone your mindset. You’re going to be transferred; in fact everyone here is going to be transferred to Fort Soot. You’re going to be needed on the frontlines.” “Isn’t that where Warrick is stationed?” “Yes, but we’ve got another task for him, his sabotage and stealth skills can be used to help us as opposed to all those years he was working against us. Now there’s some other stuff that needs to be done as well, but you really don’t need to worry about it. All I need you to do is to prepare everyone along the Arat border for a possible invasion. The ED is getting more organized everyday and we can’t afford to be caught off guard. You said you pledged yourself to defend this kingdom…I trust even after all of what you’ve learned here, that pledge is still true?” “I gave my word and you’ve revealed much about the real way things work around here. That’s probably more than the Empire ever did. The Felkan Kingdom has my loyalty, but I must be allowed to do things my way when it comes to battle and war.” “That…will be arranged. As I’ve said, other things need to be taken care of, but rest assured you will have support, just one thing, could you stop killing protesting peasants? I understand that’s a hold over from your Empire training, but that’s something you’re really going to have to stop doing.” “I will. My apologies.” “It’s alright, just no more of it in the future unless you’re specifically given the order to do so. Anyway probably won’t be a problem, not many villages along the Arat borders anymore since the last war. Okay, I believe that’s it, oh by the way, my name is Klemto Zookwinkle and I’ll most likely be in touch in the future.” The gnome shakes your hand, straightens his hat and leaves the office, leaving you to take in all of the new information thrust upon you. Oddly the only thing you can immediately think is: “Klemto Zookwinkle? That’s silly fucking name!” you laugh. > Year 55 Another clear night and you look out across the Arat border from the fort roof knowing that the ED could invade soon…though you’ve been waiting for about five years now. If anything you’d wish that they’d hurry up and do it or as you’ve often suggested to Klemto, that you strike at the ED first. He of course claims he’s still trying to sway the royals to do such a thing, most importantly the king. Seems the gnomes are still playing tug of war with their puppet strings. You suggested that a few assassinations would do the trick, but Klemto was a little upset at you for that suggestion. In any case Klemto better hurry up and get this war started, because more anti-gnome groups are starting to pop up and it’s getting harder to keep them quiet, especially since they aren’t wrong about their accusations. As for you, you’re a major now and you’re not only in charge of Fort Soot, but the entire Gan province as far as military is concerned. You’ve been busying yourself with having the soldiers keep to their patrols and training. Instilling the same routines that you did at Fort Green. Your results have been more or less just as successful. Dawn is still your second, though she’s a captain now and she’s more of a concern to you than any potential war right now. You really should’ve transferred her to another fort, as she’s certainly competent enough to run one and even during the gnoll war you suspected that she had feelings for you that were more than just a professional respect. The problem is, you had feelings for her too and by the time both of you admitted them to each other it unleashed itself in a night of passion. This wasn’t like what happened between you and Alison at Fort Destiny though, you didn’t separate love and sex from each other and now you’re too attached to Dawn to have her transferred. It hasn’t been an excessive problem in day-to-day operations, but to you it’s a definite weakness on your part. You don’t even know how the hell you can even feel love as you’ve never really experienced it before, but then you remember Brenda and Roldan and they did. They even worked together and married. Perhaps you’re over thinking it. Speaking of Brenda, you’ve finally got information on what she’s been up to thanks to Warrick’s intelligence gathering missions. She’s apparently still in charge of all of the Nalin province and the only other Eternal that has equal rank to Edgar. She joined the Eternal Dominion years ago when Edgar came to her in Nalin, but Warrick has told you that she isn’t happy with the situation. Warrick has said that she is willing to give out Edgar’s plans and troops movements. So far they’ve been updating their equipment and consolidating their territory still. She claims that Edgar has his sights on either re-conquering Rask or invading the Felkan Kingdom, but nothing is certain yet. The big thing is Edgar has actually managed to completely unite the new eternals under a doctrine that only they are fit to rule and new generations of eternals are still being trained. You have to say, you’re a little impressed by his accomplishments. Edgar a despot, Warrick a brainwashed spy, Brenda a traitorous informant and you in charge of an army that was once an enemy. If someone told you when you were fresh out of Gruz’s training school that this is how the four of you would end up, you never would’ve believed it. “Roldan, Gerald…Kane, I can only imagine what you’re thinking as you watch us all from wherever you are.” You say out loud, briefly thinking about the good old days when things were simpler. You stop with the nostalgia to return to your room to get some rest, where you find Dawn sleeping. You try not to wake her, but you’re doomed to failure. She moves over to cuddle next to you. “Go back to sleep.” You tell her. “Hey, if you’re here, who’s in charge of the fort?” she groggily asks. “Lieutenant Baker.” “Him? Ugh, I better go on duty…” “Hey come back to bed. He’s capable of handling it, besides, it’s not like anything is going on.” “I guess so. I just feel more comfortable with you or me in charge.” “Yeah, well you’ve been working too hard anyway. You probably need more rest than anyone, so go back to sleep.” “Mmmm, I’m up now, but if you’d like me to stay in bed, we could do something else…” Dawn says rubbing your chest and kissing the side of your face. Yeah, you’ve been over thinking the possible downsides of this relationship too much lately. You take Dawn up on her offer and have fun living for the moment rather than pondering the past or concerning yourself about future. The next morning you return to your duties as usual. For most of the day it looks like it’s going to be another routine one, and that’s when you get an unexpected visit from Klemto. When he arrives in your office, he has a slight frown in his face. “I’m suspecting bad news.” You say. “Well, it’s fifty fifty I suppose. Warrick has just given me news that Edgar is planning on attacking the Rask frontier. Not exactly sure how long it’ll take him, before he sets his sights on us again though. There isn’t really a government system in place there, it’s more of a collection of isolated towns relying on mercs to keep monsters at bay from what I’m told.” “Edgar and I were both stationed at Rask for many years. He’s got the advantage of knowing the area and everything else, but he also has to know that the place tends towards lawlessness. He might be able to easily conquer towns, but the manpower involved in keeping them under control is a constant drain. Not to brag, but if it hadn’t been for me keeping a tight leash on things there, the Empire would’ve never gotten control of it as well as they did. “Heh, well the ED has several eternals to keep a tight leash on it as you say.” “And those eternals aren’t me.” “Well, you seem to be in proud mood today.” “Just stating the facts.” “I see, well in any case that brings me to the next bit of news. You may be getting a transfer soon.” “Transfer? Why?” “Well the king and several others have always been uncomfortable with you in charge of the armies here on the frontlines as you probably know. It’s only due to the threat of the potential invasion and my circle’s influence that we managed to keep you in power here.” “Are you fucking kidding me? After all their worrying about an invasion for years, you mean they’re suddenly not anymore, because Edgar’s attacking Rask? That’s pretty fucking short sighted.” You say. “No, the intention is to still keep up the defenses here and keep the same procedures you set in place of course, but just uh, replace you.” “Right, because I could suddenly raise an army and try to overthrow the throne at any given time…fuck. I thought you were supposed to calm those fears!” “I tried! I really did! I mean I think I’m lucky we accomplished what we did! And I tried to fight for you on this too, but it’s just too much now and they want you gone. It’ll make everyone feel better.” “Yes, everyone but me obviously.” “Hey you’ve always claimed to be a soldier dedicated to the kingdom for good or bad. Isn’t this one of those times where you stepping down quietly to make everyone feel better would be best for the kingdom, instead of causing a fuse and potentially causing more problems?” “So I accept this, and then what happens? Where am I getting transferred to? Some fort in the middle of nowhere again?” “Well, that’s just it, you’re kind of going to be transferred to the uh…private sector. Are you familiar the merchant’s guild at the capital? Well, you’ll be the new head of security there!” Klemto says trying to make it sound impressive. You can’t believe this. “Are you telling me I’m not even going to be part of the damn army anymore? I’m just going to be a glorified guard?” “You’ll be well paid and get a better place to stay than this dreary fort!” “You know I don’t give a shit about all that, I’m a warrior! I want to fight!” “And that’s still an option! I mean it’s not like you’ll be sitting around doing nothing. In fact with the guild could use a little extra protection since the rise in anti-gnomism going on lately.” “Trust me, there’s some of that going on here too, right now.” Klempto seems like he wants to pat your arm reassure you, but decides better of it. “Look, I’m sorry about all this. It sucks I know, but the popular opinion is just not in our favor. That’s why we want you at the guild; most of my faction of likeminded fellows are there. We think we could still remedy this later.” “You’d think with all your influence and control of the economy you’d be able to do something about this now.” “Yes, well it isn’t as easy as you think.” “Yeah, well it could be.” You say. Klempto musters up all his courage and points a finger at you. “And I don’t want to hear you talking like that anymore! I know what you’re implying and the answer is no! Unlike you humans, we gnomes don’t kill one another despite our disagreements! Now I suggest you prepare for your transfer, take care of all your affairs here and a carriage will come and get you in a few days. I suppose you’ll want that Dawn girl to take over here, which will be acceptable. I managed to convince the opposition of that.” “Gee, thanks for small favors.” At this point Klemto just backs away from you and begins to leave, before he does though he speaks once more. “Y’know, you shouldn’t really see this as a bad thing. I mean think about how old you are getting. You humans don’t have that high of a life span. Shouldn’t you want to start slowing down on the war and battle a bit and start concentrating on enjoying your approaching elderly years?” “If you’re still trying to convince me you’re failing miserably, because that’s the biggest load of shit I’ve ever heard for several reasons that I’m not even going to get into. But I’ll address the age thing briefly. Yeah I know I’m not twenty, but I fucking know I’m still a better warrior than any of the soldiers under my command, let alone an average Felkan soldier. And while you keep saying I’m human, I’m not. I’m a fucking Eternal. We’re better than a normal human and when the ED invades they’re going to SHOW you that they are mainly because they aren’t afraid to do whatever it kill their enemies, unlike you lot.” Sensing he better leave this time, Klemto quickly runs off out of your office, leaving you to ponder your situation. Just last night you were feeling good in the arms of Dawn, and now you got a bunch of shit shoved at you that you’re supposed to just sit and eat it. It’s enough for you to attack the Eternal Dominion anyway > You follow orders As much as you don’t like it, if even a third of what Klemto said is true, if you went ahead and did your own thing again, you could very well destabilize the kingdom even more, possibly even a civil war. You aren’t looking to become like Kane, and if it means you have to step down to preserve the kingdom, then that’s what you’ll do. It just frustrates you that after all you’ve done, you still aren’t trusted, but perhaps it will always be this way. If anything its perhaps something of a phenomenon that they accepted you in the first place, though if Warrick is anything to go by, it’s only to exploit you. Resigned to your orders, you make preparations to pass your command to Dawn. She doesn’t like the news any better than you do, in fact she suggests that you should attack the Eternal Dominion anyway, but you explain the repercussions of such actions. “But you did that with the gnolls and that worked out!” “Yeah, and that was a different situation. Don’t have the luxury of doing whatever anymore even if I do think it would be in the kingdom’s best interest. Listen, you’re going to be in charge here, so I don’t want you doing anything rash either. No point in you getting into trouble, you understand?” “Yes, but I still don’t like this. And I don’t think this is a good idea.” “Neither do I, but we have our orders.” “Well maybe you like your orders, but I still don’t. If you’re not going to be commander here, then I don’t want to serve here anymore either.” “What?! You can’t just throw away your career like that because of me! Besides without me here, this place is going to need a good leader.” “I don’t care about all that. I care about you, and if the kingdom isn’t seeing fit to give you the respect you deserve then it doesn’t deserve me as a leader. Besides if all is so great as they claim then they won’t need me there.” “I really think you should think this through. Besides what are you going to do, if not this?” “I’m pretty sure with my vast skill set, I’ll find something, I’ll also probably move to the capital and get married.” “Married?” you say not grasping her insinuation immediately, then when she touches your hand, you get it. A lot of upcoming changes has been dumped on you this day, you just hope you can adapt to all of them. Year 58 The Eternal Dominion gains ground every day, yet the people here in the capital act like everything is going well. If you’d attacked like you wanted to, the Felkan Kingdom wouldn’t have gotten caught off guard like it did. Warrick and whatever other spies the Felkan Kingdom had on the field were all fed bad intel, and while the soldiers in the Gan province fought well, the commander who was put in charge of the province was an idiot that allowed most of it get overrun. Even if shitty intel, you’re damn sure that you would’ve at least prevented that from happening. Dawn would’ve too. You regret not ignoring orders and going through with your plan. Dawn isn’t as hard on herself, but she does sometimes wonders if she should’ve stayed on as commander of the Gan armies. But it’s too late for any of that now. The pair of you just go about your less exciting lives. She a combat instructor at an academy and you still head of security for the merchant’s guild. In the beginning your job was slightly more engaging, with all the anti-gnome stuff going on. You even prevented a nutjob from blowing up the guild once. Nowadays the anti-gnome sentiment has more or less disappeared. It’s sort of hard to be angry at the little guys who are continuing to make weapons that blow up an enemy that’s bashing the door down. As a result you’re mostly attempting to figure out the best guards for the various caravans that get sent out. Sometimes you go out on these as well just to break up the monotony. Predictably they’re always supply caravans to the frontlines so you can get the latest and best information on what’s going on, because the gods know that they never claim anything bad is going on in the capital. Here, closer to the fighting is where you feel a little more comfortable. You really miss it. While your current married life with Dawn is good, and you have no major worries, you still feel the call of war, but you are unable to participate. It’s a very frustrating situation that you never get used to and you never will. It’s just not in your nature. One day on one of your supply runs, you travel to a town called Yevdin which is in desperate need of almost everything as it is being held by only a few soldiers. Most of the civilians have evacuated save for a few of the stubborn ones unwilling to run. You respect that. It’s of some surprise that you meet Warrick there; he’s equally surprised to see you as well. While you wait for the supplies to be unloaded, you go over and speak to him. “What’re you doing here?” Warrick asks. “Staving off the boredom of my current assignment, and you?” “Waiting for my impending death.” “Well at least your punishment will be over soon…I thought you were a captain. Why are you a sergeant now?” “Got busted down for being wrong on the intelligence reports, all those years ago. I guess I should be lucky I didn’t get executed for gross incompetence. I really fucked up on that one.” “Oh, I’d say you’re in good company as far as that’s concerned, so don’t be too hard on yourself. Besides even if you’d done your mission right, you might’ve just gotten drummed out of the military altogether.” You say. After a brief discussion with Warrick, you learn that this town is facing an imminent large-scale invasion. Not that the town is really important, but it happens to be in the way of another important target, so it’s going to be overrun on the way. These supplies aren’t so much as to ensure the soldiers’ survival, but rather their survival long enough to make it a costly victory for the Eternal Dominion. Warrick doesn’t appear to be concerned though. “So, I never did get the whole story, why’d you get removed?” Warrick asks “Long story, but let’s just say I think the ones running things like things the way they are right now.” “Surely you’re joking. Why would anyone in the Felkan Kingdom want this situation?” You could tell Warrick all about the things you’ve overheard, things you’ve suspected and things you’ve outright seen just by being closer to the gnomes in the merchant’s guild. But it wouldn’t make any difference. Warrick’s been on a string for a long time now and despite his own situation, he seems in a very positive mood. Perhaps ignorance is bliss, or perhaps its because he’s still fighting and doing what he always was meant to do. The same thing you were meant to do. “Come on, we’ve delivered the stuff, let’s get the hell outta here!” the gnome merchant shouts to you. “You go on ahead with the rest of the guards. I’m staying here.” You say. “What?! Are you crazy? This place is about to be destroyed!” “Yeah I know. Tell my wife I really tried, but that this is what I was meant to do.” The gnome doesn’t try to talk you out of your plan, he just shakes his head and gets in the carriage ordering the rest of the guards to ride off as quick as possible. Warrick says nothing about your decision either. Even though the pair of you haven’t really been in close contact since you both served together in Nalin, he knows why you made your decision. The next few days aren’t filled with impending doom, but rather one of contentment. In between keeping a look out, and checking your defenses you and Warrick do a lot of catching up on the past, though the pair of you mostly stick to the happier memories of when you both were in the Empire. The other soldiers listen in on your stories. They don’t quite get all of them, but seeing the good spirits of their leader, seems to put them in a slightly better mood as well. And that’s good, their last moments should be as unpleasant as possible, there will be plenty of time for that when the Eternal Dominion arrives. Eventually the Eternal Dominion arrives with an impressively large force. The small part of you that believed you’d make this out alive shortly disappears, but this doesn’t make you second-guess yourself. You’re still comfortable in your decision and this is certainly preferable to what you’ve been doing for the past three years. “Sir, it’s been an honor to serve with you.” Warrick suddenly says to you, even giving you the old Empire salute. “The honor is both of ours.” You say. “For the Empire, sir.” “For the Empire, Warrick.” You reply. The first volley of cannon shots strike the front ranks of the Eternal Dominion troops and the battle is joined… “Prime Eternal, the town of Yevdin was taken, but we suffered massive casualties, we need reinforcements before we can take Fort Everlast.” A messenger says. “What?! You idiots! You see what we’re working with here Brenda? I expect this sort of incompetence from our human soldiers, but that army had a good portion of Eternals in it! Bah! These new ones for all their extra abilities, they still lack that spark that we have!” Edgar cursed. “Why did we suffer so many losses at Yevdin? Do the Felkans have a new weapon?” Brenda asks. “Reports indicate no new weapon, but there were a group of soldiers that seemed to be incredibly determined. Even when the town was taken, a few of them had taken to an underground shelter beneath the town and skirmished with the force for five more days.” “We should be so lucky to have Eternals such dedication.” Edgar mutters. “Any description of these enemy soldiers?” Brenda asks. The messenger reports that there was nothing out of the ordinary about any of the soldiers and doesn’t have a description since he didn’t know that it was important. He says he knows the leader had an eye patch which clues Edgar and Brenda that that was Warrick. He also mentions one other that wasn’t in a soldier uniform, but was the last to be killed. Edgar and Brenda briefly wonder a bit, and then nod to each other before dismissing the messenger. “It was stupid of the Felkans to remove him from command in the first place, but I guess even they couldn’t keep him off the battlefield forever.” Brenda says. “No, and that was that spark I was referring to earlier. Just think if the pair of them had stayed here instead? Think of all the things we could’ve accomplished! Such a waste. Well it’s over now and with those two out of the way, I think our plan is going to be a lot easier.” “True, but I still wish things had been different.” “So do I Brenda, so do I.”<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 55 Another clear night and you look out across the Arat border from the fort roof knowing that the ED could invade soon…though you’ve been waiting for about five years now. If anything you’d wish that they’d hurry up and do it or as you’ve often suggested to Klemto, that you strike at the ED first. He of course claims he’s still trying to sway the royals to do such a thing, most importantly the king. Seems the gnomes are still playing tug of war with their puppet strings. You suggested that a few assassinations would do the trick, but Klemto was a little upset at you for that suggestion. In any case Klemto better hurry up and get this war started, because more anti-gnome groups are starting to pop up and it’s getting harder to keep them quiet, especially since they aren’t wrong about their accusations. As for you, you’re a major now and you’re not only in charge of Fort Soot, but the entire Gan province as far as military is concerned. You’ve been busying yourself with having the soldiers keep to their patrols and training. Instilling the same routines that you did at Fort Green. Your results have been more or less just as successful. Dawn is still your second, though she’s a captain now and she’s more of a concern to you than any potential war right now. You really should’ve transferred her to another fort, as she’s certainly competent enough to run one and even during the gnoll war you suspected that she had feelings for you that were more than just a professional respect. The problem is, you had feelings for her too and by the time both of you admitted them to each other it unleashed itself in a night of passion. This wasn’t like what happened between you and Alison at Fort Destiny though, you didn’t separate love and sex from each other and now you’re too attached to Dawn to have her transferred. It hasn’t been an excessive problem in day-to-day operations, but to you it’s a definite weakness on your part. You don’t even know how the hell you can even feel love as you’ve never really experienced it before, but then you remember Brenda and Roldan and they did. They even worked together and married. Perhaps you’re over thinking it. Speaking of Brenda, you’ve finally got information on what she’s been up to thanks to Warrick’s intelligence gathering missions. She’s apparently still in charge of all of the Nalin province and the only other Eternal that has equal rank to Edgar. She joined the Eternal Dominion years ago when Edgar came to her in Nalin, but Warrick has told you that she isn’t happy with the situation. Warrick has said that she is willing to give out Edgar’s plans and troops movements. So far they’ve been updating their equipment and consolidating their territory still. She claims that Edgar has his sights on either re-conquering Rask or invading the Felkan Kingdom, but nothing is certain yet. The big thing is Edgar has actually managed to completely unite the new eternals under a doctrine that only they are fit to rule and new generations of eternals are still being trained. You have to say, you’re a little impressed by his accomplishments. Edgar a despot, Warrick a brainwashed spy, Brenda a traitorous informant and you in charge of an army that was once an enemy. If someone told you when you were fresh out of Gruz’s training school that this is how the four of you would end up, you never would’ve believed it. “Roldan, Gerald…Kane, I can only imagine what you’re thinking as you watch us all from wherever you are.” You say out loud, briefly thinking about the good old days when things were simpler. You stop with the nostalgia to return to your room to get some rest, where you find Dawn sleeping. You try not to wake her, but you’re doomed to failure. She moves over to cuddle next to you. “Go back to sleep.” You tell her. “Hey, if you’re here, who’s in charge of the fort?” she groggily asks. “Lieutenant Baker.” “Him? Ugh, I better go on duty…” “Hey come back to bed. He’s capable of handling it, besides, it’s not like anything is going on.” “I guess so. I just feel more comfortable with you or me in charge.” “Yeah, well you’ve been working too hard anyway. You probably need more rest than anyone, so go back to sleep.” “Mmmm, I’m up now, but if you’d like me to stay in bed, we could do something else…” Dawn says rubbing your chest and kissing the side of your face. Yeah, you’ve been over thinking the possible downsides of this relationship too much lately. You take Dawn up on her offer and have fun living for the moment rather than pondering the past or concerning yourself about future. The next morning you return to your duties as usual. For most of the day it looks like it’s going to be another routine one, and that’s when you get an unexpected visit from Klemto. When he arrives in your office, he has a slight frown in his face. “I’m suspecting bad news.” You say. “Well, it’s fifty fifty I suppose. Warrick has just given me news that Edgar is planning on attacking the Rask frontier. Not exactly sure how long it’ll take him, before he sets his sights on us again though. There isn’t really a government system in place there, it’s more of a collection of isolated towns relying on mercs to keep monsters at bay from what I’m told.” “Edgar and I were both stationed at Rask for many years. He’s got the advantage of knowing the area and everything else, but he also has to know that the place tends towards lawlessness. He might be able to easily conquer towns, but the manpower involved in keeping them under control is a constant drain. Not to brag, but if it hadn’t been for me keeping a tight leash on things there, the Empire would’ve never gotten control of it as well as they did. “Heh, well the ED has several eternals to keep a tight leash on it as you say.” “And those eternals aren’t me.” “Well, you seem to be in proud mood today.” “Just stating the facts.” “I see, well in any case that brings me to the next bit of news. You may be getting a transfer soon.” “Transfer? Why?” “Well the king and several others have always been uncomfortable with you in charge of the armies here on the frontlines as you probably know. It’s only due to the threat of the potential invasion and my circle’s influence that we managed to keep you in power here.” “Are you fucking kidding me? After all their worrying about an invasion for years, you mean they’re suddenly not anymore, because Edgar’s attacking Rask? That’s pretty fucking short sighted.” You say. “No, the intention is to still keep up the defenses here and keep the same procedures you set in place of course, but just uh, replace you.” “Right, because I could suddenly raise an army and try to overthrow the throne at any given time…fuck. I thought you were supposed to calm those fears!” “I tried! I really did! I mean I think I’m lucky we accomplished what we did! And I tried to fight for you on this too, but it’s just too much now and they want you gone. It’ll make everyone feel better.” “Yes, everyone but me obviously.” “Hey you’ve always claimed to be a soldier dedicated to the kingdom for good or bad. Isn’t this one of those times where you stepping down quietly to make everyone feel better would be best for the kingdom, instead of causing a fuse and potentially causing more problems?” “So I accept this, and then what happens? Where am I getting transferred to? Some fort in the middle of nowhere again?” “Well, that’s just it, you’re kind of going to be transferred to the uh…private sector. Are you familiar the merchant’s guild at the capital? Well, you’ll be the new head of security there!” Klemto says trying to make it sound impressive. You can’t believe this. “Are you telling me I’m not even going to be part of the damn army anymore? I’m just going to be a glorified guard?” “You’ll be well paid and get a better place to stay than this dreary fort!” “You know I don’t give a shit about all that, I’m a warrior! I want to fight!” “And that’s still an option! I mean it’s not like you’ll be sitting around doing nothing. In fact with the guild could use a little extra protection since the rise in anti-gnomism going on lately.” “Trust me, there’s some of that going on here too, right now.” Klempto seems like he wants to pat your arm reassure you, but decides better of it. “Look, I’m sorry about all this. It sucks I know, but the popular opinion is just not in our favor. That’s why we want you at the guild; most of my faction of likeminded fellows are there. We think we could still remedy this later.” “You’d think with all your influence and control of the economy you’d be able to do something about this now.” “Yes, well it isn’t as easy as you think.” “Yeah, well it could be.” You say. Klempto musters up all his courage and points a finger at you. “And I don’t want to hear you talking like that anymore! I know what you’re implying and the answer is no! Unlike you humans, we gnomes don’t kill one another despite our disagreements! Now I suggest you prepare for your transfer, take care of all your affairs here and a carriage will come and get you in a few days. I suppose you’ll want that Dawn girl to take over here, which will be acceptable. I managed to convince the opposition of that.” “Gee, thanks for small favors.” At this point Klemto just backs away from you and begins to leave, before he does though he speaks once more. “Y’know, you shouldn’t really see this as a bad thing. I mean think about how old you are getting. You humans don’t have that high of a life span. Shouldn’t you want to start slowing down on the war and battle a bit and start concentrating on enjoying your approaching elderly years?” “If you’re still trying to convince me you’re failing miserably, because that’s the biggest load of shit I’ve ever heard for several reasons that I’m not even going to get into. But I’ll address the age thing briefly. Yeah I know I’m not twenty, but I fucking know I’m still a better warrior than any of the soldiers under my command, let alone an average Felkan soldier. And while you keep saying I’m human, I’m not. I’m a fucking Eternal. We’re better than a normal human and when the ED invades they’re going to SHOW you that they are mainly because they aren’t afraid to do whatever it kill their enemies, unlike you lot.” Sensing he better leave this time, Klemto quickly runs off out of your office, leaving you to ponder your situation. Just last night you were feeling good in the arms of Dawn, and now you got a bunch of shit shoved at you that you’re supposed to just sit and eat it. It’s enough for you to attack the Eternal Dominion anyway > You disobey orders You wouldn’t have gotten promoted if you hadn’t reported Captain Eckers, and you wouldn’t have gotten this command if you hadn’t took it upon yourself to launch an attack on the gnolls. The fact is, throughout most of your life, you’ve followed orders, but it’s only when you’ve taken matters into your own hands on important decisions that you’ve gotten anywhere. Why should this time be any different? For one thing, just because there are reports that the ED aren’t planning an invasion any time soon, doesn’t mean that’s true. Not that you doubt Warrick’s skills as a spy, but there’s always a possibility that false information is being leaked intentionally and that someone is on to him. Hell, maybe its even Brenda pretending to be on his side, you don’t know. The other thing is even if the info is true it’s not like they couldn’t still invade during or after their invasion of Rask. And it would be better to catch THEM off guard instead of the other way around, because you’re pretty sure they aren’t expecting the Felkan Kingdom to attack first. You’re most likely going to get into a shitload of trouble for all this, but when you get this war started, the ED isn’t going to listen to diplomacy, when they get attacked; they’re not going to stop. When that happens the kingdom isn’t going to have any choice but to help you. Or it could just backfire horribly. It’s all a gamble, but one you’re willing to risk, because you’re damned if you’re going to grow old and just become a guard for fat gnome merchants after all you’ve done and sacrificed. And if you die in battle, then it’ll be a death you’ve been destined for since birth. You find Dawn and tell her that you want orders put out to all the forts in the province. A full offensive across the Arat border and into ED territory is to be launched. “So the ED is invading soon?” Dawn asks. “No, but after we destroy a couple of their forts and towns they will be. Have the message sent out that all forces are to converge on that ED town about twenty miles past the border, Bucklesberg. I’ll meet the rest of the battalion commanders there and plan the next attack after the place has been razed to the ground.” “Wait, you’re going?” “Yes, I’m leading this attack personally. I’m not some helpless old man you know!” “I didn’t say…wait, this plan isn’t official is it? What did that gnome tell you?” “A bunch of shit as usual. Now I’m going to need you here to keep things orderly on this side of the border. It might get ugly, but I know you can handle it. Just remember, we’re doing this for the good of the kingdom, even if its leaders are too stupid to see it.” Dawn looks a little concerned and it reminds you of when you first asked her to completely wipe out a gnoll village, but then she proves herself, as you knew she would. “It will be done, my love.” She says and leaves to send out the messengers. You order all troops in the fort to ready themselves for battle save for a skeleton crew to protect the fort. When they’re completely ready, you ride your horse up and down the line of them and are glad to see the dedication they are displaying. You can see that they have no need for any sort of long-winded motivating speech; they’ve been anticipating this moment for years, just as you have. “For the kingdom!” you shout which is followed by a loud cheer from your soldiers, then your army begins its march to war. When you get within a mile of Bucklesburg, a scout reports that the town isn’t completely undefended. In fact there is a larger than normal group of soldiers there along with Eternals. There may even be a mage there. “Hmm, it might appear that Edgar might’ve been amassing troops to prepare for an invasion after all, either that or he’s just distrustful. Doesn’t matter, we’re killing everything there anyway.” The battle of Bucklesburg is a massacre. The ED puts up as good a fight as they could have, but ultimately they’re overrun and outnumbered. The town is completely burned to the ground and the only survivors are the few villagers that had sense to run when you were seen coming in the distance. This is just the first step of the plan. When the rest of your soldiers arrive from the other forts you march again. By day nine, you’ve taken one the Eternal Dominion’s forts. It’s very damaged from the fighting, but you figure it will serve as a temporary base of operations while you plan your next attacks. After this battle you’ve also confirmed from various documents that you’ve found in the commander’s office that Edgar WAS planning to invade the kingdom, meaning you were right to attack. On day sixteen you get a message from Dawn, stating that the entire Gan province has been declared “under hostile control” and that all fort commanders are to relinquish their control to the kingdom immediately. Naturally this hasn’t happened, but the rest of the kingdom’s soldiers are supposedly being prepared to take back the province by force, however there is a lot of civil unrest going on as well due to some of the public opinion openly agreeing with conquest. She says that it’s part of the anti-gnome movement that claims they’ve been keeping the kingdom weak on purpose. She also says she is doing everything in her power to keep control of the Gan province and sends her love. On day twenty-two you get a visitor to Fort Ruin (as you’ve renamed it). “Hello Klemto, I hope your journey here wasn’t too dangerous, we’ve been trying to keep the road to the kingdom somewhat safe.” You say. “Eternal, we’ve got a lot to talk about.” “Yes, I suspect we do. So here, this’ll save time.” You say and throw a journal at Klemto who catches it. “What’s this?” “It’s the ex-captain of this fort journal. Makes mention of all the plans for the invasion on the kingdom, as well as a few amusing sexual desires. Second generation eternals certainly are a twisted bunch even when brought under control.” “At least they can be brought under control, which is more than can be said for you.” “I don’t understand, I’m did this for the kingdom and the proof is right there that I’m right! Don’t believe me? I’ve got more official documents I can give you.” “It doesn’t matter if you’re right! It never fucking mattered! What you were supposed to do is obey orders! You pushed a boundary that’s too far this time I can’t fix this! Not now!” “I question if you ever could in the first place. I’m sure you only kept me around as long as it served your purpose. Build up the pitiful defenses along the Felkan borders and then just get shuffled off to defend your fat merchants because they’re getting death threats from bigots that actually have a point whether they even know it or not. Face it, YOU fuckers helped create the Felkan government and you share part of the problems with it. Me? I’m just serving it. I told you before, I pledged myself to the kingdom, but my only stipulation was that I do things my way and that I not be held back in doing it. You got in my way and I had no choice, but to defy you. You can’t give a sword to me, and tell me not to kill the enemy with it. That’s what a fucking sword is for.” Klemto, rubs a hand over his face and sits down in silence. His face has a slightly gaunt appearance than you last remember it. Every time you’ve seen him he’s always been dressed very nice, but even his expensive clothing is a bit disheveled, even a small tear in his jacket. He takes a deep breath and speaks. “Major, you really don’t know what’s going on back home do you?” “Dawn sent me a letter recently about a week ago about some of what’s going on. I hear the Gan province has been declared hostile and the rest of the kingdom army is planning to retake it.” “Yes, and even that is being put on hold, you know why? Because somebody blew up the merchant’s guild two days ago! The day before? A duke was executed for conspiracy to kill the fucking king! At this point the Eternal Dominion doesn’t need to invade us, the Felkan Kingdom will be in ruins by the time their armies even arrive! You haven’t saved the kingdom, you’ve destroyed it!” he shouts with his eyes beginning to water and nearly hyperventilating the whole time. You have to say, you’ve never seen him ever this upset. You quickly get some water from a nearby pitcher and pour him a glass. “I don’t know what we’re going to do…I don’t know what we’re going to do…” he says in between drinks. “Look calm down Klemto, maybe it isn’t as bad as you think.” You tell him. “Bad? It’s fucking tragic! With the destruction of the merchant’s guild, the economy is going to go down the fucking privy hole, the king is an ineffectual idiot that’ll probably be successfully assassinated in a couple months, we’re suffering from civil revolts, we got a rogue province and on top of everything we’re at war with the Eternal Dominion!” Sounds pretty familiar. “Well, maybe it is as bad as you say. The question is what are YOU going to do about it?” you ask. “Do? What can I do? I’m just one gnome! I’m hated in general by most non-gnomes and even most of my own people since they personally blame me, for having a hand in allowing you to be in charge of all the military in Gan. Even most of my friends that agreed with me were all killed in the bombing! I have nobody to help me fix this!” “You’re wrong there, you’ve got me. Look, take all these documents concerning the invasion plans, and do your best in convincing everyone and anyone important that this first strike was very necessary. If you’re telling me that the king already is in danger of being assassinated…well maybe it’ll be best to let that happen and place someone who is more likely to support the cause. I have to imagine that there’s some power hungry royal ready to step up to the task.” “Assassinate the king, this is what it’s come to? I don’t know maybe you’re even right, it’s just I really hoped it wouldn’t come to that. We gnomes have been puppet masters, but we’ve never engaged in assassination tactics before.” “Well, I think you’re going to have to forget your previous tactics if you want the kingdom to survive regardless of who is actually on the throne. It’s either that or cut your losses and leave like I did with the Empire. I caution you though, if you truly believe in the kingdom and love it like I think you do, you might later regret that decision.” Klemto calms down a bit and looks at you to see that you speak from experience with that last remark. And it is true; there is a part of you that misses the Empire for all its faults. You’re making the best of things and you even manage to be content most of the time, but there is always something “missing” and you can’t get it back. “Okay, Eternal. Okay. Hand me all the documents that you mentioned, and I’ll get started on a plan. (Sigh) I just hope you can hold back the full wrath of the Eternal Dominion all by yourself.” “Don’t you worry about that, I brought this problem on, so I’ll be the one to take care of it. Just try to keep the rest of the Felkan army off of my back, even if they aren’t going to help.” Klemto leaves with the documents and you return to your duties. You can’t be sure what’s going to become of the kingdom, but one thing is certain, you aren’t going to abandon your duty like last time. > Year 58 Your soldiers stand ready at camp as a single enemy approaches you. He shows no fear and has a look of determination and blazing fury in his eyes. He might even be able to cut down everyone in his path just to get to you, but that won’t be necessary, as you have ordered everyone to stand down. This is between you and him. He’s an Eternal, a true one that you once served with, if either of you are to die today, it should at the hands of the other. No others are worthy. He’s stood in opposition to you for a few years now and now that his side has finally lost completely, his side has resorted to acts of desperation to continue a long lost battle. This is just another example of that desperation. The pair of you look at each other and say nothing. It wouldn’t do any good anyway, neither of you is going listen. You both believed in the same thing once, but not anymore. In his eyes you ruined all that. The two of you clash swords. You remember when you saw him after a long stretch of distance from each other; you felt a sense of relief. There you were in a hostile environment not exactly knowing what would come next and you saw a friendly face that was more than willing to help out. You land a kick to his stomach and smash his face with the pommel of your sword, destroying several of his teeth. He staggers back mouth filled with blood, but manages to block your next attack. After that last time you saw him you were soon separated again. Oh sure, you heard about him, and he probably heard about your deeds as well, but you haven’t actually seen each other until this moment. No matter who wins, it’s going to be the last time. You feel the deep cut of the sword sinking into your shoulder. Fighting through the pain, you manage to keep a firm grip of your sword and swing it into his side. You both hear a crack signaling that not only have you opened up a severe wound, but also broken a rib or two. He reels back from you as his side now drips red with gore. He’s unsteady and breathing hard, but he’s not going to stop. He’s got nothing left to lose. If you were in his shoes, you wouldn’t stop either. The funny thing about this is you always thought you’d be having this battle with Edgar, not Warrick. A slash at your leg brings you down to one knee, but Warrick isn’t able to capitalize on bringing his sword down on your head, since you slash upward into his groin. He screams out, dropping his weapon and you painfully lift yourself up on your one good leg and land your own strike across his head. The sickening sound of skull meeting metal is heard and he falls to the ground with blood and brains leaking out the side. He gurgles a few unintelligible things, but some of it starts to form complete thoughts. “You…? Wha…what are you doing here? I thought…you were still stationed in …Rask… I…don’t rem…gnomes…” After all this time, his memory is starting to come back. Your hit to his head, must’ve done something. You kneel down beside his bloody body and provide him a better last memory. “I was sent here to help you Warrick. It was a very important mission for the Empire. You got blown up by a trap, but we succeeded Warrick. We won. Remember this.” “We…won…yeah…we…” Warrick mumbles and then finally expires. You tell your soldiers to burn his body and not to disturb you for the rest of day, despite the medic insisting that you really should have your wounds seen to. You sit in your tent in silence trying to rationalize killing yet another one of your former comrade in arms. He was trying to kill you. Warrick was on the wrong side of the civil war. A new king had to be installed and new policies had to be implemented. It had to be done, to protect the kingdom. Just like you had to kill Kane to protect the Empire… It was a shitty end to an honorable man, but death by your hand is probably the best thing you could’ve done for him and at least in his final moments he believed he was elsewhere. You sometime wish you were. The next day, you get your wounds properly patched up and get back to the business of holding off the Eternal Dominion, which hasn’t been the same since Edgar was assassinated last year. Apparently the new eternals didn’t agree with his leadership since it wasn’t producing the results they wanted. They might not have agreed with it, but he was doing better than whoever the idiot that’s in charge now is. You wonder what happened to Brenda, you knew she was up there with Edgar in ranking, but since she’s not in charge of the ED you can only assume that she was killed along with Edgar. You’re the last one left and you think back to Gruz’s last words to you. “You’ll outlive everyone…” It’s finally come true. Year 65 More aches and pains as you slowly get out of bed. With every passing year you feel more of them and it’s getting to a point where you can’t reasonably get into the thick of battle anymore with sword in hand. Sure you’re still a good fighter, but you’re slowing down and don’t have the strength that you once did. Of course some would say you weren’t supposed to be doing that anyway as a leader should stay in the back and give orders from behind the safety of his soldiers. But then you always did cling to your old ways. Still, it’s not like you need to anymore, as the Eternal Dominion hasn’t been a threat in years. You knew they’d fall apart soon after Edgar died. Their territory or what’s left of it basically consists of petty warlords fighting each other more than fighting anyone else, let along the kingdom. Nowadays your job as a general mostly consists of pushing a few bits around on a map. Sometimes you still try to remain active by visiting areas that are experiencing heavy combat. With no real opposition anymore and a stronger king in charge, the Felkan Kingdom is entering a period of aggressive expansion. With the newly acquired Arat province under control right now the king is looking towards Rask due to its resources. Diplomatic feelers were sent to see if the towns up there would join willingly, but no luck. You know from experience how difficult it is to hold, as the land is wild and its people are fiercely independent minded especially since they threw off the shackles of Empire rule and aren’t willing to have another large government tell them what to do. While you’re certainly the most qualified to carry out an invasion on Rask, you aren’t sure if you still have the energy anymore. Granted you wouldn’t be personally, but you still remember the headaches of holding the place. Ever since Dawn retired to become an instructor, she’s been dropping hints about you retiring as well. Perhaps it’s time to follow in your wife’s footsteps and join her. > You continue as general You can’t retire, at least not yet. Despite your aches, pains, and old age, you still feel the call of war within and the fire of it still hasn’t disappeared from you. You wonder if it ever will, but until that time, your place is on the battlefield despite your diminished capacity. Within a few months the decree in passed. Rask is to be invaded, as you knew it would. You know how the powers in charge work. They want results and they want them fast so you’re going to try your best to provide just that, you amass a large army and send it forth to conquer. Since you’ve got access to more powerful weapons this time, perhaps this invasion won’t be as difficult as you think if you show an overwhelming display of force. The first strike is against Kenneth’s Rest which you once knew as Fort Destiny. The place apparently had been converted into a hang out for mercenaries and a trading spot. Your army faces a lot of dark elven mercenaries that were enjoying their pay at the time, but most of them flee seeing as there isn’t any profit in defending a place they don’t actually have any loyalty to. When Kenneth’s Rest is taken, you ride out to it so you can carry out your orders closer to the action. “So you’ll be leaving soon again?” Dawn asks. “You know how it is, if I don’t make a personal appearance they’re likely to fuck up my orders.” “They can’t handle it themselves?” “While I’m sure they could, I’m still the most familiar with the area. I think it would be best if I went there myself. Dawn, you shouldn’t really worry. I mean I’m not even going to be on the frontlines and there were more times in the past of when I could’ve been killed.” “It’s not that, it’s just I dunno, when we got married and as we both get older I suppose I just figured we’d settle down a bit more so we could enjoy our remaining time together.” “Like a normal married couple?” “Well, yes.” “Dawn, I think you know you didn’t exactly marry a normal person.” “Yes, I know that too. Still, I do wonder when you’ll eventually realize that you don’t need to prove yourself anymore. I think everyone knows you aren’t an armchair general. Ever since the new king took the throne, you’ve actually had nothing but support. I’m pretty sure your name will go down in history.” “It’s not about that, I pledged myself to this kingdom and its survival. Part of that is me making sure this invasion of Rask doesn’t go badly, because while we’re on top now, I’d rather make sure we stay that way and it doesn’t become a drain on our kingdom which then has a chain reaction of making things worse.” “You didn’t abandon your duty.” Dawn says to you. “What?” you ask, turning to face her. “You didn’t abandon your duty to the Empire. I know that’s why you try so hard here and still do. I’ve always known that the first time you told me of your past. You always speak in such a way about it with a mix of regret and frustration yet always with a sense of pride. You still struggle with that one thing that you consider a failure on your part, when if you think about it…it was the best thing you ever did.” You hold Dawn’s hand and the pair of you look at each other’s wedding rings. She has an argument that can’t be debated as far as that is concerned. If you hadn’t left the Empire when you did, you doubt if you would’ve been married. Most likely you probably would’ve gotten a knife in the back by one of those treacherous new eternals by this point. You hold Dawn tightly and kiss her, before explaining. “You’re absolutely right of course. It was the best thing I could’ve done, but that’s not the whole picture. I was raised different than anyone in the Felkan Kingdom, hell I was raised different than most in the Empire. I was brought up not just for war, battle and combat, but also to this ideal. An ideal that wasn’t reality unfortunately, but there it was still implanted in my mind regardless. The thing is while that ideal barely existed in the Empire as I knew it, I see the spark of it coming to pass here in the Felkan Kingdom, and it’s like I finally belong here and I want to be apart of it’s glory as much as I can before I’m too old to be of any more use. Maybe I’m trying to live out the rest of my life as IF the Empire had never fallen. Perhaps that’s what I’ve been doing all along for the past few decades.” Dawn nods and understands, but you know she would still prefer you to stay closer to home. “Someday Dawn, someday.” You tell her before you leave for Rask. You almost feel like history repeating itself when you enter Kenneth’s Rest, though it’s a comforting feeling. Using Kenneth’s Rest as your base of operations in the Rask province, you decide the next attack should be the largest town in the region, which is Keplavisk. While Rask doesn’t strictly have a proper central government, Keplavisk is the closest thing to a capital. Take that out and everything else should be a lot easier. You tell your captain that when he enters the smoldering ruins of the town to relay a message to the survivors. “Tell them that the Bane of Rask has returned.” Year 75 You have to admit, that while retirement has it’s good and bad points, you think you’ve finally gotten your “struggle” out of your system now. You initially thought after you retired you would still have that “pull” but you don’t. Your successful campaign in Rask was truly a bookend of sorts. Maybe it was a kind of closure for you. Your retirement basically consists of you spending a lot of time with Dawn which is time well spent as you grow old together. You sometimes wonder if Dawn wanted children, though she never specifically addressed it. Nature never took its course in that area. Dawn is about twenty years younger than you, and she was still in her childbearing years when you first got together. You don’t think it was a problem with her though, you hold the belief that it probably was with you. Perhaps Eternals weren’t meant to reproduce, or maybe you weren’t. Still, you know that Roldan and Brenda never had any children that you know of, so you maintain the belief that it’s one of the limitations of an Eternal. After all if an Eternal could breed offspring his attention might not be solely on war. Besides your time with Dawn, you sometimes fill your time giving instruction at one of the military academies. You attend the occasional special royal event and recently you just accepted an award for everything you’ve done for the kingdom. There are also plans on having a statue made of you, but that isn’t set in stone (literally) yet. You sometimes walk down the streets of the capital and see how much it’s changed in such a short time and continuing to thrive. Soldiers marching down the street keeping order. Citizens going about their business, proud of their nation and not trying to overthrow anything. This is what the Empire should’ve been like. This is what you were taught to believe in. And it fills you with happiness that it was you that was part of making this come true.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 58 Your soldiers stand ready at camp as a single enemy approaches you. He shows no fear and has a look of determination and blazing fury in his eyes. He might even be able to cut down everyone in his path just to get to you, but that won’t be necessary, as you have ordered everyone to stand down. This is between you and him. He’s an Eternal, a true one that you once served with, if either of you are to die today, it should at the hands of the other. No others are worthy. He’s stood in opposition to you for a few years now and now that his side has finally lost completely, his side has resorted to acts of desperation to continue a long lost battle. This is just another example of that desperation. The pair of you look at each other and say nothing. It wouldn’t do any good anyway, neither of you is going listen. You both believed in the same thing once, but not anymore. In his eyes you ruined all that. The two of you clash swords. You remember when you saw him after a long stretch of distance from each other; you felt a sense of relief. There you were in a hostile environment not exactly knowing what would come next and you saw a friendly face that was more than willing to help out. You land a kick to his stomach and smash his face with the pommel of your sword, destroying several of his teeth. He staggers back mouth filled with blood, but manages to block your next attack. After that last time you saw him you were soon separated again. Oh sure, you heard about him, and he probably heard about your deeds as well, but you haven’t actually seen each other until this moment. No matter who wins, it’s going to be the last time. You feel the deep cut of the sword sinking into your shoulder. Fighting through the pain, you manage to keep a firm grip of your sword and swing it into his side. You both hear a crack signaling that not only have you opened up a severe wound, but also broken a rib or two. He reels back from you as his side now drips red with gore. He’s unsteady and breathing hard, but he’s not going to stop. He’s got nothing left to lose. If you were in his shoes, you wouldn’t stop either. The funny thing about this is you always thought you’d be having this battle with Edgar, not Warrick. A slash at your leg brings you down to one knee, but Warrick isn’t able to capitalize on bringing his sword down on your head, since you slash upward into his groin. He screams out, dropping his weapon and you painfully lift yourself up on your one good leg and land your own strike across his head. The sickening sound of skull meeting metal is heard and he falls to the ground with blood and brains leaking out the side. He gurgles a few unintelligible things, but some of it starts to form complete thoughts. “You…? Wha…what are you doing here? I thought…you were still stationed in …Rask… I…don’t rem…gnomes…” After all this time, his memory is starting to come back. Your hit to his head, must’ve done something. You kneel down beside his bloody body and provide him a better last memory. “I was sent here to help you Warrick. It was a very important mission for the Empire. You got blown up by a trap, but we succeeded Warrick. We won. Remember this.” “We…won…yeah…we…” Warrick mumbles and then finally expires. You tell your soldiers to burn his body and not to disturb you for the rest of day, despite the medic insisting that you really should have your wounds seen to. You sit in your tent in silence trying to rationalize killing yet another one of your former comrade in arms. He was trying to kill you. Warrick was on the wrong side of the civil war. A new king had to be installed and new policies had to be implemented. It had to be done, to protect the kingdom. Just like you had to kill Kane to protect the Empire… It was a shitty end to an honorable man, but death by your hand is probably the best thing you could’ve done for him and at least in his final moments he believed he was elsewhere. You sometime wish you were. The next day, you get your wounds properly patched up and get back to the business of holding off the Eternal Dominion, which hasn’t been the same since Edgar was assassinated last year. Apparently the new eternals didn’t agree with his leadership since it wasn’t producing the results they wanted. They might not have agreed with it, but he was doing better than whoever the idiot that’s in charge now is. You wonder what happened to Brenda, you knew she was up there with Edgar in ranking, but since she’s not in charge of the ED you can only assume that she was killed along with Edgar. You’re the last one left and you think back to Gruz’s last words to you. “You’ll outlive everyone…” It’s finally come true. Year 65 More aches and pains as you slowly get out of bed. With every passing year you feel more of them and it’s getting to a point where you can’t reasonably get into the thick of battle anymore with sword in hand. Sure you’re still a good fighter, but you’re slowing down and don’t have the strength that you once did. Of course some would say you weren’t supposed to be doing that anyway as a leader should stay in the back and give orders from behind the safety of his soldiers. But then you always did cling to your old ways. Still, it’s not like you need to anymore, as the Eternal Dominion hasn’t been a threat in years. You knew they’d fall apart soon after Edgar died. Their territory or what’s left of it basically consists of petty warlords fighting each other more than fighting anyone else, let along the kingdom. Nowadays your job as a general mostly consists of pushing a few bits around on a map. Sometimes you still try to remain active by visiting areas that are experiencing heavy combat. With no real opposition anymore and a stronger king in charge, the Felkan Kingdom is entering a period of aggressive expansion. With the newly acquired Arat province under control right now the king is looking towards Rask due to its resources. Diplomatic feelers were sent to see if the towns up there would join willingly, but no luck. You know from experience how difficult it is to hold, as the land is wild and its people are fiercely independent minded especially since they threw off the shackles of Empire rule and aren’t willing to have another large government tell them what to do. While you’re certainly the most qualified to carry out an invasion on Rask, you aren’t sure if you still have the energy anymore. Granted you wouldn’t be personally, but you still remember the headaches of holding the place. Ever since Dawn retired to become an instructor, she’s been dropping hints about you retiring as well. Perhaps it’s time to follow in your wife’s footsteps and join her. > You retire As much as you might like to go on, you decide that perhaps it is finally time to pass the torch to younger and more energetic men and women than yourself. You also know it would probably make Dawn happier. You’ve done quite a bit for the Felkan Kingdom and served as well as you could have under the circumstances. You just wish you had time to do more, or at least the youth, if not the time. When you step down, its sort of a surprise to the entire Felkan military, they always figured you’d never willingly step down and probably die in office. Even the new ruling class is a little disappointed to see you leave, you were after all instrumental in their rise to power. A small service celebrating your years of dedication to the Felkan Kingdom is held which you naturally attend and you even give a small speech. It’s all very patriotic and keeps the up the morale and optimistic outlook of the kingdom for everyone. Shortly after your retirement, you do indulge in the frivolities of said retirement; this pretty much consists of not doing much of anything or spending time with Dawn. It’s fun for a while. When you start to keep up on the news on the Rask invasion, you become increasingly dismayed by what your successor is doing. There are victories at first, but they eventually become costly ones. The Raskians begin organizing enough to make further conquest difficult. Eventually several lower ranking officers begin calling for you to return if only as a consultant or strategic advisor. You actually would gladly volunteer as you definitely want to help the kingdom and you’re starting to find your retired life a little boring. Unfortunately the current general doesn’t want that, as he wants to take all the credit for the conquest of Rask and if he’s able, to surpass your victories. The fool manages to sway the king in his favor by pointing out that they hold most of the territory and are plundering its resources. The king of course is just concerned with the bottom line, so he keeps him on. Of course the biggest problem with this, is it’s incredibly short sighted. The Raskians sabotage their mines and fight a guerilla war that makes things even worse. Felkan soldiers die by the thousands over the course of several years and this begins to have a downward spiral. Not a grand one, but it’s noticeable that the cracks are starting to show and people are beginning to protest again. You don’t agree with how the government is handling things, but you’re a patriot to the end and one day you get into an argument with a group of them on the street. Dawn tells you to let it go, but the more they get in your face, the more you won’t let it go and eventually you feel that call to violence again… You punch out one of the protestors, which causes more shouting from the rest of the crowd as well as the soldiers attempting to keep order. One the soldiers respectfully attempts to hold you back, but you continue to try to attack the rest of the protestors and screaming at them of how ungrateful they all are. With tensions heating up on all sides, it’s only a matter of time before things escalate and somebody fires a shot and it isn’t from the soldiers, it’s from one of the protestors carrying a concealed pistol. You feel the impact to your chest and fall to the ground as mass chaos erupts all around you. Dawn screams for a medic and attempts to drag you out of the way, but you’re already coughing up blood and gasping for breath as the chest wound continues to bleed out your vital fluids. “Dawn…(gasp, gurgle)” is all you can utter before your heart stops beating.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 58 Your soldiers stand ready at camp as a single enemy approaches you. He shows no fear and has a look of determination and blazing fury in his eyes. He might even be able to cut down everyone in his path just to get to you, but that won’t be necessary, as you have ordered everyone to stand down. This is between you and him. He’s an Eternal, a true one that you once served with, if either of you are to die today, it should at the hands of the other. No others are worthy. He’s stood in opposition to you for a few years now and now that his side has finally lost completely, his side has resorted to acts of desperation to continue a long lost battle. This is just another example of that desperation. The pair of you look at each other and say nothing. It wouldn’t do any good anyway, neither of you is going listen. You both believed in the same thing once, but not anymore. In his eyes you ruined all that. The two of you clash swords. You remember when you saw him after a long stretch of distance from each other; you felt a sense of relief. There you were in a hostile environment not exactly knowing what would come next and you saw a friendly face that was more than willing to help out. You land a kick to his stomach and smash his face with the pommel of your sword, destroying several of his teeth. He staggers back mouth filled with blood, but manages to block your next attack. After that last time you saw him you were soon separated again. Oh sure, you heard about him, and he probably heard about your deeds as well, but you haven’t actually seen each other until this moment. No matter who wins, it’s going to be the last time. You feel the deep cut of the sword sinking into your shoulder. Fighting through the pain, you manage to keep a firm grip of your sword and swing it into his side. You both hear a crack signaling that not only have you opened up a severe wound, but also broken a rib or two. He reels back from you as his side now drips red with gore. He’s unsteady and breathing hard, but he’s not going to stop. He’s got nothing left to lose. If you were in his shoes, you wouldn’t stop either. The funny thing about this is you always thought you’d be having this battle with Edgar, not Warrick. A slash at your leg brings you down to one knee, but Warrick isn’t able to capitalize on bringing his sword down on your head, since you slash upward into his groin. He screams out, dropping his weapon and you painfully lift yourself up on your one good leg and land your own strike across his head. The sickening sound of skull meeting metal is heard and he falls to the ground with blood and brains leaking out the side. He gurgles a few unintelligible things, but some of it starts to form complete thoughts. “You…? Wha…what are you doing here? I thought…you were still stationed in …Rask… I…don’t rem…gnomes…” After all this time, his memory is starting to come back. Your hit to his head, must’ve done something. You kneel down beside his bloody body and provide him a better last memory. “I was sent here to help you Warrick. It was a very important mission for the Empire. You got blown up by a trap, but we succeeded Warrick. We won. Remember this.” “We…won…yeah…we…” Warrick mumbles and then finally expires. You tell your soldiers to burn his body and not to disturb you for the rest of day, despite the medic insisting that you really should have your wounds seen to. You sit in your tent in silence trying to rationalize killing yet another one of your former comrade in arms. He was trying to kill you. Warrick was on the wrong side of the civil war. A new king had to be installed and new policies had to be implemented. It had to be done, to protect the kingdom. Just like you had to kill Kane to protect the Empire… It was a shitty end to an honorable man, but death by your hand is probably the best thing you could’ve done for him and at least in his final moments he believed he was elsewhere. You sometime wish you were. The next day, you get your wounds properly patched up and get back to the business of holding off the Eternal Dominion, which hasn’t been the same since Edgar was assassinated last year. Apparently the new eternals didn’t agree with his leadership since it wasn’t producing the results they wanted. They might not have agreed with it, but he was doing better than whoever the idiot that’s in charge now is. You wonder what happened to Brenda, you knew she was up there with Edgar in ranking, but since she’s not in charge of the ED you can only assume that she was killed along with Edgar. You’re the last one left and you think back to Gruz’s last words to you. “You’ll outlive everyone…” It’s finally come true. Year 65 More aches and pains as you slowly get out of bed. With every passing year you feel more of them and it’s getting to a point where you can’t reasonably get into the thick of battle anymore with sword in hand. Sure you’re still a good fighter, but you’re slowing down and don’t have the strength that you once did. Of course some would say you weren’t supposed to be doing that anyway as a leader should stay in the back and give orders from behind the safety of his soldiers. But then you always did cling to your old ways. Still, it’s not like you need to anymore, as the Eternal Dominion hasn’t been a threat in years. You knew they’d fall apart soon after Edgar died. Their territory or what’s left of it basically consists of petty warlords fighting each other more than fighting anyone else, let along the kingdom. Nowadays your job as a general mostly consists of pushing a few bits around on a map. Sometimes you still try to remain active by visiting areas that are experiencing heavy combat. With no real opposition anymore and a stronger king in charge, the Felkan Kingdom is entering a period of aggressive expansion. With the newly acquired Arat province under control right now the king is looking towards Rask due to its resources. Diplomatic feelers were sent to see if the towns up there would join willingly, but no luck. You know from experience how difficult it is to hold, as the land is wild and its people are fiercely independent minded especially since they threw off the shackles of Empire rule and aren’t willing to have another large government tell them what to do. While you’re certainly the most qualified to carry out an invasion on Rask, you aren’t sure if you still have the energy anymore. Granted you wouldn’t be personally, but you still remember the headaches of holding the place. Ever since Dawn retired to become an instructor, she’s been dropping hints about you retiring as well. Perhaps it’s time to follow in your wife’s footsteps and join her. > You year 61 (Klemto's Lamentation) As you think about your own possible future and if your “time” has come to settle into old age and compromise, you also think back to another who was struggling with his own future… “Eternal, come drink with me one last time!” Klemto says sitting in a very basic chair near an equally unimpressive table. He’s not drunk yet, but he will be soon, if he keeps drinking. You take a quick glance at his home and most of it is very simplistic and lacks the luxury that he once had. It’s obvious he’s fallen on hard times now that the civil war has wrapped up. He no longer wears a suit; instead he has on a drab torn shirt and a pair of plain pants. Even one of his shoes has a hole in it. “No that’s okay, Klem…it is my understanding that all of the remaining gnomes in the kingdom are leaving on their own accord. I thought that you would be busy making preparations to join them.” “Of their own accord? Hah! That’s rich! Richer than me anyway! No, my dear Eternal, I think the change in the regime has made it quite clear that our kind are not wanted in any capacity. In fact I got a personal warning from that bastard calling himself king right now. After all the shit we did for him too…oh well. At least they’re letting us leave peacefully this time. Lot more than I can say for the Empire.” You aren’t exactly sure how to respond, but it doesn’t matter because Klemto is in a talkative mood. “Y’know though, I don’t blame him.” “You don’t?” “Pfftt no. He’s a fucking human. And all humans are alike, power hungry and ready to backstab someone as soon as they get it and crush all those when they get on top. I get it. They got short life spans. Gotta get shit done a lot quicker. All of them do and if persecuting, enslaving or killing an entire race stands in their way, so be it.” “You seem to be taking all this well.” “Well? Well how else can I take it? I certainly can’t do shit about it can I? Hell, I’m just lucky I backed the right side of the civil war, otherwise we probably wouldn’t be having this conversation and I’d be in a mass grave right now.” “That’s a good way to look at things. By surviving you can still make a life for yourself and rebuild.” Klemto bursts out laughing, spitting out most of his drink. “Ohhhh, that’s a good one Eternal. I guess that’s why I don’t blame you either. You don’t know any better.” “Blame me? I didn’t put you in your current position.” “Oh and you mean to say you had NOTHING at all to do with the current change in regime? The expansion of the Felkan Kingdom? Hell, even the rise in nationalistic fervor? You can stand here and look me in the fucking eye and say you had absolutely NOTHING to do with that?” “…very well. Perhaps my actions did set certain events in motion, but I did it for the kingdom!” “Right! You’re right. You DID do it for the kingdom and that’s why you don’t know any better. You aren’t even human. You look like one. You sound like one. Hell, you must even have some feelings like one given your marriage. Still a little surprised about that one…but like you once said to me, you aren’t human. You’re a fucking abomination that managed to finish a job that a corrupt dead society set in motion long ago.” “And what is that exactly, Klemto?” “Conquest and genocide. My people…my people escaped the slavery of the Empire centuries ago, and for what? For us to be practically destroyed by YOU. Whether you did it knowingly or not, you managed to complete the job. The Felkan Kingdom? It’s not the Felkan Kingdom anymore. It’s the fucking Empire. My people? My people are scattered and more divided in away that we’ve ever known! We…turned on each other…(sob)…we KILLED one another (choke)…you…you did so…(sob) much damage…” Klemto breaks down completely at this point and cries softly to himself. You really don’t know how to respond at all. Part of you actually feel sorry for him, as odd as it may seem. You and he didn’t always get along; you never really trusted him and you certainly never forgave his kind for what they did to Warrick... And yet, besides Dawn, he’s the closest you’ve had to a “friend” since you’ve been in the Felkan Kingdom. Despite all of what he is saying to you, the fact remains he did help you several times. And that’s where the problem lies… “(Sniff) And despite all of the damage you did, you are not to blame. We are, or rather I am. I was the fool who believed that you could bring about change for the better. I was the fool who helped you the entire time. There is no way you could’ve gotten away with most of what you got away with had I not intervened with my connections and even convinced some of my fellows to go down the path to hell. If I had any of the great intelligence that we gnomes are supposed to be known for, you should’ve been executed the first time we met, but I had to be an optimist. Idealism…the disease of idiots.” Klemto takes a long swig of his bottle draining it completely before throwing it to the floor. “Klemto…I did appreciate your help when you gave it. I mean that.” “I know you did, just wish I could help myself.” “You can. Like I said, you’re a survivor and intelligent. You can rebuild somewhere else maybe even better than ever.” “Heh, while I appreciate your words of encouragement Eternal, I don’t think so. You see, I’m not just an exile from the Felkan Kingdom, I’m also an exile from my own people now, or what remains of them. Seems they blame me for what’s happened as well…I guess I can at least take solace in the fact that their hatred of me has kept them united them on some level.” “But, surely you could make it on your own, somewhere!” “I don’t think so. We gnomes have always been communal in nature. Perhaps in some ways we DO rely on integrating into other societies to protect us. Hopefully one day we won’t and we’ll carve out a land of our own. But in any case I won’t be there to see it, and I’m too old to try to make it on my own even if I was going to attempt such a mad plan. No Eternal, there comes a time in your life when you realize it’s time to retire. I think I probably should’ve done so a LONG time ago, but I stayed in the game because I thought I could do some more good. Instead I just made things worse, A LOT worse. Sometimes you have to look back at your past, smile at the good times, forget about the bad and enjoy old age. Unfortunately for me there are too many bad times to forget and no place for me to enjoy the good times…” You begin to get a little apprehensive by Klemto’s tone and words. “Klem…” Klemto suddenly pulls out a flintlock pistol and points it to his head. “Goodbye Eternal.” And with those last words you saw Klemto blow his brains out. Naturally you don’t have the same problems as he did, but perhaps he could’ve been right about there coming a time to retire. Quitting while you’re ahead so to speak, and not screwing up your past accomplishments by being too stubborn. You certainly wouldn’t want to end up in a hopeless position like poor Klemto.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You wouldn’t have gotten promoted if you hadn’t reported Captain Eckers, and you wouldn’t have gotten this command if you hadn’t took it upon yourself to launch an attack on the gnolls. The fact is, throughout most of your life, you’ve followed orders, but it’s only when you’ve taken matters into your own hands on important decisions that you’ve gotten anywhere. Why should this time be any different? For one thing, just because there are reports that the ED aren’t planning an invasion any time soon, doesn’t mean that’s true. Not that you doubt Warrick’s skills as a spy, but there’s always a possibility that false information is being leaked intentionally and that someone is on to him. Hell, maybe its even Brenda pretending to be on his side, you don’t know. The other thing is even if the info is true it’s not like they couldn’t still invade during or after their invasion of Rask. And it would be better to catch THEM off guard instead of the other way around, because you’re pretty sure they aren’t expecting the Felkan Kingdom to attack first. You’re most likely going to get into a shitload of trouble for all this, but when you get this war started, the ED isn’t going to listen to diplomacy, when they get attacked; they’re not going to stop. When that happens the kingdom isn’t going to have any choice but to help you. Or it could just backfire horribly. It’s all a gamble, but one you’re willing to risk, because you’re damned if you’re going to grow old and just become a guard for fat gnome merchants after all you’ve done and sacrificed. And if you die in battle, then it’ll be a death you’ve been destined for since birth. You find Dawn and tell her that you want orders put out to all the forts in the province. A full offensive across the Arat border and into ED territory is to be launched. “So the ED is invading soon?” Dawn asks. “No, but after we destroy a couple of their forts and towns they will be. Have the message sent out that all forces are to converge on that ED town about twenty miles past the border, Bucklesberg. I’ll meet the rest of the battalion commanders there and plan the next attack after the place has been razed to the ground.” “Wait, you’re going?” “Yes, I’m leading this attack personally. I’m not some helpless old man you know!” “I didn’t say…wait, this plan isn’t official is it? What did that gnome tell you?” “A bunch of shit as usual. Now I’m going to need you here to keep things orderly on this side of the border. It might get ugly, but I know you can handle it. Just remember, we’re doing this for the good of the kingdom, even if its leaders are too stupid to see it.” Dawn looks a little concerned and it reminds you of when you first asked her to completely wipe out a gnoll village, but then she proves herself, as you knew she would. “It will be done, my love.” She says and leaves to send out the messengers. You order all troops in the fort to ready themselves for battle save for a skeleton crew to protect the fort. When they’re completely ready, you ride your horse up and down the line of them and are glad to see the dedication they are displaying. You can see that they have no need for any sort of long-winded motivating speech; they’ve been anticipating this moment for years, just as you have. “For the kingdom!” you shout which is followed by a loud cheer from your soldiers, then your army begins its march to war. When you get within a mile of Bucklesburg, a scout reports that the town isn’t completely undefended. In fact there is a larger than normal group of soldiers there along with Eternals. There may even be a mage there. “Hmm, it might appear that Edgar might’ve been amassing troops to prepare for an invasion after all, either that or he’s just distrustful. Doesn’t matter, we’re killing everything there anyway.” The battle of Bucklesburg is a massacre. The ED puts up as good a fight as they could have, but ultimately they’re overrun and outnumbered. The town is completely burned to the ground and the only survivors are the few villagers that had sense to run when you were seen coming in the distance. This is just the first step of the plan. When the rest of your soldiers arrive from the other forts you march again. By day nine, you’ve taken one the Eternal Dominion’s forts. It’s very damaged from the fighting, but you figure it will serve as a temporary base of operations while you plan your next attacks. After this battle you’ve also confirmed from various documents that you’ve found in the commander’s office that Edgar WAS planning to invade the kingdom, meaning you were right to attack. On day sixteen you get a message from Dawn, stating that the entire Gan province has been declared “under hostile control” and that all fort commanders are to relinquish their control to the kingdom immediately. Naturally this hasn’t happened, but the rest of the kingdom’s soldiers are supposedly being prepared to take back the province by force, however there is a lot of civil unrest going on as well due to some of the public opinion openly agreeing with conquest. She says that it’s part of the anti-gnome movement that claims they’ve been keeping the kingdom weak on purpose. She also says she is doing everything in her power to keep control of the Gan province and sends her love. On day twenty-two you get a visitor to Fort Ruin (as you’ve renamed it). “Hello Klemto, I hope your journey here wasn’t too dangerous, we’ve been trying to keep the road to the kingdom somewhat safe.” You say. “Eternal, we’ve got a lot to talk about.” “Yes, I suspect we do. So here, this’ll save time.” You say and throw a journal at Klemto who catches it. “What’s this?” “It’s the ex-captain of this fort journal. Makes mention of all the plans for the invasion on the kingdom, as well as a few amusing sexual desires. Second generation eternals certainly are a twisted bunch even when brought under control.” “At least they can be brought under control, which is more than can be said for you.” “I don’t understand, I’m did this for the kingdom and the proof is right there that I’m right! Don’t believe me? I’ve got more official documents I can give you.” “It doesn’t matter if you’re right! It never fucking mattered! What you were supposed to do is obey orders! You pushed a boundary that’s too far this time I can’t fix this! Not now!” “I question if you ever could in the first place. I’m sure you only kept me around as long as it served your purpose. Build up the pitiful defenses along the Felkan borders and then just get shuffled off to defend your fat merchants because they’re getting death threats from bigots that actually have a point whether they even know it or not. Face it, YOU fuckers helped create the Felkan government and you share part of the problems with it. Me? I’m just serving it. I told you before, I pledged myself to the kingdom, but my only stipulation was that I do things my way and that I not be held back in doing it. You got in my way and I had no choice, but to defy you. You can’t give a sword to me, and tell me not to kill the enemy with it. That’s what a fucking sword is for.” Klemto, rubs a hand over his face and sits down in silence. His face has a slightly gaunt appearance than you last remember it. Every time you’ve seen him he’s always been dressed very nice, but even his expensive clothing is a bit disheveled, even a small tear in his jacket. He takes a deep breath and speaks. “Major, you really don’t know what’s going on back home do you?” “Dawn sent me a letter recently about a week ago about some of what’s going on. I hear the Gan province has been declared hostile and the rest of the kingdom army is planning to retake it.” “Yes, and even that is being put on hold, you know why? Because somebody blew up the merchant’s guild two days ago! The day before? A duke was executed for conspiracy to kill the fucking king! At this point the Eternal Dominion doesn’t need to invade us, the Felkan Kingdom will be in ruins by the time their armies even arrive! You haven’t saved the kingdom, you’ve destroyed it!” he shouts with his eyes beginning to water and nearly hyperventilating the whole time. You have to say, you’ve never seen him ever this upset. You quickly get some water from a nearby pitcher and pour him a glass. “I don’t know what we’re going to do…I don’t know what we’re going to do…” he says in between drinks. “Look calm down Klemto, maybe it isn’t as bad as you think.” You tell him. “Bad? It’s fucking tragic! With the destruction of the merchant’s guild, the economy is going to go down the fucking privy hole, the king is an ineffectual idiot that’ll probably be successfully assassinated in a couple months, we’re suffering from civil revolts, we got a rogue province and on top of everything we’re at war with the Eternal Dominion!” Sounds pretty familiar. “Well, maybe it is as bad as you say. The question is what are YOU going to do about it?” you ask. “Do? What can I do? I’m just one gnome! I’m hated in general by most non-gnomes and even most of my own people since they personally blame me, for having a hand in allowing you to be in charge of all the military in Gan. Even most of my friends that agreed with me were all killed in the bombing! I have nobody to help me fix this!” “You’re wrong there, you’ve got me. Look, take all these documents concerning the invasion plans, and do your best in convincing everyone and anyone important that this first strike was very necessary. If you’re telling me that the king already is in danger of being assassinated…well maybe it’ll be best to let that happen and place someone who is more likely to support the cause. I have to imagine that there’s some power hungry royal ready to step up to the task.” “Assassinate the king, this is what it’s come to? I don’t know maybe you’re even right, it’s just I really hoped it wouldn’t come to that. We gnomes have been puppet masters, but we’ve never engaged in assassination tactics before.” “Well, I think you’re going to have to forget your previous tactics if you want the kingdom to survive regardless of who is actually on the throne. It’s either that or cut your losses and leave like I did with the Empire. I caution you though, if you truly believe in the kingdom and love it like I think you do, you might later regret that decision.” Klemto calms down a bit and looks at you to see that you speak from experience with that last remark. And it is true; there is a part of you that misses the Empire for all its faults. You’re making the best of things and you even manage to be content most of the time, but there is always something “missing” and you can’t get it back. “Okay, Eternal. Okay. Hand me all the documents that you mentioned, and I’ll get started on a plan. (Sigh) I just hope you can hold back the full wrath of the Eternal Dominion all by yourself.” “Don’t you worry about that, I brought this problem on, so I’ll be the one to take care of it. Just try to keep the rest of the Felkan army off of my back, even if they aren’t going to help.” Klemto leaves with the documents and you return to your duties. You can’t be sure what’s going to become of the kingdom, but one thing is certain, you aren’t going to abandon your duty like last time. > You year 56 (Wedding Day) You never thought such a day would come for you, ever. But here you are standing before a woman that you’ve come to feel closer to than anyone else. Not even your fellow Eternals, who at this point are all pretty much hostile to you, even Warrick, now that he’s taken the side of the loyalists in the Felkan civil war. You are hardly surprised though; you knew it was bound to happen given what the gnomes did to him. Even Klemto, who managed to convince most of his brethren to join you, can’t undo the unwavering loyalty they instilled in him. The civil war pales in comparison to the war you’re fighting with the Eternal Dominion, you might’ve gotten an initial advantage over them, but they are certainly trying to make up for it now. Edgar must be enraged. But none of that matters right now. A Felkan civil war and war with the Eternal Dominion, and still you are able to put all those more pressing conflicts aside to focus on Dawn. You look at her youthful face and into blue eyes and it makes you realize just how much younger she is than you. You wonder briefly if her youth is part of what makes her so desirable. Not for the superficial reasons that most would consider, but her youth itself. Looking at how young she is, makes you forget how old you are. You dismiss such thoughts, as you have enough aching joints and pains to always remind you how old you’re getting. Besides, it’s a much deeper connection and the pair of you knows that. She has been with you through all of this and supported you the entire way. You don’t even think you could’ve accomplished all of this without her. It is like the pair of you is in perfect harmony with each other at times. You can’t imagine yourself without her in someway. You think you now understand what Roldan was talking about when he spoke of Brenda. With war looming all around the pair of you, death is always a possibility, but this gesture, this ritual, this bond that you both are going through will signify that even if the unfortunate should occur to either one of you, you know that the love you felt was always there, and will always be there. The pair of you aren’t even paying attention to the local holy man performing the ceremony or the few soldiers in attendance as witnesses, it’s just you and her as the pair of you embrace and kiss.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You don’t know if this is actually going to do any good, but if the captain ever decides to suddenly secede from the Felkan Kingdom, you want someone to know that you weren’t part of it from the beginning. The problem there isn’t a higher-ranking officer at the fort and you don’t really know anybody that you could report this to. You suppose you write a letter to Major Samuels at Fort Smoke. He’s in charge of the whole Ibim province, but then you think what if he feels the same way as the captain? If that’s the case, then you’d probably become hated not just at your fort, but in other circles as well. You’d possibly even be demoted or worse. You’ve managed to make a life here with minimal friction, and you’d hate to just throw that all away, but you have to do something. For good or ill your duty is to the kingdom now and you need to defend against all potential threats, external and internal, and from your experience the internal ones are the worst. That’s when you come up with the idea that you’ll write to Warrick about this. He might not be able to do anything about it considering he’s in another province, but he’s about the only one you can trust and maybe he knows something and can at least give you advice. You write a letter to Warrick that night and hand it to a professional courier in Blossumdale the next day. Not having anything else to do, you return to your duties. Days pass into weeks and weeks pass into months. Just when you’re starting to wonder if your letter got intercepted and someone having sinister plans for you, you get a letter back from Warrick. You’re anxious to see his reply and you find a quiet place to open it up and read it private. You’re expecting a long letter, but instead you get a short one that’s to the point. Things are already in motion to remedy the situation soon and your duty to the kingdom has been noted. Warrick You can only guess that Captain Eckers will soon be gone with wording like that. You didn’t expect anything to be done either, just advice. Warrick must have better connections than you thought. Another week passes since you received Warrick’s reply and Fort Green is visited by a general with his personal assistants, a couple of royals and a well-dressed gnome. The visit is unexpected by everyone, especially Captain Eckers since he’d know first if anyone was scheduled to visit. Captain Eckers and several others are taken into rooms and questioned separately. The rest of you are ordered to go about your business and to not interfere. Later you are called in as well. You find yourself face to face with one of the generals. General Benson. He’s probably about the same age as Eckers, though obviously more successful. “Sergeant, I’m going to make this quick. You are the one who wrote the letter to Captain Warrick are you not?” General Benson asks. “Yes, sir.” “And why did you write to Captain Warrick about your concerns? Why not write to Major Samuels? He is the superior officer in charge of this province.” “Well, I wasn’t sure if I should sir. For all I knew he might’ve had sympathies with Captain Eckers and if that had been the case, my situation would not have been a good one.” “Hold on sergeant, are you telling me Major Samuels is also part of this?” “No, I don’t even know the Major sir, I was just being cautious on my part. I wrote to Warrick because…well he’s the only person I felt I could absolutely trust.” The general is silent for a moment while he looks you up and down. “Tell me, have you had any conflict while being here?” “Conflict with the other soldiers? No sir, can’t say that I have, I tend to just do my job and keep to myself as far as social matters are concerned.” “What about your relationship with Captain Eckers?” “It’s a respectful one sir, I feel no malice towards him nor perceive any towards me.” “Yet you felt the need to report him.” “Well sir, I thought it was something that might be needed to be brought to the attention of those in a higher position than me. Dissension in the ranks is no good sir. These sorts of things need to be taken care of before they spread. I know from direct experience, sir.” “Hmmm, yes I suppose you would…” General Benson continues to study you as if he’s trying to read your mind, after a minute of this, he backs off and starts to pack up some papers on a nearby desk. “I think we have everything we need to know. We weren’t exactly sure about you for a long time, and quite frankly some of us still aren’t. Your lack of trust among your fellow soldiers is concerning, but considering what we’ve found here, possibly understandable. As of now, I’m promoting you to captain and putting you in charge of Fort Green until further notice. You’ll be receiving some new soldiers soon to replace the men that will be leaving here. And hopefully this reward for your dedication to the Kingdom alleviates some of your trust issues.” “It will sir. It will. Thanks you sir.” “Very good, you’re dismissed.” You step out of the room feeling a sense of accomplishment. This is truly the first time since you pledged loyalty to the Felkan Kingdom that you feel appreciated. With this new command you actually feel like you’re back to where you’re supposed to be again, which is something you haven’t felt since you were taken off of your command in Rask. Granted Fort Green is no Fort Destiny, but it’s better than where you were. As for Captain Eckers, he and several other soldiers are escorted out of the fort as the rest of you stand by and watch. On his way out Eckers glares at you, he doesn’t say anything, but you can feel as if his stare is burning a hole in you. He knows someone said something, and he knows that someone was you. It’s too bad it had to be this way, but what’s done is done and it’s time to move on. Over the next few months you begin running the fort a lot more efficiently, the soldiers aren’t particularly thrilled about it since they’ve gotten used to not doing as much under Captain Eckers, which is another good reason why he needed to leave. Instead of whining, he should’ve been thinking up stuff to keep everyone’s mind’s occupied. After a few more months of extra training, you pick the soldier who has shown the most promise and pull them aside in your office for a talk. “Let’s see… Sergeant Dawn Young…easy name to remember. You’re one of the newer transfers here. Says that before you came here, you served on the Kilania Plains. Not exactly familiar with that area, but I hear it’s infested with centaurs. Half man half horse or something like that?” “Yes sir, they are little more than wild beast. They get drunk, breed, start fights and from what I can tell that’s about it.” “Hmm, bet they were a joy to fight. Well from your record it says you successfully lead several attacks on them. I’m guessing they are no longer a problem anymore?” “Well they are less of a problem than they were. I was told to hold back, by my commanding officer at the time. I know if we had pressed against them though we could’ve wiped them out completely though.” She remark with a slightly annoyed tone. Sounds like typical Felkan policy. You have to admit, Eckers did have a point about certain things. While you’re not going to support possible rebellion like he did, you are going to change some things. “Okay you sound like the kind of soldier I need. Consider yourself promoted to lieutenant and you’re my new second.” “…wow…thank you sir!” “Don’t go thanking me just yet, you still have live to enjoy it. I want you to take two platoons of soldiers, march over to those hills a few miles away and I want you to wipe out ALL of the gnolls that you see.” “All of them sir?” “All of them. Their warriors, their citizens, their women, their children. If there are little baby gnolls sucking on marrowbones in their cribs, I want you to kill them too.” Your orders are a little shocking to Dawn. She’s probably never heard anyone commanding the murder of infants before let alone the total war doctrine you’re following, even if it is against a bunch of barbaric monsters. “Lieutenant, am I going to have to find someone else to do this?” you ask. “…Um no sir. I just…well…the other soldiers sir. I’m not sure if they’ll follow such orders.” “Oh yes they will. Because it’s going to be YOUR job to make sure they follow them. Besides I’ve noticed guns tend to take away a lot of the emotional impact of killing. Not even like you have to look someone in the eye and take away their life. You can sit back comfortably from a few feet away and pull the trigger. They’ll be able to kill baby gnolls a lot easier than you think, and after this first time, it’s only going to get easier. I’m sure you’ll do fine, I have faith that you’re up to this task. I wouldn’t have picked you if I didn’t. You’re dismissed.” Looking a little overwhelmed, Dawn nods and leaves your office. Now all you have to concern yourself about is whether your changes get you thrown out of the fort like Captain Eckers. > You dawn Young (Personnel File) Dawn grew up in a poor neighborhood with a mother that barely wanted her to begin with. Despite this disadvantage and her humble upbringing she was determined to not stay stuck with her lot in life and turn to a life of crime like so many of her peers. Instead she decided to make something of herself by joining up with the Felkan military at sixteen; a younger age than most in the Felkan army, which is usually at least eighteen. She’s about twenty now and from what you can tell she’s served pretty commendably wherever she was stationed. You can also respect the fact she overcame the obstacles that life placed in front of her and it’s probably what made you choose her over a couple of the other potential candidates. She also transferred here shortly after you replaced Eckers, which might explain why she doesn’t have the bad habits that a lot of the other troops have which also made her the best candidate. She seems capable, and you’re confident you’ve made a good choice in picking a second.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Chapter 3A2: For the Kingdom! Year 40 “I don’t understand why the hell we haven’t just gone marching into the Arat province and taken it from the Eternal Dominion. We have superior weaponry, and they aren’t even that organized. I don’t care how skilled they are in combat, they can’t stop a bullet.” A soldier complains. “So, do you think we’ll really be going to war again?” his buddy asks. “Is there any fucking doubt? The Empire might be dead, but that Eternal Dominion or whatever it’s called took its place and from what I can gather the ones running that are complete monsters. No small feat considering how the Empire was run…uh no offense sarge.” You shake your head as a sign that you could care less how they discuss the Empire, as you’re busy keeping on the look out for potential enemies and you tell them to stop talking and do likewise. Felkan soldiers tend to be a little more chatty than you’re used to, they also tend to be a little over confident in battle at times due to their reliance on firearms. Their melee skills aren’t bad, but they aren’t anywhere near those of a say an Empire soldier, let alone an Eternal. You learned how to handle a musket pretty quickly, but much like the same reason you avoided using bows and such, ranged combat just isn’t quite your thing. Still, you appreciate their destructive power and having an advantage so you have no problems carrying around a couple of flintlock pistols on your person. Another thing that’s different is a government that isn’t actually interested in conquest despite its people often expressing such desires. You’ve never met the king or any of the royals, but from what you’ve heard the king is more of a scholar rather than a warrior ruler. Some consider this a weakness, but you aren’t convinced that it is. The king apparently believes conquest would just drain the coffers of what is currently a healthy economy (despite a recent war) and it’s better to put that money to other uses. The Felkans in general are always looking for new ways to advance the quality of life for all through scientific advancement. You don’t remember that sort of thing in the Empire where the status quo was law. While magic was reserved for the elite and still not common in the Empire, it’s practically non-existent in the Felkan Kingdom, which might explain their tendency towards scientific endeavors. Well that, and the fact that a good number of gnomes live among them who probably produce most of the great inventions in the kingdom. Still, you often hear a lot of criticism about the king; sometimes it makes you wonder if there shouldn’t be cause for concern. If this were the Empire you would’ve been expected to harshly discipline all of those soldiers that insulted the Emperor. Here, there is a lot more freedom in what you can say. Yes, there are so many differences from the Empire and you often feel out of place. Hell you feel strange enough only being a sergeant again. Five years and they still haven’t felt that you warrant a promotion to a higher rank, you don’t know why they still don’t trust you as much as they trust Warrick considering he actually fought against them directly. Of course he actually saved the lives of some important Felkan royals, so that’s probably the reason. They don’t keep you stationed on the frontlines of the Arat border like they do with Warrick either, for the past several years you’ve been stationed at a fort at the other end of the kingdom, though the fort is so small it’s more like an outpost. Fort Green is located near a small village called Blossomdale and that’s basically what you’ve been defending. It’s a rather dull assignment and only broken up by the occasional skirmishes with gnolls, bandits or other denizens living in the untouched forests and the hills. You’ve tried to make the best of things. You keep your mind mostly focused on your job like you always do. One good thing is that the soldiers that serve under you don’t seem to mind your Eternal origins, but you do get the impression they’re a little afraid of you. Your superior officer Captain Eckers seems okay with you as well. He’s the only one stationed here that’s older than you and probably sees you as someone he has a little more in common with, not to mention you bring a little more discipline to the fort and encourage more drilling and combat training. Eventually your shift is over and as usual, nothing happened today. Your replacements take over your post and you make your way back to the fort. The rest of the soldiers head to Blossumdale presumably for a little R&R as they often do. When you get back to the fort, somebody tells you that Captain Eckers wants to see you, so you proceed to his office. “Have a seat sergeant. So was today any different than yesterday? Any hostiles to be dispatched or anything?” “No sir, things were quiet as usual.” You answer. “I figured as much. It’s been like this for the past eight months. You know it’s always been slow around here, but lately…(sigh) I don’t know. I suppose we should be glad this place isn’t under attack constantly, but the boredom of nothing to do is frustrating.” “I know the feeling sir.” “Heh, I’ll bet. Bred for war and all that…you once had a command at a fort at one time did you not?” “Yes sir I did, in Rask.” “Yeah, I’ve heard about that area. I’ll bet you never ran out of fighting up there.” “Well sir, we sort of did since I did my best to try to exterminate the most dangerous threats. For a while things got slow then we had a series of uprisings became a problem and I had to be in involved in putting those down so I wasn’t quite as bored anymore.” “Uprisings. Now that would be an interesting event, though I don’t think I’m quite that bored yet. Still, I wonder if one wouldn’t do some good. Get those royals off their asses and actually do something for a change.” “I’m sure they do what they can…the land is prosperous after all.” You say unsure of how to react and still wondering why you were called in here. “Yeah, yeah, I know, but really what good is that going to do when the Eternal Dominion comes beating down our door? I served on the front lines of the war with the Empire from beginning to end, and I saw shit that even I wasn’t prepared to see. Even with our technological advantage, sometimes I don’t know how we managed to hold the Empire off…I guess you guys really had a lot of internal problems.” “Yes, yes we did sir. A lot.” “Right, and that’s the only reason why we held out. If the Empire had been a united front like it used to be… well me and you probably wouldn’t be having this conversation.” “Captain, if I may interject for a moment. I have heard citizens and soldiers on more than one occasion suggest that the Felkan Kingdom should become more aggressive. I’m puzzled to as why if things are going well. after all the Empire engaged in continual conquest and I think we know how that turned out.” “You have a point about the Empire, but you also should remember the Empire lasted several centuries before collapsing. I don’t presume to know exactly all the problems you had, but I can tell you what the problems we have are and why the people are getting sick of it.” “And what are those sir?” “Fucking gnomes.” “Gnomes? Don’t they provide all the wonderful inventions for this Kingdom?” “Yeah, and they also have been using us as protection for decades and the royals are in their fucking pockets. We aren’t really ruled by the royals, the damned gnomish inventors and businessmen rule us. They don’t want us expanding too much, because then we just might be harder to control. They also don’t want us to become too strong militarily because we just might turn it against them. I mean hell, I think you’ve seen how our soldiers aren’t exactly the best fighters and rely on firearms. I shudder to think if we ever had to actually fight without them. It didn’t always used to be that way, at least not back in my day. That’s why you’re a damn breath of fresh air. You’re actually a REAL warrior.” You just sit and listen as the captain begins getting even angrier during his rant. “You know why I’m stationed here in the ass end of nowhere? Because I spoke my mind on what I thought about gnomes and suggested we needed to stop being pussies and actually start taking more land. I mean take this place for example. If we had just a couple more platoons, and the orders, we could march into those hills nearby and wipe out all those damned gnolls for good. But what do we do instead? Wait around for the fuckers to attack us then sit here with our thumbs up our asses until they rebuild and do it all over again. We’re better than that! Or at least we used to be!” at this point Captain Eckers slams his fist on his desk. He’s silent with his head looking down for a moment and then looks up to address you. “…forgive me sergeant, I get a little emotional about this stuff sometimes. I really shouldn’t. Thank you for your report and listening. I just need someone to speak my mind to sometimes…anyway dismissed.” You get up and leave, thinking about what has transpired. It basically sounds like the captain doesn’t believe in his government anymore. You know what that’s like, but you just aren’t sure if it’s as bad as he’s claiming or he’s just a bitter old man that’s mad because times changed and he pissed off the wrong people in charge of his career. However as you’re reminded he isn’t the only person you’ve heard speaking out, he just happens to be the only one that’s gone into more detail than you’re used to. You also wonder if he told you all this stuff for a reason, is he hinting for you to do something? And what could you do? You’re a lower rank than him and not exactly high on the hierarchy. You’re also pretty much an outsider. Stirring up trouble isn’t exactly something you should be doing, and you pledged yourself to serve the kingdom and its king, not overthrow it. If you were going to be doing that, you might as well have joined the Eternal Dominion. You aren’t sure of what to make of all this gnome business though, if that is even true. You’ve never paid too much attention to them being in a lot of the positions of power. Part of you though does make you wonder about who you’re really serving and if it is really the gnomes like the captain claims, then your whole oath to the kingdom is pretty much a joke. Then again if they really are controlling everything, does it really make a difference? Things seem to still be running well and you personally just don’t have any real proof that there is some conspiracy even though it wouldn’t surprise you too much if there was one going on. One thing you know though, if others are feeling like the captain does, this isn’t going to go away. This is going to get worse; in fact it may already be too late to stop something from occurring. You could very well find yourself serving in another collapsing government again. > You leave it alone Captain Eckers is probably just venting, you doubt if he’s actually going to do anything. Besides the captain is about the only one you can slightly relate to around here and he’s always been all right with you so you decide it wouldn’t be a good idea to report him. You return to your duties as usual without giving it anymore thought. In the passing months, the captain never spouts off anything else to you so you figure you were right in your assumption that he was just venting. Nothing to major worry about except the increasing boredom of not having much to do at the fort. You haven’t seen a gnoll in months now and you don’t really like it. They’ve never disappeared for this long of a stretch and it makes you suspect they could be up to something because you refuse to believe that they’ve just decided to leave you alone. The next time you see the captain, you tell him that you’d like to take a platoon up into the hills to scout out the area, and while he says he’d like to send you, he has his orders. “But you said yourself, that we could do a lot more good if we just went into the hills and wiped out all the gnolls.” You point out. “I know what I said that day, and perhaps I shouldn’t have spoken out like that to a subordinate. (sigh) Look, despite my feelings on this situation I know I’ve damaged my career enough as it is. If I go disobeying orders, I’m just going to get myself in deeper. Besides if the gnolls have been as quiet as they have been perhaps we did kill them all, or at least scared them so much that they won’t attack ever again.” You of course aren’t convinced, but there is little you can do. If the captain is content on sitting on his hands you’re going to have to do some hand sitting yourself. It’s very frustrating. Year 41 “They’re breaking down the doors!” a soldier yells. “Hold ‘em dammit! Don’t let these hyena bastards step one foot into this fort!” Captain Eckers commands. The captain can order everyone all he wants, but the fact is those gnolls ARE breaking down that door. They have an overwhelming superiority of numbers on their side and even of reinforcements did arrive right now, you’re still sure that it wouldn’t be enough to save you in time. As you grimly prepare yourself for the onslaught that’s about to bust through the doors, you think about how bad of a choice you made seeking to find your place here in this kingdom of cowards and fools. If you’d stayed with the Empire instead of leaving it, you wouldn’t be in this situation now. Even if you failed to keep it from collapsing, you would’ve at least died honorably in its service. But this? There will be no honor in this death. You’re going to die, because your superiors and their superiors were either too timid or idiotic to do what was necessary and you’re an even bigger idiot for following along into oblivion. No more time for regret now though, the gnolls are breaking through. Already the first soldiers still trying to keep the doors shut are screaming their death cries from the axes cleaving into their flesh and spilling their innards onto the floor. Captain Eckers displays a pitiful showing as a gnoll with a halberd severs his head from his body before he can even attack once. As for you, you make the gnolls earn every inch they step into the fort. The first two that step to you have their heads blown to gooey pieces with your flintlocks, and then you resort to tried and true methods of slaughter. You hack down several of their number before suffering any major wounds. Even then, you continue to fight with the determination of ten men. The bodies of gnolls pile up, the blood is everywhere and you’ve just suffered an injury that should’ve rightfully killed you, but you continue to fight. All the anger you feel at this situation is being directed utterly towards the gnolls until it finally burns itself out and your body pushes itself past its limitations of physical exertion. An axe cleaves into your skull, followed by another into your arm, severing it just enough to hang from a bit of tendon. You fall to your knees, then to the floor and that’s when you feel another axe to your back destroying your spine. A finally kick by a hefty boot to the face and the gibbering laughing howls of the gnolls is the last thing you hear.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You can’t bring yourself to be some lawless mercenary like a svelk and you can’t fathom even trying to run your own piece of territory. You’re no ruler. You’re a warrior that currently has no direction or mission. The only chance to find purpose is to pledge yourself to another nation. Again, the only one you know of any note is the Felkan Kingdom. You only know a little about them based on the propaganda the Empire has told you as well as the brief conversation you had with Gerald when you temporarily reunited with him. Technically the Empire is at peace with the Felkan Kingdom, but there are still skirmishes. Though nowdays it’s due to rogue Empire soldiers (and peasants too) becoming outright bandits rather than any patriotic reason. The Felkan Kingdom has been trying to keep out Empire refugees as well, which means you’ll probably just get turned around, if not outright fired upon. Still with shitty situation you’re in, getting shot doesn’t even seem like a bad option at this point You find a nearby horse and set off for the west. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. When you get to the Arat province you find it in a bit better condition than other territory you’ve rode through, though when you ride through the town of Bucklesberg the peasants give you hateful glances or just outright run into their homes. You see in the middle of the town square several heads stuck on pikes with their eyes gouged out, some of them of children. In the very center of that is a pole with a sign attached. THIS TOWN IS UNDER THE DOMINION OF THE ETERNALS. LAW WILL THRIVE UNDER THE NEW ORDER. DISOBEDIENCE WILL BE CRUSHED. OBEY AND LIVE. REBEL AND DIE. -GENERAL EDGAR You read the sign twice you to make sure what you’re reading is correct. You almost wish you could say you’re surprised, and perhaps that small naive part of you still is, but you’re disappointed more than anything else. You of course don’t know the whole story, but quite frankly you don’t even want to know. All this revelation does is make you want to get out of Empire lands as quick as possible because it seems like it really was ever good for is turning everybody into a wannabe sovereign. You hasten your pace to the Felkan border as you don’t wish to have any potential conflict with this new “regime” that seems to be trying to form here. It’s a shame, because you did think about trying to find Edgar before going to the border hoping that maybe he’d join you. Now? He’d probably try to convince you to join him. Seen that story play out too, you’d rather not have to go through it again. Edgar obviously has chosen his path to deal with the Empire’s inevitable collapse and you must choose yours. Eventually you get to the Felkan border which is predictably well guarded by several men with their fancy musket weapons. From what you’ve heard they aren’t very sporting, but can blow through even a heavily armored orc instantly. Could’ve used some of those yourself ten years ago. “Alright just stop right there. You come any closer and you’ll have a brand new hole in your body.” One of them says pointing his weapon at you. “Sheesh Harry, can’t you come up with a better threat than that?” “Fuck you Wally, we’re turning back refugees every damn day, they can’t all be winners.” “Uh guys, I don’t think this one’s a refugee, he’s wearing military armor.” Another one says which at this point all of them point their weapons at you. You take this in stride you figured they wouldn’t exactly be welcoming. “Alright I don’t know why the hell an Empire soldier is here, but I suggest you just turn right back around. We’re supposed to be at peace now in case you didn’t know it, which judging by some of you lot you don’t.” Harry says. “I no longer serve the Empire, I request to serve your kingdom instead.” You say. “Ha ha ha, yeah right. Look even if we were inclined to believe you, we don’t need your kind especially since you can’t even keep your own shit together. We know you’re having a civil war or whatever it is right now. You’re lucky our king is such a pussy that he refuses to take advantage of the situation otherwise, we’d fucking own the Arat province right now.” Harry replies. “Hell yeah Harry! We should’ve just marched in and took it when they were begging for peace!” Wally adds The one soldier’s words are most interesting. Especially how he speaks about his ruler so freely and without fear. It is apparent that despite their dislike of their ruler, yet they are very dedicated to their nation. It is sort of a comforting thing to see after so many you’ve encountered over the years weren’t. Perhaps you could find a place here, assuming you can get past this first obstacle. “Very well gentlemen the only thing I can tell you that might convince you, is that I am an Eternal, born and bred for combat. I say with no boast that I am the best of my kind and while I am not yet familiar with your weapons, I dare say my combat skill and knowledge would allow me to learn rather quickly. All I ask is that I be allowed to speak with someone with more authority so that I can be given a proper chance.” “Eternal? You ain’t no Eternal, you’re way too old. I’ve seen those bastards running around on the other side of the border and they’re either in their twenties or younger. Dunno why you’d claim to be one of them for anyway, they’re not even human, they’re fucking soulless monsters. Heard enough horror stories from all the refugees we have to turn away. Some of those stories…pretty heartbreaking stuff…” Harry says getting a little choked about one of the stories he seems to be thinking about. It’s at that point one of his buddies pipes up. “Hey, uh maybe he’s one of those OTHER Eternals.” “Oh an original? I dunno, didn’t they not make too many of them?” Wally asks as if any of his buddies know. “How the hell should I know Wally?” “Well you were the fucker that brought it up! All right there’s an easy way to do this. Chuck, head back to Fort Soot, and see Captain Warrick, he’ll…” “Hold on did you say Captain Warrick?” you ask. “Yeah? And?” “I know him seeing as we practically grew up together. He was believed to be dead, how is it that he’s a captain in the Felkan military?” “Hmm, well perhaps you can ask him that yourself, if you really do know him. Okay change of plan, we’ll take you to see Captain Warrick, but you better not try anything funny. We’ll need you to get off that horse and hand over your weapons. Chuck and Wally, you’re with me, the rest of you keep an eye on the border as usual, we’ll be back soon.” You comply with their demands and have them march you to Fort Soot. The thing you notice immediately are all the trenches built into the land. Left overs from the war you imagine. When you get to Fort Soot it isn’t particularly large, though it does seem to be heavily defended with weapons you’ve heard about before. Cannons they’re called, and they are very devastating. You remember Gerald telling you how they could destroy stone golems as if they were made of paper. Makes you wonder why for all it’s power that the Empire didn’t fund money and time into developing such wonders as it certainly would’ve helped a lot more than their Eternal project. You quietly chuckle at the irony of that thought briefly thinking what you would’ve been doing now if there hadn’t been such a project. Probably not marching into a Felkan fort that’s for sure. When you are brought into Warrick’s office it’s like a trip to the past. Warrick’s changed quite a bit. He’s wearing an eyepatch for one thing and he’s lost most of his hair, but you’d still recognize him. He also recognizes you though he’s still having trouble believing it. “By the gods, is it really you?” “Yes, it’s me. By the gods? Not by the Emperor anymore I see.” “Nope and never will be again, which brings me to my next question. Why have you come here? I certainly hope it isn’t on some fool mission to bring me to justice for being a traitor…” “Ha ha. Maybe at one time, but not anymore either. I guess you could say, I’m also a traitor, though I don’t think I am. The Empire betrayed itself a long time ago and I can’t serve a place that has not even the slightest concept of honor or loyalty even if it was the one that taught me such ideals.” “I must say, I am a little surprised that you of all people would come to that conclusion. You were the most dedicated of all of us. I know that you are telling the truth though, as you were never a liar. So you’ve left the Empire then and come here to…?” “Pledge myself to the Felkan Kingdom, though it seems I wasn’t the only one who had that idea.” “Hah, yeah a bit of a long story that. Before we continue I’ll have to clear this with a lot of people first, and you’re probably going to have to prove yourself several times, but if you’re serious about this then you’ll most likely be accepted. I’ve found things work with a little more leniency in the Felkan Kingdom.” “All I want is a new chance.” And so began your service to the Felkan Kingdom. > You warrick (AWOL) “So when did you decide to leave the Empire?” you ask. “Oh that was a slow drawn out process actually. After all the shit I saw, I began to feel a severe amount of disillusionment for the Empire. Even on the front lines and being involved in a lot of fighting, I saw all the corruption going on, the incompetence of lazy commanders…it was like Captain Pollo multiplied by ten. I mean here we are trying to conquer an enemy that was somewhat equal to us as far as military and in some cases superior and we’re just throwing soldiers into the field, without any regard for tactics or strategy!” “Sounds pretty bad, last time I spoke to Gerald, he never mentioned all the problems.” “Heh, well I think Gerald didn’t like to focus on the negative, but trust me when I tell you it was a complete fuck up from beginning to end. The only competent officer I remember was a Major Krozer…” “Wait, did you say Krozer? As in Alison Krozer?” you interrupt. “Yeah I guess. Never knew her first name, never really met her either, but she was sending out orders that were making a whole hell of a lot more sense for a while. A shame she got assassinated by a fucking bomb only a few months after her arrival.” You don’t say anything to this news. You sort of figured that maybe she had gotten killed, but a part of you sort of hoped that maybe she found a way out of the Empire as well. Seems silly to have a strong feeling about her given you hadn’t seen her in so long and your one night tryst, but even not counting that, she was still a good officer that always played straight with you. The fact she got killed in a similar manner than Roldan did, certainly makes you feel that she deserved better. Warrick begins to notice your silence, and then you quickly pick the conversation up again. “So…how did you lose your eye?” “To be quite honest I don’t even remember, though that’s probably due to me losing the damn eye in the first place. I remember reaching my limit with the Empire towards the last days of the war. I mean we were supposed to be making peace with the Felkans, because we couldn’t get our own shit together and we still had commanders throwing soldiers at the Felkan borders! What kind of logic is that? Anyway, at that point I just said fuck it and decided to leave. I wasn’t entirely sure where I was going to go, and I don’t remember exactly what happened soon after, but I’m guessing I must’ve crossed into Felkan territory or something, because the last thing I remember was a flash and everything went black. Guess I was so pre-occupied, I forgot to stay alert for traps. Next thing I knew, I woke up on a Felkan medic table. They said they found me and kept me alive, but couldn’t save my eye. I still have memory problems about other parts of the past too, but nothing serious.” “Surprised they didn’t kill you, or leave you to die instead.” “Eh, the Felkans have always been a little odd that way. Their medics have some sort of code or something, but still here was a hated enemy and they were treating me a hell of a lot better than the Empire ever did. That’s pretty much when I offered my services to them. Took a while for them to trust me, but eventually they did. Of course it helped later on I saved the lives of some royals, but that’s a tale for another time. I think we need to get you started on your own new life here.” “Yeah, I still feel a little odd about all this.” You say. “You’ll get used to it, and in time you’ll see that your efforts will be better appreciated here than they ever were in the Empire. Trust me, you’re on the winning team now.” You just smile and nod at Warrick’s statement. While you don’t doubt that you’re on “the winning team” only time will tell if you will be truly appreciated.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 35 Another rebellion put down. You wipe your sword of blood and shake your head as you look around at the chaos. This is the Quala province, the very heartland of the Empire. You shouldn’t have to be trying to maintain order here only a few miles away from the capital itself. “Ha ha ha! Come on bitch, give it up! I’m an Eternal, you oughta be flattered that I’m even wasting my time on your normal ass!” private Felding says as he attempts to rape a nearby girl. You briskly walk over to Felding and pull him off her. You know damn well that the rest of his kind are probably doing stuff like this all over the place, but this one is in your direct sight and under your command. “What the hell, captain? If you wanted first dibs you could’ve just said so! Ah look, now she’s getting away!” “We’re here to maintain order private, not create more chaos.” “Oh yeah? Coulda fooled me by destroying the entire town like this.” “Regrettable, but during battle only victory matters.” “Exactly! We won! So now it’s time to have our fun with these disobedient peasants. Y’know instill fear in them so they won’t do it again.” “You’re not instilling fear though, you’re just satisfying your own desires.” “Hey, who says we aren’t supposed to have fun while doing it?” It’s like talking to a brick wall. You’ve had these “New Eternals” under your command for a few months now and they are some of the most undisciplined troops you’ve ever had. You can try to encourage them, you can try to reason with them, you can punish them, and none of it has a real effect. The only constant is that they know of your reputation and know that you’re also an Eternal, which makes them just fearful of you enough that they don’t attempt to directly challenge your authority like they have with so many of their other commanders. If it were up to you, you would’ve had them all killed for treason as soon as they murdered their first CO, but for whatever reason the Empire wants them active. You’re guessing because the Empire’s desperate. So they were ultimately transferred to you and unfortunately you’re not allowed to kill them either…well unless they try to kill you first. You swear this must be what it’s like to be a svelk. They are like children, malicious hateful little children. It’s not even their suspect loyalty that baffles you; it’s their complete lack of discipline. Even Kane and Cyrus who opposed you had discipline. Hell, Edgar who was arguably the most emotional and hotheaded of the group was a hundred times more disciplined than any of these new “Eternals.” You remember back to your own training and there were a few of your fellows that didn’t learn proper discipline either. They never made it past Mistress and the few that did, didn’t survive Gruz. Whoever was in charge of their training did a horrible job and should’ve been executed for incompetence along with the rest of these vicious monsters. That old orc was right, they will destroy what’s left of the Empire, but you doubt if they’ll survive long after its downfall. You think back to all the real Eternals. You, Edgar and Brenda are the only ones left, as Warrick killed in the final days of the Felkan War. At least you assume that’s what happened, his body was never found and you know he would’ve rather died than let himself be captured to rot in a P.O.W. Camp. Either way it’s truly a loss you never ever got to talk with him again. From what you know Edgar is still stationed in the Arat province, probably trying to keep his own “eternals” in line to keep the peace there. As for poor Brenda you know she has her command in the Nalin province and probably still quietly grieving for Roldan. After all you’ve been through, it’s come to this and you’re wondering what the hell you’re still fighting for. The Emperor? You haven’t cared about that unknown ruler for years. For all you know he’s some feeble minded inbred idiot figure head that his advisors keep locked away while they bumble around ruling things probably about as well as he would. The Empire? Perhaps at one time, but as it has lost territory, respect and apparently all resemblance of sanity over the years you’ve lost all faith that it can ever regain any sort of glory it might have had, if it ever had it to begin with. You’ve tried your best to stem back the tide of chaos, but you’re only one man even if you are an Eternal. While you ponder your potential future, private Felding interrupts you. “Hey, cap? You’re in a bit of a daze there. So if you’re done I’m going to go now.” “Hold on, I have one more thing to tell you.” “(Sigh) What?” Felding says with an exasperated tone. “You’re not a fucking Eternal. None of you little shits are.” You say and run Felding through and pull up on the sword unleashing his blood and guts onto the ground. Felding makes a high pitched scream and slumps on top of his entrails after you remove the sword. “Shit! The cap just killed Felding!” another so called eternal shouts while he and his buddy have just come back from looting some farmer’s home. The pair of them look like they want to run, but you make it easy on them. “Go ahead and run or stay. I don’t care anymore. I’m leaving. I will tell you this though, if the Empire sends any of you unruly scum after me, know that I shall take great pleasure in not just killing you, but in drawing it out for as long as possible. Remember this.” And with that last warning, you leave your service to the Empire. The question now is, where will you go? What will you do? This all feels so wrong when you think about it. You’ve killed so many for abandoning, opposing, or attempting to betray the Empire and here you are doing the same thing. Was it all for nothing? Was it worth it? You don’t know. You always believed at the time you were right and that you were doing the right thing. Maybe you were, maybe you weren’t. You just know that you can’t serve something you don’t believe in anymore. Especially when everyone else around you doesn’t either. Speaking of not knowing, you don’t know how to do anything except kill people. While you’re certain that you’d be able to hire your skills out somewhere, the idea of being a mercenary is a little distasteful for you. You’d rather not push the svelk comparison that far. You could swear loyalty to another government you suppose. Perhaps the Felkan Kingdom? You’re not sure they’d want you, what with all their high tech weapons and your own government once fighting against them. The only other alternative for you is to carve out your own territory and rule it as your own. While it’s true you do have leadership qualities, you know nothing of actually running a government. You honestly wouldn’t know where to begin. > You rule your own territory You can’t bring yourself to be some like the svelk and be mercenary scum who have no other goals than to earn coin. By the same token you’re not going to pledge yourself to yet another government that will probably be just as corrupt and decadent as the one you just left. Maybe in a way, Kane was right. He was obviously suffering a mental breakdown as well as being manipulated, but the concept of forming your own nation would be the surest way to ‘get it right.” You could run things the way they SHOULD be. The question is where to start? You’d need at least an army to conquer anything and right now you don’t really have that. You’re sure you could probably get those “new eternals” to follow you, but there still isn’t enough of them even if you were inclined to subject yourself to the torture of futility. Regular soldiers would probably follow you, but nowadays they’re so scattered that you’d literally have to travel all over most of the Empire to collect them, not to mention all the fighting you’d have to do during this state of anarchy. The only place you can think of is the Nalin province. It’s virtually the one place still left in the empire that isn’t suffering outright revolts, though the citizens are reportedly still severely disgruntled, Brenda is also there in command of Fort Glory. Perhaps she’ll see the wisdom of your plan and help you, if that’s the case you should be able to pull it off. You find a nearby horse and set off for the south. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. When you get to the Nalin province you find it in much better condition than the rest of the places in the Empire that you’ve ridden through. Fort Glory looks slightly different, namely it looks more heavily fortified and a lot better cared for than when you left this place. When you approach Fort Glory, you are momentarily halted by the guards, but when you tell them who you are and that you need to see Brenda they immediately let you in. Brenda is very surprised to see you. She looks a lot different from the teenage girl you parted company with. Her hair is going gray and she has a very “tired” look about her. As if the whole weight of responsibility is crashing down on her, but she still carries herself with confidence and strength. “When my soldiers told me it was you I couldn’t believe it, it’s been so long since we’ve seen one another. Wow you haven’t really changed at all.” She says almost smiling. “It is good to see you too, Brenda. Still as pretty as ever.” You say, unsure of how to respond. “Pretty? Now that’s a word I never thought I’d hear you say. Let alone to me. Maybe you have changed more than I thought.” “Well I mean I never thought you were ugly, Brenda. I was just trying to reply to your compliment with one of my own.” “Ha ha, a complete lack of tact. That’s more like the old you. Still it’s nice to hear, though I hope for your sake, you’re a better sweet talker to the other girls out there.” “Brenda, I have to talk to you in private about something it’s very important and I don’t know how you’re going to react.” You say by passing her statement. “Oh geez, you’re not going to suddenly confess some sort of hidden love for me that you’ve kept to yourself all these years are you?” “What?! NO! This is something important!” Brenda’s a little amused by how you worded your statement especially since she was joking. You just aren’t in a “joking mood” though right now and after what you have to tell Brenda you doubt if she will too. “Look, I apologize for my outburst. It’s just that this is really important.” “Okay, we’ll go to my office and speak privately there.” When you get to Brenda’s office you don’t bother beating around the bush and you just tell her everything. Your thoughts, feelings, actions and ultimately your plan and why you came here. Now she really is amazed. You of all people were practically a paragon of duty and loyalty and here you are openly confessing that you’ve abandoned the Empire. “Okay, wow. Well you’ve just been full of surprises today.” “Will you help me?” “What exactly am I supposed to do? I mean are you seriously asking me to just hand over control of this fort to you while you play pretend emperor?” “No! I mean shit I don’t know I haven’t thought out all the details yet I guess. It’s just (sigh) Look Brenda, I just left ALL I’ve known. Everything I’ve ever been taught to believe in is GONE, if it ever existed to begin with. I didn’t have many choices on what to do next and this seemed to be the best choice all things considered. I came here because I didn’t know where else to go quite frankly. I see now that this was just as foolish an idea leaving the Empire in the first place, I guess…” “No it wasn’t.” “What wasn’t?” “Leaving the Empire. I mean I certainly understand your reasons. I share them. Maybe not in the exact same way, but they are there. Hell I think in these dark times, everyone shares them. I dunno perhaps you just made that extra step that the rest of us here aren’t quite willing to make yet.” “What do you mean?” you ask. “I mean everyone in this fort and probably the entire province would be for seceding from the Empire at this point. I think the only reason why nobody has done it yet or even rioted is due to way we run things here at Fort Glory. We found it much better by just letting people go about their business if we’re not threatening them all the time and actually defending them from real external threats. The only real problem here is the high taxes which the Empire imposes on this region, that of course tends to make people a little grumpy, but not quite enough to riot. They remember what this place used to be like after all." “Not threatening people you say? That’s a pretty wild concept. Did you think that one up?” “Nah, the credit goes to Roldan, he was the first to suggest it. He probably would’ve made a better fort commander too and if he had been promoted instead of me, he might still be here…” “Brenda, okay you can’t think like that. If he’d been promoted then you’d probably be dead and…” “I know, I know. I just get a little sad thinking about him not being here sometimes. Okay, anyway let’s do it. Let’s break away from the Empire. Like you said, shouldn’t take much convincing, though I hope you’re prepared for a shitstorm from this. We might not much problem from the population, as I said they’ll probably be relieved to not have to pay the high taxes any more, but we’re going to get Empire armies to come down here eventually.” “Possibly, but it’s pretty bad Brenda. I’m not sure if they’ll be able to really do anything, the government is on the brink of collapse. If anything we might be getting an influx of people wanting to come here to join. You’re just lucky they didn’t saddle you with those new eternals. If they had, I guarantee this place wouldn’t be as nice as it is now.” “So I’ve heard. I suppose I am lucky. This whole province is lucky.” Brenda takes a deep breathe before speaking again. “Okay so how exactly are we doing this? I mean what system are we going to have in place?” “Well, given what you’ve told me about how you’ve been running things, I’ve had one new idea. How about YOU run this place and you be the leader?” “ME? But…I don’t know anything about running a nation or anything like that!” “Seems to me you’ve been running this place pretty well for years. You know the people and better yet, they know you. I think if I was in charge…well they’d think they were living under the Empire again. No, I realize now my place isn’t to rule, but to fight. It really is what I’m good at. About the only thing.” “Now come on, you have great leadership skills!” “Leadership skills for combat perhaps, but not for ruling. I think whatever is it that you had with Roldan made you and him more in touch with human nature and that’s a good thing.” “Yes…it was a good thing. I just wish he was here. I could certainly use his help right now.” Brenda says reminiscing. You pat Brenda on the shoulder in your effort to comfort her; she tells you she’s fine though. You and Brenda at that point set your plan in motion to split from the Empire. > Chapter 3A3: Remnant Year 45 In all the years you served the Empire, you always felt like you were being held back in some way; lack of supplies, lack of equipment, ungrateful rioting peasants, or incompetent commanding officers. In most cases it was never a failing on your part. For the past few years, you’ve come to appreciate no longer having any of those limitations. In Nalin everyone more or less works for the greater good of the country. In fact it could be argued that this is more the case here than it ever was in the Empire, at least as far as you saw. Brenda eventually declared the biggest town (Now a city) Dalt to be the capital and moved there to better manage things. You of course are head of the army and remained at Fort Glory. Despite her initial inexperience at running a nation, Brenda has proven to do a fair job at it. Hand picking town mayors and other bureaucratic types to help run things certainly helps. What also helps is Nalin is a much smaller nation than the Empire was. The long arm of the army doesn’t need to go far to catch someone doing something against the law. Your intimidating reputation as head of the army obviously keeps people in line as well. Still, it isn’t complete fear; they know you’ll also keep them safe. When Usksha raiders started gathering around the southern borders again, you made sure to strike at them before they could attack any of the southern towns. You wish you could just go into the Usksha Desert and wipe them all out, but you know you just don’t have the resources for such a thing. Still, you did find a temporary solution in the form of an equally old annoyance. The kobold tribes who eventually realized that continuing to fight against you would result in genocide, agreed to relocate to the edges of the southern Nalin border where they would help defend it. This has worked out quite well. The harsh terrain conditions closer to the desert as well as the occasional Usksha raids keep the kobold population down as well as aid as a front line defense without having to waste valuable troops. For the most part everything has been running quite well, perhaps a little too well to the point where you get a little bored, but you don’t even mind that now. You’re just glad to be part of a nation that isn’t crippled by corruption. “This is the last remnant of the true Empire.” You sometimes think. Of course a certain person might disagree with that thought, namely Edgar. Edgar hasn’t contacted you or Brenda. Brenda wonders if it’s because he considers you both traitors for seceding from the Empire, and while that sounds like Edgar, you suspect it’s more because he’s been very busy. Ever since the Empire fell, Edgar has been busily trying to unite all the new “eternals” under his command and his results are quite surprising. He’s not only managed to do it, but he’s forged his own nation calling it the Eternal Dominion. He claims it is the successor to the Empire and as general he has vowed to reunite all the old lands by any means. So far he’s had varying success, but he’s doing well under the circumstances. He’s also created a strict hierarchy system where Eternals are considered to be the superior ruling class and everyone else is below them. You aren’t exactly sure what to make of this ideology. Assuming he’s successful, you know it’s only going to be a matter of time before Edgar comes marching an army from the north. Brenda has the same concerns and lately a majority of the military has been stationed on the northern borders. You just aren’t sure it’ll be enough. Brenda wonders if an alliance would be best, but the only other major power in the region is the Felkan Kingdom, and you’re not exactly sure if they would even be in a position to help, let alone willing to help. The enemy of my enemy isn’t always your friend. This ties in with the other matter that has come up is expansion. Nalin has had a steadily growing population for quite some time and since the south is hostile desert, the western side of Nalin is covered by an equally imposing mountain range and to the north is old empire lands suffering from destroyed infrastructure and near anarchy, the only logical conclusion is to the east. Slowly over time Brenda has encouraged Nalin citizens to systematically settle the eastern wilderness. The Empire for some reason never colonized this territory. It probably was marked, but just never exploited due to other more pressing matters. In any case, things have gone more or less peacefully as there have been no encounters with any hostile natives and it has proven to be great farming land. While things are peaceful there now, there’s no telling what could happen later and due to all the troops on the northern border, the eastern territory has a minimum number of soldiers there. Right now you and Brenda are discussing on how to best to maximize your defenses. “Have you sent envoys to Edgar? Is it possible that he wouldn’t be a problem in the future?” you ask Brenda. “I actually have a couple times over the years and none of them ever returned. Which is why I’m convinced he’s pissed at us.” “Hmm, well guess we better up keep the defenses on the northern borders then. Still, my own reports say he’s still nowhere near us. He’s been trying to tame the core region of the old Empire as well as maintain order in places he’s already conquered. There is the option to take redeploy some of the troops to the east.” “But of course that would weaken us in the north.” “Well yes, but if you’re really worried about the east, then that’s all I can suggest other than conscription.” “Yeah, thought about that, and I’m not exactly keen on that idea. The people have been happy for quite awhile. We start conscripting like the Empire did, they might not be as happy.” Brenda says “They’ll be even less happy, if Edgar comes barging down here declaring them all inferior while letting his Eternal troops run amok.” “You wouldn’t allow that to happen.” Brenda says. “Well I certainly would try my best to not let it happen, but let’s just say I’m not as certain about things as I once was, there is always the chance things can go horribly wrong.” “Yeah, I understand that. (Sigh) Well, I suppose we can restart conscription. It’s not going to be popular, but I think if we stress how much of a threat Edgar potentially is, we’ll prevent the civil unrest. I’ll get my civilian advisors to start spinning the propaganda. I’ll leave it up to you how you want to deploy the troops; I think it would be best to put most of the conscripts on the east though, as I think we’ll need most of the experienced troops on the northern borders.” “I’ll certainly consider all the options. I guess I’ll get to it then and leave you to your work as well.” You say and are about to leave when Brenda calls out to you. “Hey, I know you’re very duty bound anyway, but I just want to say, I’m glad you’re here to help me.” “Well I’m happy to help, but I’m sure you’d do just as well without me here.” “Perhaps, but it’s sort of comforting to have another Eternal around to talk to. I just feel like we connect a lot better you know?” “Yes, I do agree. We do share a bond that most others will never know.” Brenda goes to hug you and you’re a little unsure of how to react at first, but you hug her back. Before you leave Brenda asks you one more question. “Do you think Edgar’s ideology for his nation is correct? Do you think Eternals are superior to everyone else?” You think about the question for a moment, then answer. “I think Edgar thinks it is correct. In one aspect, I agree with it, I mean look at the pair of us. We’re both in the highest positions of power and people seem to be accepting of it. However, from my own experiences with the new Eternals I’m not actually convinced that THEY are superior to the average human except in combat and sadism which I suppose are good enough to instill fear into the masses.” “Heh, but isn’t that what we do?” “Of course, but we do it because we know it’s necessary to maintain order. The new Eternals engage in pointless cruelty because they enjoy it. They’re no better than svelks in that regard. They’re so eager to move on to next atrocity that they let their emotions cloud their purity of battle. I believe this is a weakness on their part and that is why I do not consider them superior.” Brenda smiles a bit at your answer. “The Empire really should’ve made you a general straight out of training. I’m certain you would’ve single handedly saved it.” “I don’t know. Perhaps it was beyond saving by that time. If you’ll excuse me…” you say and leave Brenda’s office. As you leave the capital building, you think back on how you left the Empire. While you’re satisfied with your decision, part of you does wonder IF you could’ve done anything. Not just at that time, but before then. Is there another decision you could’ve made that would’ve prevented the situation you’re in now? After a brief run down in your mind of endless possibilities you quickly dismiss such thoughts as a fool’s game. You were right, the Empire was beyond any help you could’ve provided. Nalin is your concern now and you need to make the decisions to how to best protect it starting with deciding where to send the conscripts when Brenda enacts her decree. > You send them to the northern borders As much of a threat Edgar could potentially be, he’s not knocking down your door right now and as safe as the east seems to be, it’s still mainly uncharted territory. Anything could be lurking over there. Best to have experienced troops there just in case, in fact you’re going to have them make scouting expeditions. When Brenda enacts conscription there is a lot of grumbling as was expected, but nothing more. Many of the conscripts are a little nervous about being put on the northern borders after hearing all the scary things about Edgar and his “baby eating” army. You make sure to keep enough vets there to keep them in line until they toughen up a bit more. You also make sure to keep a close eye on the situation. Months pass a life goes on as usual, and you begin to get reports on the eastern wilderness. Most of the scouts say that there is evidence of other denizens living further east. In fact there seems to be a small tribal war going on between four separate groups. Two of those are human barbarian tribes, one them is elven, but much wilder than what you know of them and the last one is a race you’re not familiar with called the Slin. They’re apparently reptilian in nature though, similar to the kobolds, but much larger and meaner. All of them save for one of the human tribes have been hostile to your scouts. Your scouts report that most attacks were accompanied by slurs and curses against the Empire. Even the Slin have been reported to utter a few recognizable insults in their strange reptilian tongue. You can only guess that all of these folks at one time came in contact with the Empire and it wasn’t a good experience. Makes sense they would mistake you for Empire troops as well considering that all your troops are either still wearing the same armor or very similar armor. Some of the really old guard are still wearing the same insignias. Sort of like you do actually. While you’re confident that individually these uncivilized savage tribes wouldn’t be a match in a straight up fight, there is always the possibility that they could all unite against you which would make things a little more difficult. They’ve all most likely been living here a long time too, so they’ll have the advantage of knowing the land better. Right now the situation is similar to the one you have with Edgar. They’re all preoccupied fighting each other and not immediately close to any Nalin settlements. Stirring up a hornet’s nest by marching east could bring that tribal alliance that you don’t really want. Then again you have been getting sort of bored lately…maybe you DO want it a little. You make the decision and you’re wiping out these troublesome tribes before they become a major problem. You’re also going to personally lead this campaign of expansion; it’s been far too long since you’ve experienced a real battle again. Brenda is supportive of the idea, though she reminds you that if trouble comes to the northern borders she’s going to have to pull everyone back immediately. Since that could happen at any time, you decide you need to handle this as quickly as you can, but at the same time, not sloppy. First thing you do is establish a sizable war camp near the closest Nalin village in the eastern wilderness. You then have your scouts contact the human tribe that wasn’t hostile and to tell them that you want to meet their leader to discuss about destroying their enemies. Your scouts return with a crude map and report that the chieftain of the Belkaz Tribe is willing to listen, but that you must come meet him in his own village several miles away towards the southern hills and that if you arrive with more than five men he will consider you hostile and order an attack. “Acceptable. I was going there by myself anyway.” You say taking the map. “Sir?” one of your scouts says after looking at the other in surprise. “It’s fine. Corporal Bajin isn’t it? You did your job. Take a break, and tell the rest that I’ll be back soon.” “But…don’t you think you should take some of us with you? I mean they’re barbarians and not exactly trustworthy.” Bajin says. “Oh I know that, but if I can’t handle a simple mission every once in awhile, well what kind of general am I? Relax, I’ll be back.” You say and gallop away on your horse towards the village. As you get closer to your destination, you start noticing the usual primitive totems typical of such tribes establishing their territory. Eventually several barbarian types wrapped in furs and other crude cloth stop you. “This is Belkaz territory! You go back or die!” one of them shouts as they all point spears at you. “I have business with your chieftain. My scouts contacted some of your fellows about it not too long ago.” After speaking amongst themselves for a moment, one addresses you again. “You must be leader of the Empire men to the west. Other tribes hate you. Scared of you. Very funny because you are not scary. Not even that big. But other tribes cowards, we not. Come with us and do not try anything!” You follow the Belkaz to their village which is a fairly large one. You assume that there are probably others, but that this is just their “capital.” You get off your horse and look around and see the usual trappings of a primitive village. This whole situation is starting to remind you of your time in Rask. Though you hope that these particular barbarians aren’t shapeshifters or spirits in disguise otherwise this idea of yours is not going to go well. The Belkaz chieftain comes out of his hut. He’s certainly a big muscular man. Almost ogre sized. Hell, he may even have ogre blood in him. Heavily tattooed, various tribal piercing. All proof of his manhood and tolerance to pain no doubt. A worn looking axe hangs by his side. Probably has seen a lot of battle. You figure he slaughtered his way to the top like most of his kind do. Whether it was enemies of the tribe or rivals within the tribe, it doesn’t matter, he’s proven himself to be the best warrior and that’s what makes him the leader. The rest fall in line when he give them an order. He stands before you looking down at you. Probably wondering how someone so small could be a leader of anything. “Huh. Empire man. You wanted to discuss a possible alliance?” “No, I wanted to discuss destroying your enemies.” You say looking up. “Hrm? Yeah, I said alliance. You need help destroying other tribes.” “Yes, I need help, but no I do not need an alliance.” “You speak in riddles Empire man.” “My apologies. Perhaps this is something you would better understand.” You say and draw your sword. The Belkaz immediately goes for his axe, but fails you draw it in time since you land a heavy blow on his forearm nearly chopping it completely off. He bellows in pain and falls back holding on to his dangling bloody limb. Two Belkaz attempt to spear you in the back, but you easily dispatch them with spinning swing to their bellies unleashing their innards all over the ground. You run another Belkaz through as you advance towards the chieftain who has managed to draw his axe and recover from the initial shock of losing a vital limb which still partially dangles by the skin and bleeds profusely. He swings his axe recklessly at your head screaming the whole time. The battle was over long ago for him though as you easily duck such an attack and aim your sword directly at his groin. Literally destroying his manhood, his screams suddenly become much higher pitched as the useless member falls to the ground along with its two friends. Dropping his axe, falling to his knees and attempting to hold himself up with his one good arm, you finish him off with a chop to his head, and then another, and then another until his head splits in two. Already dead at this point, you then stomp on his split skull crushing the brain matter leaking out. The rest of the Belzak tribe at this point is either hiding or staring in awe of how easily you dispatch their leader. You look around and after catching your breath, you speak. “This man did not lead your tribe to victory against your enemies. As such he was also your enemy and needed to die. This will be your fate as well if you do not submit to my army. If you wish to live and see victory over your enemies, then you will join me. If not…well you will join him.” You say and point at their dead chieftain with your sword. You get back on your horse unopposed and ride back to your camp where some of your soldiers have been mildly concerned about you. You address the camp and one of your lieutenants in particular. “Everyone get some rest tonight our path to victory begins tomorrow. Lieutenant Harren I’m going to need you to take a platoon and head out to the main Belzak village tomorrow. Be on guard, as usual, but I think you’ll find the natives quite agreeable with helping you in any way they can. In fact I dare say after this is all over they’ll be some of the most loyal of our newest citizens.” > Year 46 It took longer than you expected, but you’ve at last tracked down the main lair of the Slin. They’ve stretched this little war out the longest, but this is where it’s going to end. Arrows unleashed by Slin bows hit some of your Belzak skimishers, but your own soldiers advance on the cave opening undeterred with their shields held up to protect them. You shake your head when you see the remaining Belzak run away. They’ve actually been completely useless when fighting the Slin. The only time they seemed to prove useful is when you were wiping out the Fleg tribe. The Fleg were pretty odd as you came to find out that they were decedents of once regular Empire citizens that started believing in some weird cult that took hold in the Nalin province long before you were around. The Empire stomped it out, but obviously the remainder fled here. Surrender and backing down wasn’t an option for them. When you got to their last village you found that they all committed ritual suicide. Their cult finally wiped out. You and your men fight your way into the cave entrance, several large Slin come lumbering from various tunnels hissing and charging at you. You like that. You appreciate a foe that gives no quarter and doesn’t run even in the face of certain death. It’s more than can be said of the wild elves. They were fierce fighters at first, but after you wiped out the Fleg and started making great progress against the Slin, something in them must’ve changed. It’s as if all their courage left them. Their elder came to you and begged you to spare them from genocide. These elves were all former slaves that managed to run away from the Empire long ago. The elder spoke of how he should’ve known it was folly to run away and that eventually the Empire would eventually find them again even if it took them hundreds of years. You told him that the Empire was no more, but his peoples’ attacks on your soldiers was something that couldn’t be forgiven. Taking a page from Captain Krozer’s handling of elves in Rask, you had all the adults and elderly killed. Any children were taken to become wards of the state. While slavery doesn’t exist in Nalin as it did in the Empire, you figure these children can still be indoctrinated to be proper citizens and given a second chance at a better life. Sometimes mercy can be a good thing. Several Slin lie dead at your feet. More of them continue to pour in as you and your remaining men travel further into the cavern. No, there will be no capitulation, or cowardly escape through suicide here. Before you killed the elven elder, he told you that the Slin apparently once lived in the Delerg swamps before being driven out by the Empire. (With the help of the Shadow Guard) Funny how all these people managed to settle in the same area and fight each other rather than unite, but then they all had different reasons and ways of life. The Slin don’t even realize that the Empire has fallen, and attempting to explain it to them at this point wouldn’t do any good even if you wanted to bother with such a thing. You’re close enough to being one of their oppressors in their eyes and your goals of kill or be killed were locked in as soon as you stepped into their territory The final confrontation takes place in what you guess to be brood chamber. Even Slin children are vicious enough to take part in battle. The Slin matriarch isn’t as big as the ones you’ve been fighting, but she has the advantage of some sort of primitive magic. She casts a poisonous cloud causing several of your troops that had followed you, immediately gag, cough and vomit. They eventually succumb to the toxins and choking on their own blood and bleeding from every orifice. The cloud doesn’t make you feel too well either, but being an Eternal you’re made of stronger stuff and have natural immunities to most poisons. Her brood bite at your legs as you attempt to fight through the haze of the poison cloud. You slaughter all of them and ignore the pain of several teeth cutting through your leggings and into your flesh. The matriarch hisses at you backing away as you advance towards her. She attempts to cast another spell, but you interrupt her by slashing her staff out of her hand. Lacking any other weapons, she resorts to her natural ones that are just as good to kill someone with. She lunges at you and wrestles you to the ground where you lose your sword in the process. Having a hard time seeing and breathing due to the cloud, you begin to feel a lot weaker and you struggle to free your arms from her talons. “Babies! Ssss! You kill my babiessss!” She says attempting to bite your face off. You more your head in such a manner that she only manages to bite your ear off instead. At this time you finally manage to free one of your arms and bring a fist to the side of her head. It isn’t enough to knock her off of you, but it’s enough to daze her enough so you can free your other arm. With both hands free you take your thumbs and jam them into the red orbs of the matriarch succeeding in pulling one out completely. The matriarch shrieks in pain holding her face and you push her off of you. Blind and crawling on the ground, she attempts to look for her staff. You stand up and easily grab your own weapon and put the matriarch out of her misery with a chop to her leathery neck. Another severs her head completely. You stagger out of the Slin brood chamber coughing up some blood from all the poison you inhaled from the now dissipating cloud. Some of your troops that were still fighting Slin in other parts of the cavern see that you’re not feeling your best and go to help you. You don’t remember exactly what happened after that. You must’ve passed out briefly because the next thing you know you’re lying outside the cave surrounded by some of your soldiers and a few of the belzaks who must’ve regained their courage after they ran away. You’re still not feeling good, who knows how much of that poison is in your system. “I’ve seen this before! He needs certain herbs to cure the poison, and I have some, I can mix up an antidote right here!” one of the belzak says. “Shut the fuck up tribal, you oughta be glad we’re not executing you right now for desertion on the battle field! In fact let’s take care of that right now!” a soldier remarks and you hear a scuffle and protests of wanting to help and begging for life. You struggle to get up, and you manage it just barely. You feel like you’re going to collapse again and you aren’t sure if you’re going to make it to the medic back at the war camp. In the meantime the belzakians are begging you to call off you soldiers. > You call off the execution You’re feeling so ill at this point that if these deserters can actually do something to help you, you’ll give them a pass. “Release them…let them make their antidote.” You gasp. Your soldiers are hesitant, but fulfill your orders and release the belzakians so that they can do their work. The one who spoke up thanks you immediately and starts asking his buddies to help him mix up the antidote. You lie on a bed roll drifting in and out of deliriousness hoping they hurry up with that antidote, eventually one of them approaches you. “This is for you, my merciful general!” You grab the wooden bowl that they’ve mixed the antidote in and struggle to sit up. After gazing into the green liquid you drink deeply. “Yes, drink, soon all your pain will be no more!” the belzak exclaims You might be ill and your hearing might be off due to missing an ear now, but the tone of the belzak’s voice is a little concerning. And you have every right to be concerned unfortunately it’s a little too late. Your throat and your entire insides feel like they’re on fire. If you were ill before, that “antidote” you just drank made it ten times worse. You struggle to breathe and attempt to grab at the belzak who avoids your feeble attempts, though your other soldiers grab him and his fellows. “YES DIE TYRANT! DIE FOR MAKING MY TRIBE SLAVES!” he screams before one of your soldiers cuts his throat. It’s no victory though; your own life ends soon after as the mixture of poisons in your system shut down your body completely.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 46 It took longer than you expected, but you’ve at last tracked down the main lair of the Slin. They’ve stretched this little war out the longest, but this is where it’s going to end. Arrows unleashed by Slin bows hit some of your Belzak skimishers, but your own soldiers advance on the cave opening undeterred with their shields held up to protect them. You shake your head when you see the remaining Belzak run away. They’ve actually been completely useless when fighting the Slin. The only time they seemed to prove useful is when you were wiping out the Fleg tribe. The Fleg were pretty odd as you came to find out that they were decedents of once regular Empire citizens that started believing in some weird cult that took hold in the Nalin province long before you were around. The Empire stomped it out, but obviously the remainder fled here. Surrender and backing down wasn’t an option for them. When you got to their last village you found that they all committed ritual suicide. Their cult finally wiped out. You and your men fight your way into the cave entrance, several large Slin come lumbering from various tunnels hissing and charging at you. You like that. You appreciate a foe that gives no quarter and doesn’t run even in the face of certain death. It’s more than can be said of the wild elves. They were fierce fighters at first, but after you wiped out the Fleg and started making great progress against the Slin, something in them must’ve changed. It’s as if all their courage left them. Their elder came to you and begged you to spare them from genocide. These elves were all former slaves that managed to run away from the Empire long ago. The elder spoke of how he should’ve known it was folly to run away and that eventually the Empire would eventually find them again even if it took them hundreds of years. You told him that the Empire was no more, but his peoples’ attacks on your soldiers was something that couldn’t be forgiven. Taking a page from Captain Krozer’s handling of elves in Rask, you had all the adults and elderly killed. Any children were taken to become wards of the state. While slavery doesn’t exist in Nalin as it did in the Empire, you figure these children can still be indoctrinated to be proper citizens and given a second chance at a better life. Sometimes mercy can be a good thing. Several Slin lie dead at your feet. More of them continue to pour in as you and your remaining men travel further into the cavern. No, there will be no capitulation, or cowardly escape through suicide here. Before you killed the elven elder, he told you that the Slin apparently once lived in the Delerg swamps before being driven out by the Empire. (With the help of the Shadow Guard) Funny how all these people managed to settle in the same area and fight each other rather than unite, but then they all had different reasons and ways of life. The Slin don’t even realize that the Empire has fallen, and attempting to explain it to them at this point wouldn’t do any good even if you wanted to bother with such a thing. You’re close enough to being one of their oppressors in their eyes and your goals of kill or be killed were locked in as soon as you stepped into their territory The final confrontation takes place in what you guess to be brood chamber. Even Slin children are vicious enough to take part in battle. The Slin matriarch isn’t as big as the ones you’ve been fighting, but she has the advantage of some sort of primitive magic. She casts a poisonous cloud causing several of your troops that had followed you, immediately gag, cough and vomit. They eventually succumb to the toxins and choking on their own blood and bleeding from every orifice. The cloud doesn’t make you feel too well either, but being an Eternal you’re made of stronger stuff and have natural immunities to most poisons. Her brood bite at your legs as you attempt to fight through the haze of the poison cloud. You slaughter all of them and ignore the pain of several teeth cutting through your leggings and into your flesh. The matriarch hisses at you backing away as you advance towards her. She attempts to cast another spell, but you interrupt her by slashing her staff out of her hand. Lacking any other weapons, she resorts to her natural ones that are just as good to kill someone with. She lunges at you and wrestles you to the ground where you lose your sword in the process. Having a hard time seeing and breathing due to the cloud, you begin to feel a lot weaker and you struggle to free your arms from her talons. “Babies! Ssss! You kill my babiessss!” She says attempting to bite your face off. You more your head in such a manner that she only manages to bite your ear off instead. At this time you finally manage to free one of your arms and bring a fist to the side of her head. It isn’t enough to knock her off of you, but it’s enough to daze her enough so you can free your other arm. With both hands free you take your thumbs and jam them into the red orbs of the matriarch succeeding in pulling one out completely. The matriarch shrieks in pain holding her face and you push her off of you. Blind and crawling on the ground, she attempts to look for her staff. You stand up and easily grab your own weapon and put the matriarch out of her misery with a chop to her leathery neck. Another severs her head completely. You stagger out of the Slin brood chamber coughing up some blood from all the poison you inhaled from the now dissipating cloud. Some of your troops that were still fighting Slin in other parts of the cavern see that you’re not feeling your best and go to help you. You don’t remember exactly what happened after that. You must’ve passed out briefly because the next thing you know you’re lying outside the cave surrounded by some of your soldiers and a few of the belzaks who must’ve regained their courage after they ran away. You’re still not feeling good, who knows how much of that poison is in your system. “I’ve seen this before! He needs certain herbs to cure the poison, and I have some, I can mix up an antidote right here!” one of the belzak says. “Shut the fuck up tribal, you oughta be glad we’re not executing you right now for desertion on the battle field! In fact let’s take care of that right now!” a soldier remarks and you hear a scuffle and protests of wanting to help and begging for life. You struggle to get up, and you manage it just barely. You feel like you’re going to collapse again and you aren’t sure if you’re going to make it to the medic back at the war camp. In the meantime the belzakians are begging you to call off you soldiers. > You have them killed “Kill these fucking deserters and get me to the medic.” You say. The screams of the belzak deserters begging for their lives and death squeals fall on deaf ears…or rather ear as the case may be now. Eventually you manage to make it to the medic who immediately starts administering an antidote to you. You’re out of commission and very sick for a couple of days, but after which time you’re at least able to stand without feeling ill anymore. Your chewed off ear isn’t an excessive problem as you can still hear relatively well, still you do feel a sense of “loss.” In any event the expansionist eastern campaign is over. All the tribes have been either wiped out or subdued to the point of submissiveness. Brenda will be relieved to hear it, as you know she was always concerned about having most of the veteran troops there instead of the northern borders. She’ll also be pleased that there weren’t many losses overall. You’re satisfied with the results, though now you’re just wondering what you’re going to do with yourself again. Year 50 “Our defenses are strong in the north. Have been for years. No need to be concerned about that.” You say. “I know, but this is a big thing. I mean after all these years now Edgar wants to speak with us?” Brenda asks. “My reports say he’s gotten a lot more organized and isn’t dealing with anarchy in his ranks anymore. He even re-conquered the old core lands of the Empire. It could be that he wants to see how strong we really are. His message said he’s coming alone without anyone else.” “Well, maybe that’s a good sign. Maybe he just wants to talk.” “Or maybe he wants to kill us both to a great show of strength so Nalin will capitulate with minimum fuss.” You point out. “Yeah…there is that tactic. (sigh) Well I guess we all knew this day was coming. Guess I better practice my combat skills., which sadly have probably declined from lack of use. Would you spar with me?” “Of course. Don’t worry, I’m sure you’re not that out of practice.” You remark. You and Brenda go to her personal training room where you and her prepare to spar. Brenda makes a few remarks about this being like the old days when Mistress made you fight each other. Brenda mentions the time when you broke Gerald’s arm and Kane’s nose when she pit them both against you. “Yeah, I remember that. That was my first match. Mistress had it in for me after I begged for my life. I was always pretty aggressive after that, well at least until Gruz told me I should master my anger better, and I did…anyway let’s get on with this.” You say not really wanting to think about those days or any of the names mentioned. Brenda isn’t quite as skilled as you remember her to be and she has indeed let her talents decline. Then again as you remember she always was more skilled with the bow. Something you never quite got the hang of yourself. You begin to get more in a “drill instructor mode” and shout commands at her to watch her techniques. “Alright, alright, I told you I was out of practice.” She shouts back. “Well you shouldn’t have let it get this bad in the first place.” You say. After this remark, Brenda begins to get a little annoyed, which of course means she makes even more mistakes. “Brenda, come on I know you’re better than this! Focus!” “I am!” “Well prove it!” “Well, I’m sorry I’m not the fucking lord of war that you are!” “You don’t need to be me, you just need to be an Eternal!” “What the hell for? The Empire is fucking dead and we’ve just been upkeeping a parody of it for the past fifteen years! I don’t even know what I’m doing trying to run this fucking country anymore! I never wanted this! I…I just wanted…to spend the rest of my…(sob) life with Roldan…(sob)” At this point Brenda sits down on the floor and completely breaks down in tears. You can honestly say you weren’t expecting this. “Brenda…” “I’m sorry, but I can’t be the Eternal you are. I can’t even be the Eternal that Edgar is. I lost that edge when I fell in love. I wasn’t supposed to and neither was Roldan! If we hadn’t been so weak, he’d still be alive and…” “Dammit Brenda, you can’t keep blaming yourself for his death! Your relationship and whatever feelings you had for each other had nothing to do with some insane asshole blowing him up. What’s bringing this all on? Edgar? I think you’re worrying about him more than you need to. I mean for all we know he just wants play catch up and even if he doesn’t we’re going to be ready for him and his army of half assed Eternals…” Brenda shakes her head and tries to compose herself. “No, it’s not Edgar. It’s you.” “Me? What do you mean? Out with it.” “I…I think I’ve developed the same kind of feelings for you that I did for Roldan.” Brenda says. Another surprise for you today, not exactly the best timing with all that’s coming up soon. “…Uh…I don’t know what to say…I guess…I mean…are you sure?” you ask. “I think I’d know. It’s been building up slowly over time. At first I was just happy to have you around, another Eternal to talk to. Sure you weren’t Roldan, and you’re certainly less fun loving than he could be, but there was that familiar bond. Then when you were so instrumental in helping to keep order in this place, I remembered why we all admired and respected you as a leader so much back in the day. It also began to remind me of how Roldan and I complimented each other in keeping order here during the days of the Empire. You were bringing the memories of those good old days back and making them reality again.” “You probably just still miss him and are transferring those feelings.” “I thought so too, which is why I didn’t do anything before. In fact I was feeling guilty about it, I thought I was dishonoring Roldan’s memory. Wasn’t until I heard about your close call with death during your campaign in the east that I knew it was more than mere transference. I was so happy that you were still alive, I nearly told you how I felt when you came back. I just didn’t think you suffered from such weaknesses and I wanted to remain strong because your respect was more important than my silly attractions.” You don’t have much experience with any of this, but you need to say or do something make Brenda feel better. “Brenda, you’ll always have my respect. As for anything between us, I never thought about it because I figured you’d always be carrying a torch for Roldan. I’m not opposed to the idea however. I mean we do have much in common and contrary to popular belief, I’m not quite the unfeeling golem that most consider me to be. I do have feelings, even if I don’t show them a lot and I would’ve thought you knew that.” “I know you do, but you’re in control of them or you at least direct them better. I worry that if by some chance something would to occur between us, that you would lose your edge. I don’t want you to become weaker or distracted because of me. You’re needed as you are now.” You’re about to reply, and then there’s a knock on the door. “Sorry to disturb your training, but I’ve been told that the leader of the Eternal Dominion has been spotted at the northern border. He’s on a horse by himself, and several soldiers are already escorting him to Fort Glory. Did you want to meet him there or did you want us to escort him all the way to the capital?” a voice asks from behind the door. The pair of you didn’t expect him this soon, let alone be in the middle of the discussion you’re having now. You’d probably both like to wrap this up before having to focus on Edgar, though the question is if you’d have enough time to do it anyway. > You meet Edgar at the fort You and Brenda might have a bit more on your mind now, but this is much more important. “Brenda, I know emotions are running high right now, but I think we need to go meet Edgar. We can talk more about this later.” You say. “Yes. Yes, of course. We need to get back to business. I’ll be okay. This was silly anyway. Need to focus.” Brenda says standing back up and wiping her eyes. You and Brenda ride off to Fort Glory. The ride there is done with minimal talking, but that’s sort of to be expected. The thing is you never seriously thought about Brenda in that way until she just brought it up today. Sure you always knew you had that bond from both of you being Eternals and the fact that you’ve served together for so long. You may have even had the occasional sexual thought about her, but like you said to her, you always figured she would’ve carried a torch for Roldan. You would’ve just been a substitute at best. Now you’re having scenarios in your head about the two of you being together in a closer way and you really shouldn’t be thinking about that at this moment. Maybe she’s right in a way maybe if you did have something together it would cause you to lose your edge. It’s certainly clouding your judgment right now and you’re not even together. When you get to Fort Glory you’re told that Edgar is waiting for you in your meeting room. When you ask how he seems, the soldiers say he’s been stand offish, but not overly hostile. About what you expected. When you and Brenda reach the meeting room, you ask her if she’s ready, and she remarks that she is. The door opens and you both step in and see Edgar sitting in a chair with a big grin on his face. He stands up and addresses the both of you. “Well it’s about time! I’ve missed the both of you! Come here!” he says jovially with his arms out walking towards you. “Uh… yeah, hey Edgar. Good to see you too.” Brenda says when he gives her a big hug. Looks like it’s going to be a day of surprises… Edgar stops hugging Brenda and then looks at you. You stand a little back from him as you don’t want to be hugged, but Edgar doesn’t try it. “Oh don’t worry, I know you’re the serious minded Bane of Rask! Bane of Nalin too now I hear! Heh, but how are you?” “I’m fine Edgar.” You say. “Good, good. I just have to say it’s really great seeing the both of you again! I mean you two are like my brother and sister! No, you ARE my brother and sister!” The last time you heard this sort of sibling talk before was from Kane and if you weren’t wary before, you certainly are now. “Edgar, I’m glad you seem to be in a good mood and all, but I sent envoys to contact you several times in the past and none of them ever returned. We always assumed you had them killed and were angry at us.” Brenda says. “You did? When was the last one?” “Mmm, last one was about six years ago I believe. After that, I saw no need to waste lives.” “Aw! You should’ve kept sending them! I don’t know if you’re aware of just how much anarchy and infighting I’ve had to put up with! Those envoys probably got killed by the new Eternals and nobody ever told me about it! Hell, they might’ve even gotten killed by run of the mill bandits, it was pretty lawless back in the early days! Shit, if I had known you guys weren’t pissed at ME, I would’ve made this trek sooner!” “Wait, so you weren’t mad at us?” “Mad at you guys? What the hell for?! Oh you mean seceding from the Empire? Well I have to say I was more shocked than angry about that. I mean YOU especially.” Edgar says pointing at you. “But in time I heard about what you two were doing down here and I respected what the pair of you were attempting to do.” You and Brenda look at each other, wondering what Edgar THINKS you both were trying to do. “Oh? And what was that exactly?” Brenda asks. “You saw that the Empire was a lost cause, but you were trying to uphold a portion of it, though this patch of territory. I’ve heard about your great success in keeping order and how you’ve even added more land to your nation. Only an Eternal could do something like that and that’s why both of you were successful!” Edgar isn’t far off, at least from your perspective. Though he probably has a more idealistic vision of it than the reality, which was this; you didn’t know where else to go and over time Nalin was transformed into a “mini Empire” because you didn’t know any other way. Brenda’s reasons are probably based on simple emotional attachment. “Well, we were doing the best we could under the circumstances, but you forged a whole new nation, so you’ve been successful too Edgar.” Brenda says. “Ah yes, but it wasn’t easy! There were many times I almost wanted to give up and come join you two! But I knew I couldn’t do that, I had a vision that I had to make work! A nation run by Eternals and I’m proud to say it’s all finally coming together and I think it’s finally time for us, to reunite like we were meant to!” You and Brenda look at each other again. “Edgar, I don’t think it’s quite as simple as all that. We’re going to have to discuss this, all of it.” Brenda remarks and the three of you sit down to do just that. Edgar starts off by saying that while he respects what you’ve done, he doesn’t think that you’re going about things the right way and that you’re still thinking like “The Empire” and clinging to the old way of doing things. He points out that within his new regime he’s pushed for advances in weapon technology like the Felkan Kingdom has and managed to even “acquire” such gunpowder based weapons. He’s also managed to get a few mages to help in getting the Eternal process started again. When you bring up your experience with the new Eternals, Edgar reassures you that they don’t have the discipline issues at all anymore. He says he’s manages to instill the pride of being an Eternal into them and they’ve shaped up enough to no longer behave like the bloodthirsty children you knew them to be. He also says the next generation of Eternals are almost ready to prove their worth now as well and says he has made sure that their training was stricter and more in line with how you were trained. “Don’t you see I’m creating a new nation like the Empire, but how it should’ve been run! A nation run by us Eternals! Only we are able to efficiently run things. The lessers can either wisely listen to us, or be crushed underfoot.” “That sounds very nice Edgar, but what is our place in this new nation?” you ask. “Well, you’d be helping of course! I mean we would be ruling as…uh…a council! Yes! A council of three! The Eternal Council!” “A council huh? Don’t you think that might ruin your standing with the new eternals who you’ve probably conditioned to listen to a single strong leader?” you ask. “And they’ll still listen to me, because if they don’t they’ll get executed!” “So…you’d actually be in charge then.” “Well yes. I mean no. I mean…fuck, why are you fighting me on this!? I just want us to all work together again like we should’ve been doing a long time ago!” Edgar says in an exasperated tone. He’s actually getting upset. You’re not really being a dick on purpose, but you have a lot of reservations about this plan Edgar has, even if he has genuine good intentions. Brenda has been fairly silent for a while, but she suddenly stands up and says to Edgar that she needs to speak to you outside. He says okay, but is obviously troubled by how this is going. Brenda and you leave and after dismissing the soldiers standing outside, you’re standing in an empty corridor. “I think we should join Edgar.” Brenda says. “What? Just like that? You’d be giving up control of your own nation. Don’t you have some concerns?” “Not really. I think you heard me say not too long ago, that I never wanted it. And you heard him, it sounds like Edgar’s done a good job so far and just wants our help.” “And I’m not sure if I want to. I know he claims to have those second generation Eternals under control, but I just don’t trust them. And now he’s saying there’s a whole new batch to deal with.” “I’m sure we can handle it, that’s probably why he wants us to help. Besides, we’d be with others of our kind at least; don’t you wish for that sometimes? To not constantly be alone?” “Maybe my experiences are different, but not particularly. Besides, you’re not alone. You’ve got me.” There is an uncomfortable silence with that statement. The unresolved issue between the pair of you has reared its ugly head again. “I know, but I still have conflicting feelings about you and if we don’t join Edgar he’s going to declare war on us. Can we truly have any sort of meaningful relationship then? Would you become less focused with me on the back of your mind? If we join Edgar, the pressure to constantly run things would be off of us. We would have time to explore the potential for a deeper relationship. Look, I know your feelings on the new Eternals, but I don’t think it’s just that. You’re in charge here at least in the military aspect of things, which quite frankly is the only thing that does matter to you. You don’t want to give that up and I understand, but I think you need to look at the bigger picture here.” > You join Edgar Maybe Brenda’s got a point; maybe you need to let go of your control a bit. Edgar has certainly proven to be a more capable leader than when you last knew him, and he seems to genuinely want you and Brenda to have an equal partnership. You’re still a little skeptical of that, but you’ll see how it goes. There’s also your unresolved situation with Brenda. She has feelings for you and you realize you do have them for her. If there is the potential for something deeper here, maybe it would be better if the pressures of potential war with the Eternal Dominion were eliminated. Plus she wants to join, and you feel as if trusting in her judgment would be a positive step in your relationship. “Okay Brenda. I agree. Let’s join the Eternal Dominion.” You say. Brenda smiles and gives you a hug added with a kiss, which startles you a little. You both very nearly make out in the hallway, but then you remember Edgar is still waiting for you. You and Brenda return to the room where Edgar looks a bit on edge. You decide to let Brenda break the news to him. “Edgar, we’ve talked it over and we accept your offer.” Edgar looks incredibly relieved and leaps out of his seat to shake both of your hands. “Great! That’s great! Whew! For a moment I thought you weren’t going to go for it, but I should’ve known you’d see the wisdom in this! This is going to be the best thing for all of us! You’ll see!” “You realize, there’s going to be a lot of things to sort out Edgar.” You say. “Oh yeah! I know we’ll hammer out the details and we’ll be equals in this. You don’t know what this means to me! The rest of our family united again, nothing can stop us! Not even that traitor Warrick!” “Warrick?” you and Brenda ask in unison. “Yeah, he joined the Felkan Kingdom didn’t you know? He joined a former enemy of the Empire! I guess you two probably wouldn’t know being so far away from it and all. Oh well, doesn’t matter we’ll take him down like with did with Kane! Eh? Remember that?” Edgar says nudging you. “Yeah I remember Edgar.” You reply. Edgar is so happy right now, you think he’s almost about to cry. It’s definitely not a side you’ve ever seen of him before. “Ah, well I wish I could stick around longer to celebrate, but I have to return. Got some things to take care of and prepare before the great merging of our territories! But we’ll be seeing a lot of each other soon enough!” Edgar leaves in good spirits and biding you both goodbye. As you and Brenda see him ride off, you shake your head in almost disbelief after all that’s happened today. “It’s been an overly emotionally day for you today I imagine.” Brenda says. “You’re not joking. I guess I am an emotionless golem compared to the rest of you.” “Oh I wouldn’t say that. You handled everything very well, for a golem.” “Heh. I just hope this is the right decision.” “You still think you and Edgar will clash?” “After today, it’s not really Edgar that I’m concerned about, there’s still all those newer generation of Eternals to deal with. I hope Edgar really does have them under control.” “I’m sure everything will be fine. Odd news about Warrick though, thought he was dead.” “Yeah, that was just one of the many surprises today.” “Well enough about them, I think we’ve got us to discuss.” You and Brenda retire to your quarters at Fort Glory. After an hour or so of talking, you both decide that it’s time to take it to the more physical side of things. The night of passion you spend with Brenda is just one of many you hope in the years to come. Year 53 You and Brenda now oversee the Nalin territory as a married couple. The transition hasn’t been a completely easy one, there was a lot of outright dissent when the announcement that Nalin was going to be annexed by the Eternal Dominion. Many of the citizens saw you and Brenda as their protectors against the ED, and then you went and joined it, and they had no say in the matter. Multiple rebellions had to be put down, Edgar wanted to send in Eternals to take care of the problem, but you and Brenda disagreed with that idea as it would just reinforce the fears of the less rebellious population. You instead resorted to more traditional means using normal Nalin troops, though your soldiers weren’t exactly happy about it as they felt betrayed as well. While things in Nalin eventually settled down, the area feels like it could erupt with another rebellion at any time. You and Brenda haven’t really been able to enjoy your newfound relationship with all the problems cropping up, though you do make the time when you can. In the meantime Edgar has suggested that you and Brenda move into the royal palace and live there instead. He’s wanted you to do that for some time. He’s also been hinting and letting the Eternals go in and reinforce law and order at Nalin once and for all. “We’ve already joined the Eternal Dominion why not leave and live in the palace? It is the capital after all and we are partial rulers.” Brenda asks. “Because there’s still problems here and I’d like to fix them before traipsing off to some cushy palace.” You reply. “You’re just stalling. We’ve done the best we can to get this place to assimilate, and at this point it really would be for the best to let the Eternals come in and maintain the order now. We’ve moved beyond this, and we deserve spending some downtime together. Besides, I would’ve at least thought you’d want to talk with Edgar about his battle plans to invade the Felkan Kingdom. Best way you can do that is to be at the palace.” “Because…ah shit. You’re right. I am stalling. It’s still hard to let go of personally managing this place I suppose. There’s also the fact that I still don’t like the idea of having to deal with those second gen Eternals on a daily basis.” “Oh come on, you’ve spoken with some of them when we visited the palace before. They all seem pretty respectful.” Brenda says. “Yeah, I suppose, I dunno…okay let’s move to the palace. I suppose we do deserve the break of living on the edge of dirty peasants possibly storming the gates.” Brenda moves closer and hugs you in a loving way and kisses you. Despite all the shit you’ve had to deal with concerning Nalin, you’ve never felt happier than you have with Brenda. It is still weird to you that you can even feel this way. You never thought it was possible to feel so comfortable with another person on this sort of level, not even with another Eternal. Brenda has a way about her that manages to make you feel like everything is going to be okay. Safe even. You and Brenda send word to Edgar that you’re both making your preparations to move and he sends a letter back stating how pleased he is and will send one of his personal royal carriages to come pick you. You accept, what the hell, why not ride in needless luxury? You both pack what you can and intend on sending for the rest of your things later. The pair of you board the carriage when it arrives and settle in for a long ride. “See, told you the new Eternals respect us, you saw how polite our drivers are.” Brenda says. “Well these ones seem to be anyway. But I have been thinking more about it and I’m starting to accept the idea of making this change. I’ve been thinking of some ideas about Edgar’s plans for the Felkan Kingdom invasion.” “I figured you’d see a bright side to it.” “Yeah, he’s going to need my direct help on that plan. I’m just glad I managed to talk him out of invading Rask. That would’ve been a disaster.” You excitedly tell Brenda what you plan to tell Edgar for the Felkan Kingdom invasion, and she listens intently, but also gives her own input on some things. You take some of her ideas into consideration and generally enjoy this time you have. Later the pair of you begin to drift off together, not exactly the easiest thing to do in a carriage, but you’ve always been a light sleeper any way. Times passes and then suddenly… “SHIT! ATTACK!” you hear one of the Eternal drivers shout followed by the sound of a pistol shot. You instantly wake up and Brenda does likewise. You look out the window on your side and see several people armed with bows firing at the carriage. You then hear a loud crash that sounds like it came from in front of you, then the carriage screeches to a halt. The sounds of dying whinnies of horses soon follow. You grab your own flintlock and fire off a shot from inside the carriage; Brenda meanwhile loads up her bow and fires off arrows from her side. You can hear the two Eternal drivers jumping off and yelling about getting to cover and closing the gap on these attackers. That’s exactly what you had in mind; you never did get the hang of these gunpowder weapons. You step out of the carriage and head for the nearest tree to get some cover. You look over at the other two Eternals ducked behind a large rock and motion them to run around the other way to help Brenda, They seem to understand. In the meantime you manage to dodge arrows by ducking tree to tree and when you finally close the gap, you cleave one of your attackers’ heads clean off. The rest of them draw their own swords and axes to attack, but in close combat it’s no contest. You dispatch all of them with ease. They don’t appear to be the unwashed rabble you’ve been pissing off lately, they’re too well armed and armored. You doubt if they’re simple bandits either. These are probably mercenaries, but you don’t have time to figure out right now who hired them, you turn around to go help Brenda. By the time you get to the half destroyed carriage again, you don’t hear anymore sounds of battle. When you see the Brenda’s side of the carriage has been opened and some blood stain you begin to worry. Running over to the other side, you see several bodies of the attackers and then a few feet away, you see Brenda lying face down on the ground. Your heart sinks. You run over to her and turn her over and your worst fears are confirmed, her eyes show no signs of life. Your eyes begin to water and a mixture of rage and sorrow causes you to cry out. As you hold her body you don’t see any arrow or sword wounds, you do notice two gunshots to her chest though… Upon the realization of who killed your beloved Brenda, you don’t even get to face the treacherous dogs. The two Eternal drivers blast you from afar, one shot to your back and one to your head, killing you instantly. Your deaths are blamed on an ambush by some of the disgruntled population of Nalin. To his credit, Edgar doesn’t believe the story and has the two Eternals executed for suspicion and incompetence. It’s of minor consequence though, the real conspirators of this assassination remain uncaught and you’re still dead.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You and Brenda might have a bit more on your mind now, but this is much more important. “Brenda, I know emotions are running high right now, but I think we need to go meet Edgar. We can talk more about this later.” You say. “Yes. Yes, of course. We need to get back to business. I’ll be okay. This was silly anyway. Need to focus.” Brenda says standing back up and wiping her eyes. You and Brenda ride off to Fort Glory. The ride there is done with minimal talking, but that’s sort of to be expected. The thing is you never seriously thought about Brenda in that way until she just brought it up today. Sure you always knew you had that bond from both of you being Eternals and the fact that you’ve served together for so long. You may have even had the occasional sexual thought about her, but like you said to her, you always figured she would’ve carried a torch for Roldan. You would’ve just been a substitute at best. Now you’re having scenarios in your head about the two of you being together in a closer way and you really shouldn’t be thinking about that at this moment. Maybe she’s right in a way maybe if you did have something together it would cause you to lose your edge. It’s certainly clouding your judgment right now and you’re not even together. When you get to Fort Glory you’re told that Edgar is waiting for you in your meeting room. When you ask how he seems, the soldiers say he’s been stand offish, but not overly hostile. About what you expected. When you and Brenda reach the meeting room, you ask her if she’s ready, and she remarks that she is. The door opens and you both step in and see Edgar sitting in a chair with a big grin on his face. He stands up and addresses the both of you. “Well it’s about time! I’ve missed the both of you! Come here!” he says jovially with his arms out walking towards you. “Uh… yeah, hey Edgar. Good to see you too.” Brenda says when he gives her a big hug. Looks like it’s going to be a day of surprises… Edgar stops hugging Brenda and then looks at you. You stand a little back from him as you don’t want to be hugged, but Edgar doesn’t try it. “Oh don’t worry, I know you’re the serious minded Bane of Rask! Bane of Nalin too now I hear! Heh, but how are you?” “I’m fine Edgar.” You say. “Good, good. I just have to say it’s really great seeing the both of you again! I mean you two are like my brother and sister! No, you ARE my brother and sister!” The last time you heard this sort of sibling talk before was from Kane and if you weren’t wary before, you certainly are now. “Edgar, I’m glad you seem to be in a good mood and all, but I sent envoys to contact you several times in the past and none of them ever returned. We always assumed you had them killed and were angry at us.” Brenda says. “You did? When was the last one?” “Mmm, last one was about six years ago I believe. After that, I saw no need to waste lives.” “Aw! You should’ve kept sending them! I don’t know if you’re aware of just how much anarchy and infighting I’ve had to put up with! Those envoys probably got killed by the new Eternals and nobody ever told me about it! Hell, they might’ve even gotten killed by run of the mill bandits, it was pretty lawless back in the early days! Shit, if I had known you guys weren’t pissed at ME, I would’ve made this trek sooner!” “Wait, so you weren’t mad at us?” “Mad at you guys? What the hell for?! Oh you mean seceding from the Empire? Well I have to say I was more shocked than angry about that. I mean YOU especially.” Edgar says pointing at you. “But in time I heard about what you two were doing down here and I respected what the pair of you were attempting to do.” You and Brenda look at each other, wondering what Edgar THINKS you both were trying to do. “Oh? And what was that exactly?” Brenda asks. “You saw that the Empire was a lost cause, but you were trying to uphold a portion of it, though this patch of territory. I’ve heard about your great success in keeping order and how you’ve even added more land to your nation. Only an Eternal could do something like that and that’s why both of you were successful!” Edgar isn’t far off, at least from your perspective. Though he probably has a more idealistic vision of it than the reality, which was this; you didn’t know where else to go and over time Nalin was transformed into a “mini Empire” because you didn’t know any other way. Brenda’s reasons are probably based on simple emotional attachment. “Well, we were doing the best we could under the circumstances, but you forged a whole new nation, so you’ve been successful too Edgar.” Brenda says. “Ah yes, but it wasn’t easy! There were many times I almost wanted to give up and come join you two! But I knew I couldn’t do that, I had a vision that I had to make work! A nation run by Eternals and I’m proud to say it’s all finally coming together and I think it’s finally time for us, to reunite like we were meant to!” You and Brenda look at each other again. “Edgar, I don’t think it’s quite as simple as all that. We’re going to have to discuss this, all of it.” Brenda remarks and the three of you sit down to do just that. Edgar starts off by saying that while he respects what you’ve done, he doesn’t think that you’re going about things the right way and that you’re still thinking like “The Empire” and clinging to the old way of doing things. He points out that within his new regime he’s pushed for advances in weapon technology like the Felkan Kingdom has and managed to even “acquire” such gunpowder based weapons. He’s also managed to get a few mages to help in getting the Eternal process started again. When you bring up your experience with the new Eternals, Edgar reassures you that they don’t have the discipline issues at all anymore. He says he’s manages to instill the pride of being an Eternal into them and they’ve shaped up enough to no longer behave like the bloodthirsty children you knew them to be. He also says the next generation of Eternals are almost ready to prove their worth now as well and says he has made sure that their training was stricter and more in line with how you were trained. “Don’t you see I’m creating a new nation like the Empire, but how it should’ve been run! A nation run by us Eternals! Only we are able to efficiently run things. The lessers can either wisely listen to us, or be crushed underfoot.” “That sounds very nice Edgar, but what is our place in this new nation?” you ask. “Well, you’d be helping of course! I mean we would be ruling as…uh…a council! Yes! A council of three! The Eternal Council!” “A council huh? Don’t you think that might ruin your standing with the new eternals who you’ve probably conditioned to listen to a single strong leader?” you ask. “And they’ll still listen to me, because if they don’t they’ll get executed!” “So…you’d actually be in charge then.” “Well yes. I mean no. I mean…fuck, why are you fighting me on this!? I just want us to all work together again like we should’ve been doing a long time ago!” Edgar says in an exasperated tone. He’s actually getting upset. You’re not really being a dick on purpose, but you have a lot of reservations about this plan Edgar has, even if he has genuine good intentions. Brenda has been fairly silent for a while, but she suddenly stands up and says to Edgar that she needs to speak to you outside. He says okay, but is obviously troubled by how this is going. Brenda and you leave and after dismissing the soldiers standing outside, you’re standing in an empty corridor. “I think we should join Edgar.” Brenda says. “What? Just like that? You’d be giving up control of your own nation. Don’t you have some concerns?” “Not really. I think you heard me say not too long ago, that I never wanted it. And you heard him, it sounds like Edgar’s done a good job so far and just wants our help.” “And I’m not sure if I want to. I know he claims to have those second generation Eternals under control, but I just don’t trust them. And now he’s saying there’s a whole new batch to deal with.” “I’m sure we can handle it, that’s probably why he wants us to help. Besides, we’d be with others of our kind at least; don’t you wish for that sometimes? To not constantly be alone?” “Maybe my experiences are different, but not particularly. Besides, you’re not alone. You’ve got me.” There is an uncomfortable silence with that statement. The unresolved issue between the pair of you has reared its ugly head again. “I know, but I still have conflicting feelings about you and if we don’t join Edgar he’s going to declare war on us. Can we truly have any sort of meaningful relationship then? Would you become less focused with me on the back of your mind? If we join Edgar, the pressure to constantly run things would be off of us. We would have time to explore the potential for a deeper relationship. Look, I know your feelings on the new Eternals, but I don’t think it’s just that. You’re in charge here at least in the military aspect of things, which quite frankly is the only thing that does matter to you. You don’t want to give that up and I understand, but I think you need to look at the bigger picture here.” > You don't join Edgar Brenda’s argument that you don’t want to give up a lot of your autonomy is correct in many ways. Perhaps you are a little stuck in the past as well. You still remember having to save Edgar’s life on more than one occasion. The idea of him telling you what to do is something that just doesn’t sit right with you, even if you have put away your differences with him a long time ago. His council idea, while a valiant attempt is doomed to failure. Ultimately there can only be one real leader and while you don’t mind following Brenda, you are not going to follow Edgar. The moment you disagree with him on something major it’s going to get ugly again. “Brenda I understand that you’re officially in charge of Nalin so ultimately it is your decision, but call it pride or even a hunch, but I feel that joining with Edgar would only lead to bad things occurring. What we control now is stable and with minimal chaos, maybe it isn’t the Empire or even the Eternal Dominion, but it is ours. If Edgar declares war on us for not joining, then so be it. At least that tells us where we always stood with him in the first place. And as for us, well if there is anything at all between us, then that relationship won’t be effected whether we’re at war with Edgar or not, so you shouldn’t even let that cloud your judgment on this matter.” “And what if I decided that we should join with the Eternal Dominion? Would you leave?” Brenda asks. “Honestly I don’t know what I’d do…(sigh) I suppose I’d support your decision even though I didn’t agree with it. Where that would leave us as far as a relationship is concerned, well as I said before, if there is anything genuine and meant to be there, then it’ll survive it. Wouldn’t change my feelings for you.” Brenda smiles at your remark. The first you’ve seen her do so all day. She then approaches and kisses you and you embrace her. You then both remember you’ve got Edgar waiting for an answer. You and Brenda return to the room where Edgar looks a bit on edge. You decide to let Brenda break the news to him. “Edgar, I’m sorry, but we both feel that Nalin should remain independent of the Eternal Dominion at this time.” “But…but you’ve seen everything I’ve done! I’ve done all this for us! Eternals! Don’t you see that?!” Edgar says in an aspirated tone. “We…know you did and we appreciate it, but I think our path is different from yours.” Brenda says and then looks at you. Edgar notices this and tries a different tactic. “Oh wait. You two are together now? Well that’s great! I mean I wasn’t aware of it, but that’s great! You weren’t worried I was going to try anything did you? Ha ha, I’ve got tons of concubines! I wouldn’t dream of coming between you two! Heh, so if that was your only concern, you can join me and…” “No Edgar, it’s not that. We’re just happy with the way things are, but thank you all the same.” Brenda says. And here it comes. Edgar’s face changes to red and he begins breathing heavier. “HAPPY? How the fuck can you two be so damn happy living in such mediocrity?! You’re fucking Eternals! We’re supposed to be ruling the fucking world! You two are no better than that traitor Warrick!” “Warrick?” you and Brenda ask in unison. “Yeah, he joined the Felkan Kingdom didn’t you know? He joined a former enemy of the Empire! Of course you two probably haven’t been keeping up on events since you’ve been playing grab ass with each other for the past fifteen years! By the Emperor’s dead cock, you didn’t wait long for Roldan to be dead did you?” This remark causes Brenda’s calm demeanor to shift entirely and she stands up and draws her weapon. “You say one more fucking thing about my dead husband, and I’ll send you back to the Eternal Dominion in fucking pieces!” Edgar draws his own weapon, but was a little surprised by her response. It’s all you can do to hold Brenda back. “Alright, I think…” you start to say before Edgar cuts you off. “And you! What the fuck happened to you? You were supposed to be the BEST of us! You were the one that was the leader! Now look at you! You’re following Brenda because she’s spread her legs for you? Where the hell are your balls? You know when we were young I disliked you a lot, but I always respected you. After our escape from Fort Defiance I liked you as well as respected you. Now? I can’t say I feel either.” “Okay Edgar…” “Out of all of us YOU were the one that was supposed to prevent the Empire from falling! What did you do? You ran away! You know what I did? I stayed until the bitter end picking up the pieces! I saw the fucking capital in flames! I tried so hard to prevent it…I tried…and you didn’t help me, (sob) none of you did…” At this point Edgar collapses back in his seat sobbing and going on about how he failed. His motivations for everything he’s done are a little clearer now. Even after the verbal abuse he laid down on Brenda, she sees now he probably didn’t mean any of it. After all these years, Edgar is still like a teenager trying to prove himself by over compensating. You actually feel sorry for him. You can only imagine the internal torment he’s been going through all these years since the Empire fell. Justifications, rationalizations, outright blocking out reality, he’s probably done it all. You sit down next to Edgar and pat him on the back. “Edgar. There was nothing any of us could’ve done. It was a doomed mission to begin with. You did your best and that’s all anyone could’ve done. Even an Eternal.” Edgar tries to compose himself while you give your pep talk. “You’ve accomplished much and you should be proud of your achievements on their own merits, not as compensation for perceived failings. This is your path and your destiny. Brenda and I, we have our own path.” “Okay…okay…” Edgar sniffles. Before he leaves he apologizes to Brenda and says he has no intention on invading Nalin, but he still hopes that one day you’ll reconsider in joining him “It’s possible. Perhaps one day our paths will reunite.” You answer. “I hope that day will be soon, goodbye my Eternal brother.” Has says extending his hand. “Goodbye Edgar.” You reply and shake his hand. After Edgar leaves the fort you sit down and run your hands over your face and taking a deep breath from all the emotional baggage you had to put up with today. “It’s been an overly emotionally day for you today I imagine.” Brenda says. “You’re not joking. I guess I am an emotionless golem compared to the rest of you.” “Oh I wouldn’t say that. You handled everything very well, for a golem.” “Heh. Well anyway that’s one less thing to worry about.” “You don’t think we shouldn’t still be concerned about him? I mean I know he said he wouldn’t invade, but there’s always the possibility of a sneak attack.” “Edgar’s a lot of things, but he not a backstabber. At least he wouldn’t be for us. If he ever does decide to do it, I promise you, it’ll be announced in a very dramatic fashion weeks in advance.” “Yes, I suppose you’re right. Odd news about Warrick though, thought he was dead.” “Yeah, that was just one of the many surprises today. But I guess that was his path and how he dealt with the fall. It’s all in the past now anyway, I’m not going to judge him.” “Well enough about them, I think we’ve got us to discuss.” You and Brenda retire to your quarters at Fort Glory. After an hour or so of talking, you both decide that it’s time to take it to the more physical side of things. The night of passion you spend with Brenda is just one of many in the years to come. > Year 55 You and Brenda now rule the nation of Nalin as a married couple. There has been some issue on what your official titles are now. The simplest choices would be emperor and empress or king and queen. Eventually Brenda settled for imperatrix, which would officially make you imperator, though you still go by general for the most part. In any case life has been good. You don’t even mind that things have been slow since you conquered all those tribals in the east. You’ve been taking a slightly more active role in running the nation from an administrative point of view, but sometimes you still long for the day of a good battle. When that day comes you’ve also tried to keep up on the changing times of changing warfare. While the days of close combat are far from over, if the Eternal Dominion is starting to slowly incorporate firearms into their ranks, then you better do likewise if only to maintain a show of strength. The ED isn’t hostile though and you maintain a good trading relationship with them. Edgar still hopes you’re going to join him one day, especially since you know he’s got designs on going to war with the Felkan Kingdom (You gave him some friendly advice to not bother with invading Rask). He’d probably like you to at least be involved in a joint military operation with him, but you think he’s over extending himself and the Felkan Kingdom is no pushover. It’s not exactly like you’re near the Felkan Kingdom as far as location is concerned either. All you’d be doing is having soldiers die in a war that doesn’t even directly benefit your nation. That being said, Nalin hasn’t sided with the Felkan Kingdom either in any way. Again, due to your location, you’ve had minimal contact with them. Brenda thought about allying with them in the past, but that was never seriously considered (Good thing too). Somehow though you imagine you’re going to get dragged into this saber rattling between the Eternal Dominion and the Felkan Kingdom. Funny how that feeling turns out to be true. Late one night you and Brenda are awakened from your sleep. Some envoy from the Felkan Kingdom has sudden decided to show up in the middle of the night. Demanding to see the pair of you and claiming it’s very urgent. You and Brenda don’t get much sleep as it is, so you’re inclined to tell your soldiers to just shoot him and go back to bed, but you’ve got a good idea of who it is. “You really think it’s him?” Brenda ask. “You really think it isn’t? It was only a matter of time. Ugh, I guess we better get this over with.” You shout at the guard behind the door to hold the envoy in the meeting room and keep a close eye on him until you and Brenda get there. After grumbling and getting dress you and Brenda head to the meeting room where you see a familiar face. He’s missing an eye, all of his hair and his face has a few more winkles and scars on it now, but you still recognize him. “Warrick, you better have a damn good reason for waking us up in the middle of the night.” You say. “…you aren’t surprised it’s me?” “Not really, I actually thought you’d show up sooner, and how the hell did you manage to join the Felkan Kingdom anyway?” “It’s a long story…but well anyway, I’m glad to see you both. I was surprised to hear about your marriage. Didn’t think that…” “Warrick, I’m tired as well. It’s not easy running a nation and I’ve been doing it even longer than my husband has, so get to the damn point of the visit or let this wait until tomorrow.” Brenda demands rubbing one of her eyes. Warrick looks a little hurt by your remarks, but he gets on with it. “Very well, to business. The Felkan Kingdom wants an alliance with you.” “Yeah sort of figured that. Anything else?” you ask. “Erm, no, but…” “Okay then, the answer is no. We can talk more about old times tomorrow, if you want. Good night.” Brenda says starting to turn around to go back to bed. “Hey wait! No? Just like that?! You don’t even want to consider the benefits?” Warrick asks. “What benefits? If we ally with the Felkan Kingdom, all it’s going to do is piss off the Eternal Dominion who we have a good relationship with diplomatically and tradewise. What is the Felkan Kingdom going to offer?” Brenda replies. “How the fact that we’re more likely to leave you alone after the war with the Eternal Dominion is over?” “Warrick…Warrick…you should know threats aren’t going to sway us.” You remark. “What?! NO! I meant, argh look. What I’m saying is if the unfortunate should happen and the Eternal Dominion wins don’t you think that they’ll try to invade you next?” “I suppose it’s possible yes.” “Whereas if the Felkan Kingdom wins, we have no intention on even expanding our borders.” “Probably true, but that still doesn’t help us during the war. A war that is really between you and the ED.” “I can’t believe I’m trying to convince YOU of all people to go to war. I would’ve thought you would’ve jumped at this chance!” Warrick says in a raised tone. “Things change Warrick, and just because I’m not jumping through your hoops doesn’t mean I’ve lost a taste for battle. But I’m thinking on a grander scale now. Going to war with the Eternal Dominion doesn’t do us or Nalin any good. It’s just going to result in dead soldiers at best. We’ve found that our continued expansion eastward is much better in building up the country. Maximum gain with minimum losses.” You say. Warrick paces a bit and sputters. He obviously thought this was going to go better. “So that’s it then huh? You just take Edgar’s side over mine. I thought you didn’t like him anyway.” “Warrick, it’s not about taking sides. If you haven’t noticed we’re not exactly allied with the ED either. We trade with them and are on friendly terms, but that’s out of convenience more than anything. Trust me, Edgar’s been trying to get us to join for years. I don’t know what you’re even worried about, the Eternal Dominion is formidable I’m sure, but the Felkan Kingdom survived a war with the Empire. I’m guessing you should be able to handle the ED.” “I don’t know if we can.” He calmly states. There’s a moment of silence where you weren’t expecting him to say such a thing so blatantly like that. “Look, I didn’t want to say anything. The Felkan Kingdom is what I serve now and I serve it to the best of my abilities as I did the Empire. To do anything less would be a failure as an Eternal on my part.” “But?” “But I see the weaknesses that we have and I can’t ignore them. It’s not public knowledge to anyone outside the kingdom, but we’re also suffering a large gnoll invasion from the west. It caught us completely by surprise. The Felkan Kingdom is a mighty nation, but right now it’s straining its resources just to stay alive. A war with the ED…and we all know it’s coming, could break us. The funny thing is I feel like I’m in the Empire all over again. You know during the bad times.” “I think they were ALL bad times Warrick. We just made the best of them.” Brenda says. “Perhaps. (sigh) I guess I can’t convince you ally with us, I mean you’ve got a good thing going on here and you shouldn’t wreck it. I’m glad. Glad that some of us are doing well. But couldn’t you at least break off your trade routes? I mean that would at least cause Edgar’s attention to be diverted. He might suspect you’re up to something and not attack the Felkan Kingdom. At least not right away. It might be enough time for us to put up a better defense.” “Yeah and he might also attack us instead.” Brenda remarks. “I don’t think he will, because then he has to divert his own soldiers and resources and then he’ll be worried that we will attack. He can’t fight a two front war, even Edgar’s smart enough not to risk that. And that’s if he dares fighting you in the first place.” “That’s a big if, there Warrick.” You say. You and Brenda tell Warrick you’ll both discuss this in a little more detail outside. He says he understands and will await your decision. You and Brenda don’t have too much to talk about really, since it’s basically coming down to helping out a former comrade in arms and starting a possible war with another one or avoiding the situation entirely. Brenda is for staying neutral; oddly you’re actually of two minds of this. > You stay neutral As much as you might like to help Warrick out, you just really aren’t in a position to do so on any meaningful level. Breaking your trade routes with the Eternal Dominion is just foolish. You tell Brenda you’ll break the news this time. You both enter the room where Warrick awaits your answer. “Sorry Warrick, while we do understand your troubles, we can’t help you. What you’re asking for is too much and we see no benefit for us or Nalin in general.” Warrick’s face doesn’t drop and he doesn’t get any angrier, All in all, he takes your response a lot better than Edgar did. “Very well. I shall tell my superiors that you are not interested in any sort of alliance with us. I hope that one day this may change. I suppose I will also take my leave now, sorry to have bothered the both of you, but it was still good to see you again.” He says and leaves immediately. You and Brenda remark on he was probably more disappointed than he let on, but what’s done is done and you’ve all made your choices now. The pair of you go back to bed and try to get some sleep. Year 56 “We’ve got to do something about this epidemic. If this keeps up we’re not going to have a population left to rule over!” Brenda says. “Well so far the problem has hit the eastern territory of Nalin yet. We’ve scoured the land for healers, medics and a few hedge wizards and they’re doing all they can, but this thing is really bad in a few of the towns. I’ve quarantined all of the major areas where this plague is taking place, but understandably a lot the soldiers aren’t exactly keen on their duties there mainly because they don’t want to get sick either. The only ones who aren’t kicking up much of a fuss about it are soldiers with families in those towns.” You reply. “(Sigh) Shit. I’ve talked to all of the advisors and nobody has a clue where, who and why this thing might’ve started. You got any ideas?” “Unfortunately the only one I can think of just a hunch, and I’d rather not believe it. I think Warrick, or at least the Felkan Kingdom had something to do with it. For all we know they could’ve had saboteurs in here for years planning this.” “If it was them, I hope Edgar rips them a new asshole now that he’s at war with them.” “Be that as it may, I’m still hoping that wasn’t the case, not because I don’t want to believe a former friend could do this to us, but more because it doesn’t reflect well on my duties to protect the nation. I mean if the Felkan Kingdom had saboteurs here, how was it that I didn’t see it until now?” “You can’t start doubting yourself, we need to focus on the problem at hand first.” “You’re right of course. Well as I see it, if we really want to stop the plague, we need to kill everyone in the quarantined areas, then cleanse everything with fire.” “Wait, hold on. There’s no other way? Can’t we just have more medics and healers transferred to those places?” “I don’t see what good that would do. From the reports a lot of these people are practically dead or dying as it is. It doesn’t do any good for them to linger and possibly get others sick. Better to just kill them now and save the medics to observe the places that only have a few sick people.” “You do realize that something like this is not going to be popular right? I mean are the soldiers even going to be willing to do such a thing?” “Well we try pretty hard to keep up the old ways of Empire indoctrination, I don’t think we should have major problems, though I suppose those with families might protest (Sigh) I guess we’ll have to take care of them as well.” “This isn’t sounding like a great idea. Maybe we should just keep the quarantine and let them all slowly die off. We could always say we’re looking for a cure, and whether one comes or not, the problem will take care of itself.” Brenda suggests. “The problem with that plan is we’re diverting soldiers from more important duties and continuing to risk lives that can still be useful to Nalin.” You say. You and Brenda weigh the pros and cons of your limited choices. > You kill everyone in the quarantine Ultimately, when in doubt killing everyone has worked for you on several occasions in the past, no reason to change tactic now. Brenda really doesn’t think this is such a good idea, but you convince her that if there is going to be problems you might as well get them over with quickly. First thing you do is get every remaining “old guard” officer that’s still serving since the days of the Empire and have them put in charge of this operation. You know they won’t even question this command coming from you. Then you tell them to go through their personnel rosters to see who is going to be up for this grim task. You personally suggest to include all of those elves you made into orphans years ago. While they may all be good indoctrinated soldiers now, you think they wouldn’t hesitate at a chance to kill some humans and would be good candidates for this job. Besides, elves seem to be more resistant to the plague anyway. Three entire towns are put to the sword, gun and torch until there is nothing left, but burned corpses and hollowed out buildings. In keeping with non-humans being seemingly less affected by the plague, you have kobolds remove the bodies and clean out what they can. They’re more than happy to do this as they get the chance to loot some stuff for their own impoverished reservation you’ve set aside for them. This action causes an outcry, which hasn’t been seen in a long time. Not even when conscription was implemented were things this bad. As predicted you have to execute several soldiers who took up arms against you during the cleansing. Many Nalin citizens aren’t happy with the fact that you’ve implemented several non-humans in helping with this massacre as well. Indeed some begin calling you their inhuman “Eternal overlords.” As far as the plague goes, you did successfully wipe it out from being an ongoing danger. Medics, healers and the like are able to focus their attentions on the places where it’s less of a problem and eventually it is gone completely. The repercussions of this action are that you now have a split nation. Eastern Nalin is still prosperous as the plague barely even reached the area. You also still have all of your supporters mainly from there who appreciate the fact that you stopped the plague from spreading. Western Nalin however is a mess and pockets of lawlessness begin to appear. You naturally take steps in trying to curb this problem by being more oppressive… Year 60 “You want to move the capital?” “I don’t see why not. It’s obvious that eastern Nalin is where the prosperity is, I don’t see why us as rulers shouldn’t be living there instead.” Brenda remarks. “I do. By having the seat of power here, we still maintain control over this area and are displaying a show of dominance. If we go running to the east, it looks like we’re effectively abandoning the area and that’s going to make the less desirable elements here even more motivated to pursue whatever lawlessness they want. We need to maintain control.” “Well what if I don’t? Ever since the plague hit, it’s been a downward spiral for western Nalin. We’ve tried and tried to get it back to what it once was, but throwing soldiers at the problem is just a bandage. It didn’t help that you had soldiers shaking down people looking for other possible Felkan Kingdom saboteurs.” “I had to be sure to make sure something like the plague didn’t happen again!” “Look, I know you don’t like losing control of anything and we’ve had arguments about how the plague was handled to begin with, but we are in a spot now that we need to make a serious change in things if we want to avoid getting overthrown by mobs and our heads on pikes in the future.” “Oh come on, like that’s going to happen.” “I said in the future, not immediately. And don’t be so sure of yourself, you’re not twenty anymore you know.” “I know that!” “Do you? Because sometime I wonder. I love you and you’re still a great warrior and you’re probably still better than most men half your age, but you can’t go around thinking you’re invincible anymore. There are guns now you know, someone could just assassinate you from a few feet away and not even engage you in combat. The days of the Empire are over, you have to realize that.” “I know that too, Brenda.” “And that’s why you’re frustrating to deal with sometimes, because you DO know it, yet sometimes you completely lapse into the mindset of the good old days.” “So what the hell are you proposing? That we just relinquish complete control of the western Emp…Nalin? That we run and hide to the east, because it’s easier?” “Let me put this into terms you can understand. Eastern Nalin is healthy, thriving even. Western Nalin is very sick and slowly dying. It can’t be cured, so what’s the best way to deal with it? Cut it off and focus on the more important area that is still of use.” Brenda’s analogy to your idea of how you handled the plague makes sense even if you don’t want to admit it. Brenda’s right about a lot of things, you aren’t young anymore. You haven’t been for a long time and even though you aren’t even on the frontlines of any fighting anymore you find yourself getting tired and weary of the constant conflict that Nalin has been suffering from the past few years. You’ve tried to halt the ravages of time to the best of your abilities, but ultimately even as an Eternal, you’re not immune to such things. You begin to wonder if the past few years were more about you wanting to relive your “youth” a bit rather than seeking out possible traitors, saboteurs, and other dissidents. You could insist on staying and Brenda would probably go along grudgingly, but she’s also right. You’re just going to become even more hated by the citizens in this area and it only takes one dumb ass peasant with a with a gun or even a bomb, to kill you. Maybe at one point you wouldn’t have even cared if that had happened, but you’ve had a long and enjoyable life with Brenda for several years now. A relationship you never even dreamed of before it happened. You see now that want to live as long as possible with her as your older years advance, because ultimately she is the only other one you have in your life and the only other one that is going to understand you. “Okay Brenda. Let’s cut off the sick limb.” You say. Brenda is happy you see reason and her plan is set in motion. Over the next few months, the Nalin government is relocated to one of the bigger central towns in the eastern territory, Adlen. The town soon swells to become a city with the influx of people. Military is pulled out of the west next. A few soldiers desert and don’t follow in this exodus, but you just let it go. If they don’t want to be here, then it’s better off that they aren’t. Most merchants and businesses are the next to follow. After these major transfers, western Nalin is declared no longer under protection and an independent territory. This causes some debate on if eastern Nalin is still “Nalin” since technically it was never part of the territory originally. After some discussion eastern Nalin is renamed the nation Naleen. Most of the eastern citizens have oddly developed an accent in which they’ve been pronouncing “Nalin” like that anyway for years. As for Nalin, the people that still dwell there are either happy about it or too poor to move. You figure the biggest winners will be the kobolds, at least until the Eternal Dominion sends in forces to take the land, assuming they have the time and manpower. You’ve heard they’re doing well against the Felkan Kingdom, but things could always change. In any event none of it is your concern anymore. Still, you hope that this really is the last time you have to make a big move like this again, you don’t know if you want to bother with a third time. > Year 70 It’s a calm night and you stand outside on the balcony of your palace and look down at the city of Adlen. Brenda comes out to join you. “It’s good when everything is going well isn’t it?” Brenda asks. “It’s definitely going better for us now. Certainly going better than it is for Prime Eternal Edgar too.” “Always thought that was a ridiculous title. I don’t understand how he’s at a stalemate with the Felkan Kingdom, he was doing so well against them for the longest time.” “I figured he’s eventually over extend himself, though he’s also had a few personal set backs like several assassination attempts for one. From his last letter he doesn’t sound like he’s doing too well healthwise. He says the last two times he’s been stabbed, the assassin’s knife was coated with a heavy duty poison. The bolt that went into his back was too. If he wasn’t an Eternal he’d probably be dead by now.” “Well that’s better than Warrick.” “Yeah, but from that letter Edgar sent, he said Warrick died at the battle of Yaquan six years ago. Regardless of his loyalties, he died like how an Eternal is supposed to die. Edgar will be lucky if he dies from a successful assassination, because it’s sounding like the poison build up in his system might get him first. He’s sick and weak. It’s a shame really, I remember him being so hale and hearty at one time. If I were him I’d probably give up the ruling nonsense, join his soldiers in the next battle and die in one last blaze of glory.” “Is that how you wish to die? You want to go out in one last blaze of glory?” Brenda asks. “Eh, sometimes I still think about it, but not really seriously. I guess I’ve finally grown past it.” You laugh. “Didn’t think that would happen actually.” “Well, if Naleen starts suffering an unstoppable rebellion I guess I still got a shot at it. I’ll meet the unwashed mobs with sword in hand.” “Heh, well if that happens I guess I’ll join you, because I’m too old to be moving the capital again.” You both smile and hold each other side by side still looking out at the city. Yes, life is good when things are running well. Year 75 You, Brenda and your elite guards step into Edgar’s palace, and it’s every bit as impressive as you thought it would be. Lots of statues, symbols of war, etc. Certainly a lot of bigger than your humble palace, but then Edgar always was one for overcompensation. You all are taken through the palace to see Edgar, along the way you and Brenda continue to take in some of the sights. “Isn’t weird that all those years we served the Empire that this the first time we’ve ever stepped foot into this place?” Brenda says. “Yeah, Edgar must’ve spent a fortune rebuilding it.” “Did he ever actually meet the emperor?” “No he never did. He said he assumed that he either fled or burned up in the fire, by the time he got to the palace. For all we know, maybe there never was an emperor.” “Just one of life’s mysteries I guess.” Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. You wonder if this is “Eva” that he’s referred to a couple times in his letters. She’s not exactly his queen since she’s human, but you know she is definitely his companion. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. “Oh so you two decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. “And who the hell are you exactly?” you ask. “Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true Eternal who served with honor!” “Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say. “Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” At this point your guards take up a defensive stance and Rissok’s do likewise. “Well if you’re going to make a move, better do it quick.” You say. “Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you and Brenda may enter at any time, but your own guards must stay outside. Before you do, Brenda addresses the woman. “We apologize, we did not mean to cause you distress. Are you Lady Eva by any chance?” “(sniff) Yes. Yes I am.” “Edgar’s spoken highly of you in his letters.” Brenda says which causes a slight smile on her face. “I know that he’s better than me in everyway being an Eternal, yet he shows such compassion and sweetness by making me, a non-eternal, his only companion. I don’t know what I ever did to deserve such an honor, but I will always be grateful for it.” Brenda asks her if she wants to come in too, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you both alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you both enter the bedroom. When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. “Edgar?” you ask just to make sure. “(wheeze) ah…you both came…I knew you would. (cough cough) There isn’t much time…I trust you’ve read my letter?” “Yes.” “Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” “Don’t you have a successor?” “I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but I imagine Brenda has and that’s we can’t have children.” You look at Brenda and she nods and mentions she learned that with Roldan when they were together. It’s never been a topic you’ve brought up, but you always had your suspicions. Edgar continues his speech. “We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do. Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the only two I think could be proper successors…” You already know where Edgar is going with this. “Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged us out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to us! We aren’t even ED citizens!” “This is rather unrealistic Edgar.” Brenda adds. “That doesn’t matter! You’re still Eternals! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you two? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to. Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) but I can’t go on any longer. The only people who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier are you two. I’m asking not just as a dying man or friend …but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” You and Brenda look at each other and you both know your answer. Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power. And you and Brenda have your own nation, your own lives, and you’ve told Edgar this before, but it’s time to tell him one last time. “Edgar, we’re not accepting this position. First of all it’s not realistic despite what you want to believe and I think deep down you know that. Second of all, these are your final moments Edgar. Don’t worry about what you accomplished and if it’ll last. Just be proud of it now and spend your last moments with your wife or whatever you consider her. That’s who you need to be concerned about.” Edgar hacks and coughs up blood and spits it into a nearby bucket and struggles to breathe, but manages to answer you. “Very well…you’ve made your point. And you’re probably right. You usually were. (wheeze) Bring my…my wife in. I do wish to spend the last moments with her…and farewell…my Eternal siblings.” “Farewell Edgar.” You say with a nod. Brenda says goodbye as well before you both leave. You step outside and tell Eva that Edgar wants to spend his remaining time left with her. She seems happy with this idea though of course still upset. She runs in and you, Brenda and the rest of your group are escorted out and back to the carriage that brought you here. When you finally get back to Naleen, you and Brenda are both glad to be home, though you both talk for quite awhile about this recent event and how it’s odd to think that you both are going to be the only original Eternals left soon. A couple days later you get the news that Edgar has died and that the new leadership of the Eternal Dominion as of now is uncertain. Fortunately you don’t really have to worry about it. Naleen is strong enough and far enough away that any sort of chaotic attack from the new ruler is very unlikely. You suspect that most of the fighting will be within the ED itself, or pushing ahead against the Felkan Kingdom. In the meantime you wonder about your own legacy and if you’ll be remembered on any meaningful level. Brenda isn’t really concerned about it; she figures you’ll both be in the history books as the first rulers of Naleen if nothing else. That sounds fine, but you wonder if that would necessarily be the case, after all you never met the emperor, you don’t even know his name or really anything about him except what you were taught as a child and that was most definitely all propaganda. You know even less about his predecessors. History may very well remember the Empire, but information on its rulers is either going to be sketchy or non-existent in another century. Edgar will probably be forgotten in even less time. You get the idea that a solid written record is in order. “Since when are you a writer?” Brenda asks. “I’m not, but maybe we can work on this together, I mean you are part of this too.” “Well that’s certainly true. Okay, so how did you want to go about this?” > You create a book painting you in a positive light While you toy with the idea of creating a book telling the complete truth, but decide it would probably be better to just do one as a partial propaganda piece. People have enough excuses to complain about you, no need to add more sticks to the fire. “Sounds like that might be for the best. So are you going to still start from the beginning?” Brenda asks. “Well I’ll briefly touch upon some of my time serving the Empire, but I’ll mostly deal with when Nalin broke away from it and beyond. Obviously I’ll focus on the most memorable parts, not the times where I just sat around reading skirmish reports.” “Still going to take a while you realize.” “I know it’s not going to be in one night, but I feel like a lasting record of us should exist. I mean after we’re gone, who’s to say that we won’t be forgotten soon after? I mean I understand what Edgar was trying to do, but sadly I don’t think he’s going to be remembered in the scheme of things. I don’t think the Eternal Dominion is even going to survive too much longer now that he’s dead.” “Hmm, you might be right about that. So you don’t mind that the book might be excessively biased?” “Brenda, ALL history is biased in favor of its victors. Why should we be any different? Besides, I’m sure people will make up more than enough lies about us to make up for it when we’re gone.” “Heh, you’re probably right about that too. Okay then, let’s get started, I want to make sure I’m in a good portion of this history as well.” Brenda says with a smile. You and Brenda immediately get to work on your project. You and her take turns doing the writing for the most part, but the pressures of ruling sometimes get in the way, so it takes longer than it probably would have if you both didn’t have other responsibilities. Your ambitious project takes more than a few years to complete, but when it is finally finished you definitely feel a sense of accomplishment. It may not be conquering an enemy or territory or anything like that, but if this goes the way you want, you will have achieved much more than simple victory. You will have achieved a kind of immortality. The huge tome immediately copied several times when it is complete. The great thing about being a ruler is you’ve got underlings that can do this. You make sure to keep the original writing for yourself. The first copies go out to a few Naleen schools, libraries and other places of higher learning where you decree that it is to become required reading. (Another great thing about being in charge!) In time there probably isn’t a single citizen that hasn’t at least heard of the book, if not read it. There are a few criticisms about the book from intellectual types claiming that it is little more than the usual propaganda, but such people don’t voice such opinions for very long or they quickly shut up about them. For the most part though, the book brainwashes the masses enough that you at least never have to worry about any possible uprisings again. Year 101 “Brenda…did you say that our book Eternal Vigilance has reached lands outside Naleen?” you ask. “Yes, I have been told as much, but from what I’ve heard it isn’t popular like it is here. It’s been dismissed as little more than the fat musings of tyrants…that would be us.” “Ah, I suppose everyone’s a critic. Well I guess we at least we’ll probably be remembered by our subjects, for however long that lasts.” “You shouldn’t worry about such things right now, it’s not important.” “I know Brenda. I suppose it was just a last foolish attempt to keep the Empire alive. I know it sounds odd, but even though the Empire fell long ago, I still felt like it existed in a small form as long as we original Eternals lived. Silly I suppose.” “No, it was just something that you believed in. No sillier than any of the gods that people worship.” “Hrm. The gods. We never were a religious bunch were we? I wonder after I die if I’ll meet any of the gods if they even exist.” Brenda gets a bit quiet at that last statement, you don’t mean to upset her, but you’ve got to be realistic at this stage. “Brenda, I love you.” You say. “And I love you.” She says back and squeezes your hand. For a moment the two of you are just silent for a while. You’re were getting tired anyway, but the both of you don’t really need to speak to communicate. You know each other better than any two people could. You’ve been through a lot together and this is will be your final journey with her. As you begin to get sleepy, you surprise Brenda by making a small chuckle. “What’s so funny?” she asks. “Captain Gruz…he said I would outlive everyone. I’m glad to have proved him wrong.” You say and give Brenda a smile. She manages to smile back through the tears. Life is slipping away now. This your final battle against an opponent who has stalked you for over a century. “For the Empire…” you whisper as your last battle cry and finally succumb to eternal sleep. Your funeral is a big deal. All of Naleen comes out for it, and there is a lot military marching, saluting, and all of that. Various officials give several speeches in your honor about your deeds and accomplishments. Brenda says a few words, but your death has been an emotional drain on her and she saves her strength to get through the day. You’re ultimately placed in a fancy tomb with nice statues of you and Brenda in your “warrior prime” just inside the doorway of it. A couple months later Brenda joins you in death and she is placed in the same tomb by your side where upon it is sealed, shutting the pair of you in darkness forever. Your place in history is remembered best in the nation of Naleen, but as time goes on as time always does, you are remembered less fondly. Eventually there comes a day when the latest rulers have your books burned altogether as to establish their own cult of personality. Your book never reached many other far off lands and if it did, it wasn’t wide spread to cause any significant impact. The nation of Naleen goes through various changes of government systems as decades pass by and you and Brenda ultimately become just “names” of past rulers and not much more than that. Ultimately when it too ceases to be (Conquered by the great kobold/usksha alliance three hundred years later) you are forgotten altogether. Though the kobolds and usksha still stay far away from the graveyard ruins of your tomb, fearing it to be cursed and believing that disturbance will cause the vengeful spirits of the Eternals to rise up.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 70 It’s a calm night and you stand outside on the balcony of your palace and look down at the city of Adlen. Brenda comes out to join you. “It’s good when everything is going well isn’t it?” Brenda asks. “It’s definitely going better for us now. Certainly going better than it is for Prime Eternal Edgar too.” “Always thought that was a ridiculous title. I don’t understand how he’s at a stalemate with the Felkan Kingdom, he was doing so well against them for the longest time.” “I figured he’s eventually over extend himself, though he’s also had a few personal set backs like several assassination attempts for one. From his last letter he doesn’t sound like he’s doing too well healthwise. He says the last two times he’s been stabbed, the assassin’s knife was coated with a heavy duty poison. The bolt that went into his back was too. If he wasn’t an Eternal he’d probably be dead by now.” “Well that’s better than Warrick.” “Yeah, but from that letter Edgar sent, he said Warrick died at the battle of Yaquan six years ago. Regardless of his loyalties, he died like how an Eternal is supposed to die. Edgar will be lucky if he dies from a successful assassination, because it’s sounding like the poison build up in his system might get him first. He’s sick and weak. It’s a shame really, I remember him being so hale and hearty at one time. If I were him I’d probably give up the ruling nonsense, join his soldiers in the next battle and die in one last blaze of glory.” “Is that how you wish to die? You want to go out in one last blaze of glory?” Brenda asks. “Eh, sometimes I still think about it, but not really seriously. I guess I’ve finally grown past it.” You laugh. “Didn’t think that would happen actually.” “Well, if Naleen starts suffering an unstoppable rebellion I guess I still got a shot at it. I’ll meet the unwashed mobs with sword in hand.” “Heh, well if that happens I guess I’ll join you, because I’m too old to be moving the capital again.” You both smile and hold each other side by side still looking out at the city. Yes, life is good when things are running well. Year 75 You, Brenda and your elite guards step into Edgar’s palace, and it’s every bit as impressive as you thought it would be. Lots of statues, symbols of war, etc. Certainly a lot of bigger than your humble palace, but then Edgar always was one for overcompensation. You all are taken through the palace to see Edgar, along the way you and Brenda continue to take in some of the sights. “Isn’t weird that all those years we served the Empire that this the first time we’ve ever stepped foot into this place?” Brenda says. “Yeah, Edgar must’ve spent a fortune rebuilding it.” “Did he ever actually meet the emperor?” “No he never did. He said he assumed that he either fled or burned up in the fire, by the time he got to the palace. For all we know, maybe there never was an emperor.” “Just one of life’s mysteries I guess.” Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. You wonder if this is “Eva” that he’s referred to a couple times in his letters. She’s not exactly his queen since she’s human, but you know she is definitely his companion. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. “Oh so you two decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. “And who the hell are you exactly?” you ask. “Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true Eternal who served with honor!” “Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say. “Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” At this point your guards take up a defensive stance and Rissok’s do likewise. “Well if you’re going to make a move, better do it quick.” You say. “Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you and Brenda may enter at any time, but your own guards must stay outside. Before you do, Brenda addresses the woman. “We apologize, we did not mean to cause you distress. Are you Lady Eva by any chance?” “(sniff) Yes. Yes I am.” “Edgar’s spoken highly of you in his letters.” Brenda says which causes a slight smile on her face. “I know that he’s better than me in everyway being an Eternal, yet he shows such compassion and sweetness by making me, a non-eternal, his only companion. I don’t know what I ever did to deserve such an honor, but I will always be grateful for it.” Brenda asks her if she wants to come in too, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you both alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you both enter the bedroom. When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. “Edgar?” you ask just to make sure. “(wheeze) ah…you both came…I knew you would. (cough cough) There isn’t much time…I trust you’ve read my letter?” “Yes.” “Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” “Don’t you have a successor?” “I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but I imagine Brenda has and that’s we can’t have children.” You look at Brenda and she nods and mentions she learned that with Roldan when they were together. It’s never been a topic you’ve brought up, but you always had your suspicions. Edgar continues his speech. “We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do. Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the only two I think could be proper successors…” You already know where Edgar is going with this. “Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged us out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to us! We aren’t even ED citizens!” “This is rather unrealistic Edgar.” Brenda adds. “That doesn’t matter! You’re still Eternals! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you two? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to. Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) but I can’t go on any longer. The only people who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier are you two. I’m asking not just as a dying man or friend …but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” You and Brenda look at each other and you both know your answer. Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power. And you and Brenda have your own nation, your own lives, and you’ve told Edgar this before, but it’s time to tell him one last time. “Edgar, we’re not accepting this position. First of all it’s not realistic despite what you want to believe and I think deep down you know that. Second of all, these are your final moments Edgar. Don’t worry about what you accomplished and if it’ll last. Just be proud of it now and spend your last moments with your wife or whatever you consider her. That’s who you need to be concerned about.” Edgar hacks and coughs up blood and spits it into a nearby bucket and struggles to breathe, but manages to answer you. “Very well…you’ve made your point. And you’re probably right. You usually were. (wheeze) Bring my…my wife in. I do wish to spend the last moments with her…and farewell…my Eternal siblings.” “Farewell Edgar.” You say with a nod. Brenda says goodbye as well before you both leave. You step outside and tell Eva that Edgar wants to spend his remaining time left with her. She seems happy with this idea though of course still upset. She runs in and you, Brenda and the rest of your group are escorted out and back to the carriage that brought you here. When you finally get back to Naleen, you and Brenda are both glad to be home, though you both talk for quite awhile about this recent event and how it’s odd to think that you both are going to be the only original Eternals left soon. A couple days later you get the news that Edgar has died and that the new leadership of the Eternal Dominion as of now is uncertain. Fortunately you don’t really have to worry about it. Naleen is strong enough and far enough away that any sort of chaotic attack from the new ruler is very unlikely. You suspect that most of the fighting will be within the ED itself, or pushing ahead against the Felkan Kingdom. In the meantime you wonder about your own legacy and if you’ll be remembered on any meaningful level. Brenda isn’t really concerned about it; she figures you’ll both be in the history books as the first rulers of Naleen if nothing else. That sounds fine, but you wonder if that would necessarily be the case, after all you never met the emperor, you don’t even know his name or really anything about him except what you were taught as a child and that was most definitely all propaganda. You know even less about his predecessors. History may very well remember the Empire, but information on its rulers is either going to be sketchy or non-existent in another century. Edgar will probably be forgotten in even less time. You get the idea that a solid written record is in order. “Since when are you a writer?” Brenda asks. “I’m not, but maybe we can work on this together, I mean you are part of this too.” “Well that’s certainly true. Okay, so how did you want to go about this?” > You tell the whole story While creating a book for all the masses to read and absorb might help solidify a remembrance of you and Brenda, you’re thinking on a bigger picture. “Wait, you want to tell your experiences from the past seventy five years?” “Well, just the most memorable ones. Obviously I’m not going to focus on the days where I just sat at a desk reading skirmish reports or what I was eating on a particular day.” “Do you realize how long that’s going to take?” “I know it’s not going to be in one night. I want to tell the whole story or at least as much as I can.” “That’s pretty ambitious. I figured you were just going to start from Nalin’s independence from the Empire at most.” “See that’s just it, I, WE didn’t just suddenly appear when we took official control of Nalin and later Naleen. We’ve got a lot of history behind us. We’re Eternals and we’re the last of our kind. There should be some sort of lasting record of us.” “Last of our kind? There’s a whole nation of them if you remember.” Brenda reminds you. “Yes and that’s exactly my point. Do you think it’s going to last? Do you think any of new generations are going to be stable enough to think beyond their own petty power? I’d wager that they don’t even continue the method to create anymore of them, now that Edgar’s dead. He was the only one who was trying to leave a lasting legacy beyond himself. The rest of them? They’re going to wonder why they’re creating potential rivals and no longer bother.” “You might be right about that. So, you weren’t interested in creating this in a more positive light for people to remember you?” “Ha ha, I’m pretty sure such a task is impossible. No matter how much propaganda I churned out for the masses, I’m certain it wouldn’t make the citizens start believing I’m a nice person. Even the military doesn’t think such a thing. This isn’t going to be about making me look good. I’ll let history decide that, but this written account will at least provide a solid guide from which they can judge.” “But won’t it still be biased?” “Probably, but given that I want to include everything, I’m still not portraying myself as some benevolent ruler with a pleasant background. Now you said you would help, did you still wish to? I mean I want to include everything, but I guess I can leave out anything that portrays you in a negative way.” “My love, I was right along side you on your less popular decisions, in fact I made a lot of them myself. I’m not innocent and I would imagine the average citizen wouldn’t consider me a nice person either. Well, maybe nicer than you, but you’re a hard act to follow.” Brenda says with a smile. You and Brenda immediately get to work on your project. You and her take turns doing the writing for the most part, but the pressures of ruling sometimes get in the way, so it takes longer than it probably would have if you both didn’t have other responsibilities. Your ambitious project takes more than a few years to complete, but when it is finally finished you definitely feel a sense of accomplishment. It may not be conquering an enemy or territory or anything like that, but if this goes the way you want, you will have achieved much more than simple victory. You will have achieved a kind of immortality. The huge tome immediately copied several times when it is complete. The great thing about being a ruler is you’ve got underlings that can do this. You make sure to keep the original writing for yourself. The first copies go out to a few Naleen schools, libraries and other places of higher learning where you decree that it is to become required reading. (Another great thing about being in charge!) In time there probably isn’t a single citizen that hasn’t at least heard of the book, if not read it. There is a slight backlash to “telling all” however. Some students, professors, intellectuals and other academics take the opportunity to use examples from the book to prove what tyrants you are and Brenda are and how if Naleen is ever going to achieve its maximum potential then relics of tyranny need to be gotten rid of. An increase in protests about silly “freedoms” and “rights” pop up a little more. An annoying side effect to be sure, but a predictable one. Executing them all would only prove their point of course, but you really don’t disagree with them in the first place. You and Brenda ARE relics of tyranny. In fact you stated as much in the book. You were created by a government obsessed with control and molded into Eternals to enforce that control. You can’t help what you are and you’re not going to apologize for any of your actions. In any case, if it wasn’t this, you would’ve gotten protests about something, it’s been a while. Besides you have more than your share of intellectual defenders as well your loyal military, so you’re not worried about revolutions anytime soon.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>As much as you might like to help Warrick out, you just really aren’t in a position to do so on any meaningful level. Breaking your trade routes with the Eternal Dominion is just foolish. You tell Brenda you’ll break the news this time. You both enter the room where Warrick awaits your answer. “Sorry Warrick, while we do understand your troubles, we can’t help you. What you’re asking for is too much and we see no benefit for us or Nalin in general.” Warrick’s face doesn’t drop and he doesn’t get any angrier, All in all, he takes your response a lot better than Edgar did. “Very well. I shall tell my superiors that you are not interested in any sort of alliance with us. I hope that one day this may change. I suppose I will also take my leave now, sorry to have bothered the both of you, but it was still good to see you again.” He says and leaves immediately. You and Brenda remark on he was probably more disappointed than he let on, but what’s done is done and you’ve all made your choices now. The pair of you go back to bed and try to get some sleep. Year 56 “We’ve got to do something about this epidemic. If this keeps up we’re not going to have a population left to rule over!” Brenda says. “Well so far the problem has hit the eastern territory of Nalin yet. We’ve scoured the land for healers, medics and a few hedge wizards and they’re doing all they can, but this thing is really bad in a few of the towns. I’ve quarantined all of the major areas where this plague is taking place, but understandably a lot the soldiers aren’t exactly keen on their duties there mainly because they don’t want to get sick either. The only ones who aren’t kicking up much of a fuss about it are soldiers with families in those towns.” You reply. “(Sigh) Shit. I’ve talked to all of the advisors and nobody has a clue where, who and why this thing might’ve started. You got any ideas?” “Unfortunately the only one I can think of just a hunch, and I’d rather not believe it. I think Warrick, or at least the Felkan Kingdom had something to do with it. For all we know they could’ve had saboteurs in here for years planning this.” “If it was them, I hope Edgar rips them a new asshole now that he’s at war with them.” “Be that as it may, I’m still hoping that wasn’t the case, not because I don’t want to believe a former friend could do this to us, but more because it doesn’t reflect well on my duties to protect the nation. I mean if the Felkan Kingdom had saboteurs here, how was it that I didn’t see it until now?” “You can’t start doubting yourself, we need to focus on the problem at hand first.” “You’re right of course. Well as I see it, if we really want to stop the plague, we need to kill everyone in the quarantined areas, then cleanse everything with fire.” “Wait, hold on. There’s no other way? Can’t we just have more medics and healers transferred to those places?” “I don’t see what good that would do. From the reports a lot of these people are practically dead or dying as it is. It doesn’t do any good for them to linger and possibly get others sick. Better to just kill them now and save the medics to observe the places that only have a few sick people.” “You do realize that something like this is not going to be popular right? I mean are the soldiers even going to be willing to do such a thing?” “Well we try pretty hard to keep up the old ways of Empire indoctrination, I don’t think we should have major problems, though I suppose those with families might protest (Sigh) I guess we’ll have to take care of them as well.” “This isn’t sounding like a great idea. Maybe we should just keep the quarantine and let them all slowly die off. We could always say we’re looking for a cure, and whether one comes or not, the problem will take care of itself.” Brenda suggests. “The problem with that plan is we’re diverting soldiers from more important duties and continuing to risk lives that can still be useful to Nalin.” You say. You and Brenda weigh the pros and cons of your limited choices. > You let the healers find a cure Killing everyone might have its benefits, but perhaps a less bloodthirsty approach would be for the best right now. You and Brenda decide to keep the quarantine up and just encourage the medics to work harder on a cure. The next few months are relatively calm, there’s a lot of grumbling, but nothing serious yet. No cure has been found yet and while the less affected areas seem to be stabilized, the ones in the quarantine aren’t getting any worse either. This is somewhat of a problem, part of the hope is that they would ultimately just all die off if a cure isn’t found. As it stands, the ones that have managed to survive the plague are now just carriers which makes them a lot more dangerous. A few healers try their hand at various cures, but nothing works, if anything you just lose more physicians as they too become infected and have to stay inside. The situation gets worse when you have escapees and the soldiers stationed outside the quarantine area start to show symptoms of the plague and have to be shoved in as well. Eventually you station all those elves you made orphans (now proper Nalin soldiers) all those years ago around the quarantined area, as non-humans seem to be more resistant. You even “deputize” kobolds as soldiers as well as they’re virtually immune. This isn’t a popular decision, but purging the infected areas would be even less so. You hold out hope that a cure will be found soon. Year 60 You sit quietly contemplating everything that has transpired for the past four years. When the plague had managed to re-establish itself throughout Nalin, and worse in eastern Nalin and it became apparent that no one was close to a cure, you went through with your original plan of cleansing the infected areas. There were still protests against you carrying out such a grim plan, but such dissent was silenced. However it was a bit too late at that point. Several towns in eastern Nalin claimed you and Brenda were unfit as rulers for letting this happen and threatened to secede. Resistance probably would’ve been crushed with ease, but with a shortage of troops due to the plague, general dislike of your rule and others just taking advantage of the coming chaos, it wasn’t as easy as it could’ve been. Opposition was crushed, but ultimately large sections of Nalin had either been ravaged by the plague or civil war. Nalin wasn’t so much of a nation anymore than it was a collection of towns in a war torn land. Eventually the strain of holding so much land with the troop shortage you now suffered was too much and territory had to be abandoned anyway. After some restructuring, the nation of Nalin was much smaller than it was when the Empire ruled over it. It was a small poor miserable country, with equally poor miserable citizens. Edgar has offered to absorb Nalin into the Eternal Dominion and give you a place at his side, but you’re still too prideful to except such an offer, even if you know he means well. “Brooding again, dear?” Brenda says tapping you on the shoulder. “Just temporarily lost in thought.” You answer. “You figure out how to re-conquer all our lost territory yet?” “Not quite, but I’m working on it.” “Well I wouldn’t worry about it. I think we had a good run, we should just look at other options.” “Brenda are you seriously reconsidering joining the Eternal Dominion, because…” “No, but there are other options.” “You mean just focusing on building up what we have left?” “Well that’s certainly one possibility, but quite frankly I’m not interested in that either. This whole ruling business…it’s not fun anymore. I question if it ever was at least for me anyway. You sort of made it tolerable, but I think I’m done.” You get a little worried by this statement. “You’re not talking about suicide are you?” “What? No! Sheesh, I’m not ready for the grave, but it is something that is much closer than it was in the past. I mean is fighting over this little piece of shitty land and running it really what I want to be doing in my twilight years? Not really, life’s short enough as it is. I’ve come to that conclusion and that’s why I’m leaving all of this behind. I’m guessing you might feel a little different about it though.” “You’re damn right I feel different about it! We can’t just run away from this! We’ve got to re-establish our rule! I know it’ll take a while, but it can be done!” Brenda smiles and touches your face. “For what purpose? I hate to tell you this, but you’re not young anymore either.” “I…I know that!” “Do you? Because sometime I wonder. I love you and you’re still a great warrior and you’re probably still better than most men half your age, but you can’t go around thinking you’re invincible anymore. There are guns now you know, someone could just assassinate you from a few feet away and not even engage you in combat. The days of the Empire are over, you have to realize that.” “I know that too, Brenda.” “And that’s why you’re frustrating to deal with sometimes, because you DO know it, yet sometimes you completely lapse into the mindset of the good old days. Look, you know I love you, and I know you love me, but I can’t do this mini empire shit anymore.” “So what’s your solution then?” “Well, I was thinking we just leave.” “And go where?” “I dunno, someplace else. Further east I guess, someplace far away from this entire region though. I mean there’s probably a great big world out there, and we’ve just been stuck in a small portion of it.” “Hmm, so you’re suggesting we just live like vagabonds and wanderers with no set home?” “Well maybe for a time, but who knows maybe we’ll eventually find some place to settle down.” “Wait a minute you’re going on about how we’re not young anymore, yet you’re advocating wandering the wilderness like some young snot nosed adventurers. Sounds like you’re talking out both sides of your mouth…” “Okay fine, you don’t have to come with me, you can sit here and play brooding overlord until somebody either assassinates you or the unwashed masses storm the palace.” Brenda says turning away and walking. “Hold on! Wait! (sigh) Look, I know what you’re saying and you’ve got a point. It’s just really hard for me to give all this up. I’d feel like I would be abandoning my post and I did that once already with the Empire. And while it was the best decision I ever made, it still stays with me like a black spot, and I’m sure you know that. Abandoning Nalin is like history repeating itself all over again.” “Remember what you told Edgar when he visited? There was nothing any of us could’ve done. It was a doomed mission to begin with. You did your best and that’s all anyone could’ve done. Even an Eternal.” You give a slight smile and nod. “Okay, Brenda. Let’s get out of here.” You and Brenda pack some equipment and take your leave of your rulership of Nalin. You don’t even bother assigning a successor or anything like that, you decide whoever wants it bad enough can hold it if they have the desire. You and Brenda head east and stick to the wilderness when traveling through old Nalin territory, eventually you pass through it and you’re exploring new land. Living off the land is quite easy for you and the freedom is a nice change of pace. After a few months, you don’t miss Nalin at all, and are just glad to be spending more quality time with Brenda. In the years that follow the pair of you wander, seeing new sights and getting into a few skirmishes a long the way. Eventually the pair of you do settle down close to a small village in a far away land where you live out the remainder of your lives in complete obscurity and peace.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 55 You and Brenda now rule the nation of Nalin as a married couple. There has been some issue on what your official titles are now. The simplest choices would be emperor and empress or king and queen. Eventually Brenda settled for imperatrix, which would officially make you imperator, though you still go by general for the most part. In any case life has been good. You don’t even mind that things have been slow since you conquered all those tribals in the east. You’ve been taking a slightly more active role in running the nation from an administrative point of view, but sometimes you still long for the day of a good battle. When that day comes you’ve also tried to keep up on the changing times of changing warfare. While the days of close combat are far from over, if the Eternal Dominion is starting to slowly incorporate firearms into their ranks, then you better do likewise if only to maintain a show of strength. The ED isn’t hostile though and you maintain a good trading relationship with them. Edgar still hopes you’re going to join him one day, especially since you know he’s got designs on going to war with the Felkan Kingdom (You gave him some friendly advice to not bother with invading Rask). He’d probably like you to at least be involved in a joint military operation with him, but you think he’s over extending himself and the Felkan Kingdom is no pushover. It’s not exactly like you’re near the Felkan Kingdom as far as location is concerned either. All you’d be doing is having soldiers die in a war that doesn’t even directly benefit your nation. That being said, Nalin hasn’t sided with the Felkan Kingdom either in any way. Again, due to your location, you’ve had minimal contact with them. Brenda thought about allying with them in the past, but that was never seriously considered (Good thing too). Somehow though you imagine you’re going to get dragged into this saber rattling between the Eternal Dominion and the Felkan Kingdom. Funny how that feeling turns out to be true. Late one night you and Brenda are awakened from your sleep. Some envoy from the Felkan Kingdom has sudden decided to show up in the middle of the night. Demanding to see the pair of you and claiming it’s very urgent. You and Brenda don’t get much sleep as it is, so you’re inclined to tell your soldiers to just shoot him and go back to bed, but you’ve got a good idea of who it is. “You really think it’s him?” Brenda ask. “You really think it isn’t? It was only a matter of time. Ugh, I guess we better get this over with.” You shout at the guard behind the door to hold the envoy in the meeting room and keep a close eye on him until you and Brenda get there. After grumbling and getting dress you and Brenda head to the meeting room where you see a familiar face. He’s missing an eye, all of his hair and his face has a few more winkles and scars on it now, but you still recognize him. “Warrick, you better have a damn good reason for waking us up in the middle of the night.” You say. “…you aren’t surprised it’s me?” “Not really, I actually thought you’d show up sooner, and how the hell did you manage to join the Felkan Kingdom anyway?” “It’s a long story…but well anyway, I’m glad to see you both. I was surprised to hear about your marriage. Didn’t think that…” “Warrick, I’m tired as well. It’s not easy running a nation and I’ve been doing it even longer than my husband has, so get to the damn point of the visit or let this wait until tomorrow.” Brenda demands rubbing one of her eyes. Warrick looks a little hurt by your remarks, but he gets on with it. “Very well, to business. The Felkan Kingdom wants an alliance with you.” “Yeah sort of figured that. Anything else?” you ask. “Erm, no, but…” “Okay then, the answer is no. We can talk more about old times tomorrow, if you want. Good night.” Brenda says starting to turn around to go back to bed. “Hey wait! No? Just like that?! You don’t even want to consider the benefits?” Warrick asks. “What benefits? If we ally with the Felkan Kingdom, all it’s going to do is piss off the Eternal Dominion who we have a good relationship with diplomatically and tradewise. What is the Felkan Kingdom going to offer?” Brenda replies. “How the fact that we’re more likely to leave you alone after the war with the Eternal Dominion is over?” “Warrick…Warrick…you should know threats aren’t going to sway us.” You remark. “What?! NO! I meant, argh look. What I’m saying is if the unfortunate should happen and the Eternal Dominion wins don’t you think that they’ll try to invade you next?” “I suppose it’s possible yes.” “Whereas if the Felkan Kingdom wins, we have no intention on even expanding our borders.” “Probably true, but that still doesn’t help us during the war. A war that is really between you and the ED.” “I can’t believe I’m trying to convince YOU of all people to go to war. I would’ve thought you would’ve jumped at this chance!” Warrick says in a raised tone. “Things change Warrick, and just because I’m not jumping through your hoops doesn’t mean I’ve lost a taste for battle. But I’m thinking on a grander scale now. Going to war with the Eternal Dominion doesn’t do us or Nalin any good. It’s just going to result in dead soldiers at best. We’ve found that our continued expansion eastward is much better in building up the country. Maximum gain with minimum losses.” You say. Warrick paces a bit and sputters. He obviously thought this was going to go better. “So that’s it then huh? You just take Edgar’s side over mine. I thought you didn’t like him anyway.” “Warrick, it’s not about taking sides. If you haven’t noticed we’re not exactly allied with the ED either. We trade with them and are on friendly terms, but that’s out of convenience more than anything. Trust me, Edgar’s been trying to get us to join for years. I don’t know what you’re even worried about, the Eternal Dominion is formidable I’m sure, but the Felkan Kingdom survived a war with the Empire. I’m guessing you should be able to handle the ED.” “I don’t know if we can.” He calmly states. There’s a moment of silence where you weren’t expecting him to say such a thing so blatantly like that. “Look, I didn’t want to say anything. The Felkan Kingdom is what I serve now and I serve it to the best of my abilities as I did the Empire. To do anything less would be a failure as an Eternal on my part.” “But?” “But I see the weaknesses that we have and I can’t ignore them. It’s not public knowledge to anyone outside the kingdom, but we’re also suffering a large gnoll invasion from the west. It caught us completely by surprise. The Felkan Kingdom is a mighty nation, but right now it’s straining its resources just to stay alive. A war with the ED…and we all know it’s coming, could break us. The funny thing is I feel like I’m in the Empire all over again. You know during the bad times.” “I think they were ALL bad times Warrick. We just made the best of them.” Brenda says. “Perhaps. (sigh) I guess I can’t convince you ally with us, I mean you’ve got a good thing going on here and you shouldn’t wreck it. I’m glad. Glad that some of us are doing well. But couldn’t you at least break off your trade routes? I mean that would at least cause Edgar’s attention to be diverted. He might suspect you’re up to something and not attack the Felkan Kingdom. At least not right away. It might be enough time for us to put up a better defense.” “Yeah and he might also attack us instead.” Brenda remarks. “I don’t think he will, because then he has to divert his own soldiers and resources and then he’ll be worried that we will attack. He can’t fight a two front war, even Edgar’s smart enough not to risk that. And that’s if he dares fighting you in the first place.” “That’s a big if, there Warrick.” You say. You and Brenda tell Warrick you’ll both discuss this in a little more detail outside. He says he understands and will await your decision. You and Brenda don’t have too much to talk about really, since it’s basically coming down to helping out a former comrade in arms and starting a possible war with another one or avoiding the situation entirely. Brenda is for staying neutral; oddly you’re actually of two minds of this. > You convince Brenda to help Warrick Maybe it isn’t the most tactically sound decision, but he’s still an Eternal and you feel like you should give him a fighting chance. It takes some convincing, but Brenda eventually agrees with you, but she still thinks this isn’t one of your better ideas. You both go back inside to tell Warrick the news. “Okay, Warrick after talking it over, we’ll help you indirectly by breaking trade with the Eternal Dominion.” Warrick’s face doesn’t show a great degree of happiness, but one more of relief.. “Thank you. Thank you both, my friends. This might not seem like much, but it still helps. I’ll never forget what you’ve done here.” “Yeah, yeah, you better go before I change my mind.” Brenda says. Warrick, not wishing to wear out his welcome he bids you both goodbye and takes his leave. Brenda remarks again that she sees no good coming of this, but what’s done is done and you’ve all made your choices now. The pair of you go back to bed and try to get some sleep. Year 56 “Great that’s all we need a war with the Eternal Dominion while we have a fucking epidemic going on right now!” Brenda shouts throwing a paperweight against the wall in frustration. When the trade routes were broken with the Eternal Dominion, Edgar did not take it well, and while it was always a risk, you didn’t think he’d actually wage a two front war over it. He immediately suspected you both were in league with each other and declared war on you both. You would probably fare better against the ED, but a terrible plague has hit Nalin pretty hard around the same time. Nobody knows exactly where it came from or how it spread, but the common thought is that the Eternal Dominion has something to do with it. You on the other hand entertain another idea, one that you’d rather not believe and that’s Warrick had something to do with it. Destabilize your country and weaken it to a point where the Eternal Dominion can destroy it completely while they also waste their own manpower at the same time. Possibly even spread the plague to their own lands too. It’s a good plan. If that really is the case, you question your judgment and beginning to wonder if you’re even fit to command anything anymore. You know Brenda has been a little distant towards you lately, however to her credit she has not blamed you for the current situation. Though she wouldn’t since she’d only blame herself as well for agreeing to break trade with the ED to begin with. In any case, right now is not really the time to second guess or lament possible past mistakes, a serious situation rears it’s ugly head right now and it must be take care of. “Well, the plague hasn’t hit eastern Nalin yet and we’ve drafted every healer, medic and hedge wizard we can find to help cure this blight. We’ve managed to quarantine the towns and cities that have been hit the hardest. The problem with that though is we’ve had to redistribute soldiers to those places where we could desperately use them on the northern borders.” You explain. “Yes, I’m aware of the situation, what’s your solution?” Brenda demands. “Kill everyone in the quarantine and cleanse it with fire. No more people, no more plague and we can focus on the war.” Brenda chuckles. “Figures you’d suggest something like that.” “Well I’m coming up with the most efficient plan, waiting around for the docs to come up with a cure isn’t really time we can afford.” You say. “And massacring entire settlements isn’t going to endear us to anyone. You know what? To hell with it, I’m leaving this up to you, I’m sick of running this fucking country anyway…” Brenda says and walks out the room. You aren’t exactly sure of what to make of that response, but you go through with your cleansing plan since you can’t afford to wait around for some cure that may never come. Killing everyone has worked for you on several occasions in the past, no reason to change tactic now. First thing you do is get every remaining “old guard” officer that’s still serving since the days of the Empire and have them put in charge of this operation. You know they won’t even question this command coming from you. Then you tell them to go through their personnel rosters to see who is going to be up for this grim task. You personally suggest including all of those elves you made into orphans years ago. While they may all be good indoctrinated soldiers now, you think they wouldn’t hesitate at a chance to kill some humans and would be good candidates for this job. Besides, elves seem to be more resistant to the plague anyway. Three entire towns are put to the sword, gun and torch until there is nothing left, but burned corpses and hollowed out buildings. In keeping with non-humans being seemingly less affected by the plague, you have kobolds remove the bodies and clean out what they can. They’re more than happy to do this as they get the chance to loot some stuff for their own impoverished reservation you’ve set aside for them. This action causes a great outcry and you even have to execute several soldiers who took up arms against you during the cleansing. Many Nalin citizens aren’t happy with the fact that you’ve implemented several non-humans in helping with this massacre as well. Indeed some begin calling you their inhuman “Eternal overlords” and wonder if they aren’t already under the rule of the Eternal Dominion. As far as the plague goes, you did successfully wipe it out from being an ongoing danger. Medics, healers and the like are able to focus their attentions on the places where it’s less of a problem and eventually it is gone completely. As for everything else, western Nalin, is in horrible condition and soldiers from eastern Nalin have to be brought in to reinforce the northern borders which have now changed hands a bit as the ED army has pushed you back. Eastern Nalin is in good shape as it was spared the plague and isn’t in any immediate danger from the fighting, but there are rumors of the population aren’t happy. With the plague gone though, you dig in ready to focus on the Eternal Dominion invasion. > Year 60 “Fort Glory has fallen sir.” A disheveled messenger tells you while you look over a map of Nalin in your tent. “Doesn’t matter, it was no longer a priority anymore.” You say not looking up. “So you’re still going through with the plan involving the kobold sappers?” “Yes. I figure it’ll take a few days for those eternals get settled in their new conquest and then that fort crumbles right underneath them. A shame, I used to like that fort, but this is war.” “Sir, I don’t mean to question your orders, but how can you trust those little scaley bastards? They’re little more than animals.” “That may be, but they’re animals that are more scared of me than anything else, and that’s all that’s important. Speaking of which how do things fare in eastern Nalin?” “All major settlements are under martial law, lots of structures destroyed, several dissidents executed and there are reports of rebels in the wilderness, but most of it is still under our control.” “Good enough for now I suppose. Tell Captain Yasil, that I want her to mount an attack on Camp Conquest in a tomorrow. We’re going to make our major offensive soon and I want her to weaken that camp as much as possible.” “…you mean that large eternal camp in northern Nalin? The main one? That’s suicide! Her company is only at half strength from the last mission you sent her on!” the messenger exclaims. “Her sacrifice will be remembered. That will be all.” You say still not looking up. The messenger sounds like he would like to say something else, but realizes he better not and just leaves. Smart move on his part. You would’ve killed him. You have little patience for hesitation nowadays, especially since you’ve got nothing left to lose. You rub your eyes and stop looking at the map of Nalin and sit down to take a short break. You’re tired, but you don’t remember the last time you had a good night’s sleep. You look over at a portrait you had made of Brenda a long time ago before this war ever broke out. An image of her in happier times. You often speak to the portrait, during times like this and tonight is no different. “You were right, shouldn’t have broken that trade agreement with the ED (Sigh) just wish I would’ve been the one that paid for that mistake instead of you. Though I suppose I paid for it, when some suicidal asshole shot you in the head two years ago.” You focus more attention on the portrait “Maybe you’re better off…I mean you were getting increasingly unhappy. Heh, who knows maybe you would’ve just left altogether. You were right about ruling not being any fun too, I’ve been trying to do your job and mine, but I find myself just not caring about much lately. I’m half ready to just get up and leave it all behind, but I still feel the need to control and regain what has been lost. Maybe it’s that old Empire syndrome popping up again. I dunno. Recently I’ve just been focusing on the war. It’s about the only slight pleasure I get anymore. Sometimes I wade into battles, bones creaking, joints aching and five times slower and weaker than I once was, yet do it anyway. I guess I’m hoping to at least die a warrior’s death, but somehow I still manage to survive. The war’s not over yet though, so maybe there’s still time right?” You pick up the portrait and look directly into Brenda’s face. “I don’t know if you still loved me near the end of everything, but I still loved you. Still do. Maybe I’ll be with you soon.” You say. You put down the portrait and lie down on your bed. You won’t get a good night’s sleep, but you don’t need it. You just need a quick recharge before you go back to the business of war. The next couple of day pass and you’re ready for your final push. You have no idea if you’ll actually succeed in driving out the Eternal Dominion, but you’re ready to put an end to this one way or another. You lead the battalions to the north. When you arrive to the frontlines, you receive a report that Fort Glory completely collapsed and killed a couple of companies of eternals that were planning their next move from there. Kobolds took advantage of the chaos and finished off the wounded. Captain Yasil’s mission was also somewhat successful, you see the smoke in the distance from the main ED camp. The smell of gunpowder from the cannons lingers in the air; hundreds of trenches are filled with the living and the dead on both sides. You heard that this is how the battlefield looked when the Empire fought the Felkan Kingdom, seems like this is going to be standard for war, until something else changes in the way people kill others. You remember when things were much simpler though. The funny thing is that the Felkan Kingdom is despite being accustomed to this sort of fighting and more technologically advanced, they’re apparently having a much worse time holding off the Eternal Dominion than you have, though you imagine that they’re getting more of the brunt of the combat. You are approached by several of your officers; they say their respective companies are ready to advance, if you give the word. You nod and tell them the attack will commence. You watch as thousands of your soldiers run forward to kill and die for you. If there has always been one consistency with you, is you ability is muster up a shitload of people to do that, even when you’re not popular. And you’re REALLY not popular with the average Nalin citizen right now. But ungratefulness is something you’re used to. You experience the same thing in Rask, after you destroyed all the barbarian tribes. Peasants complain and know nothing of real sacrifice. Not like you do. The battle is going strong and a cannon ball from the other side even crashes a few feet away from you. One of your majors advises that you should step further back from the battle so you stay out of harm’s way. But maybe you don’t want to; in fact maybe you want to just end it all right now. > You walk into the battle You look out at the battlefield from your horse and get off of it. This is it. The time is right. The major is screaming at you to take cover and asking you what do you think you’re doing walking forward into the battlefield like you’re doing, but you ignore him. No sooner have you taken number of steps forward and large explosion occurs behind you causing you to fall forward. You push yourself up and look behind to see a small crater where the major and your horse once stood. Your head hurts and seems to be bleeding, but you shake off the cobwebs and crawl into the nearest trench. The stench of death fills your nose immediately. You see several dead soldiers with various fatal wounds. A few living ones are looking for their next opportunity to crawl forward to the next trench. They see you and are quite surprised. “Gen..general?” one of them says. “What are you lot waiting for? There’s a great big war out there just dying to be won!” “Uh, well the enemy cannons are…” “No excuses! Come on, follow me! I’ll lead you to fucking victory!” you shout excitedly and crawl out of the trench. The soldiers are a little reluctant to follow you at first, but they do so anyway. Explosions and gunfire are all around you as you crawl forward. The danger you’ve put yourself in right now is giving you a rush. You make your way to the next trench where you encounter even more of your soldiers who are in close combat with the enemy eternals. You help out with your own superior swordsmanship. “That’s how you do it!” you shout as you run your sword through the neck of an enemy. “Eternals my fucking ass! Back in my day, a single eternal could’ve killed the lot of you! And that Eternal would’ve been me!” you tell your men who are a little unnerved by your remarks. “But fortunately I’m helping!” you shout with a slight giggle and motion them to follow you forward. You crawl from trench to trench through mud, blood, guts, bodies, and all around nastiness and you love every moment of it. The soldiers you’ve “picked up” along the way believe you’ve gone completely mad, but they continue to follow since you’re actually making progress and your combat abilities still surpass their own. You don’t even know how many eternals and “regular” soldiers you’ve killed so far, but you aren’t keeping track. All that you do know is that you still haven’t reached your goal. Along with completely disregarding your safety, you start to become a little delusional as well, you end up shouting at your men that they need to watch out for possible wendigos in the area confusing the hell out of them. “Why isn’t there snow? There’s usually snow in Rask.” You mumble to yourself. You see the enemy camp in sight and there is already some fighting going on there, but by the Emperor, you are NOT going to miss this fight! “For the Empire!” you shout, which at this point your soldier aren’t even surprised by whatever you yell about now. They’re too busy thanking their gods that you managed to lead them to the enemy camp with no losses. Camp Conquest is in chaos. There is fighting everywhere and you jump right in the middle of it. You proceed with your bloodthirsty adrenaline crusade. You suffer several wounds that probably would’ve stopped a normal man your age in their tracks and even you’re starting to feel the effects. Fortunately you’ve still got your small personal troop behind you to take up the slack. “Look general there’s the commander’s tent!” one of them shouts. It would appear your enthusiasm has finally rubbed off. With sword cuts across your face, a bleeding gash on your left arm, your armor half destroyed and a bullet in one of your legs, you continue forward. You’re starting to feel a little wobbly though. “These Eternals will pay for their betrayal of the Emperor!” you mutter. The enemy commander with some of his own staff stands around several dead bodies and upon seeing you he pats his mace in his hand waiting for you to arrive. As you get closer, there’s something somewhat familiar about him. Like you knew him, but he’s older now. He bashes the face in of one of your soldiers before clashing with you. He starts to babble about how he’s wanted revenge on you for killing his friend twenty-five years ago. He kicks you to the ground and tries to crush your skull, but you roll out of the way. Your head is really starting to hurt, and you’re feeling a little dizzy. Images of the past and present begin to mix together and you have a moment of clarity of where you are, and it isn’t Rask and you aren’t serving the Empire. The bleeding from the back of your head was actually caused by shrapnel from the explosive cannon ball that nearly killed you at the beginning of the battlefield. You’ve been suffering from a mild brain injury the entire time, hence your delusions. This fool that’s trying to kill you now is one of those eternals that was under your command when you left the Empire and killed private Felding in the process. You dodge another mace swing as you try to regain your wits. You’re stating to feel your strength really ebb. This is what reality feels like and it sucks, you were enjoying yourself up until this point. You don’t know if you’re actually going to survive this, but you’ll be damned if you’re going to give this asshole the satisfaction of getting his revenge. You hack at his foot causing him to fall to one knee. You then strike out against one of his soldiers trying to sneak attack you. Before the commander to get back up, you hack his arm off at the shoulder. Blood spews from the stump and he screams in agony. He stops screaming when you kick his teeth in and sever his head from his body. You look around and see that your soldiers are winning the day. You know that the Eternal Dominion presence is still in Nalin, but it has now been greatly reduced with this victory. The war isn’t over yet, but maybe it is for you. You stagger to the asshole’s tent you just killed and lie down on his bedroll. You head hurts something fierce and you’re starting to feel like you’re about to pass out. One of your soldiers says he’ll go find a medic or healer, but really you don’t care anymore. You’re going to die here and that’s okay. You’ve had your last win and really even if you did survive to see final victory; you’d rather not go through the drudgery of ruling alone anymore. You’re too old and too tired and now that Brenda’s gone, you just don’t have the motivation anymore. “Brenda, I’m coming to join you.” You say and close your eyes. You never wake up.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 60 “Fort Glory has fallen sir.” A disheveled messenger tells you while you look over a map of Nalin in your tent. “Doesn’t matter, it was no longer a priority anymore.” You say not looking up. “So you’re still going through with the plan involving the kobold sappers?” “Yes. I figure it’ll take a few days for those eternals get settled in their new conquest and then that fort crumbles right underneath them. A shame, I used to like that fort, but this is war.” “Sir, I don’t mean to question your orders, but how can you trust those little scaley bastards? They’re little more than animals.” “That may be, but they’re animals that are more scared of me than anything else, and that’s all that’s important. Speaking of which how do things fare in eastern Nalin?” “All major settlements are under martial law, lots of structures destroyed, several dissidents executed and there are reports of rebels in the wilderness, but most of it is still under our control.” “Good enough for now I suppose. Tell Captain Yasil, that I want her to mount an attack on Camp Conquest in a tomorrow. We’re going to make our major offensive soon and I want her to weaken that camp as much as possible.” “…you mean that large eternal camp in northern Nalin? The main one? That’s suicide! Her company is only at half strength from the last mission you sent her on!” the messenger exclaims. “Her sacrifice will be remembered. That will be all.” You say still not looking up. The messenger sounds like he would like to say something else, but realizes he better not and just leaves. Smart move on his part. You would’ve killed him. You have little patience for hesitation nowadays, especially since you’ve got nothing left to lose. You rub your eyes and stop looking at the map of Nalin and sit down to take a short break. You’re tired, but you don’t remember the last time you had a good night’s sleep. You look over at a portrait you had made of Brenda a long time ago before this war ever broke out. An image of her in happier times. You often speak to the portrait, during times like this and tonight is no different. “You were right, shouldn’t have broken that trade agreement with the ED (Sigh) just wish I would’ve been the one that paid for that mistake instead of you. Though I suppose I paid for it, when some suicidal asshole shot you in the head two years ago.” You focus more attention on the portrait “Maybe you’re better off…I mean you were getting increasingly unhappy. Heh, who knows maybe you would’ve just left altogether. You were right about ruling not being any fun too, I’ve been trying to do your job and mine, but I find myself just not caring about much lately. I’m half ready to just get up and leave it all behind, but I still feel the need to control and regain what has been lost. Maybe it’s that old Empire syndrome popping up again. I dunno. Recently I’ve just been focusing on the war. It’s about the only slight pleasure I get anymore. Sometimes I wade into battles, bones creaking, joints aching and five times slower and weaker than I once was, yet do it anyway. I guess I’m hoping to at least die a warrior’s death, but somehow I still manage to survive. The war’s not over yet though, so maybe there’s still time right?” You pick up the portrait and look directly into Brenda’s face. “I don’t know if you still loved me near the end of everything, but I still loved you. Still do. Maybe I’ll be with you soon.” You say. You put down the portrait and lie down on your bed. You won’t get a good night’s sleep, but you don’t need it. You just need a quick recharge before you go back to the business of war. The next couple of day pass and you’re ready for your final push. You have no idea if you’ll actually succeed in driving out the Eternal Dominion, but you’re ready to put an end to this one way or another. You lead the battalions to the north. When you arrive to the frontlines, you receive a report that Fort Glory completely collapsed and killed a couple of companies of eternals that were planning their next move from there. Kobolds took advantage of the chaos and finished off the wounded. Captain Yasil’s mission was also somewhat successful, you see the smoke in the distance from the main ED camp. The smell of gunpowder from the cannons lingers in the air; hundreds of trenches are filled with the living and the dead on both sides. You heard that this is how the battlefield looked when the Empire fought the Felkan Kingdom, seems like this is going to be standard for war, until something else changes in the way people kill others. You remember when things were much simpler though. The funny thing is that the Felkan Kingdom is despite being accustomed to this sort of fighting and more technologically advanced, they’re apparently having a much worse time holding off the Eternal Dominion than you have, though you imagine that they’re getting more of the brunt of the combat. You are approached by several of your officers; they say their respective companies are ready to advance, if you give the word. You nod and tell them the attack will commence. You watch as thousands of your soldiers run forward to kill and die for you. If there has always been one consistency with you, is you ability is muster up a shitload of people to do that, even when you’re not popular. And you’re REALLY not popular with the average Nalin citizen right now. But ungratefulness is something you’re used to. You experience the same thing in Rask, after you destroyed all the barbarian tribes. Peasants complain and know nothing of real sacrifice. Not like you do. The battle is going strong and a cannon ball from the other side even crashes a few feet away from you. One of your majors advises that you should step further back from the battle so you stay out of harm’s way. But maybe you don’t want to; in fact maybe you want to just end it all right now. > You stay where you are You tell you subordinate to fuck off and state that you’re not going to run away and cower in some tent. You’re going to observe and give assistance when necessary like a general should. He pleads with you once more, but you merely tell him that if he doesn’t get out of your face you’re going to kill him yourself. No sooner have you said that, a nearby explosion knocks you off your horse, which ends up falling on top of you as well. You feel a sharp numbness in your right leg, which is under the horse. You look over at the major who was speaking to you and half of his face has been blown off. You can’t hear a thing as the explosion has made you completely deaf though your hearing wasn’t the greatest with only one ear and all. Using all your strength you pull yourself out from underneath your horse, which is quite dead. A couple of your other officers see you and come to help pull you out and you see that your leg is broken to the point where the bone is coming through the skin. One of your lieutenants goes to stop the bleeding and she’s obviously yelling at others to get help, but you still can’t hear a thing. You can make out her saying something to you, probably that she’s going to put the bone back in place. You just nod quickly and shout at her to do it. She does and it’s one of the most excruciating things you’ve felt in a long time and you’ve had more than your share of wounds. It’s only through your own will power that you don’t scream out. While the lieutenant wraps up your leg with a splint, two others come with a stretcher. You don’t want to be helped up, but you are any way. “Standing up” straight you decline being put on the stretcher and insist that you’ll hop to the nearest horse if you have to. The female lieutenant says something to you while she continues to help prop you up, but you’re still deaf and can’t hear anything she’s saying. You can only guess it’s something about doing it for your own good. You aren’t going to be told what to do and you push her away, only to fall down. You curse and yell at your weakness and begin to crawl away. You can only assume the rest of your staff is yelling at you back, but you can’t see their faces, your eyes are staring at dirt right now. You crawl for a moment and that’s when you start to hear something again. “Gen……..mu….now! C… on!” You feel several hands turn you around and your staff is intent on forcibly putting you on the stretcher. You don’t bother struggling because that’s when through your damaged hearing that you hear a distinct whistling sound. “Brenda, I...” You say before the explosive cannon ball wipes you all out.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>“Kill these fucking deserters and get me to the medic.” You say. The screams of the belzak deserters begging for their lives and death squeals fall on deaf ears…or rather ear as the case may be now. Eventually you manage to make it to the medic who immediately starts administering an antidote to you. You’re out of commission and very sick for a couple of days, but after which time you’re at least able to stand without feeling ill anymore. Your chewed off ear isn’t an excessive problem as you can still hear relatively well, still you do feel a sense of “loss.” In any event the expansionist eastern campaign is over. All the tribes have been either wiped out or subdued to the point of submissiveness. Brenda will be relieved to hear it, as you know she was always concerned about having most of the veteran troops there instead of the northern borders. She’ll also be pleased that there weren’t many losses overall. You’re satisfied with the results, though now you’re just wondering what you’re going to do with yourself again. Year 50 “Our defenses are strong in the north. Have been for years. No need to be concerned about that.” You say. “I know, but this is a big thing. I mean after all these years now Edgar wants to speak with us?” Brenda asks. “My reports say he’s gotten a lot more organized and isn’t dealing with anarchy in his ranks anymore. He even re-conquered the old core lands of the Empire. It could be that he wants to see how strong we really are. His message said he’s coming alone without anyone else.” “Well, maybe that’s a good sign. Maybe he just wants to talk.” “Or maybe he wants to kill us both to a great show of strength so Nalin will capitulate with minimum fuss.” You point out. “Yeah…there is that tactic. (sigh) Well I guess we all knew this day was coming. Guess I better practice my combat skills., which sadly have probably declined from lack of use. Would you spar with me?” “Of course. Don’t worry, I’m sure you’re not that out of practice.” You remark. You and Brenda go to her personal training room where you and her prepare to spar. Brenda makes a few remarks about this being like the old days when Mistress made you fight each other. Brenda mentions the time when you broke Gerald’s arm and Kane’s nose when she pit them both against you. “Yeah, I remember that. That was my first match. Mistress had it in for me after I begged for my life. I was always pretty aggressive after that, well at least until Gruz told me I should master my anger better, and I did…anyway let’s get on with this.” You say not really wanting to think about those days or any of the names mentioned. Brenda isn’t quite as skilled as you remember her to be and she has indeed let her talents decline. Then again as you remember she always was more skilled with the bow. Something you never quite got the hang of yourself. You begin to get more in a “drill instructor mode” and shout commands at her to watch her techniques. “Alright, alright, I told you I was out of practice.” She shouts back. “Well you shouldn’t have let it get this bad in the first place.” You say. After this remark, Brenda begins to get a little annoyed, which of course means she makes even more mistakes. “Brenda, come on I know you’re better than this! Focus!” “I am!” “Well prove it!” “Well, I’m sorry I’m not the fucking lord of war that you are!” “You don’t need to be me, you just need to be an Eternal!” “What the hell for? The Empire is fucking dead and we’ve just been upkeeping a parody of it for the past fifteen years! I don’t even know what I’m doing trying to run this fucking country anymore! I never wanted this! I…I just wanted…to spend the rest of my…(sob) life with Roldan…(sob)” At this point Brenda sits down on the floor and completely breaks down in tears. You can honestly say you weren’t expecting this. “Brenda…” “I’m sorry, but I can’t be the Eternal you are. I can’t even be the Eternal that Edgar is. I lost that edge when I fell in love. I wasn’t supposed to and neither was Roldan! If we hadn’t been so weak, he’d still be alive and…” “Dammit Brenda, you can’t keep blaming yourself for his death! Your relationship and whatever feelings you had for each other had nothing to do with some insane asshole blowing him up. What’s bringing this all on? Edgar? I think you’re worrying about him more than you need to. I mean for all we know he just wants play catch up and even if he doesn’t we’re going to be ready for him and his army of half assed Eternals…” Brenda shakes her head and tries to compose herself. “No, it’s not Edgar. It’s you.” “Me? What do you mean? Out with it.” “I…I think I’ve developed the same kind of feelings for you that I did for Roldan.” Brenda says. Another surprise for you today, not exactly the best timing with all that’s coming up soon. “…Uh…I don’t know what to say…I guess…I mean…are you sure?” you ask. “I think I’d know. It’s been building up slowly over time. At first I was just happy to have you around, another Eternal to talk to. Sure you weren’t Roldan, and you’re certainly less fun loving than he could be, but there was that familiar bond. Then when you were so instrumental in helping to keep order in this place, I remembered why we all admired and respected you as a leader so much back in the day. It also began to remind me of how Roldan and I complimented each other in keeping order here during the days of the Empire. You were bringing the memories of those good old days back and making them reality again.” “You probably just still miss him and are transferring those feelings.” “I thought so too, which is why I didn’t do anything before. In fact I was feeling guilty about it, I thought I was dishonoring Roldan’s memory. Wasn’t until I heard about your close call with death during your campaign in the east that I knew it was more than mere transference. I was so happy that you were still alive, I nearly told you how I felt when you came back. I just didn’t think you suffered from such weaknesses and I wanted to remain strong because your respect was more important than my silly attractions.” You don’t have much experience with any of this, but you need to say or do something make Brenda feel better. “Brenda, you’ll always have my respect. As for anything between us, I never thought about it because I figured you’d always be carrying a torch for Roldan. I’m not opposed to the idea however. I mean we do have much in common and contrary to popular belief, I’m not quite the unfeeling golem that most consider me to be. I do have feelings, even if I don’t show them a lot and I would’ve thought you knew that.” “I know you do, but you’re in control of them or you at least direct them better. I worry that if by some chance something would to occur between us, that you would lose your edge. I don’t want you to become weaker or distracted because of me. You’re needed as you are now.” You’re about to reply, and then there’s a knock on the door. “Sorry to disturb your training, but I’ve been told that the leader of the Eternal Dominion has been spotted at the northern border. He’s on a horse by himself, and several soldiers are already escorting him to Fort Glory. Did you want to meet him there or did you want us to escort him all the way to the capital?” a voice asks from behind the door. The pair of you didn’t expect him this soon, let alone be in the middle of the discussion you’re having now. You’d probably both like to wrap this up before having to focus on Edgar, though the question is if you’d have enough time to do it anyway. > You let the soldiers escort Edgar to the capital Edgar can wait, you need to wrap this up now, or at least get some sort of temporary closure on this situation. “Bring Edgar here, it won’t hurt him to ride a little longer!” you yell before turning your attention back to Brenda. “Okay, we’ve got a little more time and that’s all I need. Stop worrying about me, I’m not going to suddenly turn into some love sick idiot that can’t think things through if we have a deeper relationship! My question is, do you want one with me? Do you genuinely feel that strongly for me?” “Yes, I do.” Brenda says. “Then we shouldn’t avoid how we feel.” You reply and kiss Brenda. Brenda kisses you back and the pair of you give in to your physical desires. You’re both at it so long you lose track of time and you’re interrupted again with another knock at the door. “Erm, I hate to disturb you again, but I’ve just received word that general Edgar was attacked on the road by fanatics opposing our talks with the Eternal Dominion. We don’t even know what’s happened to him and soldiers are…” “WHAT?!” you shout. “Fuck, hold on!” In exasperation you get dressed as fast as you can and Brenda does likewise. You’re cursing the entire time, Brenda says nothing, but you can imagine that she’s already starting to blame herself for this. You question the advisor on what he’s heard and he mentions that Edgar and his escort were ambushed near the village of Helas. Apparently nobody even saw it coming, the guards that were assigned to escort had several crossbow bolts in their bodies. Edgar must’ve put up a fight since there were some of the assassins found dead at the scene, though no sign of him. There was a blood trail, but it disappeared after a half of mile or so. So far none of the villagers from Helas have been incredibly helpful, which pretty much indicates that most of them must’ve known about it. Brenda orders a complete search of the area, while you press forward to interrogating the entire village of Helas. You don’t have too much success and just find out how much the inhabitants really don’t like the idea Nalin becoming friendly with the Eternal Dominion. They assume if that happens then you’ll start lording it over them like the Eternals do in the Dominion (as opposed to the “nice” way you do it now) After executing half of the village, you proceed with the search, but you still can’t find any trace of Edgar. You suspect that he’s covering his tracks and making his way back home. You can’t allow that to happen, because if he does, he’s going to declare war on you probably believing this to be a set up, and while that may happen anyway, you’d at least like to try to convince him that it wasn’t. Or failing that, depriving the Eternal Dominion of their leader… You order double the amount of troops along the northern borders; you’re going to need them there regardless of what happens. Brenda and you have a long argument about how your feelings lead to this situation. Brenda of course says that it just proves her right and that you need to put an end to the relationship. You get to the point where you’re too frustrated with her to argue anymore and perhaps in some small way she has a point so you ultimately agree and say it’s business from here on out. A couple months pass and still no word on Edgar either. You aren’t exactly ready to declare him dead, but if he was still alive and managed to make it back to the Eternal Dominion, it really seems like he would’ve declared war on you by now. As it stands you haven’t heard a word from them. They haven’t even sent any threatening messengers asking about their leader (you assume he told them he was going to visit you). You chalk it up to whatever selfish power grab they probably got going on. Still there’s always the possibility they could attack even with disorganized leadership. However it isn’t really Edgar or the ED that you’re worried about, things are obviously strained with Brenda. Brenda and you barely even meet in person anymore and you mainly stay at Fort Glory. She’s been delegating a lot of responsibility to her staff and become increasingly withdrawn. You attempt to reach out to her, but she doesn’t respond positively and just requests that you leave her alone. From what her advisors tell you, she spends most of her time staring and talking to a portrait of Roldan a lot and constantly re-reading love letters he wrote to her. Mostly apologizing for straying from him and being responsible for his death. You step in to take up the slack of rulership, and there aren’t too many objections though things in Nalin haven’t exactly been the most calm as far as civil obedience goes lately. Year 51 “…and so I’m sorry. I’m sorry that my weakness diminished your strength. Even though we didn’t go through with a closer relationship, I know you were continuing to worry about me. I couldn’t let you be distracted with lesser concerns. I saw that happen with Roldan, and I wouldn’t let it happen to you too. I think this will be for the best. I feel like I’ve just been walking through a parody of life ever since Roldan died and I think you know that I was growing weary of rulership anyway. Assuming Edgar is indeed dead, I guess this will make you the last of the original Eternals. I guess what you once told me what Captain Gruz’s last words were are true. You outlived everyone. Thank you for your company and making the last fifteen years much more bearable, I wish you well in whatever your future plans are, but I’m going to be with my beloved Roldan now. May you always remain the paragon of the Empire that you are. Love Brenda You knew it was only a matter of time and you suspected it was coming, but perhaps this is the only way it could’ve been. Apparently she hadn’t been happy for a long time, still, you wish that things could’ve been different. Maybe you didn’t exactly have a relationship with Brenda like Roldan did, but you did have one of sorts for the past fifteen years and now you definitely feel a great sense of loss because she’s gone. However, life goes on. After shedding a few tears in private and composing yourself, you fold the letter and put it with the rest of your personal belongings. You then make arrangements for her funeral, which is a small one. You have her body burned outside Fort Glory since you know that she had Roldan’s body burned outside the fort as well. It only seems fitting. You officially take over as sole ruler of Nalin unsure of what the future may hold. > Year 56 “Sir, you want us to completely wipe out all settlements with the plague?” Colonel Gemma asks. “That’s what I said isn’t it? I’ve already assigned all the medics, healers and hedge wizards in the land to focus on the less affected areas. As for those places really bad off kill all the people, cleanse the area with fire, no more problem.” “But, you’re going to have mass riots! The people will protest, even soldiers! I mean some of their families are in the quarantined areas!” “Well I guess you better have those soldiers executed then if you think they’ll be a problem. In fact I’m surprised to hear you balk from these orders, I remember you when you were a young soldier wiping out Belzak women and children without hesitation.” “I…I’m not sir, I’m just concerned about the repercussions of potentially losing more of our army.” “You let me worry about the repercussions! Look here’s what you do, gather up all the old guard such as yourself to carry out this plan. In fact get those elves I made into orphans during the tribal wars. I’m guessing they should be good and obedient soldiers by now, but they probably won’t hesitate to murder some defenseless humans. The plague doesn’t seem to be affecting non-humans as much anyway, so they’re probably more resistant. In fact gather some of those kobolds too; they can clear out the bodies. Those little bastards seem to be immune altogether. That’s all for now.” Gemma nods and takes her leave. You have more concerns today, but you’re delegating them to the advisors as usual. If it isn’t a problem that can be solved by force, you’re not very interested in it. Brenda was right; ruling is a pain in the ass. When she was alive, you still had the “fun” part to focus on, now you have to do it all. This latest plague is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in years. Still can’t figure out how and where it originated from though. A passing thought was it might be saboteurs from the Eternal Dominion, but they’ve been fighting amongst themselves ever since Edgar died. Never did find his body. You still wonder exactly what it was he wanted to discuss with you and Brenda. An alliance perhaps? A threat to submit? You’ll never know. The nation of Nalin has become a lot more totalitarian under your rule. You’ve actually made it even more “Empire like” than it already was mostly because it’s what you know, but also because it makes you at least feel like things are how they “should be”. Lately though even that hasn’t helped your mindset. You’ve become increasingly bored with just plain ruling, and after this plague nonsense is taken care of, you’re thinking of doing something to shake things up a bit. The obvious idea is to expand again, specifically aggressive expansion into Eternal Dominion territory. It’s been too long since you’ve experienced a good fight. The other idea you’ve had is one you probably wouldn’t have considered again, but at this point any change would be welcome. You’ve thought about just leaving. Leaving everything behind and the region entirely. > You expand You left the Empire behind because you no longer believed in it. Nalin has become a kind of substitute for it though and ever since Brenda died, you’ve tried to make it even more like the Empire. This may be the closest you’re going to get back to the “good old days” and with age ever creeping up on you, you need to make the best of things and not wallow in indecision or hesitation. You’re the last of the real Eternals and you’re going to act as such. Nalin WILL become the new Empire. After a few months of putting out some of the backlash of how you handled the plague, you make your plans for expansion. You also fully intend overseeing it personally. The first round of conquests go well. The disorganized Eternals and their slaves don’t give you too much trouble; indeed some of the population welcomes your intervention. Most of the new generations of Eternals have been so excessively cruel that their subjects are willing to accept any other tyrant as an improvement, even if it’s another Eternal. Eventually you do hit a brick wall of sorts, the remaining Eternals realize they need to unite against you. The Eternal Dominion is more advanced technology wise (having stolen ideas and equipment from the Felkan Kingdom), though through your initial conquests, you’ve made steps to try to close the gap in the availability of gunpower-based weapons for your own soldiers. Still, even with the current stand off with the Eternal Dominion, you victories restore some of the appreciation of your citizens in Nalin who are probably just glad your violence is focused on others for a change. The balance of power has been shifted enough for the Felkan Kingdom to take greater notice of you too, especially since now your territory borders some of their own. They send one of their own to speak to you, while you’re currently at a conquered ED Fort making plans for your next attack. To your surprise one of their own, is also one of your own too, or as least was at one time. “Warrick?” you ask. He’s obviously older, has a missing eye and no hair, but you still recognize him despite your near disbelief. “Yes, it’s me…see you’re missing a few body parts as well.” He says causing you to touch where your ear used to be. Sometimes you even forget that it’s missing. “Well you know how it is…but I thought you were dead! I mean I’d heard…how is it that you’re working for the Felkan Kingdom now?” “That’s a long story, but let’s just say I found my own path, like I see you found yours. Which is sort of why I’m here.” Warrick mentions to you that the Felkan Kingdom has been expecting an attack from the Eternal Dominion for more than a decade, even after the disappearance of their leader Edgar. However, now that the ED seems to be no longer a potential threat they’re worried about Nalin invading, perhaps even more so since you seem to be a more organized potential threat. “Well, you can tell your king or whoever, that I’m not interested in the Felkan Kingdom. The Nalin Empire isn’t in a position to attack such a powerful nation at this time.” “At this time…that implies that you might later.” “Heh, well you might be right, just as I might believe that you’re planning on attack us.” “True, and while you probably will rightfully remain suspicious, the Felkan Kingdom has no interest in conquest. Especially not right now. I probably shouldn’t tell you this, but we’re still dealing with a massive gnoll invasion that hit our land years ago. Fighting another war isn’t something we want right now.” “Hmm, you’re right, you shouldn’t be giving vital intelligence away like that. This new information gives me an advantage. Knowing that you aren’t as powerful as I once thought, I may very well attack you now.” “Well I suppose you’ll do what you have to then, but if you’re still the leader I know you to be, you won’t. You don’t want to fight a war on two fronts either.” Warrick says in an unconcerned tone. “Ha ha! And you would be correct! But enough about power struggles, let’s talk for a moment just as Eternals.” Warrick’s tale of how he came to be in the service of the Felkan Kingdom is a little sketchy. He mentions that during the last days of the Empire he was still under orders to perform his usual sabotaging missions. He says that he managed to integrate himself in their favor by rescuing some of the royal family who were apparently in the wrong place at the wrong time. Children actually. He says he doesn’t remember all of it exactly though except there was a big explosion and the next thing he knew when he woke up is that he was missing an eye and was given a job. Already knowing how the Empire was beginning to crumble he accepted. You proceed to tell Warrick about your time since the Empire fell. He listens intently as you go on about the various thoughts you’ve gone through since that time. You mention Edgar to him, which interests him greatly. He says the Felkan government assumed that he was killed by one of his own men in a power struggle. He asks if you ever found his body or any evidence of his death. You tell him you never did, for all you know he still got killed by one of his own men, assuming he had managed to get back to the Eternal Dominion. You also mention Brenda. Warrick displays a bit of sadness when he hears the whole story, and you sort of relive some of that sadness as well. It hasn’t been that long since she died after all. “So, we’re really the last two left then?” Warrick says. “Looks that way, though to be honest I thought you’d been dead for years. Glad to see you’re still around.” “Even if we may be enemies one day?” “We’re Eternals. The originals. We’ll always have a bond that nobody else will and if we should end up on opposite ends of the battlefield it still doesn’t change that. Assuming that day ever comes and we’re both still in fighting condition, seek me out as I shall seek you out and we’ll settle things in the only way they can be.” Warrick nods at your proposal and is silent for a moment as if deep in thought. He then eventually gets up and tells you he has to leave. He mentions that he’ll tell his superiors that the Nalin Empire has no hostile intentions towards the Felkan Kingdom at this time. The pair of you shake hands and part company, possibly knowing if you ever do see each other again, it won’t be on friendly terms. Still, there is a small bit of you that was happy to see an old comrade again. You return to the business of waging war on the pathetic remains of the Eternal Dominion. Year 65 “Sir, you are incredibly lucky that the sword didn’t hit any vital organs and just pierced the top layer of muscle.” Lieutenant Davis says as he applies a mixture of some salve to the wound. “Agh! Yeah, lucky me. Just patch me up, I want to finish off these wannabes once and for all.” You say wincing at the burning sensation of the ointment working to seal the wound. “General, victory is assured, is it really necessary for you personally be involved in the combat? Your military expertise is better served as the mind. Colonel Gemma says she’s got a handle on things.” “Yeah, well if she’s got such a handle on things, why did I have to save her ass at the Battle of Julk Pass? And what’s this shit about my military expertise is better served with my mind? You’re lucky I don’t have you executed for saying shit like that! I was killing werebeasts, orcs and other shit you ain’t even heard about before you were even a twinkle in your parent’s eyes! I’m still every bit of a warrior as I… ah shit! My fucking head!” you suddenly shout and lie back down on the table. A couple of other medical types apply something cold to your head saying that you need to rest. The plate they put in your head from the bullet wound needs to be “adjusted.” You grudgingly comply and close your eyes. You hate this weakness. Old age, the only enemy you can’t outmaneuver, regardless of how hard you try. Death isn’t something you’ve ever been afraid of, indeed part of you never expected to even live this long. But death by old age? Natural causes? That’s something you never even seriously considered before, even if it was in the back of your mind. If you continue your insistence on believing you’re still in your twenties, you’re going to die on the battlefield. You know that, and you’re okay with that idea, but part of you wonders if it’s just foolish to throw your life away over being stubborn when you could still live and do more with you life. The Nalin Empire is thriving and you’ve almost conquered the Eternal Dominion which means you effectively restored most of the old Empire. A feat Edgar was probably trying to accomplish no doubt, but much like him, if you died suddenly, who knows how long it would last before it crumbled. If you want to leave any sort of real legacy, you would most likely have to step back now and begin to make preparations for a line of succession and you’d need a lot of time to do that to sort out all the details. This would mean you’d no longer be able to take such a personal approach to war again. Your days as a warrior would effectively be over and you’d be back to the drudgery of bureaucratic rulership again. You have to take a long look at yourself and decide now, if that’s what your fate is going to be. > You continue to lead by example You spend the rest of the day in your personal tent still recovering from your last battle thinking about your situation. Your head still hurts from where part of your skull was replaced with a crude metal plate and your body aches all over as it has been for years. You’re nearly deaf in your one working ear. You’ve got scars all over your face and body. You even have a couple of missing fingertips now. Yet for good or ill, you’re going to at least see this war through to its end. You have to be hands on when it comes to battle. You were raised to be a warrior, a killer, and an instrument of war. There have been times you’ve had stray thoughts on a different life, but ultimately it’s always come back to war. You weren’t meant to be an old man who dies on his throne either through natural causes or assassination, and you definitely weren’t meant to find a love and live happily ever after. You are an Eternal and you were meant to die in battle. Whatever happens afterwards is of minor importance. The next morning you muster up all your strength and stand. You’re a little wobbly, but you manage it and step outside. Several of your staff urges you to rest, but you ignore their concerns. You plan your attack on the “Eternal City” with your top staff. It was once the capital of the Empire, now it’s the last stand of the Eternal Dominion. At this point there really isn’t too much strategy involved. You just plan on blowing up the walls and storming the place with as many soldiers as possible. You remark that when the walls are down, you’ll be leading the first assault. “General! You can’t be serious! I understand you want to be involved in the battle, but this is going too far! You know very well the battalion that goes in first is going to suffer the most losses.” Colonel Gemma exclaims. “It won’t if I’m leading it.” You say. “However, when I fall, you’re next in line. I trust you know what to do. ALL of you know what you’re supposed to do.” This remark causes a dead silence among your staff. You didn’t even say IF you fall, you said WHEN you fall. You realize this and collect your thoughts in what you believe to be your last speech to all of them. “(Sigh) Look, I’m tired. I’m old. I got more scars than all of you put together. I’m missing portions of my body. I’m in constant pain and I got a fucking plate in my head. I appreciate all the service you’ve given in the past few years and in some cases decades. Your concern for my life is noted, but I know it’s time. I’ve lived a satisfying life. I won’t say good, because I’ve been through enough shit to know that isn’t true, but I can say it had its good moments. And I fully intend on making my last moments on earth satisfying as well by leading all of you to victory before it’s all over. So! You all have your orders, and if I’m wrong about my impending death…well I’ll see you all in the palace when this is over and you all can taunt me for being an overly dramatic old man. One taunt per person of course.” This last remark lightens the mood enough for a couple of them to smile. One even manages to give a small chuckle. You figure even if you don’t believe it, you should try to keep morale up. The attack on the city commences. It won’t really take long to bring the walls down. Never thought the day would come where you’d actually be attacking this place. It’s funny, in all the years you served the Empire, you never once set foot into it’s capital, let alone the Emperor’s palace. You sometimes wonder what exactly happened to the Emperor when the Empire fell. Was he killed? Did he escape? Was there really ever an Emperor at all? It’s all irrelevant now you suppose. After a couple days of bombardment by catapults and cannons you at last breach the walls enough that the opening cannot be repaired quick enough. That’s when you make your move. “ATTACK!” you shout while galloping forward with your horse, which is shaking you enough to make every bone in your body ache. You’ve never really liked riding horses, but if you want to be the first one in the city, you need the speed, because running just isn’t something you do much anymore. You get closer and closer to the city nearly getting blown to pieces in the process by the cannon fire. How you aren’t shot off your horse by a stray bullet is short of amazing. It’s just as well you’re nearly deaf, you doubt if you could stand the noise of the explosions if you weren’t. You reach the wall breach and it is there your horse rears up from the wall of pikes held by the enemy. This temporarily saves its life, but a few shots are fired and the beast makes one last neigh before collapsing. You are also hit in the leg by one of these shots, but you fortunately manage to avoid having the horse land on you when you’re thrown from it. Sensing that you’re an easy target some the enemy soldiers break their formation and attempt to attack you while you’re down, but you’re far from being out of this fight. Ignoring the pain, you stand up and meet your attackers head on, easily slaying them. You then proceed to fight your way through the breach just before the rest of your soldiers reach it to help you. The bodies of the dead surround you and the streets are quite literally running red with blood. The mixture of gunpowder and death fills your lungs when you breathe deeply and it smells a hell of a lot better than that poison cloud that Slin witch inflicted on you years ago. Limping around on one good leg, you help out the rest of your soldiers who are a little faster than you now in engaging the enemy. You tell them all to take the palace, a lot of them shout back at you, but you can only really read their lips due to the noise and your bad hearing. The Eternal Dominion’s last stand has them pulling out all the stops for this battle, at one point you find yourself facing a large group of orc troops in heavy armor and a single battle mage desperately trying to defend the gates of the palace. It’s been a while since you’ve faced either of these enemies, but you’re not going to run at this late stage. Your soldiers engage the orcs and you try to focus on the battle mage who is chanting something, a couple of shots are fired at him, but whatever magic barrier he has up blocks them. When you reach him, his eyes turn completely red and a ring of flame suddenly emanates from him burning you and several others nearby. You fall to the palace steps trying to put the flames out and after managing to do so you realize you’re now blind in one eye and the other eye sees a statue outside the palace beginning to move. “Fuck, he’s bringing it to life.” You say to yourself. Your body then feels a heavy mace blow to your left arm shattering several bones in it. It’s quite possible that you would die right there if not for a fellow soldier killing the orc that attacked you. Somebody helps you up and you’re feeling nearly delirious at this point. Someone shouts about you bleeding from the head, but you can’t really hear them, you’re still focused on the mattle mage, who has nearly brought the statue to life. Fighting through the pain as usual, you rush at the mage, even knocking an orc down in the process. The barrier doesn’t stop non-projectiles and you easily tackle him. He tries to cast a spell, but is unable to when you shove your armored fist into his mouth. As he chokes on his own blood and teeth, you pull part of his tongue out and then smash his skull open on the palace steps painting them with his brains. Whatever magic that was about to power the statue dies with him and it stops moving. You stand back up with great effort, one of your soldiers shouts something about getting into the palace and you just nod and limp your way inside. Victory is at hand. You step inside the palace and even in the midst of this carnage it is certainly impressive. You can only imagine what it looked like at the height of the Empire’s might. Several of your soldiers engage the last remaining hold outs, but you just wander about looking at the palace. You feel sort of odd, like almost delirious, but you try to ignore it. It has been a tiring day after all. You see the skirmishing going on in the hallways and rooms, but you’re looking for something in particular, the throne room. You eventually find it, and surprisingly it’s empty. A couple of vases and banner have been knocked to the floor, but other than that, it’s in relatively good condition. You gaze upon the single impressive platinum throne at the back and approach it. You feel a sudden sense of accomplishment and pride in your deeds. You’re also still feeling woozy and you collapse to one knee, but some how it seems appropriate. “I see. The Emperor…he was still watching…he was always watching…I’ve passed the test.” You says to yourself staring at the floor. You then look up at the empty throne. “I have restored the Empire. I have restored its glory. I will take my place with you soon.” You say and then pass out, never to wake up.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>You left the Empire behind because you no longer believed in it. Nalin has become a kind of substitute for it though and ever since Brenda died, you’ve tried to make it even more like the Empire. This may be the closest you’re going to get back to the “good old days” and with age ever creeping up on you, you need to make the best of things and not wallow in indecision or hesitation. You’re the last of the real Eternals and you’re going to act as such. Nalin WILL become the new Empire. After a few months of putting out some of the backlash of how you handled the plague, you make your plans for expansion. You also fully intend overseeing it personally. The first round of conquests go well. The disorganized Eternals and their slaves don’t give you too much trouble; indeed some of the population welcomes your intervention. Most of the new generations of Eternals have been so excessively cruel that their subjects are willing to accept any other tyrant as an improvement, even if it’s another Eternal. Eventually you do hit a brick wall of sorts, the remaining Eternals realize they need to unite against you. The Eternal Dominion is more advanced technology wise (having stolen ideas and equipment from the Felkan Kingdom), though through your initial conquests, you’ve made steps to try to close the gap in the availability of gunpower-based weapons for your own soldiers. Still, even with the current stand off with the Eternal Dominion, you victories restore some of the appreciation of your citizens in Nalin who are probably just glad your violence is focused on others for a change. The balance of power has been shifted enough for the Felkan Kingdom to take greater notice of you too, especially since now your territory borders some of their own. They send one of their own to speak to you, while you’re currently at a conquered ED Fort making plans for your next attack. To your surprise one of their own, is also one of your own too, or as least was at one time. “Warrick?” you ask. He’s obviously older, has a missing eye and no hair, but you still recognize him despite your near disbelief. “Yes, it’s me…see you’re missing a few body parts as well.” He says causing you to touch where your ear used to be. Sometimes you even forget that it’s missing. “Well you know how it is…but I thought you were dead! I mean I’d heard…how is it that you’re working for the Felkan Kingdom now?” “That’s a long story, but let’s just say I found my own path, like I see you found yours. Which is sort of why I’m here.” Warrick mentions to you that the Felkan Kingdom has been expecting an attack from the Eternal Dominion for more than a decade, even after the disappearance of their leader Edgar. However, now that the ED seems to be no longer a potential threat they’re worried about Nalin invading, perhaps even more so since you seem to be a more organized potential threat. “Well, you can tell your king or whoever, that I’m not interested in the Felkan Kingdom. The Nalin Empire isn’t in a position to attack such a powerful nation at this time.” “At this time…that implies that you might later.” “Heh, well you might be right, just as I might believe that you’re planning on attack us.” “True, and while you probably will rightfully remain suspicious, the Felkan Kingdom has no interest in conquest. Especially not right now. I probably shouldn’t tell you this, but we’re still dealing with a massive gnoll invasion that hit our land years ago. Fighting another war isn’t something we want right now.” “Hmm, you’re right, you shouldn’t be giving vital intelligence away like that. This new information gives me an advantage. Knowing that you aren’t as powerful as I once thought, I may very well attack you now.” “Well I suppose you’ll do what you have to then, but if you’re still the leader I know you to be, you won’t. You don’t want to fight a war on two fronts either.” Warrick says in an unconcerned tone. “Ha ha! And you would be correct! But enough about power struggles, let’s talk for a moment just as Eternals.” Warrick’s tale of how he came to be in the service of the Felkan Kingdom is a little sketchy. He mentions that during the last days of the Empire he was still under orders to perform his usual sabotaging missions. He says that he managed to integrate himself in their favor by rescuing some of the royal family who were apparently in the wrong place at the wrong time. Children actually. He says he doesn’t remember all of it exactly though except there was a big explosion and the next thing he knew when he woke up is that he was missing an eye and was given a job. Already knowing how the Empire was beginning to crumble he accepted. You proceed to tell Warrick about your time since the Empire fell. He listens intently as you go on about the various thoughts you’ve gone through since that time. You mention Edgar to him, which interests him greatly. He says the Felkan government assumed that he was killed by one of his own men in a power struggle. He asks if you ever found his body or any evidence of his death. You tell him you never did, for all you know he still got killed by one of his own men, assuming he had managed to get back to the Eternal Dominion. You also mention Brenda. Warrick displays a bit of sadness when he hears the whole story, and you sort of relive some of that sadness as well. It hasn’t been that long since she died after all. “So, we’re really the last two left then?” Warrick says. “Looks that way, though to be honest I thought you’d been dead for years. Glad to see you’re still around.” “Even if we may be enemies one day?” “We’re Eternals. The originals. We’ll always have a bond that nobody else will and if we should end up on opposite ends of the battlefield it still doesn’t change that. Assuming that day ever comes and we’re both still in fighting condition, seek me out as I shall seek you out and we’ll settle things in the only way they can be.” Warrick nods at your proposal and is silent for a moment as if deep in thought. He then eventually gets up and tells you he has to leave. He mentions that he’ll tell his superiors that the Nalin Empire has no hostile intentions towards the Felkan Kingdom at this time. The pair of you shake hands and part company, possibly knowing if you ever do see each other again, it won’t be on friendly terms. Still, there is a small bit of you that was happy to see an old comrade again. You return to the business of waging war on the pathetic remains of the Eternal Dominion. Year 65 “Sir, you are incredibly lucky that the sword didn’t hit any vital organs and just pierced the top layer of muscle.” Lieutenant Davis says as he applies a mixture of some salve to the wound. “Agh! Yeah, lucky me. Just patch me up, I want to finish off these wannabes once and for all.” You say wincing at the burning sensation of the ointment working to seal the wound. “General, victory is assured, is it really necessary for you personally be involved in the combat? Your military expertise is better served as the mind. Colonel Gemma says she’s got a handle on things.” “Yeah, well if she’s got such a handle on things, why did I have to save her ass at the Battle of Julk Pass? And what’s this shit about my military expertise is better served with my mind? You’re lucky I don’t have you executed for saying shit like that! I was killing werebeasts, orcs and other shit you ain’t even heard about before you were even a twinkle in your parent’s eyes! I’m still every bit of a warrior as I… ah shit! My fucking head!” you suddenly shout and lie back down on the table. A couple of other medical types apply something cold to your head saying that you need to rest. The plate they put in your head from the bullet wound needs to be “adjusted.” You grudgingly comply and close your eyes. You hate this weakness. Old age, the only enemy you can’t outmaneuver, regardless of how hard you try. Death isn’t something you’ve ever been afraid of, indeed part of you never expected to even live this long. But death by old age? Natural causes? That’s something you never even seriously considered before, even if it was in the back of your mind. If you continue your insistence on believing you’re still in your twenties, you’re going to die on the battlefield. You know that, and you’re okay with that idea, but part of you wonders if it’s just foolish to throw your life away over being stubborn when you could still live and do more with you life. The Nalin Empire is thriving and you’ve almost conquered the Eternal Dominion which means you effectively restored most of the old Empire. A feat Edgar was probably trying to accomplish no doubt, but much like him, if you died suddenly, who knows how long it would last before it crumbled. If you want to leave any sort of real legacy, you would most likely have to step back now and begin to make preparations for a line of succession and you’d need a lot of time to do that to sort out all the details. This would mean you’d no longer be able to take such a personal approach to war again. Your days as a warrior would effectively be over and you’d be back to the drudgery of bureaucratic rulership again. You have to take a long look at yourself and decide now, if that’s what your fate is going to be. > You retire your sword Your head still hurts from where part of your skull was replaced with a crude metal plate and your body aches all over as it has been for years. You’re nearly deaf in your one working ear. You’ve got scars all over your face and body. You even have a couple of missing fingertips now. Even if you did go into battle again, you probably wouldn’t even make it to the city. You’ve finally realized that your days of battle are over, or at least over on any meaningful level. It’s a sobering thought and not one you’re happy with, but if you’re going to truly re-establish the Empire or have a reasonable successor nation, then you’re going to have to step back from the battlefield. The next day you call in your top staff and tell them that you will indeed pull yourself out of the final push on to the “Eternal City”, they all of course agree with your decision and state they are glad to hear you’ve made it. You tell them all what you want done still as far as the attack is concerned and you also say you aren’t going to be running off the battlefield just yet, as you still want to oversee things from a distance at least. There really isn’t too much strategy in the scheme of things. You plan on breaching the wall with cannons and catapults and then your soldiers will kill everything hostile within. Simple enough. You watch from outside your tent when the attack commences, hours pass and everything is going as planned and then your head begins to hurt once again. Cursing, you go back inside to lie down for a while. After a few minutes you begin to feel better, but now you’re tired. If your hearing was better you probably wouldn’t be able to fall asleep, but as it is, the faint sounds of the cannons and battle aren’t enough to keep you awake. You figure a small nap won’t hurt, so you allow yourself to drift off. You begin to have a dream where you are back in Mistress’ classroom. Everything is the same except you’re the only one there and you’re five years old again. Mistress then walks into the room with a sneer on her face. “You disappoint me, but then I should’ve expected such weakness from one that begs for his life when faced with the possibility of death!” Mistress says to you. “I…” is all you get out before she kicks you in the chest and steps on you. You look up and see her cruelly smiling at you. “Silence! Did you learn nothing from me? You lack discipline! You always did! You’re weak and soft! That’s why your Empire fell! You think you can restore it? It’s gone! Just like most of your fellow Eternals and you’ll be next, if you don’t beg. Now do it! Beg!” “No…I…” you gasp. “What?! You dare disobey me?” Mistress shouts and ceases stepping on you for a moment to pick you up and slap you across the face. You slap her back and she throws you into a bunch of chairs. “Impudent whelp! You will learn to obey!” she yells and moves towards you. You scramble back and stand up. She approaches closer and you pick up a chair and attempt to hit her with it, but she grabs it and yanks it from your hands. “Nice try Eternal, but it’s too late for fighting back.” You try to get out of the way, but you feel hard wooden chair smashing into your body which is already bruised and sore from being thrown. You collapse on the floor and feel something wet dripping from your head. It’s blood. You are picked up and turned around by Mistress; she spits in your face and lifts you in the air. You can barely focus on her face as you’re feeling very dizzy. “Is this the best you can do? You couldn’t even land one hit on me and you’re trying to restore the Empire? You need to just let it die. Its time came and went just like yours did. Yet instead of letting go and dying with dignity you’re choosing to live as a parody of yourself ruling a parody of the Empire. Pathetic!” Mistress says and throws you, though you don’t hit a wall like you expect to, you just continue to fly backwards in the air and then someone catches you. “Oof! What the hell son, I’m not carrying you, you fight your own battles!” you hear Captain Gruz say and then he drops you to the floor. When you stand back up you’re a little bigger. You’re twelve and in Gruz’s training room. “Now listen, I know we had our differences, but don’t you listen to that svelk bitch, she’s just projecting her own failures onto you. I say go for it. I mean I think you know you can achieve anything you set your mind to. So what if you’re an old broken down warhorse now? You can still restore the Empire. The hard part is over! It’s just the boring part that you have to take care of, and if you start on it now, you might even take care of all of it before you die! But remember you have to work with others, for it to succeed! Now go on, and for the Emperor’s sake, let go of the fucking past, it doesn’t need to be perfect! Nothing ever is!” At this point Captain Gruz points to a door and you comply and grab the handle and pull the door towards you… “Sir! Sir! It’s just me!” Colonel Gemma shouts. You open your eyes and see her blurry image and your hand strongly grabbing her wrist. She probably was trying to wake you up and you instinctively reacted. Seeing that you’re not in danger you let her go. “What the hell’s going on?” you say sitting up and rubbing your head. “I just wanted to inform you that we won. The city is uh…ours.” “Hmm, what’s that hesitation in your voice?” “No hesitation, just well…” “Colonel, my head still hurts so I’m in no mood for your sputtering, now out with it!” “The city is ours and the enemy has been defeated, but I’m afraid that the city has been totally destroyed.” “Destroyed? What the fuck happened?” ‘There were some complications…sir…I…” You don’t let her finish; you get off you bed, push her aside and are blinded by the light when you open the tent. When you fell asleep it was mid-day, now the sun is coming up! Were you asleep the whole damn day? You look in the distance and see the Eternal City with heavy smoke rising from it. In fact there is a weird purple cloud hovering over part of it as well. You can’t even see any of the large towers anymore and it looks like the palace was trashed as well, if the destroyed domes and spires are any indication. So much for making this the new capital or even stepping foot into a place that you never even got to visit when you were serving the Empire. “Why the hell didn’t someone wake me?!” you shout. Several officers nearby are silent. Gemma once again attempts to explain that someone did, but you were in a deep sleep and thought you’d only be angry if you thought they couldn’t handle things. You look at her and the rest of your staff. Here they are scared of your next reaction and there are several of them and one of you. Some are in very fit condition and all of them are armed with firearms as well as close combat weapons. If they were all of the mind to overthrow you by putting several bullets in your body they could easily do it, and quite frankly you wouldn’t even blame them either. Yet somehow their mixture of fear and respect for you prevents them from doing so. This is what you have to work with and this is as good as it gets. It could be a lot worse. “(Sigh) Alright. You all did well and I’m proud of all of you. There’s going to be some changes in command structure, but we can get to that later. I want a carriage sent here to take me back to the capital, but before that I guess a small victory celebration is in order.” “General, you don’t want the Eternal City?” someone asks. “Well it would’ve been nice, but no. In fact just leave it; I don’t even want it rebuilt. It’s a relic of a past that’s long dead. The Nalin Empire doesn’t need it.” You go back in your tent to lay down while hearing the faint sounds of cheering of your staff and surviving soldiers outside. You drift off again and hope you have better dreams this time around. > Year 75 Another day of aches and pains, getting old sucks. After a couple of years of finally putting down the rest of the new Eternal hold outs, you’ve been spending most of your time restructuring the Nalin Empire’s command structure, economy, security and all the rest that goes with it. You haven’t done a bad job considering you were bred for war, not administration, then again you’ve been doing it in limited capacity for years, you just decided to totally focus on it for once and the results are excellent. While you still have the reputation for ruthlessness, you’ve managed to temper that a bit in last few years even with all the changes you’ve made. Most rulers would probably have to worry about coups or assassination attempts, but those haven’t been a problem due to the high amount of respect you’ve earned from the military. General Cynthia Gemma is officially your second in command, so if anything happens to you, she takes over. Though sometimes you wonder if you’ll outlive her given your knack of surviving. Warrick who was the only other Eternal left besides you died last year. Before he did, he sent a letter informing you that his final hours were upon him. He didn’t exactly say what was wrong, just that he felt the combination of his age and old wounds catching up to him. It wasn’t a long letter, just mostly him saying how he was glad he never had to fight you as he still respected you as a leader. The respect was mutual. Indeed it was one of the factors to as why you never attacked the Felkan Kingdom. You mourned his passing as you morn the passing of all your fellow Eternals. Most of them deserved better ends. All of them actually. And now here you are the last of not just your old comrades, but of your kind. The last words that Gruz once told you, have at last come true…you outlived everyone. Whether you were tougher, smarter, or luckier than the rest you don’t know. Maybe it was something by design when the Empire altered you. Maybe it was just common sense and the simple will to live. Though lately you’ve been wondering about “living.” You don’t have too many thrills left anymore and the constant pain you’re in, doesn’t make things any easier. You didn’t quite understand all of Brenda’s choice to end her life at the time, but as you’ve reflected on it again and again over the years you get it now and you’re starting to wonder if it’s time to join your fellows. Besides all you victories in battle, you’ve practically rebuilt the Empire. At least you have as best you could’ve done, all things considered and that’s no easy achievement. You have done enough for anyone to feel proud of doing and if you died now, there would be no shame. Still, part of you wonders if you’ve lived this long what else could you accomplish if you went on a little longer? Granted you could mess up your already strong reputation, but you could also go on to other great things. > You end your life If you were younger perhaps you’d go on to try to conquer the world, but that’s a task for other more energetic leaders than yourself. You’ve had your battles and won your victories, now it’s time for your hard earned rest. However you fully intend on going out the same way you lived and you call Gemma and all your closest staff to assemble in the throne room. You dress in your old Empire gear and ignore the constant pain as you slowly walk to meet them there. When you arrive, they’re all at attention and respectful as usual. You look them all over and sit down on your throne to rest before you go through with what you have planned. “My loyal staff and soldiers, the time has come for me to realize that I may no longer be in fit condition to properly lead you all anymore. I believe I have done a good job all these years, but a good leader also knows when his or her time is possibly at an end.” Your staff and some of the guards look a little surprised by your remark. They would probably verbally disagree with you, but they’ve grown accustomed to know when to speak and now is not the time. “I’m not just getting old, I’m a shell of my former self, I have been for quite some time. However there was still work that needed to be done, so I persevered through the pain and the stress to achieve my goal. And that has been accomplished, the Nalin Empire is now a worthy successor to the old Empire.” You take a long pause and stand up again. The ache of this action alone makes you glad you won’t have to go through it anymore soon. You slowly step towards your staff and address them. “I may no longer be fit to lead…but then again maybe I am. There is still battle lust that rages in these old bones. I will not just step down and live out some sort of feeble existence where I am only trotted out during celebrations or when advice is needed. I won’t be some ancient relic to be handled with sympathy or awe. No, if my reign is truly meant to end today then it shall be by combat. General Gemma draw your weapon.” You say and draw your sword. “Sir, I…” “I SAID DRAW YOUR WEAPON OR I’LL KILL YOU WHERE YOU STAND!” you demand. General Gemma draws her weapon and steps forward. You stand back and position yourself into your fighting stance. “Alright now the rest of you listen, if the good general here kills me, you follow her. If not, then you still follow me. It’s pretty easy. And as for you, defend yourself!” you shout and attack. Your swords clash and the battle commences. At first Cynthia seems to only be on the defense, as if she’s unwilling to harm you, let alone kill you. You can see it in her eyes that this isn’t a battle she wants to fight, not so much due to fear, but due to respect. Part of you understands her reluctance and you appreciate it, so you figure you need to push her a bit. “What’s the matter? Can’t beat an old man? Then again you’re no spring chicken yourself, perhaps I should’ve chosen a younger successor.” It’s not the cruelest thing you’ve ever said, but it does the job. Cynthia begins to go on the offensive. Pain wracks your body with every sword swing, but even with your battered body and slower reflexes you’re still proving to be a match for Cynthia. She’s not an unskilled warrior, she wouldn’t be in her position if she was, but even with a few more taunts you’re getting the impression she’s still holding back…either that or you’re still that good. Perhaps it’s a combination of both, because Cynthia leaves herself wide open for a killing blow that you could easily take advantage of. You don’t think she even did it intentionally; she’s just so upset at having to fight you that her head is not completely in the fight. Of course that’s never really ever been a problem for you even during the worst of conditions, and there were some bad ones. You realize that you’ll probably win this fight and you weren’t really expecting to. You nearly laugh at the absurdity that you may very well have to kill half your staff before one of them is able to take your position through combat, and that’ll only be because you’d be so tired by that point. If you were even ten years younger you could probably kill them all. But that isn’t your goal today. You goal was to go out in one last battle and if that means you’re going to have to “help” events along then so be it. You don’t take advantage of the opening, but you do leave one for Cynthia. One that she can’t ignore, though there is a split second of hesitation… Then you feel the sharp blade rip past your flesh and into your upper chest. A couple of ribs break from the force and your heart is sliced open as it passes by it and out the other side of your back. You stop to look down and see the blade slowly being withdrawn from your body and covered in your blood. It won’t be long now and you feel death already beginning to take you. You see Cynthia convey a troubled expression on her face and look away as your body falls to the floor. Everyone else looks on in stunned silence. Coughing up blood and bleeding out all over the floor, the last thing you hear even with your near deafness is a quiet “I’m sorry.” and feel the touch of a hand. Then you feel nothing else ever again. Your funeral is a large event, with lots of military honors and grand speeches about your accomplishments. You are placed in a fancy tomb with an impressive statue nearby. It’s a fitting funeral. The memory of you exists for quite some time, but as time does with all things, eventually it wears away. Successor after successor become less capable of holding together what you have built. Nothing lasts forever. Civil wars, invasions, in fighting and countless other factors play apart in the eventual complete dissolution of the Nalin Empire as an entity three hundred years later and a new dark age begins once again. Still, every once in awhile various savage tribes stumble upon your weathered broken statues when scavenging through the various ruins that dot the landscape. They don’t know your name, they don’t know what you did, they know nothing of what you accomplished or where you came from. Yet the dominating stance and the determined look on the face still convey the idea that a great warrior once called these lands his own. It is hardly surprising that eventually one of these savages found inspiration in these statues to forge her own empire. Such is the cycle of things.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 75 Another day of aches and pains, getting old sucks. After a couple of years of finally putting down the rest of the new Eternal hold outs, you’ve been spending most of your time restructuring the Nalin Empire’s command structure, economy, security and all the rest that goes with it. You haven’t done a bad job considering you were bred for war, not administration, then again you’ve been doing it in limited capacity for years, you just decided to totally focus on it for once and the results are excellent. While you still have the reputation for ruthlessness, you’ve managed to temper that a bit in last few years even with all the changes you’ve made. Most rulers would probably have to worry about coups or assassination attempts, but those haven’t been a problem due to the high amount of respect you’ve earned from the military. General Cynthia Gemma is officially your second in command, so if anything happens to you, she takes over. Though sometimes you wonder if you’ll outlive her given your knack of surviving. Warrick who was the only other Eternal left besides you died last year. Before he did, he sent a letter informing you that his final hours were upon him. He didn’t exactly say what was wrong, just that he felt the combination of his age and old wounds catching up to him. It wasn’t a long letter, just mostly him saying how he was glad he never had to fight you as he still respected you as a leader. The respect was mutual. Indeed it was one of the factors to as why you never attacked the Felkan Kingdom. You mourned his passing as you morn the passing of all your fellow Eternals. Most of them deserved better ends. All of them actually. And now here you are the last of not just your old comrades, but of your kind. The last words that Gruz once told you, have at last come true…you outlived everyone. Whether you were tougher, smarter, or luckier than the rest you don’t know. Maybe it was something by design when the Empire altered you. Maybe it was just common sense and the simple will to live. Though lately you’ve been wondering about “living.” You don’t have too many thrills left anymore and the constant pain you’re in, doesn’t make things any easier. You didn’t quite understand all of Brenda’s choice to end her life at the time, but as you’ve reflected on it again and again over the years you get it now and you’re starting to wonder if it’s time to join your fellows. Besides all you victories in battle, you’ve practically rebuilt the Empire. At least you have as best you could’ve done, all things considered and that’s no easy achievement. You have done enough for anyone to feel proud of doing and if you died now, there would be no shame. Still, part of you wonders if you’ve lived this long what else could you accomplish if you went on a little longer? Granted you could mess up your already strong reputation, but you could also go on to other great things. > You continue to live No, there are still battles to be won even if they aren’t of the physical nature anymore. One of these battles is how to prevent all of what you’ve built from collapsing soon after you die. You don’t believe it’ll fall into complete anarchy immediately of course and you’re sure that your first few successors will probably do a good enough job since you’ve set it up in such a manner, but entropy and decline seem to be factors as certain as death. You wonder if this would be easier if you had been able to have children. You know that you can’t just by experience and your own past discussions with Brenda when she spoke of Roldan. No Eternals could have children. You never did know why and just chalked it up to it being something in the process of your creation. Maybe nature balancing itself? In any case you do come up with something. You think back to the old Empire and the emperor. You never did get to meet him…or her…or it! You once wondered if there even was an emperor. You assume there had to have been at one time, probably several, but something changed. Something changed to make people believe that the emperor wasn’t just a mortal anymore, but an immortal of sorts. It’s this sort of thinking that held the old Empire for a very long time. It occurs to you that you need to start this very same mindset now. Most of the citizens as of right now hold a certain respect for you and the military is in near awe. You need to keep that going even after you’re dead. The population needs to believe that you’re still alive, watching and protecting them forever. You’re not really looking for immortality for yourself so much as you’re looking for immortality for what you’ve struggled to rebuild. Even creating a strong cult of personality so that you still have “followers” long after your death won’t solve the problem. Basically, you can’t die and you mean you literally can’t die. Of course this is impossible, so you have to do the next best thing. Fake your life. Create the same lie that the Empire did. Granted you don’t know if they did, but you’re going to have to attempt it the best way you can. It’s a gamble and it might not even work, but you figure it’s worth a shot and you won’t really know if it fails or not since you’ll be too dead to care. You call General Gemma into your chambers. She arrives promptly as usual though she seems a confused as you never call anyone into your private chambers. “Ah good, you’re here. We’ve got some important things to talk about.” You begin to explain your plan to Cynthia. It’s a lot for her to take in, but she certainly understands it, she also provides some input that you didn’t immediately think about. In time a few more of your closest staff are informed of this plan and sworn to absolute secrecy then the plan is set into motion. You begin to make less public appearances and have little contact with anyone else except your staff, and begin to have propaganda spread about how you seem to be undergoing a transformation. You confine yourself to your private chambers most of the time and never leave the palace at all. It’s like a prison, but this is what you need to do in order to carry out this grand plan. You keep yourself busy by thinking up more ideas for your grand plan and making notes as you go. You think about having all your palace guards replaced by some sort of golem, but then that would require having mages around all the time and you’d rather not deal with that factor. So you do something else, you implement your own elite warrior program. The Silent Ones, utterly loyal soldiers conditioned from birth to serve the Nalin Empire and you no matter what. Their tongues are also removed so that they cannot speak any lies or speak out of turn. Year 88 The Silent Ones have replaced all other normal palace guards and nobody else other than a select few are able to enter the palace at all and only Cynthia is able to directly have contact with you. The palace becomes a very quiet place which you enjoy as you can now wander more around your own home without bumping into anyone other than your new guards. The Silent Ones may be young still, but you don’t doubt their loyalty or their skill. When you look them in the eyes, you can see the near worship they’ve been trained to have. Reminds you of the old days when you used to feel the same way about your leader, though at least they’ve gotten to see you and know you’re real, you felt you owed them that much for their indoctrination. Cynthia is supposed to meet with you today as she normally does. You figure it’ll be about the usual stuff She meets you in your private chambers as usual. “Hello Cynthia, I hope you are well today.” You say. “I’m fine sir, and you?” “The usual aches and pain, though ever since I threw everyone out of the palace, I’ve actually felt better than I have in years. Things sort of feel more relaxed when you don’t have a host of advisors constantly chattering in your ear all the time wanting to get your attention about something.” “Yes, it would be a blessing I suppose. You sure you don’t want a medic or anything to keep track of your health?” “What for? I’m going to live forever remember? Start bringing doctors in here and all there needs to be is one bystander to see it and start spreading lies about me possibly being dead or dying.” “Well there are a few rumors about you already…” “Ah yes, but just that there are strange goings on at this palace, changes and such. That coupled with the ongoing propaganda about me, the commoners and the average soldiers don’t really know what to think. It’s important that they believe that they don’t just have a series of tyrants watching them, they need an immortal sentinel.” “Why not just create a religion and tie it into the state?” “Oh no, not doing that. I’ve already seen some of that in action with my countless battles with barbarian tribes. In Rask, several of them were all practically worshipping the same faceless deities and continued to fight each other due to small disagreements in how it was interpreted. They would’ve done better to put aside their petty differences in doctrine and unite under it against us instead. Religion can unite people, but it can also divide them worse than anything else, it’s why I outlawed organized religions and cults a long time ago. It’s a silly concept anyway. The idea of beings with so much power over us, yet do nothing.” “But who says they don’t? Maybe they work through us or something…” Your eyebrows rise a bit. “Why Cynthia, I didn’t take you for a believer in the gods.” “I…I don’t know. I mean, even though there is less magic in the world nowadays, it still exists. There are so many fantastic things in this world that I just don’t think it’s out of the realm of impossibility to have gods.” “Hmm, well I’m not convinced. I think holy men of all kinds just perpetuate this lie to serve their own ends.” At one time Cynthia might’ve been a little too scared to approach you about this, but given how close you’ve been over the years, perhaps she has gotten a little more familiar. “But, isn’t that similar to the lie we’re trying to perpetuate?” she says. You look at her with a completely serious expression, one of annoyance actually. She looks slightly worried now, and then you smile. “You’re probably right, but in our case we’re doing it for the greater good!” you laugh. As your laugher can be heard throughout the quiet halls of the palace, somehow it brings a little joy to the Silent Ones. Your happiness brings them happiness.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 56 “Sir, you want us to completely wipe out all settlements with the plague?” Colonel Gemma asks. “That’s what I said isn’t it? I’ve already assigned all the medics, healers and hedge wizards in the land to focus on the less affected areas. As for those places really bad off kill all the people, cleanse the area with fire, no more problem.” “But, you’re going to have mass riots! The people will protest, even soldiers! I mean some of their families are in the quarantined areas!” “Well I guess you better have those soldiers executed then if you think they’ll be a problem. In fact I’m surprised to hear you balk from these orders, I remember you when you were a young soldier wiping out Belzak women and children without hesitation.” “I…I’m not sir, I’m just concerned about the repercussions of potentially losing more of our army.” “You let me worry about the repercussions! Look here’s what you do, gather up all the old guard such as yourself to carry out this plan. In fact get those elves I made into orphans during the tribal wars. I’m guessing they should be good and obedient soldiers by now, but they probably won’t hesitate to murder some defenseless humans. The plague doesn’t seem to be affecting non-humans as much anyway, so they’re probably more resistant. In fact gather some of those kobolds too; they can clear out the bodies. Those little bastards seem to be immune altogether. That’s all for now.” Gemma nods and takes her leave. You have more concerns today, but you’re delegating them to the advisors as usual. If it isn’t a problem that can be solved by force, you’re not very interested in it. Brenda was right; ruling is a pain in the ass. When she was alive, you still had the “fun” part to focus on, now you have to do it all. This latest plague is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in years. Still can’t figure out how and where it originated from though. A passing thought was it might be saboteurs from the Eternal Dominion, but they’ve been fighting amongst themselves ever since Edgar died. Never did find his body. You still wonder exactly what it was he wanted to discuss with you and Brenda. An alliance perhaps? A threat to submit? You’ll never know. The nation of Nalin has become a lot more totalitarian under your rule. You’ve actually made it even more “Empire like” than it already was mostly because it’s what you know, but also because it makes you at least feel like things are how they “should be”. Lately though even that hasn’t helped your mindset. You’ve become increasingly bored with just plain ruling, and after this plague nonsense is taken care of, you’re thinking of doing something to shake things up a bit. The obvious idea is to expand again, specifically aggressive expansion into Eternal Dominion territory. It’s been too long since you’ve experienced a good fight. The other idea you’ve had is one you probably wouldn’t have considered again, but at this point any change would be welcome. You’ve thought about just leaving. Leaving everything behind and the region entirely. > You leave You thought you left the Empire because it no longer felt like the government you swore to serve. Now that you’re actually in charge and made things more like how they should be, you still feel dissatisfied. Maybe you’ve just got too much “warrior” in you to deal with the minute details of rulership, maybe you just miss Brenda; maybe it’s a combination of several things. The point remains that you’re burned out on civilization in general and maybe you just need to be by yourself for a while. Granted you’ve always been a bit by yourself even among your fellow Eternals, but you’re thinking you need to be really alone. By yourself and maybe finding your own way elsewhere. So you pack up some of your belongings and leave. You don’t bother even telling anyone, you just go and head east. You keep to the wilderness and eventually when you step beyond the borders of eastern Nalin, you at last feel like a great weight has been lifted off your shoulders. After a few months, you don’t miss Nalin at all. In the years that follow you wander, seeing new sights and getting into a few skirmishes a long the way. Sometimes you genuinely attempt to find a place where you feel comfortable, but it just never happens and you continue your wandering. While you continue to feel the ravages of old age always creeping up on you, you stubbornly refuse to submit to them. Ever the warrior, you eventually meet your end in battle with a group of opportunistic svelk bandits.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Year 56 “Sir, you want us to completely wipe out all settlements with the plague?” Colonel Gemma asks. “That’s what I said isn’t it? I’ve already assigned all the medics, healers and hedge wizards in the land to focus on the less affected areas. As for those places really bad off kill all the people, cleanse the area with fire, no more problem.” “But, you’re going to have mass riots! The people will protest, even soldiers! I mean some of their families are in the quarantined areas!” “Well I guess you better have those soldiers executed then if you think they’ll be a problem. In fact I’m surprised to hear you balk from these orders, I remember you when you were a young soldier wiping out Belzak women and children without hesitation.” “I…I’m not sir, I’m just concerned about the repercussions of potentially losing more of our army.” “You let me worry about the repercussions! Look here’s what you do, gather up all the old guard such as yourself to carry out this plan. In fact get those elves I made into orphans during the tribal wars. I’m guessing they should be good and obedient soldiers by now, but they probably won’t hesitate to murder some defenseless humans. The plague doesn’t seem to be affecting non-humans as much anyway, so they’re probably more resistant. In fact gather some of those kobolds too; they can clear out the bodies. Those little bastards seem to be immune altogether. That’s all for now.” Gemma nods and takes her leave. You have more concerns today, but you’re delegating them to the advisors as usual. If it isn’t a problem that can be solved by force, you’re not very interested in it. Brenda was right; ruling is a pain in the ass. When she was alive, you still had the “fun” part to focus on, now you have to do it all. This latest plague is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in years. Still can’t figure out how and where it originated from though. A passing thought was it might be saboteurs from the Eternal Dominion, but they’ve been fighting amongst themselves ever since Edgar died. Never did find his body. You still wonder exactly what it was he wanted to discuss with you and Brenda. An alliance perhaps? A threat to submit? You’ll never know. The nation of Nalin has become a lot more totalitarian under your rule. You’ve actually made it even more “Empire like” than it already was mostly because it’s what you know, but also because it makes you at least feel like things are how they “should be”. Lately though even that hasn’t helped your mindset. You’ve become increasingly bored with just plain ruling, and after this plague nonsense is taken care of, you’re thinking of doing something to shake things up a bit. The obvious idea is to expand again, specifically aggressive expansion into Eternal Dominion territory. It’s been too long since you’ve experienced a good fight. The other idea you’ve had is one you probably wouldn’t have considered again, but at this point any change would be welcome. You’ve thought about just leaving. Leaving everything behind and the region entirely. > You cythia Gemma (Personnel File) From all accounts Cynthia had a very average upbringing, though it would appear that her family was never big on the military lifestyle as most of them seem to have had a history of working as laborers of some sort. You can only guess she was a bit of a black sheep. Actually you’ve never really known Cynthia on a personal level, but you’ve known her to be a competent soldier and later officer. Though currently a colonel, in some ways she’s still a little “unready” than her position would suggest, as she has risen through some of the ranks due to the older officers retiring or dying off. Still, she’s served with distinction during the tribal wars in the east and has kept on top of the bandit rings that sometimes still pop up and you wouldn’t have suggested her promotions if you didn’t think she could handle it. She’s always been a little too eager to please at times, but you really can’t fault her for being loyal.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Chapter 3A3: Remnant Year 45 In all the years you served the Empire, you always felt like you were being held back in some way; lack of supplies, lack of equipment, ungrateful rioting peasants, or incompetent commanding officers. In most cases it was never a failing on your part. For the past few years, you’ve come to appreciate no longer having any of those limitations. In Nalin everyone more or less works for the greater good of the country. In fact it could be argued that this is more the case here than it ever was in the Empire, at least as far as you saw. Brenda eventually declared the biggest town (Now a city) Dalt to be the capital and moved there to better manage things. You of course are head of the army and remained at Fort Glory. Despite her initial inexperience at running a nation, Brenda has proven to do a fair job at it. Hand picking town mayors and other bureaucratic types to help run things certainly helps. What also helps is Nalin is a much smaller nation than the Empire was. The long arm of the army doesn’t need to go far to catch someone doing something against the law. Your intimidating reputation as head of the army obviously keeps people in line as well. Still, it isn’t complete fear; they know you’ll also keep them safe. When Usksha raiders started gathering around the southern borders again, you made sure to strike at them before they could attack any of the southern towns. You wish you could just go into the Usksha Desert and wipe them all out, but you know you just don’t have the resources for such a thing. Still, you did find a temporary solution in the form of an equally old annoyance. The kobold tribes who eventually realized that continuing to fight against you would result in genocide, agreed to relocate to the edges of the southern Nalin border where they would help defend it. This has worked out quite well. The harsh terrain conditions closer to the desert as well as the occasional Usksha raids keep the kobold population down as well as aid as a front line defense without having to waste valuable troops. For the most part everything has been running quite well, perhaps a little too well to the point where you get a little bored, but you don’t even mind that now. You’re just glad to be part of a nation that isn’t crippled by corruption. “This is the last remnant of the true Empire.” You sometimes think. Of course a certain person might disagree with that thought, namely Edgar. Edgar hasn’t contacted you or Brenda. Brenda wonders if it’s because he considers you both traitors for seceding from the Empire, and while that sounds like Edgar, you suspect it’s more because he’s been very busy. Ever since the Empire fell, Edgar has been busily trying to unite all the new “eternals” under his command and his results are quite surprising. He’s not only managed to do it, but he’s forged his own nation calling it the Eternal Dominion. He claims it is the successor to the Empire and as general he has vowed to reunite all the old lands by any means. So far he’s had varying success, but he’s doing well under the circumstances. He’s also created a strict hierarchy system where Eternals are considered to be the superior ruling class and everyone else is below them. You aren’t exactly sure what to make of this ideology. Assuming he’s successful, you know it’s only going to be a matter of time before Edgar comes marching an army from the north. Brenda has the same concerns and lately a majority of the military has been stationed on the northern borders. You just aren’t sure it’ll be enough. Brenda wonders if an alliance would be best, but the only other major power in the region is the Felkan Kingdom, and you’re not exactly sure if they would even be in a position to help, let alone willing to help. The enemy of my enemy isn’t always your friend. This ties in with the other matter that has come up is expansion. Nalin has had a steadily growing population for quite some time and since the south is hostile desert, the western side of Nalin is covered by an equally imposing mountain range and to the north is old empire lands suffering from destroyed infrastructure and near anarchy, the only logical conclusion is to the east. Slowly over time Brenda has encouraged Nalin citizens to systematically settle the eastern wilderness. The Empire for some reason never colonized this territory. It probably was marked, but just never exploited due to other more pressing matters. In any case, things have gone more or less peacefully as there have been no encounters with any hostile natives and it has proven to be great farming land. While things are peaceful there now, there’s no telling what could happen later and due to all the troops on the northern border, the eastern territory has a minimum number of soldiers there. Right now you and Brenda are discussing on how to best to maximize your defenses. “Have you sent envoys to Edgar? Is it possible that he wouldn’t be a problem in the future?” you ask Brenda. “I actually have a couple times over the years and none of them ever returned. Which is why I’m convinced he’s pissed at us.” “Hmm, well guess we better up keep the defenses on the northern borders then. Still, my own reports say he’s still nowhere near us. He’s been trying to tame the core region of the old Empire as well as maintain order in places he’s already conquered. There is the option to take redeploy some of the troops to the east.” “But of course that would weaken us in the north.” “Well yes, but if you’re really worried about the east, then that’s all I can suggest other than conscription.” “Yeah, thought about that, and I’m not exactly keen on that idea. The people have been happy for quite awhile. We start conscripting like the Empire did, they might not be as happy.” Brenda says “They’ll be even less happy, if Edgar comes barging down here declaring them all inferior while letting his Eternal troops run amok.” “You wouldn’t allow that to happen.” Brenda says. “Well I certainly would try my best to not let it happen, but let’s just say I’m not as certain about things as I once was, there is always the chance things can go horribly wrong.” “Yeah, I understand that. (Sigh) Well, I suppose we can restart conscription. It’s not going to be popular, but I think if we stress how much of a threat Edgar potentially is, we’ll prevent the civil unrest. I’ll get my civilian advisors to start spinning the propaganda. I’ll leave it up to you how you want to deploy the troops; I think it would be best to put most of the conscripts on the east though, as I think we’ll need most of the experienced troops on the northern borders.” “I’ll certainly consider all the options. I guess I’ll get to it then and leave you to your work as well.” You say and are about to leave when Brenda calls out to you. “Hey, I know you’re very duty bound anyway, but I just want to say, I’m glad you’re here to help me.” “Well I’m happy to help, but I’m sure you’d do just as well without me here.” “Perhaps, but it’s sort of comforting to have another Eternal around to talk to. I just feel like we connect a lot better you know?” “Yes, I do agree. We do share a bond that most others will never know.” Brenda goes to hug you and you’re a little unsure of how to react at first, but you hug her back. Before you leave Brenda asks you one more question. “Do you think Edgar’s ideology for his nation is correct? Do you think Eternals are superior to everyone else?” You think about the question for a moment, then answer. “I think Edgar thinks it is correct. In one aspect, I agree with it, I mean look at the pair of us. We’re both in the highest positions of power and people seem to be accepting of it. However, from my own experiences with the new Eternals I’m not actually convinced that THEY are superior to the average human except in combat and sadism which I suppose are good enough to instill fear into the masses.” “Heh, but isn’t that what we do?” “Of course, but we do it because we know it’s necessary to maintain order. The new Eternals engage in pointless cruelty because they enjoy it. They’re no better than svelks in that regard. They’re so eager to move on to next atrocity that they let their emotions cloud their purity of battle. I believe this is a weakness on their part and that is why I do not consider them superior.” Brenda smiles a bit at your answer. “The Empire really should’ve made you a general straight out of training. I’m certain you would’ve single handedly saved it.” “I don’t know. Perhaps it was beyond saving by that time. If you’ll excuse me…” you say and leave Brenda’s office. As you leave the capital building, you think back on how you left the Empire. While you’re satisfied with your decision, part of you does wonder IF you could’ve done anything. Not just at that time, but before then. Is there another decision you could’ve made that would’ve prevented the situation you’re in now? After a brief run down in your mind of endless possibilities you quickly dismiss such thoughts as a fool’s game. You were right, the Empire was beyond any help you could’ve provided. Nalin is your concern now and you need to make the decisions to how to best protect it starting with deciding where to send the conscripts when Brenda enacts her decree. > You send them to the east If the Eternal Dominion ever does decide to attack, it’ll be better if your best soldiers are already assigned to the northern borders rather than having to scramble to pull them back from the east. You also figure the conscripts can put in their time exploring the eastern wilderness along with defending the few settlements you currently have there right now. When Brenda enacts conscription there is a lot of grumbling as was expected, but nothing more. Many of the conscripts are just glad you aren’t assigning them to the northern borders after hearing all the scary things about Edgar and his “baby eating” army. They won’t just be there without any supervision either, as you’ll still have a few veteran officers overseeing the situation. Months pass a life goes on as usual, and you begin to get reports on the eastern wilderness. Most of the scouts say that there is evidence of other denizens living further east. In fact there seems to be a small tribal war going on between four separate groups. Two of those are human barbarian tribes, one them is elven, but much wilder than what you know of them and the last one is a race you’re not familiar with called the Slin. They’re apparently reptilian in nature though, similar to the kobolds, but much larger and meaner. All of them save for one of the human tribes have been hostile to your scouts. Your scouts report that most attacks were accompanied by slurs and curses against the Empire. Even the Slin have been reported to utter a few recognizable insults in their strange reptilian tongue. You can only guess that all of these folks at one time came in contact with the Empire and it wasn’t a good experience. Makes sense they would mistake you for Empire troops as well considering that all your troops are either still wearing the same armor or very similar armor. Some of the veteran officers are even still wearing the same insignias. Sort of like you do actually. You’re very disappointed by the reports you’ve been getting on the various skirmishes your soldiers have had. Most of them involve heavy losses or in some cases outright defeats! Most of the conscripts apparently just aren’t cut out to handle these savages, they’re still too green and they also lack the desire to fight in the first place. The problem is worse than just losing soldiers though. Most of these were young males and females, sons and daughter taken from their homes that didn’t want to be soldiers in the first place. Predictably there is peasant backlash from this. Not willing to risk any more soldiers, you immediately order a halt to the scouting and make the decision that you’re going to have to go oversee things personally. Normally you wouldn’t mind this since you were getting bored lately, but you don’t like the circumstances to why you have to do it. Brenda certainly hopes you can fix things, because while keeping the peasants in line through force is a time-honored tradition, it isn’t really helping things right now. You can’t afford to have a full-scale revolt over this. What you’d like to do is wipe out every single one of those tribes as soon as possible before they can unite against you, but you know you can’t really do that without either toughening up the conscripts or taking your vets off the northern borders and since that really isn’t an option, you’re going to have to toughen up the recruits. The first thing you do is gather all your officers assigned there and reprimand them, stating if they were doing their job properly, you wouldn’t have to come here and do it for them. You might’ve even had some of them executed for incompetence, but you really can’t afford to lose anyone right now. Second of all you have a new camp built near one the eastern Nalin villages. This is where all the soldiers are going to be housed and training until further notice. Soldier rotations to be stationed at the few eastern settlements will be implemented. But most importantly a whole new training schedule is going to be put into action. You need to get these folks to start thinking the right way. It is your hope that in a couple of months, they start shaping up into the solider you need them to be. The first few weeks go pretty horrible. Your rigorous and harsh training causes some of the conscripts to go from low morale to suicidal. After three deaths, one of your officers claims you’re pushing them too hard and you’re going to have to ease up. “Captain Talger isn’t it?” you ask. “Yes sir.” “You did serve under the Empire didn’t you?” “Yes sir, for many years until we…uh seceded.” “You remember what the punishment was for questioning a superior’s decisions?” “…yes…yes I do sir.” He says in a very worried tone. After a moment of silence, you tell him to follow you outside to the training grounds. You and Captain Talger walk to the middle of the grounds where several people are training, if they aren’t you tell one of your other officers to call everyone to the grounds immediately. When everyone arrives, you address the crowd. “It has come to my attention that I may be training you lot too hard. This has been told to me, by Captain Talger here and he may have a point.” Talger looks slightly surprised to hear you say that, he also relaxes a little. “I understand that many of you do not want to be here. I also understand that many of you are not naturally killers. Few are. Most of you would just like to go back home and live nice little safe lives. And contrary to popular belief, I actually can understand that as well.” You walk over to a nearby weapon rack and examine a few swords, taking one of fairly good quality. You begin to speak again. “However, that’s not going to happen.” You say and throw the sword to the ground near Captain Talger’s feet. “Captain pick up the sword.” “Sir?” “I SAID PICK UP THE SWORD!” you shout. Talger immediately picks up the sword. You see him tremble a little, but manages to keep it together. The crowd looks on anxious to see what will happen next. “Good, now attack me.” You say and draw your own blade. Talger nearly speaks, but stops himself. He realizes he doesn’t really have any options in this. He closes his eyes for a brief moment presumably to calm himself and then approaches you. He attacks you with some skill and nearly manages to hit you, but ultimately you are the superior warrior and you stop holding back. You manage to smash his face with the pommel of your own sword. His nose nearly explodes into a mass of blood, but before he falls, you grab his sword arm and break it, causing him to drop his weapon and cry out before tumbling to the ground. You kick the sword away and address the crowd again. “You see this? This man knew he was facing potential death and he did not run away. He faced it like a soldier and tried to do his best. He showed true dedication. You all should be so brave. That’s all I’m asking, it is not such a difficult lesson to learn.” You look down at Captain Talger who is trying hard not to scream out in any more pain and is having a hard time breath due to his bloody nose. “However, this man also spoke out against me…Captain Talger are you ready for your sentence?” “…(wheeze)…argh….(wheeze)…I…acce…(wheeze) accept…” “Your life will serve as a lesson to the rest, you will have an honorable burial.” You quietly say and bring your sword down on his chest killing him instantly. The crowd remains silent as you draw out your sword from Talger’s body. “Learn from this man’s bravery and dedication…but also learn from his mistakes. DO NOT FUCK WITH ME! You all WILL become proper soldiers and you WILL serve Nalin with nothing less than your best! If you do not, none of you will leave here alive. For anyone thinking about suicide I suggest you just come down here now and let me kill you so I’m not wasting my time training you fucking grub worms! Oh and in case you all want to get cute and unite by walking down here together as a group, I suggest that you don’t if you value your lives, because I have no problem killing every last one of you by myself if I have to! I’ve destroyed entire villages of werewolves including their young, it’ll take me even less time to lay waste to you pathetic shitheads.” You continue your rant. “Let me make this clear you maggots, we have enemies to the east of us, that won’t fucking hesitate to rip your guts out and eat them. Do you really think if you all just go back home they’re going to leave you alone? No, they’re going to eventually advance westward and invade all those nice little peaceful homes you all so desperately want to go back to. You want a nice safe home, well you’re going to need to earn your keep and fight for it. You either die in here or die out there; it’s your choice. The big difference is out there you have a chance against those fucking savages. In here with me? You’ve got none. So I suggest you all start getting your shit together now, I don’t want to repeat this lesson again.” You take you leave and head back to your office, leaving everyone to ponder your words. A few days later there is an improvement in performance. Still a few suicides here and even some training deaths, but its just the weak being culled from the heard as usual. > Year 48 “We can’t take anymore forces off the northern borders you know that!” Brenda says. “I know that better than anyone, but we’re making progress against those barbarians in the east. I just need a company…” “And I said no! Look I know you’re mainly in charge of all the military stuff here, but you remember that I’m the one that’s in charge of the entire country! In fact I was running this area quite fine until you came along and started gradually changing things! Now I got a war in the east, peasant uprisings, a potential aggressor up north and a troop shortage that can’t possibly deal with all these problems! I’m beginning to wonder if you didn’t create all this chaos just to relive your Empire days again…” “Hey! I’m done nothing but try to protect this nation and build it up! And I think my success in the east has proven that!” “Look, I know you’ve done your part, and I hate to sound like an old Empire bureaucrat, but we can’t spare anymore soldiers for the eastern provinces. Can’t you make due with what you have?” “Believe me, I would if could. Molding the conscripts into proper soldiers took longer than expected and even after I was successful, a small portion of them died in the process. Then I had hoped to get the one tribe that wasn’t initially hostile to us to ally with us as a useful diversion, but due to our initial losses against the other three tribes, the savages assumed we were too weak to make an alliance with and began attacking us too. I still think we would’ve been okay though if they had all stayed fragmented. After we wiped out the Belkaz Tribe for their poor judgment, the other three tribes formed a truce and united under one banner. It’s made fighting them a lot more difficult especially since they know every inch of the land better and they outnumber us. The only good thing is they haven’t really launched any effective counter attacks on our settlements so far, but they have been getting better at it.” Brenda rubs a hand over her face before speaking again. “You can’t just build up the defenses on the villages and maintain a solid defense?” “Well that’s sort of where we’re at right now, and that’s the problem. The elves are no problem; the other tribe of humans isn’t either. It’s those Slin that are causing the most grief. They can replace their losses a lot quicker, or at least they must mature much quicker. In fact I’ve noticed a disturbing tactic by them, if they can call it that. Namely whenever there is a group attack by the three tribes, the Slin will deliberately hold back and the first to retreat when the battle starts to swing the wrong way. I see larger groups of them all the time yet they’re taking the least amount of losses from their side. At this point, I’m even wondering if there is an “alliance” so much as the Slin eventually enslaved the two remaining tribes and is using them to weaken us, while they continue to breed more lizards. If that is the case, we could be overrun even if we adopt siege mentality.” “So what is it that you want to do exactly?” “We know where the Slin home is at. I want to launch a full assault on it. I figure if we at least take them out, the other two tribes will be easy, they may even surrender, not that it’ll do them any good…” “Right and I imagine that you want to lead this attack personally.” “Of course.” “Uh huh, and don’t you think it’s very dangerous to go rushing into the heart of enemy territory outnumbered and undermanned like you are?” “Well I wouldn’t do it without the soldiers.” “Right, and that’s why you aren’t doing it at all. Look, even I gave you the men you require, you’d have to promise me that you wouldn’t let a single one get killed, and you and I both know that’s not going to happen. The other thing is, I can’t really afford to potentially lose you either.” “Brenda, have you so little faith in me? I’ve been in more dangerous situations than this! One time in Rask I…” “Yes, yes, I know all your deeds and they’re all very impressive, but you’re not in your twenties anymore and we don’t have the soldiers! I’m sorry, but we’re dealing with multiple problems right now and I need every capable commander possible even the stubborn ones like yourself. Now that’s it, and I don’t want to hear anymore about this!” Brenda’s remark dismissing your accomplishments and implying that you’re no longer in your prime is incredibly insulting and you lose your composure. It doesn’t help that you’re already frustrated with how the eastern campaign has been playing out. You grab one side of her desk and flip it over. This noise causes two guards rush in, but they’re a little unsure of how to react given that it’s you. Brenda leaps back and puts her hand on her weapon, instinctively you put your own hand on your weapon as well. “Have you lost your mind?!” she says. “No, my mind is quite clear, it’s you who has lost their mind if you think I’m going to just let you forget all the shit I’ve done, and let you just dismiss it like that! How soon you forget that I used to lead you into battle against kobolds and uskshas. I’ve been risking my life for years, what the hell have you been doing except stagnating here behind a desk